Owner's Manual

7N5012720BL

Owner’s manual

Alhambra Inglés (11.18) SEAT Alhambra

7N5012720BL (11.18)

Inglés SEAT Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING hicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 78, Important in- and top quality features. formation regarding the front passenger's airbag. We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. SEAT, S.A. ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- CAUTION About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol indicate possible This manual describes the features of the ve- damage to the vehicle. hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of  It indicates that the section continues on the features described below will be intro- the next page. For the sake of the environment duced in the future or will only be available in  Important warnings on the page. certain markets. Texts after this symbol contain informa- More in-depth content on the page. tion about the protection of the environ- Some of the features described here are  ment. not included in all the types or variations  General information on page indicated. of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing  Emergency information on the page. Note requirements without it being considered Texts after this symbol contain addition- You can access the information in this manual misleading advertising. al information. using: Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Thematic table of contents that follows the standard representation. manual’s general chapter structure. The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics backwards) in this manual refer to the travel to indicate the pages containing “essential” direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- information, which is detailed in the corre- ted. sponding chapters. The audiovisual material is only meant to ● Alphabetical index with many terms and help the users better understand some fea- synonyms to help you find information. tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction WARNING manual to see the complete information and Texts after this symbol contain informa- warnings. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.  The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as optional only for certain versions or only offered in certain countries. Printed Instruction Manual Digital Version of the Infotainment Related videos The printed instruction manual contains rele- System Manual vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System. The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information.

Fig. 2 SEAT website

Fig. 1 SEAT website The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- The digital version is available on SEAT's offi- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

cial website. ● scan the QR code Fig. 2 ››› To view the digital version of the manual: ● OR enter the following address in the navi-

gator website: ● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1

● OR enter the following address in the navi- http://www.seat.com/owners/your- gator website: seat/manuals-offline.html

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”. seat/manuals-offline.html Note choose your vehicle and then “Infotainment”. Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

How do you perform a jump start? page 54 How do you check and top up the engine cool- Frequently Asked Ques- ››› ant? ››› page 42 Where is the vehicle tool kit located? tions page 48 How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? ››› ››› page 43 How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture Before driving kit? page 47 How do you check and top up the brake fluid? ››› How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 15 ››› page 43 How do you change a wheel? ››› page 48 How do you adjust the steering wheel? How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-

››› page 18 How do you change a fuse? ››› page 45 ues? ››› page 342 How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How do you change a light? ››› page 94 Vehicle washing tips ››› page 352

››› page 17 How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 53 How do you turn on the exterior lights? Functions of interest

››› page 26 Useful tips How does the START-STOP system work?

How does the automatic gearbox selector lever ››› page 259 How do you set the time? ››› page 105 work? ››› page 36 What parking assistants are available? When should the vehicle inspection should be ››› page 262, ››› page 265 How do you refuel? ››› page 41 performed? ››› page 107 How does the rear assist work? page 270 How do you activate the windscreen wipers and What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on ›››

windscreen washer system? ››› page 27 the steering wheel perform? ››› page 110 How does the lane departure warning system

work? page 286 How do you remove the luggage compartment ››› Emergency situations cover? ››› page 174 How does tyre pressure monitoring work?

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does ››› page 298 How do you drive in an economical and environ- this mean? ››› page 34 mentally-friendly way? ››› page 254 How do you open the vehicle without a key

Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian- (Keyless Access)? ››› page 119 How do you check and top up the engine oil? gle in the vehicle? ››› page 85 ››› page 41 Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 139 How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 13 Table of Contents

Seat belts ...... 64 Opening and closing ...... 114 Table of Contents Why wear a seat belt ...... 64 Vehicle key set ...... 114 How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 67 Central locking and locking system ...... 116 The essentials ...... 7 Seat belt tensioners ...... 70 Doors ...... 123 Exterior view ...... 7 Airbag system ...... 71 Sliding doors ...... 124 Exterior view ...... 8 Brief introduction ...... 71 Rear lid ...... 126 Interior view (left-hand drive) ...... 9 Airbag safety instructions ...... 74 Controls for the windows ...... 130 How it works ...... 10 Deactivating airbags ...... 75 Panoramic sliding sunroof* ...... 132 Unlocking and locking ...... 10 Transporting children safely ...... 77 Lights and visibility ...... 133 Before driving ...... 15 Safety for children ...... 77 Lights ...... 133 Airbags ...... 18 Child seats ...... 78 Visibility ...... 140 Child seats ...... 21 Integrated child seat ...... 82 Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys- Starting the vehicle ...... 25 tems ...... 141 Lights and visibility ...... 26 Emergencies ...... 85 Rear vision mirror ...... 143 SEAT information system ...... 28 Self-help ...... 85 Seats and head restraints ...... 146 Cruise control ...... 34 In case of emergency ...... 85 Adjusting the seats and headrests ...... 146 Warning lamps ...... 34 Vehicle tool kit* ...... 85 Seat functions ...... 150 Gearbox lever ...... 36 Changing a wheel* ...... 87 Transport and practical equipment ...... 156 Air conditioning ...... 38 Tyre repair ...... 88 Transporting objects ...... 156 Fluid level control ...... 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 90 Luggage compartment ...... 157 Emergencies ...... 45 Tow-starting and towing ...... 90 Roof carrier* ...... 167 Fuses ...... 45 Emergency locking and unlocking ...... 93 Storage compartments ...... 169 Bulbs ...... 46 Fuses and bulbs ...... 93 Drink holders ...... 175 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 47 Fuses ...... 93 Ashtray and cigarette lighter* ...... 176 Changing a wheel ...... 48 Changing bulbs ...... 94 Power sockets ...... 177 Snow chains ...... 52 Operation ...... 103 Air conditioning ...... 180 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 53 Air conditioning ...... 180 How to jump start ...... 54 General instrument panel ...... 103 Auxiliary heater* (additional heater) ...... 184 Changing windscreen wipers ...... 57 Instrument panel ...... 102 Instruments ...... 104 Infotainment System ...... 188 Safety ...... 59 Control lamps ...... 109 Introduction ...... 188 Safe driving ...... 59 Communications and multimedia ...... 110 Safety warnings ...... 188 Advice about driving ...... 59 Multi-function steering wheel* ...... 110 Overview of the unit ...... 190 Correct position of the vehicle occu- Multimedia ...... 112 General instructions for use ...... 193 pants ...... 60 Three button unit in headliner ...... 112 Pedal area ...... 63 5 Table of Contents

Audio and Media Mode ...... 198 Blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross Information for the user ...... 358 Radio Mode ...... 198 traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 289 Information for the user ...... 358 Media Mode ...... 199 Traffic signal detection (Sign Assist)* ...... 294 Information stored in control units ...... 358 Images ...... 205 Tiredness detection (recommendation to Other important information ...... 359 Full Link* ...... 206 take a break) ...... 296 Information about the EU Directive Navigation* ...... 215 Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)* ...... 297 2014/53/EU ...... 360 Navigation, entry and control ...... 215 Tyre monitoring system ...... 298 ...... 364 Phone management system Towing bracket device ...... 301 Technical data (PHONE)* ...... 225 Driving with a trailer ...... 301 Technical features ...... 364 Introduction to the telephone management Important information ...... 364 Practical tips ...... 311 system ...... 225 Towing a trailer ...... 365 Care and maintenance ...... 311 Description of the telephone management Wheels ...... 366 system...... 230 Accessories, replacement of parts and Engine data ...... 367 modifications ...... 311 Vehicle data ...... 370 Driving ...... 234 Checking and refilling levels ...... 316 Start and driving ...... 234 Filling the tank ...... 316 Index ...... 371 Stopping and starting the engine ...... 234 Fuel ...... 319 Braking and parking ...... 238 Selective catalytic reduction* (AdBlue) . . . . . 321 Braking and stability systems ...... 243 Working in the engine compartment ...... 323 Gearbox ...... 247 Engine oil ...... 326 Steering ...... 252 Engine coolant ...... 329 Run-in and economical driving ...... 253 Brake fluid ...... 332 Engine management and exhaust gas puri- Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 334 fication system ...... 256 Vehicle battery ...... 334 Driving tips ...... 258 Wheels and tyres ...... 338 Driver assistance systems ...... 259 Tyres ...... 338 Start assistance systems ...... 259 Winter service ...... 347 Parking distance warning system* ...... 262 Maintenance ...... 349 Park Assist system* (Park Assist) ...... 265 Rear Assist* (Rear View Camera) ...... 270 Service ...... 349 Cruise control* (Cruise Control System Service intervals ...... 349 - CCS) ...... 273 Additional service offers ...... 351 Emergency braking assistance system Warranty ...... 352 (Front Assist)* ...... 275 Vehicle maintenance ...... 352 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* ...... 278 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 352 Lane Assist system* ...... 286 6 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 12 5 ››› page 53 2 ››› page 41 6 ››› page 13 3 ››› page 10 7 ››› page 47 4 ››› page 41 7 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 42 5 ››› page 41 9 ››› page 24 2 ››› page 41 6 ››› page 43 10 ››› page 48 3 ››› page 43 7 ››› page 43 11 ››› page 47 4 ››› page 45 8 ›››  page 163 8 The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 10 5 ››› page 34 9 ››› page 27 13 ››› page 36 17 ››› page 18 2 ››› page 17 6 ››› page 34 10 ››› page 38 14 ››› page 13 18 ››› page 15 3 ››› page 26 7 ››› page 27 11 ››› page 25 15 ››› page 13 19 ››› page 16 4 ››› page 26 8 ››› page 28 12 ››› page 19 16 ››› page 45

9 The essentials

How it works  ››› in Introduction on page 116 Unlocking and locking  ››› page 114 Doors  ››› page 10, ››› page 11

Locking or unlocking of driver door Fig. 4 On the driver's door: central locking button.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the key ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button. ● Lock the vehicle without the anti-theft system: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button again for 2 seconds. ● Unlock: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button. ● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the  Fig. 5 Driver door lever: Hidden lock cylinder Fig. 3 Remote control key: keys. ››› Fig. 3 button for at least 1 second. As a general rule, when the driver door is Locking and unlocking with the central locked all other doors are locked. Unlocking locking switch manually only opens the driver door. Please ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 4 button. None of note the instructions for the anti-theft alarm the doors can be opened from the outside. ›››  page 116. The doors can be opened from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. ● Unfold the key shaft ›››  page 114. ● Unlock: press the  ››› Fig. 4 button. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 5 (arrow) then remove the cover upwards.

10 The essentials

● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to Locking the passenger side door ● Open the door. unlock or lock the vehicle. and sliding doors manually ● Remove the rubber cap to the front of the door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock Special characteristics symbol  ››› Fig. 6. ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active ● Unfold the vehicle key blade when vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not ›››  page 114. triggered ›››  page 116. ● Insert the key shaft horizontally into the ● If the driver door is opened, the alarm will opening and moved the coloured lever for- be triggered. ward ››› Fig. 7. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- ● Replace the rubber cap and close the door. bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- ● Check if the door is locked. activates the anti-theft alarm system. ● Carry out the same operation on the other Fig. 6 On the front part of the sliding door: doors if necessary. ››› in Introduction on page 93 emergency locking, hidden behind a rubber  gasket. ● Have the vehicle checked by a specialised workshop. Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when  ››› in Introduction on page 93 the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft ›››  page 116. Note The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pulling the door handle. To open, pull the inner door release lever twice ›››  page 116.

Fig. 7 Emergency locking of the vehicle using the vehicle key

The passenger side door and the sliding doors can be locked manually. The anti-theft alarm is not activated in this case.

11 The essentials

Opening the rear lid Opening with the ignition key Manual release mechanism for the ● Press the  button on the vehicle key until rear lid the rear lid opens automatically.

To open using the centre console control ● Press the  button on the centre console ››› Fig. 8. The rear lid will be automatically opened. ● The button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Fig. 8 Detail of centre console: rear lid unlock- Opening the rear lid with the button ing key. ● Unlock the vehicle or open a door. Fig. 10 From the trunk: remove the rear lid. ● Raise the rear lid using the button ››› Fig. 9 (arrow).

 ››› in Introduction on page 126

Fig. 9 Opening the boot hatch from the out- Fig. 11 From the trunk: emergency unlocking of side the rear lid.

Before opening the rear lid, always remove ● Remove equipment to access the inside of any load on its luggage rack ››› in Intro- the rear lid. duction on page 127. ● Remove the square cover in the inner trim of the rear lid ››› Fig. 10.

12 The essentials

● Push the release lever ››› Fig. 11 A in the di- ● Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock carrier. rection of the arrow to unlock the boot. Do not press down. ● Manually open the rear lid. If the bonnet is not correctly closed, open it once again and close it correctly.  ››› in Introduction on page 93 The bonnet is correctly closed when it is flush with the corresponding parts on the bodywork. Bonnet ››› in Opening and closing the Fig. 13 Cam under the bonnet  bonnet on page 325 Opening the bonnet  ››› page 323 The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that Controls for the windows* the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under the Fig. 12 Release lever in the driver's footwell dashboard ››› Fig. 12 1 . The bonnet disen- area. gages from the locking of the protective lid due to the effect of a spring. ● Lift the bonnet using the opening lever ››› Fig. 13 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully. The bonnet remains open thanks to the pressurised gas spring. Fig. 14 Detail of driver door: controls for the Close the bonnet windows, and the electric child safety lock buttons. ● To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the gas strut pressure. Buttons on the driver door 1 For the front electric windows. » 13 The essentials

2 For the sliding door electric windows. Panoramic sunroof* ● Comfort position: turn the switch to position 3 To lock the sliding doors and their win- ››› Fig. 15 2 . dows. ● Close: turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 15 1 . Opening and closing the windows ● Lift: Push the switch to position ››› Fig. 16 4 . For an intermediate position, hold down the Opening: Push the  button. switch until you reach the desired position.  Closing: Pull the button. ● Lower: pull the switch to position ››› Fig. 16 To stop the Press or pull on the corresponding 5 . For an intermediate position, hold down one touch window button. the switch until you reach the desired posi- function: tion. Press the  button for the electronic Fig. 15 On the internal cover of the roof: rotate child safety lock to deactivate the the button to open and close. ››› in Sliding sunroof: operation on controls for the electric windows on  page 132  the sliding doors and to lock these doors ››› page 124. The indicator on ››› page 132 the button will light up. 

››› page 15 ››› in Controls for the windows:   functions on page 131  ››› page 130

Fig. 16 On the internal cover of the roof: press the button and pull on it to raise and lower the sunroof.

To open the panoramic sliding sunroof, the switch must be in the position 1 .

● Open: turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 15 3 .

14 The essentials

Manually closing the panoramic ● Insert a standard 4 mm Allen key1) into the Before driving sunroof Allen bolt ››› Fig. 18 A . ● Rotate the Allen bolt to close the panoram- Manually adjusting the front seat ic sliding sunroof. ● Re-install the lining. ● Bring the vehicle to a specialised workshop to check the panoramic sliding sunroof given that the emergency closing operation could damage general operation or the anti-trap function of the panoramic sliding sunroof.

 ››› in Introduction on page 93 Fig. 17 On the interior roof lining: remove the cover. Fig. 19 Front left seat controls

The controls are mirrored for the front right- hand seat. Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat.

1 Move the seat to the front or the back: pull the lever and move the seat. The seat must engage when the lever is released! 2 Adjust lumbar support*: rotate the lever.

Fig. 18 Allen bolt to close the panoramic slid- 3 Adjust seat back: rotate the wheel. ing sunroof 4 Adjust seat height: pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) ● Push open the cover in the direction indica- from its home position. » ted (arrow) ››› Fig. 17.

1) Not included with the vehicle tool kit. 15 The essentials

The controls are mirrored for the front right- ››› in Manual adjustment of the Adjustment of the head restraint  seats on page 146 hand seat. Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat. Electrical controls on the front seat* Fig. 20 Press the control in the direction of the arrow:

Move the seat backwards or for- 1 wards.

A 2 and Raise or lower the seat. 3

2 or 3 Adjust the seat angle.

Forward or backward.: adjust the tilt of the B seat.

Fig. 21 Press the corresponding area of the Fig. 20 Adjusting the front left seat forwards or switch: backwards, the height, the seat angle and the front seat backrest 1 or 2 Adjust the curve of the lumbar support.

3 or 4 Adjust the height of the lumbar support.

Fig. 22 Front seat: adjusting the head re- ››› in Electric driver's seat adjust- straint.  ment* on page 146 Grab the sides of the head restraints with both hands and push upwards to the desired position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 button on the side.

Fig. 21 Adjusting the lumbar support

16 The essentials

››› in Removing and installing the Seat belt tensioners  head restraints on page 149 In the event of a head-on, lateral or rear colli- ››› page 60, ››› page 147 sion, the seat belts on the front seats and the  outer seats of the second row will tighten automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once. Adjustment of the seat belt ››› in Service and disposal of belt  tension devices on page 71 Fig. 24 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.  ››› page 70 To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders, adjust the height of the seats or the height of the belt. Adjusting the exterior mirrors The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pelvis.

 ››› page 64 Fig. 25 On the driver door: control for external rear-view mirrors. Fig. 23 Positioning and removing the seat belt ››› page 67 buckle.  Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position: »

17 The essentials

L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, ● Adjust the steering wheel so that you can Airbags adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, hold onto the steering wheel with both hands left) and the passenger side (R, right) to on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and the direction desired. 3 o'clock positions and your arms slightly Front Airbags  Depending on the equipment fitted on bent. the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated ● Firmly push the lever upwards as far as it according to the outside temperature. will go ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel  Folding in mirrors. position on page 61.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheel  ››› in Exterior mirrors on page 145  position on page 61  ››› page 144

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 27 Location and deployment area of the front airbag for the driver

Fig. 26 Mechanical steering wheel adjustment

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.

● Push the lever ››› Fig. 26 1 downwards. 18 The essentials

fully when triggered, providing maximum pro- Disconnecting the passenger front tection. airbag The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 27 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 28. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red (deployment area) ››› Fig. 27. Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas ››› in Front airbags on page 74, Factory-fitted accessories are outside the range of the front airbag for the driver and the front passenger, Fig. 29 In the glove box on the passenger side: switch to activate and deactivate the front pas- e.g. the baseplate for the mobile phone sup- senger airbag. port. The airbag covers open out of the steering Disabling the front passenger front airbag wheel or dash panel and remain attached to ● Switch the ignition off. them when the driver and front passenger ● Open the glove compartment on the front front airbags are triggered ››› Fig. 28. passenger side. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› in Front airbags on page 74 ›››  page 114. Fig. 28 Location and deployment area of the  front airbag for the front passenger ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag In conjunction with the seat belts, the front ››› Fig. 29. About 3/4 of the key should enter, airbag system gives the driver and the front as far as it will go. passenger additional protection for the head ● Then turn the key gently to the  position. and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- Do not force it if you feel resistance, and lision. Always remains as far away as possible make sure you have inserted the key fully. from the front airbag. This way, in the event of ● Close the glove compartment on the front an accident, the front airbags can deploy passenger side. » 19 The essentials

● The      control lamp on Side airbags the dash panel will remain lit while the ignition is switched on ›››  page 75.

››› in Manual disabling and enabling of the front passenger front air-  bag with the key switch on page 76  ››› page 76

Fig. 31 On the driver side: action radius of air- Knee airbag bag for knees. Fig. 32 On the front seat side: location of side The knee airbag is located on the driver side airbag. below the dash panel ››› Fig. 30. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed red ››› Fig. 31 A is covered by the knee airbag when it is triggered (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas.

 ››› in Knee airbag* on page 74 Fig. 30 On the driver side: location of airbag for knees. Fig. 33 Range of action of the front and rear side airbags. With 5 and 7 seats.

The side airbags are located in the outer cushion of the driver and front passenger seat backrests ››› Fig. 32. Depending on the equipment of the model, the outer seats of the second row of seats may also be fitted with side airbags, located between the seat 20 The essentials backrests and the access area. Their position Child seats is indicated by the word “AIRBAG”. The red area (dotted line) ››› Fig. 33 shows the field of action of the side airbags. Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag In a side collision, the side airbags are triggered on the affected side of the vehicle, thus reducing the risk of injury to passengers on that side.

››› in Side airbags* on page 74  Fig. 35 Deployed head-protection airbags.

The curtain airbags are located on the driver and front passenger side above the doors Head-protection airbags ››› Fig. 34. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. The area framed red ››› Fig. 34 is covered by the curtain airbag when it is deployed (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas. In a side collision, the curtain airbag on the side affected will be deployed. The airbag covers the windows and pillars. In a side collision, the head-protection airbags for the front and outer rear seats reduce Fig. 34 On the left side of the vehicle: location Fig. 36 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on the the risk of injury to the areas of the body fac- and action field of head-protection airbag. passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear ing the impact. frame of the front passenger's door . »

››› in Curtain airbags* on  page 75

21 The essentials

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame.

 ››› in Introduction on page 77  ››› page 78

Fig. 37 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

22 The essentials

Different mounting systems

Fig. 38 On rear seats: possible assemblies of children seats.

Always secure child seats properly and safe- Specific mounting systems for each coun- Securing child seats with the seat ly in the vehicle according to the child seat try belt manufacturer's installation instructions. A Europe: ISOFIX retaining rings and upper Mounted child seats must rest correctly on retaining strap ››› page 24 and Securing the child seat using the seat belt the vehicle's seat and must not move or rock ››› page 24. ● Please read and observe the child seat more than 2.5 cm (1 inch). B Three-point seat belt and upper retaining manufacturer's handling instructions. Child seats equipped for a Top Tether strap strap ››› page 23. ● Positioning the child seat on the seat ac- must also be secured using the Top Tether re- cording to the manufacturer's instructions. The systems include the child restraint taining strap in the vehicle page 24. Only ››› system mounting with an upper retaining ● The seat belt height adjustment must be as secure the retaining belt to the rings fitted for strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring high as possible. this purpose and identified as Top Tether. Not points on the seat. ● Fasten the seat belt or pass it around the all rings can be used with the Top Tether sys- child seat structure in the manner described tem. Always tighten the Top Tether retaining in the manufacturer's instructions. strap so that the child seat fits snugly against the corresponding seat in the vehicle. ● Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click. » 23 The essentials

● Ensure that the upper belt web lies tightly Fix the child seat with the lower an- Child seat with adjustable retaining straps on the child seat. chor points (ISOFIX) ● Observe the manufacturer's instructions ● Pull the belt (it must be no longer possible when installing and removing the child seat. to pull the lower belt webbing out). ● Place the child seat on the seat cushion and attach the retaining strap hooks to the Removing the child seat retaining rings ››› Fig. 39. The seat belt must not be unfastened until the ● Tighten the straps evenly using the corre- vehicle has come to a standstill. sponding adjustment device. The child seat must sit flush against the vehicle seat. ● Press the red button on the buckle. The latch plate is released from the buckle. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged. ››› in Safety instructions on ● Remove the child seat from the vehicle. Fig. 39 Version 2: identification of the anchor points for the child seat on the vehicle seat  page 78

››› in Safety instructions on There are two retaining rings, the so-called  page 78 lower anchor points, on each rear seat or, Securing a child seat using a Top where applicable, on the front passenger Tether retaining strap seat. The retaining rings are attached to the seat frames.

Child seats with rigid mounting ● Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat. ● Press the child seat onto the retaining rings ››› Fig. 39 in the direction of the arrow. The child seat must be safely engaged and click audibly into place. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure. Fig. 40 Upper retaining strap hooked in the luggage compartment

24 The essentials

● Observe the manufacturer's instructions Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow when installing and removing the child seat plugs reheating ››› in Safety instructions on page 78. Ignition lock ● Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2 ● Raise the head restraint behind the child position. seat until it engages. ● Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1 ● Secure the child seat to the lower anchor position. points ››› page 24. ● Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs preheat ● Pull the upper child seat retaining strap when the ignition is switched on. back to the seat backrest of the rear seat, below or on both sides of the head restraint Starting the engine (depending on the child seat model). ● Manual transmission: press the clutch ped- ● Hook the upper retaining strap to the corre- al all the way down and move the gearbox sponding retaining ring (for Top Tether) on the lever into neutral. back of the seat backrest on the rear seat ● Automatic transmission: press the brake ››› Fig. 40. Fig. 41 Vehicle key positions pedal and move the selector lever to the P ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni- position or into N. go. Ensure that it does not interfere with the tion and start the engine. ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- seat belt from the upper attachment. tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not ● Tighten the strap so that the top of the child Locking and unlocking the steering wheel press the accelerator. seat rests on the seat backrest. ● Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it Start-Stop system* ››› in Safety instructions on locks. In vehicles with automatic transmission,  page 78 When you stop and release the clutch pedal, in order to remove the key, move the gear the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. shift to the P position. If necessary, press the The ignition remains switched on. gear shift blocking key and release it. ● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into ››› in Ignition lock on page 235 the ignition and turn it at the same time as the  steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-  ››› page 234 ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

25 The essentials

When the igni- Turn signal and main beam lever Lights and visibility When the ignition is switched tion is on Light switch off Dipped beam off; if necessary, the side Dipped beam  light comes on for a switched on. time.

 Fog lamps: pull the switch to the first position, from positions ,  or .  Rear fog lamp: pull the switch completely from positions ,  or . Fig. 43 Turn signal and main beam lever. Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it to the  position. More the lever to the required position: Fig. 42 Instrument console: light panel. 1 Right turn light: right-hand parking light in Switching lights on and off on Turn the switch to the required position ›››  page 134 (ignition switched off). ››› Fig. 42. 2 Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig- ››› page 133 nition switched off). When the igni-  When the ignition is switched 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on tion is on off the instrument panel. 4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- Fog lights, dipped Lights off or day- trol lamp  lit up. beam and side  time driving light on. lights off. Lever all the way down to switch it off. Automatic dipped The guidance lights beam control or may be switched ››› in Switching lights on and off on  daytime driving on.  page 134 light on.  Side light on.  ››› page 134

26 The essentials

Hazard warning lights Interior lights Windscreen wipers and window wiper blade Button/Position: Function

 Switches interior lights off.  Switches interior lights on.

Switches door contact control on (central position). The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is  opened or the key is removed from the ignition. Fig. 44 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning The lights go off a few seconds after all lights. the doors are closed, the vehicle is Fig. 45 Operating the windscreen wiper and locked or the ignition is switched on. rear wiper. Switched on, for example:  Turning the reading light on and off ● When approaching a traffic jam Move the lever to the required position ● In an emergency  ››› page 139 0  Windscreen wipers off. ● The vehicle has broken down Windscreen wipers interval wipe. ● When towing or being towed Using the control ››› Fig. 45 A adjust 1  the interval (vehicles without rain sen- ››› in Hazard warning lights on sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sen-  page 138 sor. 2  Slow wipe.  ››› page 137 3  Continuous wipe.

Brief wipe - short wipe. Hold the lever 4  down for more time to increase the wipe frequency.

Automatic wipe for cleaning wind- 5  screens with the lever up. »

27 The essentials

Move the lever to the required position A specialised workshop will be able to pro- ■ Lane Assist gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ■ Exit Assist Interval wipe for rear window. The cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- ■ Blind spot 6  wiper wipes the window at 6-second ommends taking your car in for technical ■ Fatigue detection intervals. service. ■ Front Assist Automatic wipe for cleaning rear win- 7 Some menu options can only be read when  dows with the lever pressed. ■ Parking heating ›››  page 184 the vehicle is at a standstill. ■ Activation ››› in Window wiper lever on As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it ■ Programme On / Off will not be possible to read the menus. To dis-  page 141 ■ Disconnection play the menus, confirm the warning by ■ Timer 1-3 ››› page 141 pressing OK .  ■ Day ■ Time ››› page 57  Summary of the menu structure ■ Minute ■ Activate ■ Multifunction display (MFI) ››› page 31 ■ Duration ■ SEAT information system Travelling time ■ Operating mode ■ Current fuel consumption ■ Heat ■ Average fuel consumption Introduction ■ Ventilation ■ Operating range ■ Day ■ With the ignition switched on, it is possible to Distance covered ■ Default setting read the different functions of the display by ■ Average speed ■ Vehicle status ››› page 30 scrolling through the menus. ■ Digital display of speed ■ Setup ››› page 32 ■ In vehicles with a multifunction steering Oil temperature digital display ■ Assistance systems wheel, there are no buttons on the wind- ■ Speed warning ■ Sign Assist: (Active or Trailer) screen wiper lever. The multifunction display ■ Audio ›››  page 198 ■ can only be controlled from the buttons on Lane Assist (Active) ■ Navigation ›››  page 215 the steering wheel. ■ Front Assist (Active, Pre-warning, Dis- ■ Telephone ›››  page 225 tance warning) The number of menus displayed on the in- ■ Assists (enable or disable) ■ ACC strument panel will vary according to the ve- ■ Sign Assist hicle electronics and equipment.

28 The essentials

■ Basic adjustment (ECO, Normal, ■ Individual Using the menus on the instrument Sport) ■ Synchronised panel ■ Distance (Very short, Short, Medium, ■ Back Large, Very large, Ultimate) ■ Factory settings (Factory settings) ■ Multifunction display data ■ Back ■ Travelling time ■ Lights & visibility ››› page 33 ■ Current fuel consumption ■ Coming Home ■ Average fuel consumption ■ Leaving Home ■ Distance covered ■ Footwell light ■ Operating range ■ Convenience turn signals On / Off ■ Average speed ■ Default setting ■ Digital display of speed ■ Tourist light On / Off ■ Fig. 46 Windscreen wipers: buttons to access Speed warning ■ Time ■ the instrument panel menus Compass ■ Winter tyres ■ Convenience ››› page 33 ■ Language ■ Central locking system (Central lock- ■ Units ing) ■ Second speed display On / Off ■ Automatic lock (Auto. lock) On / Off ■ Autohold ■ Automatic unlocking (Auto. unlock.) ■ Service On / Off ■ Info ■ Unlocking doors (Door unlock.: All, One door, Vehicle side, Individual) ■ Reset ■ Back ■ Default setting ■ Electric windows Fig. 47 Multi-function steering wheel: buttons ■ Off to access the instrument panel menus ■ All ■ Driver Enabling the main menu ■ Back ● Switch the ignition on. ■ Mirror angle (Mirror angle) On / Off ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, ■ Adjusting mirrors (Adjust. mirrors) press OK (››› Fig. 46 A or ››› Fig. 47). » 29 The essentials

● If handled with the windscreen wiper lever: Key for the driving assistance sys- Main menu the main menu list will be displayed. tems* ● If handled with the multi-function steering Multifunc- Information and possible configura- wheel: the main menu list will not be dis- tion display tions of the multifunction display played. To scroll through the options of the (MFI) ››› page 31. main menu, press the arrow keys   or If the radio is on, the station is dis-   repeatedly ››› page 30. played. Audio In CD mode, the current CD is Select a submenu played. ››› page 198 ● Press rocker switch ››› Fig. 46 B upwards or downwards, or, on the multifunction steer- When the navigation to destination ing wheel, turn the thumbwheel until you is on, change of direction arrows and a proximity bar are displayed. reach the required menu option. These symbols are similar to those ● The selected option is displayed between Fig. 48 On the turn light and main beam lever: used in the navigation system. key for driver assistance systems. Navigation two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is If navigation to destination is not on, displayed on the right . the direction of travel (compass) With the turn signal and main beam headlight and the name of the street on which ● To select the submenu, press OK . lever button, you can activate or deactivate you are driving are displayed. the driver assistance systems displayed in the ››› page 215 Making changes according to the menu Assistance systems menu. Information and pre-installation set- ● Use the rocker switch on the windscreen Telephone tings for mobile phone. wiper lever or the thumbwheel on the multi- Activate or deactivate a driver assistance ››› page 225. system function steering wheel to make the required Enabling or disabling driver assis- modifications. To scroll through numbers ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 48 in the di- tance systems: Sign Assist, Lane As- more quickly, hold the rocker switch down or rection of the arrow to open the menu Assis- Assistance sist, RCTA (Exit Assist), Blind spot de- turn the thumbwheel more quickly (fast for- tance systems. systems tection(BSD), fatigue detection, ward or reverse). Front Assist. ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- ››› page 259. ● Mark or confirm the selected option with tivate or deactivate it ››› page 30. A mark OK . indicates that driver assistance system is Information and configurations of the parking heating: switched on. Parking switching the parking heating on or heating off. Select the operating mode and duration. ››› page 184 30 The essentials

Current warning or information With the ignition switched on, and memory When the ignition is switched on, the texts. 1 or 2 displayed, briefly press OK to average consumption (in l/100 km This option only appears when one change from one memory to another or in mpg) is displayed after the ve- Vehicle sta- Average fuel of the following texts is available. hicle has moved approximately tus consump- The number of available messages The memory stores the values for the 100 metres (328 feet). Otherwise tion is displayed. Example 1/1 or 2/2. journey and the consumption from the horizontal lines are displayed. The ››› page 104 moment the ignition is switched on un- value shown is updated approxi- 1 til it is switched off again. mately every 5 seconds. Different setting options, for exam- Trip memo- If the journey is broken for more than 2 ple, the Convenience, Lighting & ry (for a hours, the memory is automatically Approximate distance in km (or Visibility menus, and the time, speed single jour- erased. If the journey is continued in miles) that can still be travelled with Setup warning with winter tyres, language, ney). less than 2 hours after the ignition is Operating the fuel remaining in the tank, as- units of measurement or driver as- switched off, the new data is added to range suming the same style of driving is sistance systems. the data already stored in the memo- maintained. This is calculated using ››› page 32 ry. the current fuel consumption.

The memory records the values for a Distance Distance travelled, after ignition is specific number of partial trips, up to a covered switched on, in km (or miles). Menu Multi-function display total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 2 hours and 59 minutes, or 1,999.9 km After the ignition is switched on, the (MFA) Total mem- (or miles) for 9,999 km (or miles), de- average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100 me- ory (for all pending on the model of instrument Average tres (328 feet) has been travelled. The multifunction display (MFD) has two au- journeys). panel. On reaching either of these lim- speed tomatic memories: 1 - Partial memory and 2 its, the memory is automatically Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated - Total memory. The selected memory will erased and starts to count from 0 approximately every 5 seconds. be shown in the upper right-hand corner of again. the display. Digital dis- Possible displays play of Current speed displayed digitally. speed This indicates the hours (h) and mi- Travelling Oil tempera- nutes (min) since the ignition was Updated engine oil temperature time ture digital switched on. digital display display The current fuel consumption while driving is displayed in l/100 km (or If the stored speed is exceeded (be- Current fuel Speed warn- miles per gallon, mpg); when the tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 18 - consump- ing at --- engine is running but the vehicle is 155 mph), an audible warning is giv- tion km/h not moving, in l/h (or gallons per en together with a visual warning. » hour).

31 The essentials

Changing between display modes The units of measurement can also be modi- Changing the visual and audible fied ››› page 32. speed warnings. This function should ● In vehicles without multi-function wheel: Winter only be used when the vehicle is fitted push the lever. tyres with winter tyres, which are not de- ● In vehicles with multi-function wheel: press signed for travel at high speeds. the key  or . Settings menu Changing the language of the display Language texts and the navigation system. Storing a speed for the speed warning Selection of the different settings of Assistance driver assistance systems: Sign Assist, Changing the units of measurement ● Speed warning at Select the display systems Lane Assist, Front Assist and ACC Units for the temperature, consumption and --- km/h. ››› page 259. distance. ● Press OK to store the current speed and Multifunc- Configuration of the multifunction dis- Second Switching second speed display on switch off the warning. tion display data that you wish to see on the speed and off. play data instrument panel display page 31. ● In addition, set the required speed by press- ››› Check the service notifications or re- ing the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper Service Changing the magnetic region and set the service intervals to zero. lever or using the  or  buttons on the multi- calibration of the compass. To cali- function steering wheel during the subse- Compass brate the compass, please follow the Some functions of the Configura- Factory quent 5 seconds. Next, press OK again or instructions given on the instrument tion menu will be reset to the factory panel display. settings wait a few seconds. The speed is stored and value. the warning activated. Conven- Changing vehicle convenience func- Back The main menu is displayed again. ience tions page 33. ● To switch off, press OK . The stored speed is ››› deleted. Lights & Configuration of vehicle lighting visibility ››› page 33. Manually erasing memory 1 or 2 Changing the hours and minutes of ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. the instrument panel clock and the navigation system. The time can be ● Hold down OK for approximately 2 sec- set here and the choice can be made Time onds. between the 24-hour and 12-hour display. The S in the upper part of the Personalising the displays display indicates that the clock is set to summer time. It is possible to select which of the displays in the multifunction display you wish to see on the instrument panel in the Settings menu.

32 The essentials

Submenu Convenience Tilts passenger mirror downwards All the configurations in the submenu Factory Rear vision when reverse gear is engaged. This Lights & visibility are reset settings mirror ad- enables the driver to see the edge of to the predefined factory values. Auto. lock (Auto Lock): automatic justment the pavement, for example locking of all doors and boot when ››› page 143. Headlamp adjustment for countries in reaching a speed of around 15 km/h which vehicles are driven on the other (10 mph). In order to unlock the vehi- If synchronised adjustment is se- side of the road. When the mark is ac- Exterior Tourist cle when it is stopped, push the cen- lected, when the driver side exterior tivated, the headlamps of a left-hand mirror ad- light tral locking button, pull the door han- mirror is adjusted, the passenger ex- drive vehicle are adjusted for driving just. dle or remove the key from the ignition terior mirror is also moved. on the left. This function must only be lock if the Auto unlock function is used for a short period. enabled. Some functions of the Convenience Factory submenu will be reset to the factory The Configuration menu is dis- settings Back Auto unlock (Auto Unlock): Un- value. played again. locking all doors and the boot by re- Central moving the ignition lock key. The Configuration menu is dis- locking Back played again. ››› page Door unlock: when unlocking with 116 the key, the following doors will be Personal convenience settings unlocked: When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recom- – All Lights & visibility submenu – One door: only the driver door is mends that each person always uses “their” unlocked. Pressing the  key again own remote control key. When the ignition is will unlock all doors and the rear lid. Coming This permits the adjustment of the switched off, or the vehicle is locked, the per- – Vehicle side: the doors on the Home time the headlamps stay on after driver side will unlock. locking or unlocking the vehicle, the sonal convenience settings are stored and In vehicles with Keyless Access Leaving function can also be connected or automatically allocated to the vehicle key ››› page 116, operating the lever will Home disconnected here ››› page 137. ››› page 28. unlock the doors on the side where the key is. This permits the adjustment of the The values of the personalised convenience brightness of the footwell lighting settings of the following menu options are al- Footwell Window operation settings: this ena- when the doors are open, the function light located to the vehicle key: bles the windows to be opened or can also be connected or disconnec- Handling closed when the vehicle is unlocked ted here ■ Parking heating menu windows or locked respectively. The open ■ Configuration Menu function can only be activated from Switching convenience turn signals ■ the driver door ››› page 130. Conven- on and off When the convenience turn Time ience turn signals are connected,, these flash at ■ Language signals least three times when the turn signal ■ is switched on ››› page 133. Units ■ Convenience settings menu » 33 The essentials

■ Door unlock (individual opening, Auto ● Connect CCS: set the lever to position  ››› in Cruise control system opera- Lock) 1 ››› Fig. 49. The system switches on but it  tion on page 274 ■ Convenience handling of windows does not control the speed as no speed has ■ Rear vision mirror adjustment been programmed.  ››› page 273 ■ Lights & visibility settings menu ● Enable CCS: press button  A ››› Fig. 49. It memorises and maintains the current ■ Coming home and leaving home speed. ■ Footwell light ● Disconnect CCS temporarily: move the lev- ■ Convenience turn signals Warning lamps er to  2 ››› Fig. 49 and release it or step The stored settings are automatically activa- on the brake or clutch. The cruise control sys- Control and warning lamps ted, at the latest when the ignition is switched tem is switched off temporarily. on. Please refer to the information and tips re- ● Connect CCS again: move the lever to Red warning lamps lating to the seat memory  page 150. ›››  1 ››› Fig. 49 and release. The memo- Parking brake engaged OR anomaly in the rised speed is saved and controlled again.  brake system ››› page 239. ● Increase the programmed speed during Engine cooling fluid ››› page 329. Cruise control CCS setup: briefly move the lever to   +  in order to increase the speed in 10 km/h in-  Engine oil pressure ››› page 326. Operating the cruise control sys- tervals. If you keep pressing it, the vehicle will accelerate up to the desired speed. Release  Open or not properly closed door tem (CCS)* the button to store the current speed. ››› page 124. ● Decrease the programmed speed during  Open or not properly closed rear lid CCS setup: briefly move the lever to   - ››› page 127 in order to decrease the speed in 10 km/h in-  Fault in the steering system ››› page 252. tervals. If you keep it pressed, the vehicle will decrease its speed, interrupting the gas ped-  AdBlue level too low ››› page 321. al without engaging the brakes. Release the button to store the current speed. Driver or passenger has not fastened seat  belt ››› page 65. ● Disconnect the CCS: turn the key to the  2 ››› Fig. 49 position. The system is discon-  Press the foot brake ››› page 239, nected and the memorised speed is deleted. ››› page 247, ››› page 280. Fig. 49 Left of the steering column: CCS  Fault in the generator ››› page 335. switch and controls.

34 The essentials

Yellow warning lamps  Low engine oil level ››› page 326. Mobile phone connected through Blue-  tooth ››› page 225.  Front brake pads worn ››› page 239. Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-  sioners ››› page 75. Mobile telephone battery charge status Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by  ››› page 225.  the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation Front passenger front airbag disabled  ››› page 243.  ››› page 75.  Risk of freezing ››› page 106.

 ASR manually deactivated ››› page 243. Top up AdBlue, OR fault in the system  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 259.  ››› page 321.  Fault in the ABS ››› page 243. Start-Stop system unavailable . ››› page 259. Gas tank lid is open ››› page 317. Electronic parking brake faulty   ››› page 239. Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) ››› in Control and warning lamps  ››› page 286.  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 133.  on page 109 Fault in the lighting of the vehicle Other warning lamps  ››› page 109  ››› page 133. Turn lights or emergency lights on Fault in the emission control system  ››› page 133.  ››› page 256.  Press the foot brake ››› page 247. Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault  in the management of the diesel engine  Speed regulator ››› page 273; OR Adap- ››› page 256. tive Cruise Control (ACC) ››› page 280. Fault in the petrol engine management  Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning  ››› page 256. ››› page 286. Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 133.  Particulate filter blocked ››› page 256.  Main beam assist (Light Assist) Fault in the steering system page 252.  ›››  ››› page 133.

 Tyre monitor system ››› page 299. Electronic immobiliser active  ››› page 238.  Windshield cleaning fluid too low ››› page 141.  Service interval display ››› page 107.  Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 317.

35 The essentials

go and then forwards to select reverse Gearbox lever ››› in Automatic gearbox* on ››› Fig. 50 R .  page 249 Manual gearbox ● Release the clutch.  ››› page 248 ››› in Manual gear change on  page 247  ››› page 37  ››› page 247

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 50 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever ››› Fig. 50.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. ● Move the gearbox lever to the required position. Fig. 51 Automatic transmission: selector lever positions. ● Release the clutch. P Parking lock Selecting reverse gear R Reverse gear ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot N Neutral (idling) right down. D/S Drive (forward) ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to go down a gear. 36 The essentials

Manual release of the selector lev- If the vehicle power supply should ever fail Manual release of the selector lever er (e.g. discharged battery) and the vehicle has ● Press the release lever ››› Fig. 53 in the di- to be pushed or towed, the selector lever rection of the arrow and hold it in this position. must first be moved to position N using the ● manual release mechanism. Press the lock button ››› Fig. 52 1 on the gear selector lever knob and place the gear The emergency release mechanism is loca- selector lever in the N position. ted underneath the gearbox cover panel to the right-hand side. To release the gear se- WARNING lector lever mechanism, a suitable tool is re- Never move the gear selector lever from quired, (e.g. a screwdriver). the position P while the electronic parking brake is deactivated. Otherwise, the vehi- Preparations cle may accidentally move off on hills or ● Apply the parking brake. If the brake cannot steep slopes causing serious accidents. Fig. 52 Remove the lining from the area of the be activated, the vehicle must be alternative- gear indication ly secured so that it cannot move. CAUTION ● Switch the ignition off. If the vehicle is moved on its wheels with the engine stopped and the selector lever To remove the gearbox cover panel in position N for a prolonged period of time ● Pull the cover up around the dust guard on and at high speed, for example for towing, the gear selector lever ››› Fig. 52. then the automatic gearbox will be damaged. ● Take the cover off by passing it over the gear selector lever ››› .

Fig. 53 Manual release of gear selector lever

37 The essentials

Air conditioning

How does the air conditioning work?

Fig. 54 Detailed view of the centre console:  Electronic manual air conditioning controls;  Climatronic controls.

Electronic manual air conditioning  ››› Fig. 54; Control button Climatronic  ››› Fig. 54.

Electric manual air conditioning: rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly. In the  MAX position, the cooling output will be 1 Temperature set to maximum. The air recirculation mode and the cooling system are activated automatically. Climatronic: the right and left side can be adjusted separately. Rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly.

2 Fan Electric manual air conditioning: level 0: fan and air conditioning (manual) disconnected, level 4: maximum fan lever.  Climatronic: the power of the fan adjusts automatically. Rotate the control to manually adjust the fan.

Electric manual air conditioning: rotate the continuous regulator to direct the air flow to the desired area. 3 Air distribution Climatronic: the air flow rate will be automatically adjusted to a comfortable level. It can also be switched on manually with the buttons 3 .

4 Climatronic: display of the selected interior temperature for the left and right sides.

38 The essentials

Electronic manual air conditioning  ››› Fig. 54; Control button Climatronic  ››› Fig. 54.

Electric manual air conditioning: defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. In this position, air recirculation is automatically  switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. to dry the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

Climatronic: Defrost function. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically  switched off. To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.  Air distribution towards the footwell.  Electric manual air conditioning: air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell.  Climatronic: upward air distribution.  Heated rear window: only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a 10 minutes.  Electric manual air conditioning: air recirculation ››› page 183.

 Climatronic: manual and automatic air recirculation ››› page 183.

 Instant auxiliary heating on/off button ››› page 184.   Buttons for the seat heating ››› page 150.

Climatronic: depending on the vehicle equipment there may be a button for the windscreen heating on the air conditioner control panel. The  windscreen heating only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a few minutes.

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Climatronic: accept the temperature selection for the driver and front passenger sides. When the  button light is lit, the temperature  settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or adjust the temperature control for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature. No lamp lights up on the button. »

39 The essentials

Electronic manual air conditioning  ››› Fig. 54; Control button Climatronic  ››› Fig. 54.  Climatronic: automatic temperature, fan, and air distribution control. Press the button to switch on the function. The control lamp lights up on the  button.

Climatronic: press the  button to adjust the air conditioner for the rear seats, from the front seats back. The lamp is lit on the  button if  the feature is activated. The settings for the rear seats will be displayed. Press the button again to switch the function off or do not touch any other button for around 10 seconds.

Climatronic: press the  button to use the heat that the engine produces. When the engine is still warm but the ignition switched off, the  heat given off by the engine can be used to keep the vehicle interior warm. The  button will light up when the function is switched on. The function will switch off after around 30 minutes and if the battery level is low.

Disconnect. a) Electric manual air conditioning: rotate the fan switch to position 0. Climatronic: press  or manually set the fan to 0. The  button will light up when the device switched off.

a) Depending on the version of the model.

 ››› in Introduction on page 180  ››› page 180

40 The essentials

Fluid level control Before refuelling, always turn off the engine, Oil the ignition, mobile telephones, auxiliary heating and keep them off during refuelling. Filling capacities Opening the fuel tank cap Tank level ● The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on 73 litres. 8 litre reserve the right. ● Press the rear of the tank flap to open it. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid ● Unscrew the tank cap anticlockwise and in- container sert it in the hole in the tank flap hinge Versions without headlight ›››  Fig. 286. 3.5 litres washer system Fig. 56 Engine oil dipstick. Closing the fuel tank cap Versions with headlight wash- 6 litres er system ● Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it you hear it click into position. ● Press the tank flap until you hear it click into Fuel place. The tank flap must be flush with the body contour.

 ››› page 316  ››› page 318 Fig. 57 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick located in the engine compartment ›››  page 326. Fig. 55 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. The oil indicator must be between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A . »

41 The essentials

● Zone A : do not add oil. If the recommended engine oil is not availa- Coolant ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level ble, in the event of an emergency you can in that zone. change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change: ● Zone C : add oil until zone B . – Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, Topping up engine oil VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. API SN. ● Add oil slowly. – Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure you do not add too much. Have the oil changed by a specialised work- ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , shop. Fig. 58 Engine compartment: coolant expan- unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW sion tank cap. 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00 Engine oil additives could increase consumption and the vehicle’s The coolant tank is located in the engine

No type of additive should be mixed with the CO2 emissions. compartment ›››  page 326. engine oil. The deterioration caused by these When the engine is cold, replace the coolant additives is not covered by the warranty.  when the level is below . Recommended by SEAT Motor oil specifications Coolant specifications SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to Diesel engines The engine cooling system is supplied from guarantee high SEAT engine performance. the factory with a specially treated mixture of With LongLife service VW 507 00 water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 Without LongLife service VW 507 00 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the ››› in Topping up engine oil on necessary frost protection down to -25°C  page 329 If the engine oil level is too low (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. You can get information about the correct en- ››› page 326  It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised ses the boiling point of the coolant. shop. If you have to change your engine oil, use this oil. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %,

42 The essentials even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- Brake fluid Windscreen washer tection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- corrosion protection ››› in Coolant specifi- Fig. 59 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 60 In the engine compartment: cap of the cations on page 330. The mixture of G13 ervoir cap. windscreen washer tank. with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in reduce anti-corrosion protection and should gine compartment ›››  page 326. the engine compartment ›››  page 326. therefore be avoided ››› in Coolant specifications on page 330. The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom- marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical mended by SEAT. Service. ››› in Coolant specifications on In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.  page 330 ››› in Checking the brake fluid lev- ››› in Checking and topping up the  el on page 333  ››› page 329 windscreen washer reservoir on  page 334  ››› page 332  ››› page 334

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 326. It does not require »

43 The essentials

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

››› in Checking the electrolyte lev-  el of the vehicle battery on page 336  ››› page 334

44 The essentials

Emergencies Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same ● Then lift the cover out. amperage (same colour and markings) and ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. size. Push the attachment tabs back, in the oppo- Fuses site direction indicated by the arrow until they Identifying fuses by colours click audibly into place. Fuse location Colour Amp rating In is possible that there are more fuses behind Purple 3 a cover in the lower left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Light brown 5 Brown 7.5  ››› page 93 Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25 Fig. 61 On the dashboard on the driver side: lid of the fuse box. Green 30 Orange 40

To open the dash panel fuse box ● To remove the cover, move the activation lever in the lower part to the right ››› Fig. 61. ● For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lever to the left.

To open the engine compartment fuse box ● Open the bonnet  ›››  page 323. Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: lid of the fuse box. ● Move the attachment tabs forwards, in the direction indicated by the arrow to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 62. 45 The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse Identifying a blown fuse Light source used for each function A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Halogen headlights. Type ››› Fig. 63. Dipped beam headlights H7 LL ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Main beam headlights/day- blown. H15 (double element) time running lights (DRL)

To replace a fuse Side lights W5W ● If necessary, remove the plastic pincers Turn signal PY21W NA LL from the fuse box cover. ● Small fuses: lock the pincer in from above AFS bi-xenon main Type ››› Fig. 64 A. headlight Fig. 63 Image of a blown fuse. ● Large fuses: move the pincer sideways over Daytime running lights P21W SLL the fuse ››› Fig. 64 B. (DRL) ● Remove the relevant fuse. Side lights W5W ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and Turn signal PY21W NA LL markings) and identical size. Xenon bulb. Visit an ● Replace the cover. Dipped beam / Main beam authorised workshop for replacement.

Front fog light Type Bulbs Fig. 64 Removing or fitting a fuse Fog lights HB4 Bulbs (12 V) Preparation LED rear lights Type

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- Full-LED headlights are designed to last the Side/brake light LED cal equipment. lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be Turn signal WY21W ● Open the corresponding fuse box replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced. ››› page 45 Reverse lights W16W

46 The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Sealing the tyre wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ture roadside crash barrier). the ››› Fig. 65 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. What to do first WARNING ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Always observe the above steps and pro- ››› Fig. 65 10 . The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard tect yourself and other road users. with anti-puncture technology tyres (Conti- ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 65 3 into ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break the wheel on the opposite side of the car automatically. up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro- with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- tective layer inside the tread. cle from moving. ● Remove the lid from the filling tube The inclusion of this technology means that ››› Fig. 65 3 and screw the open end of the there is no type of spare wheel included in tube into the tyre valve. the vehicle's equipment. Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill ture kit* the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot- ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and tle. in a safe place as far away from traffic as ● Remove the bottle from the valve. possible. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Apply the handbrake. ing the tool ››› Fig. 65 1 . ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Inflating the tyre ● Automatic transmission: Move the selector ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube lever to position P. ››› Fig. 65 8 into the tyre valve. ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed your vehicle. ››› Fig. 65 6 . ● Keep the vehicle tool kit ready* ● Start the engine and leave it running. ›››  page 85. ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 65 9 into the ● Observe the applicable legislation for each Fig. 65 Standard display: contents of the anti- vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 178. country (reflective vest, warning triangles, puncture kit. ● Turn the air compressor on with the etc.). ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 65 5 . » The anti-puncture kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. 47 The essentials

● Keep the air compressor running until it rea- Changing a wheel ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).  ››› in Location on page 85 A maximum of 8 minutes. Vehicle tool kit* ● Disconnect the air compressor.  ››› page 85 ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is Full hubcaps* distributed throughout the tyre. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. ● Repeat the inflation process. ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and request assistance from an authorised technician. Fig. 66 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew gage compartment: on-board tools. the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. 1 Adapter for anti-theft bolt ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and Fig. 67 Removing the full hubcap 2 Towing eye, removable 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). 3 Box spanner for wheel bolts Removing the full hubcap ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 65 2 to the in- 4 Crank handle for jack ● Take the wheel brace and the wire hook strument cluster, within the driver's visual 5 Jack from the vehicle tool kit ›››  page 85. field. 6 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the ● Hook the wire through one of the grooves ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes handle on the hubcap. ›››  page 89. 7 Hook for pulling off wheel trims or wheel ● Insert the wheel brace onto the wire hook bolt caps. ››› Fig. 67 and pull the hub cap in the direc- ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* tion shown by the arrow.  on page 88  ››› page 88

48 The essentials

Fitting hubcaps The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a Only use the tool supplied with the vehicle to Before mounting the full trim, the anti-theft special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking loosen the wheel bolts. bolts and is not for use with standard wheel wheel lock must be threaded into position Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn bolts. ››› Fig. 70 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be before raising the vehicle with the jack. possible to mount the full hubcap. If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able ● Press the trim against the wheel so that the Loosening the wheel bolts to loosen it by pushing down on the end of space for the valve fits over the tyre valve the wheel brace carefully with your foot. Hold ››› Fig. 70 1 . Make sure that the hubcap is on to the vehicle for support and take care correctly fitted all the way around the wheel. not to slip.

Loosening wheel bolts Wheel bolt caps ● Fit the wheel brace as far as it will go over the wheel bolt ››› Fig. 69. ● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise ››› .

Fig. 69 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts. Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts For wheels with full trim, the anti-theft wheel lock must be threaded into position ››› Fig. 70 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the entire hubcap.

Fig. 68 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps ● Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit. Removal ● Insert the adapter onto the anti-theft wheel ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the bolt. cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 68. ● Fit the wheel brace onto the adapter as far ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. as possible. » Fig. 70 Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and posi- The caps protect the wheel bolts and should tion of anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 . be remounted after changing the tyre.

49 The essentials

● Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate WARNING Raising the vehicle with the jack the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise ››› . If the wheel bolts are not fitted correctly they could be released while driving leading to loss of vehicle control and serious Important information about wheel bolts damage. The wheel rims and bolts have been de- ● Only use wheel bolts which correspond signed to be fitted to factory options. If differ- to the wheel rims in question. ent rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts ● Never use different wheel bolts. with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that ● The bolts and threads should be clean, wheels are fitted securely and that the brake free of oil and grease and easy to thread. system functions correctly. ● To loosen and tighten the wheel bolts, always use the wheel brace supplied with the Fig. 71 Jack position points. In some circumstances, wheel bolts from the vehicle. same model vehicle should not be used. ● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Wheel bolt tightening torque ● Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or The prescribed tightening torque for wheel the wheel hub threads. Although they have bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. been tightened to the prescribed torque, Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts they could come loose while driving. checked as soon as possible with a reliable ● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel torque wrench. rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel bolts are rusty and it is difficult to ● If the wheel bolts are not tightened to the tighten them, the threads should be replaced correct torque, they may come loose while and cleaned before checking the tighten- driving, and the bolts and rims may come Fig. 72 Jack mounted on the left rear part of ing torque. out. If the tightening torque is too high, the the vehicle wheel bolts and threads can be damaged. Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the The jack may be applied only at the jacking wheel hub threads. Although they have been points shown (marks on chassis) ››› Fig. 71. tightened to the prescribed torque, they The mark indicates the jacking points below could come loose while driving. the vehicle. The jacking points are on the ribs behind the front edges ››› Fig. 72. Always the relevant jacking point for the wheel to be changed ››› . 50 The essentials

Raise the vehicle using only the designated the vertical reinforcement beneath the ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one jacking points. vehicle ››› Fig. 72. side or the engine is running. For your own safety and that of other passen- 10. Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clear ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is gers, the following points should be observed of the ground. raised. The vehicle may come loose from in the order given: the jack due to the engine vibrations. WARNING 1. Select a suitable flat and firm surface for If the vehicle is not correctly raised, it could raising the vehicle. fall off the jack causing serious injury. Removing and fitting the wheel 2. Switch off the engine, engage a gear Please observe the following rules to mini- (manual gearbox) or place the selector mise the risk of injury: lever in position P ›››  page 247 and ● You should only use a jack approved by turn on the electronic parking brake SEAT for your vehicle. Other jacks, even ›››  page 238. those approved for other SEAT models, 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the might slip out of place. wheel being changed with folding wheel ● The ground should be firm and flat. If the chocks* or other suitable objects. ground is sloped or soft then the vehicle 4. In case of using a trailer: unhook the trail- could slip and fall off the jack. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base. er from the towing vehicle and park it correctly. ● If the ground is slippery, such as tiles, place a non-slip surface (a floor mat, for in- 5. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to Fig. 73 Changing the tyre: loosen wheel bolts stance) beneath the jack to avoid slipping. with the socket at the end of the wheel brace be changed ››› page 49. ● Only fit the jack at the prescribed jacking 6. Look below the vehicle for the jacking points. The claw of the jack should grip the Removing the wheel point ››› Fig. 71 closest to the tyre which reinforcement nerve on the underbody ● Slacken the wheel bolts ››› page 49. has to be changed. ››› Fig. 72. ● Raise the vehicle ››› page 50. 7. Raise the jack with the handle until it can ● You should never place a body limb such be inserted below the jacking point. as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that ● Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel brace ››› Fig. 73, unscrew the slackened 8. Ensure that the foot of the jack is firmly is solely supported by the jack. wheel bolts and place them on a clean sur- on the ground and that it is placed im- ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- face. mediately below the lifting point on the cle, you must use suitable stands addition- vehicle ››› Fig. 72. ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of ● Take off the wheel. » accident!. 9. Straighten the jack and continue raising it using the handle until the claw holds 51 The essentials

Putting on the spare wheel Tyres with directional tread pattern necessary whenever a tyre is changed Check the direction of rotation of the tyre ›››  page 298. ››› page 52. Tyres with directional tread pattern have ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel been designed to operate best when rotating bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- ● Fit the wheel. in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre que wrench ››› page 50. Meanwhile, drive ● Screw on the anti-theft locking bolt with the sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on carefully. adapter in position ››› Fig. 70 2 or 3 clock- tyres with directional tread ›››  page 345. wise and tighten gently. Always observe the indicated direction of rotation in order to guarantee optimum grip and ● Replace the other wheel bolts and tighten help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and Snow chains slightly using the hexagonal socket on the wear. end of the wheel brace. If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction Use ● Lower the car with the jack. of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the ● Tighten all of the wheel bolts clockwise tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is When using snow chains, applicable local ››› . Tighten the bolts in diagonal pairs (not of particular importance when the road sur- legislation and maximum permitted speed in a circle). face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos- limits must be observed. ● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on sible or remount it with the correct direction In winter weather, snow chains not only help ››› page 48. of rotation. to improve grip but also improve the braking capacity. WARNING Snow chains must only be mounted on the If the wheel bolts are not treated suitably Subsequent work front wheels, even on all-wheel drive vehi- or not tightened to the correct torque then cles, and only with the tyre and rim combina- ● In alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt this could lead to loss of vehicle control tions listed below: and to a serious accident. caps. ● All the wheel bolts and hub threads ● In plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. Tyre size Wheel rim should be clean and free of oil and grease. ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- The wheel bolts should be easily tightened 205/60 R16 6 1/2 J x 16 ET 33 tion ›››  page 85. to the correct torque. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ● The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace SEAT recommends you ask a technical serv- should be used for turning wheel bolts only. ted tyre as soon as possible. ice for further information on wheel, tyre and Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel ● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre monitoring chain sizes. bolts. system, this should be “reprogrammed” if

52 The essentials

Wherever possible use fine-link chains meas- Note uring less than 15 mm (37/64 inch) including the lock. Snow chains are available in different sizes according to the vehicle type. Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains ››› . The wheel bolts should be covered with caps for safety reasons. These are available from technical Emergency towing of the ve- services. hicle WARNING Towing Fig. 75 On the rear bumper, to the right hand The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted side: Towline anchorage in position chains could lead to serious accidents and damage. Towline anchorages ● Always the appropriate snow chains. Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- ● Observe the fitting instructions provided rages. by the snow chain manufacturer. They are located with the vehicle's tools ● Never exceed the maximum permitted  page 85. speeds when driving with snow chains. ››› Screw the towline anchorage into the screw CAUTION connection ››› Fig. 74 or ››› Fig. 75 and tighten it with the wheel brace. ● Remove the snow chains to drive on Fig. 74 On the right-hand side of the front roads without snow. Otherwise they will im- bumper: screw the anchorage. Tow rope or tow bar pair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. When towing, the tow bar is the safest and ● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- vehicle friendly way. You should only use a ed if the chains come into direct contact tow rope if you do not have a tow bar. with them. SEAT recommends the use of A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid covered snow chains. damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- ilarly elastic material. »

53 The essentials

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar to the Situations in which a vehicle should not be ● Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking towline anchorage or specially designed fit- towed and ignition system, since the electronic ting. In the following cases, the vehicle should not steering lock may not unlock. Vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, be towed but transported on a trailer or spe- ● Vehicles with an electronic parking brake, can only be used for towing with a tow bar, cial vehicle: given that it is possible that the brake will not specially designed to fit on a tow hitch ball be disengaged. ● If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lu- ›››  page 301. ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possible that bricant due to a fault. the engine control units do not operate cor- Towing vehicles with an automatic gear- ● If the vehicle battery is flat and, as a result, rectly. box the electronic steering lock and electronic parking brake cannot be disengaged if ap- Note the following for a towed vehicle: However, if your vehicle must absolutely plied. be tow-started (manual gearbox): ● Make sure the gear selector lever is in the N ● If the vehicle to be towed has an automatic ● Put it into second or third gear. position. gearbox and the distance to be covered is ● Keep the clutch pressed down. ● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). greater than 50 km (30 miles). ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ● Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles). ing lights. ● If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle ››› in Introduction on page 90  ● Release the clutch when both vehicles are must be towed with the front wheels raised. moving. Note the following instructions for towing four  ››› page 90 all-wheel drive vehicles. ● As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. Instructions for towing all-wheel drive ve- This helps to prevent a collision with the tow- hicles Tow-starting ing vehicle. All-wheel drive vehicles can be towed using a In general, the vehicle should not be star- toolbar or tow rope. If the vehicle is towed ted by towing. Jump-starting is much more with the front or rear axle raised, the engine How to jump start preferable page 54. must be turned off to avoid transmission ››› damage. For technical reasons, the following vehicles Jump leads can not be tow started: For vehicles with a double clutched DSG® (di- If the engine fails to start because of a dis- rect shift gearbox) the instructions for towing ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. vehicles with an automatic gearbox apply charged battery, the battery of another vehi- ››› page 54. cle can be used to start the engine. Before 54 The essentials starting, check the magic eye on the battery Always keep lit cigarettes, flames, sparks Positive pole on the jump lead con- ›››  page 334. and fire far from the battery. Never use a nection points For starting assistance, jump lead cables mobile telephone when connecting and re- conforming to the standard DIN 72553 are removing the jump leads. quired (see the cable manufacturer instruc- ● Charge the battery only in well ventila- tions). The jump lead cable must be at least ted areas given that when the battery is 25 mm2 in section (0.038 inches2) for petrol charged by outside assistance, it creates a engines, and 35 mm2 (0.054 inches2) for die- mix of highly explosive gases. sel engines. ● Jump leads should never enter into contact with moving parts in the engine com- For vehicles whose battery is not in the en- partment. gine compartment, the jump leads should on- ● ly be connected to the starting assistance Never switch the positive and negative poles or connect the jump leads incorrect- connection points in the engine compart- ly. ment. Fig. 76 In the engine compartment: positive ● Note the instruction manual provided by pole for starting assistance + . WARNING the manufacturer of the jump leads. On some vehicles, there is a starting assis- Incorrect use of jump leads and incorrectly tance terminal in the engine compartment, CAUTION jump starting could cause the battery to under a labelled cover. explode resulting in serious injury. Please To avoid considerable damage to the vehi- observe the following rules to minimise the cle electrical system, note the following risk of a battery explosion: carefully: ● The battery providing current must have ● If the jump leads are incorrectly connec- the same voltage (12V) and approximately ted, this could result in a short circuit. the same capacity (see markings on bat- ● The vehicles must not touch each other, tery) as the flat battery. otherwise electricity could flow as soon as ● Never charge a frozen or recently thawed the positive terminals are connected. battery. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). ● If a battery is frozen and/or has been frozen then it must be replaced. ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is being charged.

55 The essentials

Help for starting the car: descrip- 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the tion the positive + terminal of the vehicle flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 77. until the engine is running. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- Removing the jump leads hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads, 4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: switch off the dipped beam headlights if connect one end of the black jump lead they are switched on. to the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated providing the current B ››› Fig. 77. rear window in the vehicle with the flat 4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: battery. This helps minimise voltage connect one end of the black jump lead peaks which are generated when the X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol- leads are disconnected. Fig. 77 Diagram of connections for vehicles id piece of metal in the engine block, or 11. When the engine is running, disconnect without Start-Stop system. to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 78. the leads in reverse order to the details 5. Connect the other end of the black jump given above. lead X to a solid metal component bol- Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ted to the engine block or to the engine metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- block itself of the vehicle with the flat minals. battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- 6. Position the leads in such a way that onds, switch off the starter and try again after they cannot come into contact with any about 1 minute. moving parts in the engine compartment. WARNING Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles ● Please note the safety warnings referring with Start-Stop system. Starting to working in the engine compartment ›››  page 323. 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the Jump lead terminal connections boosting battery and let it run at idling ● The battery providing assistance must 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles speed. have the same voltage as the flat battery ››› .

56 The essentials

(12V) and approximately the same capaci- Note Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- The vehicles must not touch each other, ply could result in an explosion. screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- otherwise electricity could flow as soon as tion. ● Never use jump leads when one of the the positive terminals are connected. batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery ››› page 90 acid could leak and cause chemical burns.  If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Changing windscreen wipers ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of ex- Windscreen wipers service posi- plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. tion ● Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. ● Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. ● The non-insulated parts of the battery Fig. 79 Wipers in service position. clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- terminal must not touch metal parts of the ers are in service position ››› Fig. 79. vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. ● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Close the bonnet ›››  page 323. cannot come into contact with any moving ● Switch the ignition on and off. parts in the engine compartment. ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could wards briefly ››› page 27 4 . result in chemical burns.

57 The essentials

Changing the front wiper blades the windscreen and rear window wiper ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window. blades on page 90. ››› in Changing the windscreen Change the windscreen wiper blades and rear window wiper blades on  page 90 ● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms. ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 80 1  ››› page 90 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow. ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. Fig. 80 Changing the front wiper blades ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms The wiper arm may only be lifted at the point where it is fastened to the blade.

Changing the rear wiper blade ● Lift and unfold the wiper arm. ● Pull the wiper blade out of its mounting on the wiper arm ››› Fig. 81 (arrow A ). Fig. 81 Changing the rear wiper blade ● Hold down the release button ››› Fig. 81 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction Cleaning windscreen wiper blades of arrow B . You might have to apply a lot of ● Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms. effort. ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt ● Insert a new blade of the same length and from the wiper blades. type in the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 81 B and hook into ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or place. This feature is operational when the damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing knob is in position (arrow A ).

58 Safe driving

to reduce the risk of damage to the lower – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors Safety part of the vehicle and the oil sump when properly according to your size. driving over kerbs, or along dirt tracks or un- – Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats surfaced roads, etc. SEAT recommends car- Safe driving always have the head restraints in the in- rying out the assembly at a technical service. use position ››› page 147. Advice about driving WARNING – Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height. Driving under the influence of alcohol, Safety first! drugs, medication or narcotics may result – Protect children with appropriate child in severe accidents and even loss of life. seats and properly applied seat belts This chapter contains important information, ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics ››› page 77. tips, suggestions and warnings that you may significantly alter perception, affect – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct should read and consider for both your own reaction times and safety while driving, your passengers also to assume a proper safety and for your passengers' safety. which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle. sitting position ››› page 60. WARNING – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your ● This manual contains important informa- passengers also to fasten their seat belts tion about the operation of the vehicle, Before setting off properly ››› page 67. both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documenta- For your own safety and the safety of your tion also contain further information that passengers, always note the following points What affects driving safety? you should be aware of for your own safety before every trip: and for the safety of your passengers. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn ● Ensure that the on-board documentation and your passengers. When your concentra- signals are working properly. is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- pecially important when lending or selling – Check tyre pressure. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as the vehicle to another person. others on the road ››› , for this reason: – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone – Make sure all luggage is secured Introduction calls. ››› page 156. Depending upon how you expect to use your – Never drive when your driving ability is im- – Make sure that no objects can interfere with vehicle, it may a good idea to protect the en- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). » the pedals. gine from below. An undercarriage may help 59 Safety

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● head-protection airbags, Correct position of the vehi- – Always reduce your speed as appropriate ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the cle occupants for road, traffic and weather conditions. rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, ● height-adjustable front head restraints, – When travelling long distances, take breaks Correct sitting position regularly - at least every two hours. ● belt height adjustment for the front seats,

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired ● rear head restraints with in-use position and or stressed. non-use position, ● adjustable steering column. WARNING The safety equipment mentioned above When driving safety is impaired during a works together to provide you and your pas- trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa- sengers with the best possible protection in ses. the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct Safety equipment position and use this equipment properly. Fig. 82 The correct distance between the driv- Safety is everyone's business! er and the steering wheel must be at least 25 Never put your safety or the safety of your cm (10 inches). passengers in danger. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT:

● three-point seat belts, ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, ● Belt tensioners for the front seats, ● front airbags, ● knee airbags, Fig. 83 Correct belt web and head restraint ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, positions ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,

60 Safe driving

The correct sitting positions for the driver and ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while Adjusting the steering wheel posi- passengers are shown below. the vehicle is in motion. tion If your physical constitution prevents you ● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly from maintaining the correct sitting position, ››› page 67. Read the additional information carefully contact a specialised workshop for help with ›››  page 18. any special devices. The seat belt and airbag Also valid for the driver: WARNING can only provide optimum protection if a cor- ● Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) be- Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- mends taking your car in for technical serv- tween it and your chest ››› Fig. 82 and so that ment function and an incorrect adjustment ice. you can hold the steering wheel with both of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 injury in the event of an accident or sudden o'clock and 3 o'clock positions with your arms ● After adjusting the steering column, push braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the slightly bent. the lever ›››  Fig. 26 1 firmly upwards to ensure the steering wheel does not acci- following positions: ● The adjusted steering wheel must face your dentally change position while driving. chest and not your face. ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the Valid for all vehicle occupants: ● Adjust the driver seat forwards or back- vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust ● wards so that you are able to press the ac- Adjust the head restraint so that its upper the steering wheel while the vehicle is in edge is at the same level as the top of your celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor motion, stop safely and make the proper head, or as close as possible to the same lev- with your knees slightly angled and the dis- adjustment. el as the top of your head and under no cir- tance between your knees and the dash pan- ● The adjusted steering wheel should be cumstances below eye level. Keep the back el is at least 10 cm (4 inches) ››› Fig. 82. facing your chest and not your face so as of your neck as close as possible to the head ● Adjust the height of the driver seat so that not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- restraint ››› Fig. 82 and ››› Fig. 83. you can easily reach the top of the steering tection in the event of an accident. ● Short people must lower the head restraint wheel. ● When driving, always hold the steering completely, even if your head is below its up- ● Keep both feet in the footwell so that you wheel with both hands on the outside of the per edge. have the vehicle under control at all times. ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions ● Tall people must raise the head restraint to reduce injuries when the driver's front completely. Also valid for the front passenger: airbag deploys. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● Adjust the seat backrest to an upright posi- ● Move the front passenger seat back as far o'clock position or in any other manner tion so that your back rests completely as possible for optimum protection should the (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In against it. airbag deploy. such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, »

61 Safety

you may sustain injuries to your arms, cle occupant who has assumed an incorrect WARNING hands and head. sitting position. The driver is responsible for all passengers in the vehicle, particularly chil- An incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can lead to severe injuries or death in the dren. event of sudden braking or manoeuvres, Danger of injuries due to an incor- The following list shows just some examples collision or accidents or if the airbag de- rect sitting position of incorrect sitting positions which can be ploys. dangerous to all vehicle occupants. ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the Number of seats proper sitting position and maintain it Whenever the vehicle is in motion: throughout the trip. This also includes fas- Depending on the equipment, your vehicle tening the seat belt. has a total of five or seven seats. Each seat is ● Never stand in the vehicle. ● Never transport more people than there equipped with a seat belt. ● Never stand on the seats. are seats with a seat belt available in the 5 seats ● Never kneel on the seats. vehicle. ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the ● Children must always be protected with Seats in the Seats in the Seats in the rear. an approved child restraint system suited front second row third row ● Never lean against the dash panel. to their height and weight ››› page 77. 2 3 – ● ● Never lie on the rear bench. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Never, for ex- 7 seats ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ample, put your feet on the surface of a seat or on the dash panel and never put Seats in the Seats in the Seats in the ● Never sit sideways. them out of a window. Otherwise the airbag ● Never lean out of a window. front second row third row and seat belt offer insufficient protection ● 2 3 2 Never put your feet out of a window. and the risk of injury in the event of an acci- ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. dent is increased. If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat all, the risk of severe injuries increases. Seat or seat backrest. WARNING belts can provide optimal protection only if ● Before every trip, adjust the seat, the seat the belt web is properly worn. Being seated in Never travel in a footwell. belt and the head restraints and instruct an incorrect position means the seat belt ● Never sit on the armrests. your passengers to fasten their seat belts cannot offer its full protection. This could re- ● Never travel on a seat without wearing the properly. sult in severe and even fatal injuries. The risk seat belt. ● Move the front passenger seat back as of severe or fatal injuries is especially height- ● Never carry any person in the luggage far as possible. ened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehi- compartment. 62 Safe driving

● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a WARNING In the event of failure of a brake circuit, the distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) be- brake pedal must be pressed harder than Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac- tween the centre of your chest and the hub normal to brake the vehicle. cidents and severe injuries. of the steering wheel. Adjust the driver seat so that you are able to press the accelera- ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is WARNING stationary, as the seats could move unex- tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor Objects falling into the driver's footwell pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and with your knees slightly angled and that could prevent use of the pedals. This could you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- the distance between your knees and the lead the driver to lose control of the vehi- thermore, an incorrect position is adopted dash panel is at least 10 cm (4 inches). If cle, increasing the risk of a serious acci- when adjusting the seat. your physical constitution prevents you dent. from meeting these requirements, contact ● Only adjust the height, seat backrest and ● Make sure the pedals can be used at all a specialised workshop to make any modi- forwards or backwards position of the seat times, with no objects rolling underneath fications required. when there is nobody in the seat adjust- them. ● Never drive with the seat backrest tilted ment area. ● Always secure the mat in the footwell. far back. The further the seat backrests are ● There must be no objects blocking the tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of in- seat adjustment area. ● Never place other mats or rugs on top of the original mat supplied by the factory. jury due to incorrect positioning of the belt ● Only adjust the height, angle and longitu- web or to the incorrect sitting position! dinal position of the rear seats when no- ● Ensure that no objects can fall into the ● Never drive with the seat backrest tilted body is in the way. driver's footwell while the vehicle is in motion. forwards. Should a front airbag deploy, it ● The seat adjustment and lock areas must could throw the seat backrest backwards be kept clean. and injure the passengers of the rear seats. CAUTION ● Sit as far away as possible from the The pedals must always have free and un- steering wheel and the dash panel. obstructed passage to the floor. For exam- ● Keep your back straight and resting com- Pedal area ple, in case of a fault in the brake circuit, pletely against the seat backrest and the the brake pedal will need to be pressed fur- front seats correctly adjusted. Never place Pedals ther to stop the vehicle. To press the brake any part of your body in the area of the air- pedal down further will require more force bag or very close to it. Do not allow floor mats or other objects to than usual. ● If passengers on the rear seats are not obstruct the free passage of the pedals. sitting in an upright position, the risk of se- Floor mats should leave the pedal area free vere injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web increases. and unobstructed and be correctly secured in the footwell zone.

63 Safety

Seat belts the trip. This also applies to other vehicle ● Avoid damaging the seat belt by jamming occupants when driving in town. it in the door or the seat mechanism. ● When travelling, children must be se- ● If the fabric or other parts of the seat belt Why wear a seat belt cured in the vehicle with a child restraint are damaged, the seat belts could break in system suitable for their weight and height the event of an accident or sudden braking. Introduction and with the seat belts correctly fastened ● Always have damaged seat belts re- ››› page 77. placed immediately by seat belts ap- Check the condition of all the seat belts at ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their proved for the vehicle in question by SEAT. regular intervals. If you notice that the belt seat belts properly before driving off. Seat belts which have been worn in an ac- webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for cident and have been stretched must be buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the the appropriate seat and ensure it is en- replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- belt must be replaced immediately by a spe- gaged. Using the latch plate in the buckle newal may be necessary even if there is no cialised workshop ››› . The specialised of another seat will not protect you proper- apparent damage. The belt anchorage workshop must use the appropriate spare ly and may cause severe injuries. should also be checked. parts corresponding to the vehicle, the equip- ● Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to ● Never attempt to repair, modify or re- ment and the model year. SEAT recommends enter the buckle fastenings. This could move a seat belt yourself. All repairs to taking your car in for technical service. damage the buckles and seat belts. seat belts, retractors and buckles must be carried out by a specialised workshop. WARNING ● Never unbuckle your seat belt when the vehicle is moving. Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts in- ● Never allow more than one passenger to crease the risk of severe or even fatal inju- share the same seat belt. ries. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if it is not fastened and used cor- ● Never hold children or babies on your lap rectly. sharing the same seat belt. ● Seat belts are the most effective way of ● Bulky and unbuttoned clothing, such as a reducing the risk of sustaining severe or fa- coat worn over a sweatshirt, impairs the tal injuries in the event of an accident. Seat proper fit and function of the seat belt. belts must be correctly fastened when the vehicle is in motion to protect the driver WARNING and all vehicle occupants. It is extremely dangerous to drive using ● Before each trip, every occupant in the damaged seat belts and could result in se- vehicle occupants must sit properly, cor- rious injury or loss of life. rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keep it fastened throughout 64 Seat belts

Warning lamp  It lights up or flashes red The seat belt status is displayed for around 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats Driver's seat belt not fastened or front passenger is fastened or unfastened. You can switch off seat belt not fastened if the front passenger seat is this display by pressing the 0.0 / SET button. occupied. Fasten your seat belt! The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats Objects over the passenger seat. is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An Remove any objects from the front passenger seat and store them safely. audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph). Some control and warning lamps on the in- The rear seat display can be enabled or disa- strument panel will come on to check certain bled by a technical service centre. functions when the ignition is switched on. Fig. 84 Warning lamp on the instrument panel. They will switch off after a few seconds. An audible warning will be heard for a maxi- The protective function of seat mum of 90 seconds if the seat belts are not belts fastened as the car drives off and reaches a speed of more than 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The seat belt warning lamp  will also flash. The warning lamp  does not switch off until the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts while the ignition is switched on. Fig. 85 Example of seat belt status display for the rear seats (here, a 7-seat vehicle) on the in- Seat belt status display for rear seats strument panel: upper part, second row; lower part, third row. The seat belt status display on the instrument panel informs the driver, when the ignition is Fig. 86 Drivers with properly worn seat belts switched on, whether any passengers in the will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The  symbol indicates that the passenger in this Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt in the proper position. They also help prevent Fig. 85. ››› uncontrolled movements that may result in » 65 Safety

serious injury and reduce the risk of being bag trigger threshold value in the control unit thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- is not exceeded. dent. Therefore, you should always wear your seat Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants correctly benefit greatly from the ability of have fastened their seat belts properly before the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, you drive off! the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag system) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- Head-on collisions and the laws of gy released in a collision. Taken together, all physics these features reduce the releasing kinetic Fig. 88 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown energy and consequently, the risk of injury. forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a This is why it is so important to fasten seat seat belt belts before every trip, even when "just driving The effects of the laws of physics in the case around the corner". of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the Ensure that your passengers wear their seat moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on that wearing seat belts is an effective means both the vehicle and its passengers. of substantially reducing the risk of injury and The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on improving the chances of survival when in- the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher properly worn seat belts improve the protec- Fig. 87 A driver not wearing a seat belt is the speed and the greater the weight, the tion provided by airbags in the event of an thrown forward violently. more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt accident. is required by law in most countries. The most significant factor, however, is the Although your vehicle is equipped with air- speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles bags, the seat belts must be fastened and from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), worn. The front airbags, for example, are only for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. gy is multiplied by four. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the 66 Seat belts occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed Using seat belts How to properly adjust your solely by said impact. Twisted seat belt seat belt Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne guide, the seat belt may have become twis- Fastening and unfastening your (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are ted inside the side trim after being wound too seat belt even higher. quickly on unfastening:

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are ● Pull out the seat belt completely, carefully not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on pulling on the latch plate. collision, they will move forward at the same ● Untwist the belt and guide it back, assisting speed their vehicle was travelling just before it by hand. the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and The seat belt must be fastened even if it is im- collisions. possible to untwist it. In this case, the twisted Even at low speeds the forces acting on the area must not be in an area in direct contact body in a collision are so great that it is not with your body. Have the seat belt untwisted possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In urgently by a specialised workshop. a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact WARNING with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- An improperly handled seat belt increases screen or whatever else is in the way the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. ››› Fig. 87. ● Regularly check that the seat belts and It is also important for rear passengers to their components are in perfect condition. wear seat belts properly, as they could other- ● Always keep your seat belt clean. wise be thrown forward violently through the ● Do not jam or damage the seat belt or vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in rub it with sharp edges. Fig. 89 Insert the latch plate into the buckle » the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- ● Make sure there are no liquids or foreign danger not only themselves but also the front bodies on the latch plate and in the buckle. occupants ››› Fig. 88.

67 Safety

Unfastening the seat belt ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- The seat belt must not be unfastened until the bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up vehicle has come to a standstill ››› . any slack.

● Press the red button on the buckle In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt ››› Fig. 89 B. The latch plate will come out of must lie evenly across the chest and as low the buckle. as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 90. up easily and the trim will not be damaged. Adapting the position of the belt webbing Correct belt position to your size Fig. 90 Position of seat belt during pregnancy. Seat belts offer their maximum protection in The seat belt can be adapted using the fol- the event of an accident and reduce the risk lowing equipment: Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when cupants in the position that most protects they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats. them in the event of an accident or sudden the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat ● Front seat height adjustment. braking ››› . belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides WARNING Fastening the seat belt the maximum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing An incorrectly worn seat belt web can Fasten your seat belt before each trip. correctly positioned. cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. ● Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor- Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe rectly ››› page 60. ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- or even fatal injuries ››› page 60, Correct tion unless the seat backrest is in an up- ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in position of the vehicle occupants. right position and the seat belt is worn cor- an upright position ››› . rectly, according to your size. ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- on the centre of the shoulder, never across ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal not twist the seat belt when doing so . ››› the shoulder. injuries in the event of an accident or sud- ● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the den braking. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across corresponding seat Fig. 89 A. ● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, ››› the pelvis, never across the stomach. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is can cause severe injuries if the belt moves securely engaged in the buckle. 68 Seat belts from hard areas of the body to soft areas ensure the optimum protection of the seat ● Adjust the rear seat and head restraint cor- (e.g. the stomach). belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking rectly ››› page 60. ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie your car in for technical service. ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in on the centre of the shoulder, never across an upright position ››› . the neck or the arm. ● Use latch plate of the belt ››› Fig. 91 1 to ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- Fastening or unfastening the seat pull the seat belt down. Do not twist the seat ably on the torso belt with two buckles belt when doing so ››› . ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie ● Engage the latch plate 1 in the buckle of across the pelvis, never across the stom- the corresponding seat A . ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- ● Use the latch plate Fig. 91 2 to pull the fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if ››› seat belt across your lap. necessary to take up any slack. ● ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the Engage the latch plate 2 in the buckle of seat belt must lie as low as possible over the corresponding seat B . the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” ● Pull the belt to ensure that both latch the stomach ››› Fig. 90. plates are securely engaged in the buckles. ● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fastened. Unfastening the seat belt ● Once the seat belt is positioned correct- Fig. 91 Fasten the seat belt on the centre seat The seat belt must not be unfastened until the ly, don't pull it away from your body with in the second row of seats vehicle has come to a standstill ››› . your hand. ● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- ● Press the red button on the buckle fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. cupants in the position that most protects ››› Fig. 91 A . The latch plate will come out of them in the event of an accident or sudden the buckle. ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings braking ››› . or similar instruments to alter the position ● Press the red button on the buckle of the belt webbing. The seat belts for the centre seat in the sec- ››› Fig. 91 B . The latch plate will come out of ond row of seats and for the seats in the third the buckle. Note row of seats are fastened using two buckles. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged. » If your physical constitution prevents you Fastening the seat belt from maintaining the correct position of the belt webbing, contact a specialised work- Fasten your seat belt before each trip. shop for help with any special devices to

69 Safety

WARNING Using the height adjusters for the front seats Automatic belt retainer and the outer seats of the second row, the Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic An incorrectly worn seat belt web can position of the seat belts can be adjusted in cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of belt retainer on the shoulder belt. If the belt is the shoulder area according to the height of an accident. pulled slowly or during normal driving, the the occupant: system allows for total freedom of movement ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrests are in an up- ● Keep the guide device pressed down in the on the shoulder belt. However, during sudden right position and the seat belt is worn cor- direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 92. braking, during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic belt rectly, according to your size. ● Move the guide device up or down until the retainer on the seat belt is locked is pulled ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder quickly. cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal ››› page 67. injuries in the event of an accident or sud- ● Release the guide device. den braking. Belt tensioners ● Pull the belt sharply to check that the de- The seat belts on the front seats and the out- Note vice is engaged securely. er seats of the second row are equipped with belt tensioners. Seat belts with two buckles include a dia- WARNING gram to show how to fasten the seat belt. Sensors trigger the belt tensioners during se- Never adjust the belt height while the vehi- vere head-on, lateral and rear collisions and cle is in motion. retract and tighten the seat belts. If the seat belt is loose, it is retracted to reduce the for- Belt height adjustment wards movement of vehicle occupants or movement in the direction of the collision. The Seat belt tensioners belt tensioner works in combination with the airbag system. The belt tensioner will not be Automatic belt retractor, belt ten- triggered in the event of the vehicle overturn- sioner, belt tension limiter ing if the side airbags are not deployed. If the belt tensioner is triggered, a fine dust is Seat belts are part of the vehicle’s safety fea- produced. This is normal and it is not an indi- tures and consist of the following important cation of fire in the vehicle. functions:

Fig. 92 Near the front seats: seat belt height regulator.

70 Airbag system

Belt tension limiter ing severe or fatal injuries. The belt tension- Airbag system The belt tension limiter reduces the force of er may fail to trigger or may trigger in the the seat belt on the body in the event of an wrong circumstances. accident. ● Never attempt to repair, adjust or remove Brief introduction or install parts of the belt tensioners or Note seat belts. Any work must be performed by Introduction a specialised workshop only ››› page 311. The relevant safety requirements must be Front airbags have been installed for both observed when the vehicle is dismantled or ● Belt tensioners and automatic belt re- driver and passenger. The front airbags can system components are removed. These tainers cannot be repaired and must be re- requirements are known to specialised placed. also protect the chest and head of driver and workshops ››› page 71. passenger if the seats, seat belts head restraints and, for the driver, the steering wheel For the sake of the environment are correctly adjusted and used. Airbags are Airbag modules and belt tensioners may considered as additional safety equipment. Service and disposal of belt ten- contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- An airbag cannot replace the seat belt, which sion devices quirements for their disposal. must be worn at all times, even in front seats where front airbags have been installed. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install other parts of the vehicle when WARNING performing other repair work, the seat belt Never exclusively trust the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be as a means of protection. that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or not at all. ● Even when triggered, airbag protection is only auxiliary. So that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner ● The airbags provide the best protection is not reduced and that removed parts do not when the seat belts are properly fastened, cause any injuries or environmental pollution, thus reducing the risk of sustaining injuries regulations must be observed. These require- ››› page 67, How to properly adjust your ments are known to specialised workshops. seat belt. ● Before each trip, every occupant must sit WARNING properly, correctly fasten the seat belt be- Improper handling and homemade repairs longing to his or her seat and keeping it fas- of seat belts, automatic belt retainers and tened throughout the trip. This rule is valid tension devices increase the risk of sustain- for all vehicle occupants. »

71 Safety

WARNING ● Have any repairs or modifications carried WARNING out at a specialised workshop. Specialised Vehicle occupants sitting in the front of the Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag workshops have the necessary tools, diag- vehicle must never carry any objects in the modules to become porous. If an airbag is nostics equipment, repair information and deployment space between them and the accidentally triggered, the detachment of qualified personnel. airbags, as this increases the risk of sus- plastic parts could cause serious injury. ● Never fit recycled or reused airbag com- taining injuries if the airbag is triggered. ● Never clean the dash panel and the sur- ponents in your vehicle. This modifies the airbag deployment space faces of the airbag modules with cleaners or the objects may fly uncontrollably and ● Never modify the airbag system compo- containing solvents. hit your body. nents. ● Never carry objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Description of the airbag system ● Never transport objects on the front pas- If the airbags are triggered, a fine dust is senger seat. In the event of sudden braking produced. This is normal and it is not an in- The airbag system is not a substitute for the and manoeuvres, the objects may end up in dication of fire in the vehicle. seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- the airbag deployment space and fly un- al protection for the driver and passenger in controllably around the vehicle interior if ● This fine dust may irritate the skin and combination with the seat belts. the airbag is activated. eyes and cause breathing difficulties, particularly in people suffering from or who ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer have suffered from asthma or other illness- The airbag system comprises the follow- rear seats must never carry any other peo- es of the respiratory tract. To reduce ing modules (as per vehicle equipment): ple, pets or objects in the deployment breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle space between them and the airbags. ● Electronic control unit. and open and doors and windows to breath Make sure children and other passengers in fresh air. ● Front airbags for driver and passenger also respect this recommendation. ● Should you touch the dust, wash your ● Knee airbag for the driver hands and face using a mild soap and wa- ● Side airbags WARNING ter before you eat. ● Head airbag The airbag system provides protection for ● Prevent the dust from affecting the eyes ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument one accident only. If they have been de- or open wounds. ployed, they must be replaced. panel ● Rinse your eyes with water if you have ● Ensure deployed airbags and the system dust in them. ● Key-operated switch for front passenger components involved are immediately re- airbag placed with new, SEAT-approved compo- ● Control lamp to disconnect/connect the nents for the vehicle. front airbag.

72 Airbag system

The airbag system operation is monitored system may fail to trigger, or not trigger If the deceleration rate is below the prede- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- correctly. fined reference value in the control unit the luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- airbags will not be triggered, even though the nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). accident may cause extensive damage to the car. There is a fault in the system if the control Airbag activation lamp : The following airbags are triggered in seri- The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within ous head-on collisions: ● does not light up when the ignition is thousandths of a second, to provide addition- switched on, al protection in the event of an accident. ● Driver airbag. ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is The airbag system is only ready to function ● Front passenger front airbag switched on, when the ignition is on. ● Knee airbag for the driver. ● turns off and then lights up again after the In special accidents instances, several air- ignition is switched on, The following airbags are triggered in seri- bags may activate at the same time. ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is ous side-on collisions: In the event of minor head-on and side colli- moving. ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent. over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. The airbag system is not triggered if: ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- ● the ignition is switched off Activation factors dent. ● ● there is a minor frontal collision The conditions that lead to the airbag system Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● there is a minor side collision activating in each situation cannot be gener- cident. ● there is a rear-end collision alised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehi- In an accident with airbag activation: ● the vehicle turns over. cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior speed, etc. light switch is in the courtesy light position); WARNING Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- ● the hazard warning lights switch on; ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants vation. ● all doors are unlocked; are seated correctly ››› page 60. The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tory and activates the respective restraint tem, have the system checked immediately system. by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the 73 Safety

Airbag safety instructions ● When driving, always hold the steering ments, make sure you contact a special- wheel with both hands on the outside part ised workshop. Front airbags at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at Read the additional information carefully least 25 cm distance between your chest Side airbags* ›››  page 18. and the hub of the steering wheel. If your physical constitution prevents you from Read the additional information carefully WARNING meeting these requirements, make sure you ›››  page 20. contact a specialised workshop. The airbag is deployed at high speed in ● Adjust the front passenger seat so there fractions of a second. WARNING is as much distance as possible between ● Always keep the deployment areas of the the front passenger and the dash panel. The airbag is deployed at high speed in front airbags free. fractions of a second. ● Never secure objects to the covers or in ● Always keep the deployment areas of the side airbags free. the deployment area of the airbag mod- Knee airbag* ules, e.g. drink holders or phone supports. ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer ● The deployment space between the front Read the additional information carefully rear seats must never carry any other people, pets or objects in the deployment passengers and the airbags must not in ›››  page 20. any case be occupied by other passenger, space between them and the airbags. pets and objects. WARNING ● The built-in coat hooks should be used ● Never fix any object to the windscreen only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave The airbag is deployed at high speed in above the front airbag on the front passen- any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the fractions of a second. ger side. pockets. ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of ● Do not alter, cover or stick anything to ● Do not mount accessories on the doors. the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy- the steering wheel hub or the surface of the ● ment areas of the knee airbags free. Only used protective covers for the seats airbag module on the passenger side of the that are approved for the vehicle. Other- dash panel. ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the wise, the side airbag would be obstructed deployment area of the knee airbag. when deployed. WARNING ● Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- Front airbags are deployed in front of the tween your knees and the location of the steering wheel ›››  Fig. 27 and the dash knee airbag. If your physical constitution panel ›››  Fig. 28. prevents you from meeting these require-

74 Airbag system

WARNING ple, pets or objects in the deployment It lights up on the combi-in- space between them and the airbags.  Incorrect handling of the driver's and front strument ● The built-in coat hooks should be used passenger seat could prevent the side air- Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave bag from deploying properly and cause Have the system checked immediately by a special- severe injuries. any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the ised workshop. pockets. ● Never remove the front seats of the vehicle or modify any of their components. ● Do not mount accessories on the doors.   It lights up on the dash panel ● Great forces must not be exerted on the ● Do not fit curtains to the windows other seat backrest bolsters because the side than those expressly approved for use in Fault in airbag system. Have the system checked immediately by a special- airbags might not deploy correctly, might the vehicle. ised workshop. not deploy at all or might deploy unexpect- ● Only turn the sun blinds towards the win- edly. dows if there is no object, e.g. pens or ga- Front passenger front airbag disabled. ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- rage remote controls, secured to the sun Check whether the airbag should remain disabled tery or around the seams of the side airbag blind. units must be repaired immediately by a Several warning and control lamps light up specialised workshop. for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being Deactivating airbags verified. They will switch off after a few seconds. Curtain airbags* Control lamp If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, Read the additional information carefully the lamp      does not re- ›››  page 21. main lit, or if it is lit together with the control lamp  on the instrument cluster, there may WARNING be a fault in the airbag system ››› . The airbag is deployed at high speed in WARNING fractions of a second. ● Always keep the deployment areas of the In the event of a fault in the airbag system, head-protection airbags free. the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unex- ● Do not fix objects to the cover or in the pectedly, leading to severe or fatal injuries. deployment area of the curtain airbag. Fig. 93 Control lamp for disabling the front passenger front airbag on the dash panel ● Have the airbag system checked immedi- ● Vehicle occupants of the front and outer ately by a specialised workshop. » rear seats must never carry any other peo-

75 Safety

● Never mount a child seat in the front pas- The front passenger front airbag must be the dash panel, a child restraint system can- senger seat ››› page 82 or remove the disabled when a rear-facing child seat is not be mounted on the front passenger seat mounted child seat! The front passenger mounted. for safety reasons. The front passenger front front airbag may deploy during an acci- airbag may deploy during an accident. dent in spite of the fault. Activating the front passenger front airbag WARNING CAUTION ● Switch the ignition off. The front passenger front airbag must only be disabled in special cases. Always pay attention to any lit control ● Open the glove compartment on the front lamps and to the corresponding descrip- passenger side. ● Disable and activate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is switched tions and instructions to avoid damage to ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for off to avoid damage to the airbag system. the vehicle. deactivating the front passenger airbag ››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter, ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the key operated switch is set to the as far as it will go. correct position. Manual disabling and enabling of ● Then turn the key gently to the  position. ● Only disable the front passenger front the front passenger front airbag Do not force it if you feel resistance, and airbag when a child seat is to be mounted make sure you have inserted the key fully. with the key switch under exceptional circumstances. ● Close the glove compartment on the front ● As soon as the child seat is no longer passenger side. needed on the front passenger seat, recon- ● Check that, with the ignition switched on, nect the front passenger front airbag. the control lamp      on the ● Never leave the key in the airbag deacti- dash panel is not lit up ››› page 75. vation switch as it could get damaged or activate or deactivate the airbag during How to know whether the front passenger driving. front airbag is disabled The only indication of the front passenger airbag being disabled is that the      control lamp on the dash panel re- Fig. 94 In the glove box on the passenger side:   switch to activate and deactivate the front pas- mains lit ( stays yellow) ››› page 75. senger airbag. If the      control lamp on the centre console does not remain lit or is Read the additional information carefully lit in combination with the control lamp  on ›››  page 19. 76 Transporting children safely

Transporting children accessory for the footwell) to fit the child re- ● Children must always be protected with tention system correctly and securely. an approved child restraint system suited safely to their height and weight. WARNING ● Children must assume the proper sitting Safety for children Make sure children are properly belted in position and be properly belted in while and correctly secured to avoid severe or travelling. fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion. Introduction ● Ensure the seat backrest is upright when ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- a child seat is being used on it. senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- Read the additional information carefully ● Do not allow the child's head or other ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ›››  page 21. part of his or her body to fall into the de- accident increases. ployment area of the side airbags. Please read the information regarding the air- ● An inflating front passenger airbag can ● Make sure the belt webbing is correctly bag system fully before transporting babies strike the rear-facing child seat and project positioned. and children in a child seat or other child re- it with great force against the door, the roof ● straint system installed on the front passen- or the backrest. Never hold children or babies on your lap or in your arms. ger seat. ● Never install a child seat facing back- ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. This information is extremely important for wards on the front passenger seat unless driver and passenger safety, particularly that the front passenger front airbag has been ● If you are using a child seat with a base or foot, always install this base or foot cor- of babies and children. disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex- rectly and safely. SEAT recommends the use of child seats from ceptional cases, to transport a child in the ● If the vehicle has a storage compartment the SEAT accessory programme. These child front passenger seat, the front passenger in the footwell in front of the last row of seats have been designed and tested for use front airbag must always be disabled seats, this compartment cannot be used as in SEAT vehicles. You can purchase child ››› page 76. If the passenger seat has a designed; on the contrary, it must be filled seats with different mountings from a techni- height adjustment option, move it to the using the specially designed accessory so cal service centre. highest, most upright position. If you have a that the base or foot is correctly supported fixed seat, do not install any child restraint by the closed compartment and the child system in this location. Using child restraint systems with a base seat is secured properly. If this compart- or foot ● For those vehicles that do not include a ment is not suitably secured when using a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, child seat with a base or foot then the com- Some child retention systems are secured to the vehicle must be taken to a technical partment cover could rupture in an acci- the seat using a base or support leg. For cer- service. dent and the child will be ejected and suf- tain kinds of equipment the use of an addi- ● Children up to 12 years old should always fer serious injury. » tional accessory will be necessary (e.g. an travel on the rear seat. 77 Safety

● Please read and observe the child seat ● Objects between the passenger and the ● Never secure a child seat to the movable manufacturer's handling instructions. passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags attachment elements for vehicles with an on page 74. attachment element and rail system. WARNING WARNING An empty or loose child seat could fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior and Child seats In general, the rear seat is always the saf- cause injuries in the event of an accident or est place for correctly belted in children in sudden braking. Safety instructions the event of an accident. ● When not in use while the vehicle is in ● A suitable child seat that is correctly in- motion, always safely secure the child seat Read the additional information carefully stalled and used on one of the rear seats or store it in the luggage compartment. ›››  page 21. offer the most protection possible for babies and small children in most accidents. Note WARNING The lower anchor points for child seats are WARNING Replace the child seat after an accident, not anchors meant to support cargo. Only as it may have invisible damage. Unbuckling the seat belt while the vehicle secure booster seats to lower anchor is in motion can cause severe or fatal inju- points. ries in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Important information regarding WARNING ● The seat belt must not be unfastened un- the front passenger's airbag Child seats with lower anchor points and til the vehicle has come to a standstill. Read the additional information carefully with an upper retaining strap must be installed in line with the manufacturer's in- ›››  page 21. Note structions. Failure to comply could result in Read and always observe the safety informa- severe injuries. Other accessories may be required to fit the child retention system with a base or tion included in the following chapters: ● Always secure just one retaining strap foot security and safely. Contact a techni- from a child seat to a retaining ring (for Top ● Child seats and passenger side airbag cal service centre or specialised workshop. Tether) on the seat backrest on the rear ››› page 80, Use of the child seat on the seat in the boot. front passenger seat. ● Never fix child seats to the cargo anchors ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- in the luggage compartment. ger airbag ››› in Introduction on page 71.

78 Transporting children safely

General information on transport- the use of approved seat systems for trans- Weight Weight Installation of the ing children in the vehicle porting babies and children. catego- of the child seat Only used authorised, approved child seats ry child Read the additional information carefully that are suitable for the vehicle. Always con- ›››  page 23. Forward-facing. On the sult with a technical service centre or a spe- outer rear seats or in the Legal regulations and provisions will always cialised workshop should you have any centre seat of the sec- take priority over the descriptions of this in- doubts. Group 2 15 to 25 kg ond row of seats and on all seats in the third row. struction manual. There are different regula- Specific child seat regulations for each Optionally with ISOFIX tions and provisions for the use of child seats system. and their mountings (››› table on page 79). country (selection) In some countries, for example, the use of Group 3 22 to 36 kg Forward-facing. Regulation Further information child seats on certain seats in the vehicle may be forbidden. ECE-R 44a) technical service centre Not all children fit in the seat of their weight group. Nor do all seats adapt to the vehicle. The physical principles and the forces acting a) ECE-R: Economic Comission for Europe Regulation. Therefore, always check whether the child fits on the vehicle in the event of a collision or properly in the child seat and whether the other type of accidents also apply to children Categorisation of child seats according to seat can be installed safely in the vehicle. ››› page 67. However, unlike adults and ECE-R44 youngsters, children do not have fully devel- The rear seats are suitable for child seats with Weight Weight the ISOFIX system specially designed for this oped muscle and bone structures. In the Installation of the catego- of the type of vehicle in accordance with regulation event of an accident, children are subject to a child seat greater risk than adults of sustaining severe ry child ECE-R 44. injuries. Group 0 up to 10 kg Rear-facing. On rear Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44 Given that children's bodies are not yet fully seats, optionally using regulation are fitted with the corresponding developed, child restraint systems must be Group 0+ up to 13 kg the ISOFIX system. approval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E in a circle with the identification number be- used that are especially adapted to their Forward-facing. On rear low it. height, weight and constitution. There are Group 1 9 to 18 kg seats, optionally using laws in force in many countries that indicate the ISOFIX system.

79 Safety

Use of the child seat on the front front airbag and it remains activated, it is in accordance with current regulations of the passenger seat1) forbidden to transport children on the country in question. front passenger seat ››› . Universal seats for children of groups 0, 0+, Transporting children on the front passenger 1, 2 or 3 according to the standard ECE-R 44 Things to note if using a child seat on the seat is not permitted in all countries. Further- can be mounted on the front passenger seat front passenger seat: more, not all child seats are approved for use and the rear seats. on the front passenger seat. Your technical ● The front passenger front airbag must be service centre has an updated list of all ap- disabled  when using a rear-facing child WARNING proved child seats. Only used child seats that seat page 76. ››› If a child seat is mounted on the front pas- are approved for each vehicle. ● The seat backrest of the front passenger senger seat, the risk of the child sustaining The front airbag on the front passenger side seat must be upright. severe or fatal injuries in the event of an ac- is highly dangerous for a child. The front pas- ● The front passenger seat must be moved cident increases. Rear-facing child seats must never be mounted on the front passenger seat is life-threatening to a child if he as far back as possible. or she is transported in a rear-facing child senger seat when the front passenger front ● A height-adjustable front passenger seat seat. airbag is enabled. This is life-threatening to must be raised to its highest point. the child should the front airbag deploy, as If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the ● The seat belt height adjustment must be as the child seat would be struck by the infla- front passenger seat, an inflating front airbag high as possible. ted airbag and thrown against the seat can strike it with such great force that severe backrest. or fatal injuries may result . Therefore, ››› Suitable child seats rear-facing child seats must never be placed WARNING on the front passenger seat when the front The child seat must be authorised by the passenger front airbag is enabled. manufacturer especially for use on a front If, in exceptional circumstances, a child passenger seat with a front or side airbag. must be transported in a rear-facing child Only use a rear-facing child seat on the front seat on the front passenger seat, strictly passenger seat if the front passenger front If the front passenger seat is equipped with observe the following: retaining rings, the child seat can be se- airbag is disabled. When it is disabled, the ● Always disable the front passenger front cured using an approved retaining system yellow control lamp on the dash panel airbag and leave it disabled.      will be lit up ››› page 75. provided it is approved for this type of vehicle If you cannot disable the front passenger

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 80 Transporting children safely

● The child seat must be approved by the a vertical position and fold the head re- Group ISOFIX manufacturer for use on a front passenger straints down. (weight Seat position in child seat seat with front and side airbag. catego- the rear seats category ● Follow the installation instructions of the ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats ry) child seat manufacturer and observe the The rear seats are suitable for child seats with Group 0: warnings. E IUFa) the ISOFIX system specially designed for this to 10 kg ● Move the front passenger seat as far type of vehicle in accordance with regulation a) back as possible and adjust it to its highest ECE-R 44. E IUF position to keep as far away as possible Group 0+: ISOFIX child seats are divided into “specific D IUFa) from the front airbag. to 13 kg categories for the vehicle”, “limited” or “semi- C IUFa) ● Move the seat backrest to the upright po- universal”. sition. D IUFa) Child seat manufacturers supply a list of ve- ● The seat belt height adjustment must be hicles with each ISOFIX seat, which includes a) as high as possible. C IUF the models for which the ISOFIX child seat in Group 1: ● Children must always be protected with B IUFa) question is approved. If the vehicle is included 9 to 18 kg an approved child restraint system suited in the manufacturer's list and the ISOFIX child a) to their height and weight. B1 IUF seat belongs to a seat category included in a) the list, then it can be used in your vehicle. If A IUF necessary, contact the child seat manufac- a) IUF: suitable for “universal” ISOFIX child seats au- Use of the child seat on the rear turer for an updated list of vehicles. thorised for use in this group. seat WARNING If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat, If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the adapt the position of the front passenger second row then it is possible that the seat so that the child has enough space. seats of this row cannot be folded down Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat to from the third row of seats in case of an ac- the size of the child seat and the height of the cident. In the event of an emergency, pas- child. Ensure the passenger is in the correct sengers in the third row of seats will not be position  ››› page 60. able to leave the vehicle or to help themselves. » Move the second and third rows of seats fully back and lock them. Place the seat backs in

81 Safety

● Child seats should never occupy all the WARNING ● All modifications to the integrated child seats of the second row if other passengers seat must be carried out by a specialised Children must travel in a child seat appro- are to occupy the third row of seats. workshop. priate to their weight and height while the vehicle is in motion. ● Replace the child seat or any seat components damaged or involved in an acci- ● Children must always be protected with dent. Integrated child seat a child restraint system suited to their height and weight. WARNING Introduction ● Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while Loose objects could fly uncontrollably travelling. The integrated child seat is only suitable for around the vehicle interior and cause inju- children in Group 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3 ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ries in the event of an accident or sudden (22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula- approximately on the centre of the shoul- braking. tion. der, never across the neck or the arm. ● Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob- ● The seat belt must lie close to the upper jects on the child seat or on the seat while WARNING part of the body. the vehicle is in motion. Child travelling without their seat belt fas- ● The lap belt part must lie across the pel- tened or not secured using a suitable re- vis, not across the stomach, and always fit straint system may sustain fatal injuries if closely. the airbag is deployed. ● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly ● Children up to 12 years old should always over the child's seat. travel on the rear seat. ● Never hold children or babies on your lap. ● Always disable the front passenger front ● Always use a child seat and the seat belt airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no for children who are under 1.5 m tall. The alternative but to transport a child in a normal seat belt could cause injuries to the rear-facing child safety seat on the front abdominal and neck areas. passenger seat. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. ● Children must always be protected with ● Read and follow the information and a child restraint system suited to their warnings provided by the child seat manu- height and weight. facturer. ● Always fasten children's seat belts cor- ● Never leave an unsupervised child alone rectly. on a child seat or in the vehicle.

82 Transporting children safely

Unfolding the integrated child seat ● Fold both sides ››› Fig. 95 B up in the di- Seat belt routing on the integrated rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 95 2 . child seat ● Push the cushion ››› Fig. 95 C back in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 95 3 until it engages.

Install the head restraint on the child safety seat ● Remove the head support and store it safely in the vehicle ››› page 146. ● Make sure that the seat belt guide is installed in the head support of the seat for children on the window side ››› page 83. ● Enter the child seat head support in the Fig. 95 Embedded child seat: lift up the pillow. corresponding backrest until it fits correctly into place ››› Fig. 96. Fig. 97 Embedded child seat: install the seat belt. ● Make sure that the rear seats and backrests are correctly locked into place, pulling on both of them.

Fig. 96 Embedded child seat: attach the headrest. Fig. 98 Embedded child seat: seat belt routing Lifting the cushion with guide handle. » ● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 95 A on the cushion in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 95 1 . 83 Safety

Using the guide handle ››› Fig. 98, position ● Children must assume the proper sitting ● Push the cushion down through the central the seat belt so that the shoulder part of the position and be properly belted in while area B in the direction of the arrow 2 until it belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder. travelling. safely engages ››› . The side supports fold away automatically. ● The shoulder belt must be positioned Seat belt guide handle against the middle of the shoulder. Remove the head restraint on the child ● Secure the seat belt guide handle to the ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- safety seat side head restraint on the window side. The ably. ● guide handle is secured by a button. ● Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly Open the guide lever on the seat belt and ● Open the upper button on the seat belt over the child's seat. guide it by hand to pull the belt back in more easily and without damaging the trim. guide handle and pass the belt webbing be- ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie low the side head restraint and through the across the pelvis, never across the stom- ● Lift the child seat head restraint to the top. guide handle. ach. ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ● Close the button again. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat. ››› page 150. ● Remove the head restraint on the child Adjusting the seat belt safety seat. ● Guide the automatic three-point seat belt Removing the child seat ● Fitting the head restraint. below the side head restraint. ● Pull the latch plate and slowly place the CAUTION belt webbing across the child's chest and lap. When lowering the integrated child seat, ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the only press on the centre of the cushion appropriate seat and push it down until it is ››› Fig. 99 2 . Otherwise the cushion could securely locked with an audible click. bend and not engage properly. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

WARNING The seat belt only offers maximum protec- Fig. 99 Embedded child seat: lower the pillow. tion from severe or fatal injuries when it is correctly positioned. Lowering the cushion ● Pull the unlock lever ››› Fig. 99 A on the cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 .

84 Self-help Emergencies Warning triangle Vehicle tool kit* With the rear lid open, rotate the lock 90° ››› Fig. 100. Lower the bracket and remove Location Self-help the warning triangle.

In case of emergency First-aid kit There is a first aid kit ››› page 169 in the rear First aid kit, warning triangle, re- left-hand side storage compartment of the luggage compartment. flective vests and fire extinguishers* The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Check the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher Fig. 101 In the boot, seen from inside the vehi- There is a Fire extinguisher underneath the cle: on-board tools in a cavity in the lock carri- front passenger seat. er. The fire extinguisher must conform to legal When securing the vehicle in case of a break- requirements, be ready for use and be down, please note the legal requirements for checked regularly. Check the certification each country. seal on the extinguisher. Depending on the model, the vehicle tools Fig. 100 On the rear lid: Warning triangle WARNING may be kept in the luggage compartment, in bracket a cavity close to the lock carrier ››› Fig. 101. Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve- Reflective vests violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in acci- hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with Some vehicles will have a driver door com- dents causing serious injury. winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a partment to store a reflective vest toolbox located in the luggage compartment. ● Secure fire extinguishers, first aid kit, re- ››› page 102. flective vests and warning triangle secure- WARNING ly to their respective supports. Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently fired through the compartment in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking » 85 Emergencies

and especially in accidents causing seri- The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle Note ous injury. equipment. The following is a description for a vehicle with all options. The jack does not generally require any ● Make sure that the vehicle tools are stor- maintenance. If required, it should be ed safely in the luggage compartment. Individual elements of the vehicle tool kit greased using universal type grease. ››› Fig. 102 WARNING 1 Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recom- Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can mend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in Folding wheel chocks* cause injury or accidents. the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code ● Never work with inappropriate or dam- number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is aged tools. stamped on the front of the adapter. In case it is lost, another adapter can be or- dered using this number. Note the anti- Note theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it After use, return the jack to its initial posi- in a place other than the vehicle. tion using the handle in order to securely 2 Towline anchorage, removable. store it in the vehicle. 3 Wheel spanner. 4 Jack crank handle. The crank handle Components needs to be folded away before returning Fig. 103 To unfold the foldable wedges. it to the tool kit. 5 Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool kit, The folding chocks are in the tool kit fold its hook. ››› Fig. 102. 6 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for screwing and unscrewing the Assemble the folding chocks wheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is inter- ● Lift the base plate ››› Fig. 103 1 . changeable. The screwdriver may be ● Insert the two “tabs” of the mounting plate found underneath the wheel spanner. into the long openings on the base plate 2 . 7 Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover, integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt Correct use caps. The folding chocks may be used to block the Fig. 102 Components of the vehicle tool kit wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. 86 Self-help

The chocks should be placed directly in front changed when switching from summer to dure. Otherwise, you should seek profes- and behind the wheel and only be used on winter tyres or vice-versa. See ››› page 344 sional assistance. firm ground. The vehicle only comes with the necessary ● Only use suitable tools that are not dam- tools for changing wheels if factory supplied aged when changing a wheel. WARNING with winter tyres. If this is not the case, you ● Always stop the engine, turn on the elec- If the folding chocks are assembled or used need to go to a specialised workshop to get tronic parking brake and place the gear se- incorrectly, an accident may occur and se- the wheels changed. lector lever in position P, for an automatic rious injury caused. gearbox, or engage a gear for a manual You should only change the wheels yourself if ● Never use damaged chocks. gearbox to reduce the risk of the vehicle the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are moving accidentally. ● Never use chocks to immobilize the vehi- familiar with the procedure and safety stand- cle on a slope. ards and you have all the necessary tools! ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel Otherwise, you should seek professional as- bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable torque wrench. sistance.

Changing a wheel* WARNING WARNING If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not Introduction Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially on the hard shoulder. Please ob- fitted correctly, they could cause major serve the following rules to minimise the accidents or damage. Read the additional information carefully risk of injury: ›››  page 48 ● Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- come off while driving and endanger other Not all Alhambra models have the TMS (Tyre ble. Park at a safe distance from surround- road users. Mobility System). ing traffic to change a wheel. ● Damaged trims must never be mounted If a tyre needs to be changed the tools nec- ● When changing a wheel, keep all pas- on the wheels. essary are available at spare parts dealers: sengers, and particularly children, a safe ● Always ensure that the brake ventilation distance away from the work area. and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is ● Jack, ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there ● box spanner for wheel bolts, other road users. is not enough air, you may require significantly longer braking distances. ● tool to remove wheel bolt caps ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. If necessary, support the The tyres mounted on the vehicle are anti- jack on a wide solid base. CAUTION puncture. The wheels should only be ● If you are changing a wheel yourself, you Remove and remount wheel trims taking should be familiar with the required proce- care to avoid damage to the vehicle. 87 Emergencies

Tyre repair ● If you have driven with very low pressure or ● Keep children away from the tyre mobili- a flat tyre. ty system. TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* ● If the expiry date on the bottle of tyre seal- ● Never use a jack even if it is approved for ant has passed. the vehicle. Read the additional information carefully ● To reduce the risk of the vehicle possibly ›››  page 47 WARNING moving on its own, always turn off the engine, set the electronic parking brake and The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Using the tyre mobility system can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at put the selector lever in position P or put in- will reliably seal punctures caused by the the roadside. Please observe the following to gear if the gearbox is a manual. penetration of a foreign body of up to about rules to minimise the risk of injury: 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- WARNING ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- A tyre filled with sealant does not have the Once the sealant is in the tyre, make sure to rounding traffic to fill the tyre. check the pressure after 10 minutes driving. same performance properties as a conven- ● Ensure the ground is flat and firm. tional tyre. If the vehicle has more than one damaged ● All occupants, and especially children, ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h tyre, seek professional assistance. The tyre should always be at a safe distance out- (50 mph). mobility system is designed for filling one tyre. side the work area. ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking Only use the tyre mobility system if the vehi- ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn and fast cornering. other road users. cle is properly parked, you know how to do it ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum and the necessary safety measures, and if ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check you have the right kit! Otherwise, you should are familiar with the necessary procedures. the tyre. seek professional assistance. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. For the sake of the environment The tyre sealant should not be used in the ● Only use the tyre mobility system in the following cases: event of an emergency to get to the near- Once used or expired, dispose of the seal- est workshop. ant according to legal provisions. ● If the wheel is damaged. ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre ● The outside temperature is lower than mobility set as soon as possible. Note -20°C (-4°F). ● The sealant is hazardous for your health ● Sealant bottles can be purchased from ● If the tear or puncture on the tyre is over 4 and if it touches your skin, it must be imme- SEAT dealers. mm wide. diately washed off. ● Observe the usage instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.

88 Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility sys- 5 ON/OFF switch CAUTION 1) tem* 6 Air bleed screw The air compressor should be turned off af- 7 Tyre pressure monitoring1) ter a maximum of 8 minutes since otherwise it will overheat. Before switching it on 8 Tube for inflating tyres again, let it cool for a few minutes. 9 12 volt connector

10 Bottle of sealant 11 Spare insert for valve Check after 10 minutes of driving The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at Screw the inflator tube Fig. 104 8 again the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- ››› and check the tyre pressure on the gauge 7 . sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part Equal to or below 1.3 bar (19 psi/130 kPa): 11 . ● Stop driving! The tyre could not be suffi- WARNING ciently sealed with the tyre mobility system. Fig. 104 Standard display: contents of the an- ● You should obtain professional assistance ti-puncture kit. When inflating the tyre, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot. ››› . The tyre mobility system is located under- ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Equal to or above 1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa): neath the floor covering in the boot. It in- ● Do not place the air compressor or infla- cludes the following components ››› Fig. 104: tor tube onto flammable materials while ● Correct the tyre pressure until the correct they are hot. level is reached ››› page 338. 1 Tyre valve remover ● Before storing the equipment, let it cool. ● Carefully head to the nearest specialised 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument ● If a minimum pressure of 2.0 bar workshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h cluster, within the driver's visual field, to (29 psi / 200 kPa) cannot be reached, the (50 mph). remind that the maximum advisable tyre is badly damaged. In this instance, the speed is “max. 80 km/h” or ● Ask the workshop to change the damaged sealant will not be able to seal the tyre. Do tyre. » “max. 50 mph” not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- 3 Filler tube with cap tance. 4 Air compressor

1) An inflator tube may also be included. 89 Emergencies

WARNING WARNING Tow-starting and towing Driving with a tyre that cannot be sealed is Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- dangerous and may lead to accidents and duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- Introduction serious injury. dent and serious injury. ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- ● Always replace damaged or worn wind- Read the additional information carefully sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower. screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- ›››  page 53 ● Seek specialist assistance. ger clean the windscreen properly. When towing, always respect legal requirements. CAUTION For technical reasons, it is not possible to Changing the windscreen ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers tow a vehicle if the battery is flat. could scratch the glass. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access wiper blades ● If products containing solvents, rough system, towing is only allowed with the igni- sponges or sharp objects are used to clean tion on! Changing the windscreen and rear the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- window wiper blades aged. The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint towed with the engine switched off and the Read the additional information carefully thinner or similar products to clean the win- ignition connected. Depending on the battery ›››  page 58. dows. charge status, the drop in voltage may be so ● In icy conditions, always check that the large, even after just a few minutes, that no The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. may help to leave the vehicle parked with Keyless Access system, the steering wheel If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the wipers in service position could lock ››› . the water as it is wiped across the windscreen ›››  page 57. will be louder. ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the WARNING Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- wiper arms, only leave them in the service A vehicle with a flat battery should never ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass position. be towed. they should be changed if they are dam- ● Before driving, always lower the wiper ● Never remove the key from the ignition aged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . arms. lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock could suddenly lock. The vehicle would not Damaged wiper blades should be replaced be controlled and a serious accident could immediately. These are available from quali- ensue. fied workshops. 90 Self-help

WARNING deactivated. If the vehicle has no power Note the instructions for towing supply or there is an electric system fault, ›››  page 53. When towing the vehicle, the handling and the engine must be started using jump braking efficiency change considerably. leads to deactivate the electronic parking To fit the towline anchorage Please observe the following instructions brake and electronic steering lock. to minimise the risk of serious accidents ● Take the towline anchorage from the vehi- and injury: ● Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking cle tool kit ››› page 85. and ignition system should only be towed ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: ● Press on the upper cover and carefully re- with the ignition connected since, other- move it forwards. Allow the cover to hang. – The brake must be depressed must wise, the electronic steering lock will not harder as the brake servo does not op- unlock. ● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po- erate. Always remain aware to avoid sition anticlockwise as far as it will go collision with the towing vehicle. ››› Fig. 105 ››› . Use a suitable tool to firmly – More strength is required at the steer- Fitting the front towline anchorage tighten the towline anchorage in its location. ing wheel as the power steering does ● After towing, remove the towline anchorage not operate when the engine is switch- by turning it clockwise and put the cover ed off. back in place. ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: – Accelerate gently and carefully. CAUTION – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. The towline anchorage must always be – Brake well in advance than usual and completely and firmly tightened. Other- brake gently. wise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting. CAUTION ● Carefully fit and remove the towline an- Fig. 105 On the right-hand side of the front chorage and its cover to avoid damage to bumper: screw the anchorage. the vehicle (e.g. paintwork). ● When towing, fuel could enter the cata- The location for the removable towline an- lytic converter and cause damage! chorage is on the right-hand side of the front bumper ››› Fig. 105. Note The towline anchorage should always be ● The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- kept in the vehicle. tronic parking brake and steering lock are 91 Emergencies

Fitting the rear towline anchorage ● Press on the upper cover and carefully re- road, there is always a risk of overloading and move it back. This may require some strength. damaging the anchorage points. Allow the cover to hang. If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warn- ● Screw in the towline anchorage into its po- ing lights on and the ignition switched on, the sition anticlockwise as far as it will go ››› . turn signal may be used to indicate changes Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the tow- of direction. Simply operate the turn signal line anchorage in its location. lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazard warn- ● After towing, remove the towline anchorage ing lights will go off. When the turn signal lev- by turning it clockwise and put the cover er is returned to the rest position, the hazard back in place. warning lights will be turned on automatically. CAUTION Fig. 106 On the rear bumper, to the right hand Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle side: Towline anchorage in position ● The towline anchorage must always be completely and firmly tightened. Other- ● Leave the ignition on to avoid locking the The location for the removable towline an- wise, it could be released while towing and steering wheel, to release the electronic tow-starting. chorage is on the right-hand side of the rear parking brake and to activate the turn signals, bumper ››› Fig. 106. For vehicles with a facto- ● Vehicles with a factory fitted towing the horn as well as the window wipers and ry fitted towing bracket, there is no fitting be- bracket, can only be used for towing with a window washers. hind the cover to insert the towline anchor- tow bar, specially designed to fit on a tow ● As the power assisted steering does not age. For towing, fit and use the tow hitch hitch ball. Otherwise, the tow hitch ball and work if the engine is not running, you will need ››› page 301, ››› . the vehicle may be damaged. Otherwise, a more strength to steer than normally. tow rope should be used. Note the instructions for towing ● The brake must be depressed must harder ›››  page 53. as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle. Towing advice Fitting the towline anchorage to the rear ● Note the instructions and information con- for vehicles without factory fitted tow Towing requires some expertise and experi- tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi- hitch ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both cle to be towed. ● Take the towline anchorage from the vehi- drivers should be familiar with the technique cle tool kit in the luggage compartment required for towing. For this reason, inexper- Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ››› page 85. ienced drivers should abstain. ● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sud- While driving, avoid excessive traction forces den manoeuvres. and jerking. When towing on an unpaved 92 Fuses and bulbs

● Brake well in advance than usual and brake ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- Fuses and bulbs gently. peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- ● Note the instructions and information con- cle can be extremely high or extremely low tained in the Instruction Manual for the vehi- resulting in serious injuries and illness or Fuses cle to be towed. even death, particularly for young children. Vehicle fuses WARNING Read the additional information carefully Getting in the way of the doors and the Emergency locking and un- ›››  page 45 panoramic sliding sunroof is dangerous locking and can lead to serious injury. Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse ● Open and close the doors and the panor- assignments based on equipment and the Introduction amic sliding sunroof only when nobody is in use of the same fuse for various electrical the way. components, it is not possible to provide an Read the additional information carefully up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for the electrical components at the time of ›››  page 10, ›››  page 12, CAUTION ›››  page 15 printing this manual. For detailed information When opening and closing in an emergen- about the fuse positions, please consult a The doors, rear lid and panoramic sliding cy, carefully disassemble components and technical service. sunroof can be locked manually and partially then reassemble them carefully to avoid opened, for example if the key or the central damage to the vehicle. In general, a fuse can be assigned to various locking is damaged. electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several WARNING fuses. Opening and closing doors carelessly can Only replace fuses when the cause of the cause serious injury. problem has been solved. If a newly inserted ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the fuse blows after a short time, you must have doors and windows cannot be opened from the electrical system checked by a special- the inside. ised workshop as soon as possible. ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in WARNING the car in an emergency and will not be The high voltages in the electrical system able to get themselves to safety. can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! »

93 Emergencies

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to In some countries, it is a legal requirement to ignition system. avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and carry spare bulbs in the vehicle. ● Take care not to cause short circuits in humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the ve- the electrical system. age to the electrical system. hicle exterior lighting is against the law.

WARNING Note Additional bulb specifications Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than The specifications of some headlamp bulbs bridging a current circuit without fuses can those indicated in this chapter. These and bulbs for the rear lamps fitted at the fac- cause a fire and serious injury. should only be changed by a specialised tory may be different to those of conventional workshop. bulbs. Bulb information is displayed on the ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am- ● One component may have more than one bulb socket or on the bulb itself. perage (same colour and markings) and fuse. size. ● Several components may run on a single WARNING ● Never repair a fuse. fuse. If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is not clearly visible to other drivers, there is ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- a risk of accident. ple or similar. Changing bulbs CAUTION WARNING Failure to replace bulbs correctly may ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- Introduction cause serious accidents. tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of ● Before carrying out any work in the en- trical elements and remove the key from manual skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- gine compartment please read and ob- the ignition. mends that you consult a technical service or serve the warnings ››› page 323. In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazard- ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating request assistance from a specialist. In gen- ous area and could cause severe injury. fuse, you could cause damage to another eral, a specialist is required if other vehicle part of the electrical system. components must be removed or if the dis- ● Discharge lamps work with high-voltage and can cause serious or fatal injury if han- ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- charge bulbs must be replaced. dled incorrectly. vent the entry of dust or humidity as they You should store spare light bulbs in the vehi- ● can damage the electrical system. cle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs H7 and discharge bulbs are highly pressurised and could explode when being ● Always carefully remove the fuse box may be obtained from the technical services. changed. covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. 94 Fuses and bulbs

● Only replace the bulbs concerned when Control lamp Note they have cooled. A fault in the LED on the rear lights will not ● Never replace bulbs alone if you are not  It lights up be indicated. However, if the fault affects familiar with the operations necessary. If all the LEDs then this will be indicated by A vehicle exterior lighting bulb is not working. you are not sure about procedures then vis- the control lamp . Change the faulty lamp. it a specialised workshop to carry out the necessary work. Several warning and control lamps light up ● Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fin- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- gerprints will be evaporated by the heat of ed on, signalling that the function is being the operating bulb thus “fogging” up the verified. They will switch off after a few sec- reflector. onds. ● The headlamp frameworks in the engine compartment and the rear lamps contain Checking the bulbs of a trailer sharp elements. Always protect your hands when changing bulbs. For vehicles with the factory fitted towing bracket, certain trailer lights are also controlled if the power socket is correctly connec- CAUTION ted. ● After changing a bulb, if the rubber cov- A fault on a trailer turn signal is indicated on ers are not replaced correctly on the head- the instrument panel by the turn signal blink- lamp framework, the electrical installation   may be damaged, especially if water is al- ing twice as fast ( or ) ››› page 133. lowed to enter. ● General fault of all turn signals on one side. ● Remove the ignition key before working ● Fault in one rear light (on some models, al- on the electric system. Otherwise, a short so the registration light). circuit could occur. ● ● Switch off the lights and the parking light Fault in two brake lights. before changing a bulb. WARNING ● Take good care to avoid damaging any components. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109.

95 Emergencies

To replace halogen headlight bulbs Turn signals (small bulb holder) Main beam head- Side lights C lights C 1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 323. 1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 323. 2. Rotate the bulb holder 1 to the left all the way and pull it out backwards together with the 2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the bulb. headlight.

3. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed 3. Press the wire clip Pull the bulb holder directly from the bulb holder or it may need to downwards and pull 3 out backwards to- be rotated and then removed. the bulb holder 2 out gether with the bulb. together with the bulb. 4. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. 4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed directly from the bulb holder or it may need to Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: trims of 5. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and ro- be rotated and then removed. the left headlamp. A dipped beam headlights, tate to the right all the way. B daytime driving lights and C main beam 5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical headlights and side lights bulb. Dipped beam A and daytime lights B 6. Place the bulb holder 1. Open the bonnet  page 323. ››› in the headlight and Place the bulb holder 2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the pull the wire clip up- in the headlight and headlight. wards until it clicks in- insert completely. to place. 3. Rotate the bulb holder to the left all the way and pull it out backwards together with the 7. Insert the rubber cover. bulb. Note 4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed directly from the bulb holder or it may need to The images show the left hand headlight be rotated and then removed. from behind. The structure of the right hand side headlight is symmetric. Fig. 108 Left headlight. 5. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb. There is no need to remove the headlight to replace bulbs. 6. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate to the right all the way. Complete operations only in the sequence 7. Insert the rubber cover. given:

96 Fuses and bulbs

To replace the xenon headlight Turn signals 1 Turning lights 2 Replacing the front bumper bulbs bulb 1. Open the bonnet  ››› page 323. Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 109 in the direction of 2. the arrow and remove it.

Rotate the bulb holder Press the wire clip 1 ››› Fig. 110 to the downwards and pull 3. left all the way and the bulb holder 2 pull it out backwards ››› Fig. 110 out togeth- together with the bulb. er with the bulb.

Depending on the model, the bulb is removed 4. directly from the bulb holder or it may need to be rotated and then removed. Fig. 111 On the right side of the front bumper: Fig. 109 In the engine compartment: turning detaching he headlights. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical light cover. 5. bulb.

Place the bulb holder Place the bulb holder in the headlight and in the headlight and 6. pull the wire clip up- rotate to the right all wards until it clicks in- the way. to place.

Rotate the cover ››› Fig. 109 in the opposite di- 7. rection to the arrow as far as it will go.

Always seek the help of a specialist when changing the Xenon dipped beam and main beam headlamps ››› in Introduction on Fig. 110 Turn signal bulb holder 1 and turning page 94. light 2 . Fig. 112 Changing the bulbs in the headlights Note There is no need to remove the headlight to Complete operations only in the sequence replace bulbs. The illustrations show the left hand head- given: » light. The structure of the right hand side Complete operations only in the sequence headlight is symmetric. given:

97 Emergencies

Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of the Replacing the rear lid bulbs Extract the cover carefully using the flat part of 1. arrow ››› Fig. 111. 2. the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit as a lever (››› Fig. 102) on the indent ››› Fig. 113 1 . Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 111 1 2. using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit Release the bulb holder connector by pulling on 3. ››› page 85. the red connector block.

Tilt the headlight slightly forward and extract it Press on the attachment tabs in the direction of 3. from its lateral attachments ››› Fig. 112 (small 4. the arrow ››› Fig. 114 and pull out the bulb hold- arrows). er.

Release the connector ››› Fig. 112 1 and re- Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical 4. 5. move it. bulb.

Rotate the bulb holder ››› Fig. 112 2 to the left Install the bulb holder. The attachment tabs 6. 5. all the way, in the direction of the arrow, and Fig. 113 On the rear lid: remove the cover. should audibly click into place. pull it out backwards together with the bulb. Insert the cover. The cover should lock into 7. Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical place. 6. bulb.

Place the bulb holder in the headlight and ro- 7. tate to the right all the way.

Insert the connector ››› Fig. 112 1 on the bulb 8. holder 2 . The connector must audibly click in- to place.

Place the headlight into its position ›››Fig. 112 9. (small arrows) and tilt it backwards. Fig. 114 On the rear lid: remove the bulb hold- Tighten the attachment screw ››› Fig. 111 1 10. er. using the screwdriver.

11. Replace the cover on the bumper ››› Fig. 111. Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Open the rear lid ››› page 126.

98 Fuses and bulbs

Replacing the rear bulbs in the Rear light, left Rear light, right body Unscrew the attachment screw ››› Fig. 115 2 4. using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit ››› page 85. The bolt is secured in its position.

Extract the rear light from the bodywork by 5. carefully pulling backwards.

Pull the red strip on the connector and extract 6. the connector.

Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a 7. flat, clean surface.

Fig. 116 Tail light on the bodywork: detach the To change the bulb bulb holder. 1 a 4 : lock latches. To release the bulb holder, press on the attach- Complete operations only in the sequence 8. ment tabs ››› Fig. 116 1 to 4 in the direction given. of the arrow. 9. Remove the bulb holder from the rear light unit. Removing the rear light units Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical Complete operations only in the sequence 10. bulb. given: Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit. The Rear light, left Rear light, right 11. attachment tabs should audibly click into place. 1. Open the rear lid ››› page 126. Insert the connector and press the red attach- Open the storage Move the 12 V power 12. ment strip in so that the connector is locked in- Fig. 115 On the side of the boot: removing the compartments on the socket support by to place. left and right hand side rear lights. 1 remove 2. left-hand side of the pressing gently down- the cap; 2 attachment screw luggage compart- wards ››› Fig. 115 B Assembling the rear light units ment ››› page 169. (arrow). Complete operations only in the sequence Rotate the cap 1 90° given: » 3. in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

99 Emergencies

Rear light, left Rear light, right Changing the number plate light Fixed number Bolted number

plate light plate light Carefully insert the tail light unit into the opening in the bodywork. To do this, insert the up- 13. Press the flat part of per rear light unit guide into the attachment the screwdriver inclu- ring. ded in the vehicle on- Unscrew the number board tools plate light screws us- Tighten the white attachment screw using the 14. 1. (››› Fig. 102) in the di- ing the screwdriver screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit. rection of the arrow, in from the vehicle tool the groove of the kit ( Fig. 102). Ensure that the tail light unit has been correct- ››› 15. number plate light ly fitted and is firmly secured. ››› Fig. 117. Replace the cap Move the 12 V power 2. Detach the number plate light. Fig. 115 1 and ro- ››› socket support up- 16. tate it 90° in the op- Fig. 117 In the rear bumper: number plate light. wards gently until it is Turn the connector Separate the attach- posite direction of the correctly closed. lock ››› Fig. 118 in the ment tabs from the arrow. 3. direction of arrow 1 rear panel of the num- and pull on the con- ber plate light by Close the storage 17. nector. pressing. compartment. Rotate the bulb holder 18. Close the rear lid ››› page 126. in the direction of the Take the bulb holder 4. arrow ››› Fig. 118 2 out of the number and extract it together plate light. with the bulb.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical 5. bulb. Fig. 118 Number plate light: Remove the bulb holder. Insert the bulb holder into the number plate Insert the bulb holder light and rotate all the 6. into the number plate Complete operations only in the sequence way in the opposite light. given: direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 118 2 .

100 Fuses and bulbs

Fixed number Bolted number

plate light plate light

Press on the attachment tabs. The bulb Plug the connector in- 7. holder must be firmly to the bulb holder. attached to the number plate light.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the 8. opening on the bumper. Ensure that the number plate light is in the correct position.

Insert the number Tighten the attach- plate light into the ment screws for the 9. bumper until it audibly number plate light us- clicks into place. ing the screwdriver.

101 Operation

Fig. 119 Dash panel.

102 General instrument panel

Operation – Parking lights  12 Infotainment system (factory de- 8 Instrument panel: fault) ...... 188 – Instruments ...... 104 13 Storage compartment ...... 169 General instrument panel 14  – Digital display ...... 104 Hazard warning lights switch . . . . 137 – Control and warning lamps ...... 109 15 Switches for: Instrument panel 9 Steering wheel with horn and – Electronic manual air conditioning ...... 180 1 Door release lever ...... 123 – Driver airbag ...... 18 – Climatronic ...... 180 2 Central locking and opening but- – On-board computer controls . . . . . 28 ton  /  ...... 116 16 Right seat heating controls  ...... 150 – Controls for radio, telephone, 3 Switch for adjusting the exterior mir- navigation and speech dialogue 17 Button for: rors ...... 143 system ...... 110 – Anti-slip regulation (ASR)  . . . . 238 – Exterior mirror adjustment – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- – Start-stop operation  ...... 259 – Exterior mirror heating  shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 249 – Parking distance warning system – Folding exterior mirrors  10 Windscreen wiper/ windscreen (ParkPilot)  ...... 262 wash lever ...... 141 4 Brightness regulation for instrument – Park Assist system  ...... 265   panel and controls  ...... 133 – Windscreen wipers – – Tyre pressure monitor   ...... 298  5 Headlamp range adjustment  . . . . 133 – Intermittent wiper – Dynamic chassis control (DCC) 6 Light switch  ...... 133 – “Touch wipe” x    – Light off – Windscreen wipers  – The rear lid is opened  ...... 126 – Automatic dipped beam head- – Automatic windscreen – Opening and closing of electric light control wash/wipe  sliding doors  ...... 124 – Side/dipped lights  /  – Rear window wiper  18 Locking handle to open glove compartment ...... 169 – Fog lights   – Automatic rear window wash/wipe  19 Position of passenger front airbag 7 Lever for ...... 133 – Lever with buttons for controlling on the dash panel ...... 18 – Main beam headlights  the SEAT information system 20 Key-operated switch in glove com- – Headlight flasher  - , / ...... 28 partment for deactivating front  – Turn signals 11 Left seat heating controls  ...... 150 passenger front airbag ...... 19 »

103 Operation

21 Passenger front airbag off warning 27 Ignition lock ...... 234 – Childproof locks  ...... 123

lamp ...... 75 28 Pedals ...... 247 22 Note Lever for: 29 Steering column adjustment lev- – Manual gearbox ...... 247 er ...... 60 ● Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model ver- – 30 Automatic gearbox ...... 247 Fuse box cover ...... 93 sions or are optional extras. 23 12 volt power socket ...... 177 31 Lever for: ● In versions with the steering wheel on the 24 Auto Hold switch   ...... 259 – Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 273 right, the layout of the control elements is somewhat different. But the symbols as- 25 Electronic parking brake switch 32 Open bonnet lever ...... 323 signed to the controls correspond to the  ...... 238 33 Controls for: symbols used in the versions with the steer- 26 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- – Electric windows  ...... 130 ing wheel on the left cess closing and start-up system)

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 120 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 120: 104 General instrument panel

1 Clock set button1). 4 Displays on the screen ››› page 105. Indications on the display – Press the  button to select the hour or 5 Fuel reserve display ››› page 316. A variety of information can be viewed on the minute display. 6 Speedometer. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 120 4 , de- – To continue setting, press 0.0 / SET 7 Reset knob for trip recorder (trip). pending on the vehicle equipment: ››› Fig. 120 7 . Hold button down to – Press button 0.0 / SET to reset to zero. scroll through the numbers quickly. ● Warning and information text. – Press the  button again to end the WARNING ● Mileage. clock setting. Any distraction may lead to an accident, ● Time. 2 Revolution counter (with the engine run- with the risk of injury. ● Outside temperature. ning, in thousands of revolutions per mi- ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- nute). ● Compass. trols when driving. Together with the gear-change indicator, ● Selector lever positions ››› page 247. the rev counter offers you the possibility ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) CAUTION of using the engine of your vehicle at a ››› page 247. To prevent damage to the engine, the rev suitable speed. The start of the red area ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus for counter needle should only remain in the ››› Fig. 120 indicates the maximum engine different setting options ›››  page 28. speed working at operating temperature. red zone for a short period of time. However, it is advisable to change up a ● Service interval display ››› page 107. gear or move the selector lever to D (or For the sake of the environment ● Second speed display (menu Configura- lift your foot off the accelerator) before tion) ›››  page 28. Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel the needle reaches the red zone ››› . We consumption and noise. ● Start-Stop operation indicator recommend that you avoid high revs and ››› page 107. that you follow the recommendations on ● Indications of the Adaptive Cruise Control the gear-change indicator. Consult the (ACC). ››› page 280 » additional information in ››› page 251. 3 Engine coolant temperature display  ››› page 329.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is also possible to set the time using the settings menu on the instrument panel display ›››  page 32. 105 Operation

Warning and information texts Mileage Selector lever positions The system runs a check on certain compo- The odometer registers the total distance The range of engaged gears of the selector nents and functions when the ignition is travelled by the car. lever is shown on the side of the lever, and on switched on and while the vehicle is moving. the instrument panel display. In positions D The odometer (trip) shows the distance Faults in the operation are displayed on the and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corre- travelled since the last odometer reset. The screen using red and yellow symbols and sponding gear is also displayed. last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- messages on the instrument panel display ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. (››› page 109) and, in some cases, with audi- Recommended gear (manual gearbox) ble warnings. The display may vary accord- Outside temperature display The recommended gear in order to save fuel ing to the type of instrument panel fitted. is displayed on the instrument panel while When the outside temperature is below +4°C you are driving ››› page 247. Priority 1 warning (red symbols) (+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the Second speed display (mph or km/h) Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible temperature. At first this symbol flashes and warnings. then it remains lit until the outside tempera- In addition to the speedometer, the speed  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Control and warning lamps on page 109! ture rises above +6°C (+43°F) ››› . can also be displayed in a different unit of measurement (in miles or in km per hour). To Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If nec- When the vehicle is at a standstill, with the essary, request assistance from specialised person- change the units, in the Settings menu, se- auxiliary heating on (››› page 184), or when nel. lect the option Second speed travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ›››  page 28. ture displayed may be higher than the true Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) outside temperature, as a result of the heat Vehicles without menu display on the instru- Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible produced by the engine. ment panel warnings. The temperatures measured range from A function fault, or fluids which are below the correct ● Switch on the engine. -40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). levels may cause damage to the vehicle ››› in ● Press the  button three times. The odom- Control and warning lamps on page 109! eter display flashes on the instrument panel Check the faulty operation as soon as possible. If Compass necessary, request assistance from specialised per- display. With the ignition on and the navigation sys- sonnel. ● Press button 0.0 / SET once. “mph” tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to or “km/h” is displayed briefly instead of the the vehicle's direction of travel is displayed Informative text odometer. on the instrument panel ››› page 107. ● This activates the second speed display. To Information relating to different vehicle processes. switch it off, repeat the procedure.

106 General instrument panel

This option cannot be deactivated in models ● When several warnings are active at the Adjusting the magnetic zone destined for countries in which the second same time, the symbols are shown succes- ● Switch the ignition on. speed must always be visible. sively for a few seconds and will stay on ● Select the Settings menu followed by the until the fault is rectified. option Compass and Zone. Start-Stop operating display. ● Select the magnetic zone corresponding to Updated information relating to the status is the position of the vehicle ››› Fig. 121. displayed on the instrument panel Compass* ››› page 259. ● Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone (1-15). WARNING Calibrating compass Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109. To calibrate the compass you must be in one of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient WARNING space to be able to trace a circumference with the vehicle. Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges ● Switch the ignition on. may be icy. ● Select the Settings menu followed by the ● At outside temperatures above +4°C Fig. 121 Magnetic zones option Compass and Calibrate. (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal sym- ● Confirm the message Describe a com- bol” is not visible, there may still be patch- The compass does not require calibration in plete circumference to calibrate the es of ice on the road. vehicles for which the navigation system was compass with OK and then trace a complete ● Do not rely on the outside temperature mounted at the factory. The option compass circumference driving at approximately indicator! disappears. 10 km/h (6 mph). The compass in vehicles in which the naviga- When the corresponding cardinal point is dis- Note tion system was not mounted at the factory, played, the calibration is complete. ● Different versions of the instrument panel is permanently and automatically calibrated. are available and therefore the versions If electronic or metal accessories (mobile and instructions on the display may vary. In phone, television) are subsequently mounted the case of displays without warning or in- in the vehicle, the compass should be recali- Service interval display formation texts, faults are indicated exclu- brated manually. sively by the warning lamps. The service indication is shown on the dash panel display ››› Fig. 120 4 . »

107 Operation

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- Inspection reminder ● Press the  button on the instrument panel  gine oil change (Interval Service) and serv- When the Service date is approaching, when several times until the spanner symbol is ices without engine oil change (Inspection the ignition is switched on a Service remind- displayed. Service). The service interval display only er is displayed. ● OR: select the Settings menu. gives information for service dates which in- ● From the Service submenu, select the op- volve an engine oil change. The dates for the In vehicles without text messages, a spanner tion Info. other services (e.g. the next Inspection Serv- symbol  is displayed on the instrument panel and a figure given in km. The number of ice or change of brake fluid) are listed on the When the service date has past, a minus kilometres shown is the maximum number label attached to the door strut, or in the sign is displayed in front of the number of kilo- that may be driven until the next service. After Maintenance Programme. metres or days. In vehicles with text messag- a few seconds, the display mode changes. A es the following is displayed: Service --- In vehicles with Services established by clock symbol appears and the number of km (miles) or --- days ago. time or mileage, the service intervals are al- days until the next service appointment is ready pre-defined. due. Resetting service interval display In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- In vehicles with text messages, Service in If the service was not carried out by a techni- vals are determined individually. Technical --- km (miles) or --- days is displayed cal service centre, the display can be reset as progress has made it possible to considera- on the instrument panel. bly reduce servicing requirements. The tech- follows: nology used by SEAT ensures that your vehi- Service due cle only has an Interval Service when it is In vehicles with text messages: necessary. To determine the Maintenance After the service date, an audible warning is Select the Settings menu. Service (max. 2 years), the vehicle's condi- given when the ignition is switched on and the tions of use and individual driving styles are spanner displayed on the screen  flashes In the submenu Service, select the option Reset. considered. The service pre-warning first ap- for a few seconds. In vehicles with text messages, Service in --- km or --- days is Confirm with OK when requested to do so by the pears 20 days before the date established system. for the corresponding service. The kilometres displayed on the instrument panel. (miles) remaining until the next service are al- In vehicles without text messages: ways rounded up to the nearest 100 km Check a service warning (miles) and the time is given in complete With the ignition switched on, the engine off Switch the ignition off. days. The current service message cannot be and the vehicle at a standstill, the current Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button. viewed until 500 km after the last service. Pri- service notification can be read: or to this only lines are visible on the display. Switch the ignition back on.

108 General instrument panel

In vehicles without text messages: Control lamps ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Release the 0.0 / SET button and press  for the next 20 seconds. Control and warning lamps ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no highly flammable Do not reset the indicator to zero between Read the additional information carefully materials under the vehicle that could two intervals, otherwise the display will be in- ›››  page 34 come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel). correct. The control and warning lamps are indicators ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- of warnings, , faults or certain func- If you reset the display manually, the next ››› ››› dent for the driver and for other road users. service interval will be indicated as in vehicles tions. Some control and warning lamps come If necessary, switch on the hazard warning with fixed service intervals. For this reason we on when the ignition is switched on, and lamps and put out the warning triangle to recommend that the service interval display switch off when the engine starts running, or advise other drivers. while driving. be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer. ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the Depending on the model, additional text engine and allow it to cool. Note messages may be viewed on the instrument ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ● The service message disappears after a panel display. These may be purely informa- a hazardous area and could cause severe few seconds, when the engine is started or tive or they may be advising of the need for injuries ››› page 323. when OK is pressed. action ››› page 104, Instruments. ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in Depending upon the equipment fitted in the CAUTION which the battery has been disconnected vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- for a long period of time, it is not possible to Failure to heed the control lamps and text times a symbol may be displayed on the in- calculate the date of the next service. messages when they appear may result in strument panel. Therefore the service interval display may faults in the vehicle. not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the When certain control and warning lamps are maximum service intervals permitted lit, an audible warning is also heard. ››› page 349. WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

109 Operation

Communications and multimedia

Multi-function steering wheel*

Operating the audio system + telephone

Fig. 122 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction functions without needing to distract the driv- ● control of the available audio functions (ra- module from where it is possible to control er. dio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and the audio, telephone and radio/navigation the Bluetooth system from the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down A Press: Mute Press: Pause Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 110 Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Short press: pick up/hang up active call/open telephone Short press: access to the tel- Short press: access to the tel- Short press: access to the tel- Short press: access to the tel- menu. ephone menu on the dash ephone menu on the dash ephone menu on the dash ephone menu on the dash B Hold down: reject incoming panela). panela). panela). panela). call/switch to private mode Hold down: repeat calla) Hold down: repeat calla) Hold down: repeat calla) Hold down: repeat calla) or return to hands-free mode/repeat call

Short press: previous/next Search for the previous/next track Radio/media functionality C , D No function No functionb) station Hold down: fast forward/re- (except AUX ) wind

Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument E , F panel panel panel panel panel

Enable/disable voice con- Enable/disable voice con- Enable/disable voice con- G No functionb) Enable/disable voice control trola) trola) trola)

Turn: Acts upon the instrument Turn: Acts upon the instru- Turn: Acts upon the instru- Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) panel menu depending on ment panel menu depending ment panel menu depending Press: Acts on the MFD or Press: Acts on the MFD or con- position on position on position H confirms the menu option of firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or Press: Acts on the MFD or the dash panel depending on dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the confirms the menu option of confirms the menu option of the menu option menu option dash panel depending on the the dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on menu option the menu option the menu option a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX). c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

111 Operation

Multimedia Convenience phone system Three button unit in headliner USB/AUX-IN input Three button unit*

Fig. 124 Centre front armrest: phone holder for connecting the mobile phone to the car's external aerial. Fig. 123 Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN input. Depending on the equipment and country, Fig. 125 Three-key roof module: telephone the vehicle may have the Convenience management system controls. Depending on the features and the country, phone system connected to the vehicle’s ex- the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN connec- terior aerial ››› page 227. Short press: to accept or end a call. tion. Hold down: to reject a call. This system is located in the front centre arm- The USB/AUX-IN input is in the front centre  rest compartment. Short press: to start or stop the voice control armrest ››› Fig. 123. function, for example, to make a call.a)

The operating description is located in Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain infor- ››› page 199. mation about the SEAT brand and selected  additional services related to traffic and travel.

Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain help  from the network of SEAT dealers in the event of a breakdown.

a) Not operational if a navigation system with voice control is fitted.

112 Communications and multimedia

Information and assistance calls Note Ending voice control ● Calls made with the  and  buttons take ● Press the  button on the multi-function Communication with the SEAT Customer priority over normal calls. If the  or  but- steering wheel. Care Service is established using the  and  ton is pressed during a normal telephone ● OR: on the three-button unit, press . buttons of the three-button unit1). The system call, this call will be cut off and an informa- will automatically connect you with the Assis- tion call or assistance call will be made. tance Centre of the relevant country. You will Interrupting the instructions ● If the assistance call button  is pressed only be able to make calls if your mobile is ● During the instructions, press the  button during an information call, the information turned on and connected to the pre-installed on the multi-function steering wheel. call will be interrupted to make the assis- Bluetooth. tance call (and vice versa). ● OR: on the three-button unit, press . ● Mobile phone coverage must be availa- ● You will be able to give a command imme- Information call ble to place a call to the information and diately afterwards. The Information call button offers infor- assistance services. This service might not mation on the SEAT brand and selected addi- be available in some countries. tional services related to traffic and your travel. To establish communication, press the  but- Activating and deactivating ton for more than 2 seconds. Switching on the speech control system In countries where there is no information telephone number, an information call is made ● Press the  button on the multi-function by pressing the  button. steering wheel. ● OR: on the three-button unit, press . Assistance call ● Wait for the acoustic signal. The assistance call button gives imme- ● Give the command. diate help in case of a breakdown. To this ● Follow the dialogue instructions (extended end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile dialogue). assistance vehicles, is at your disposal. To establish communication, press the  button for more than 2 seconds.

1) Depending upon country. 113 Operation

Opening and closing Vehicle keys crochip has not been encoded. This is also With the vehicle key ››› Fig. 126 or ››› Fig. 127 true for keys cut for the vehicle. the vehicle may be locked or unlocked re- The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be Vehicle key set motely. obtained from a technical service centre, a specialised workshop or approved key serv- Vehicle key The vehicle key includes an emitter and batteries. The receiver is in the interior of the ve- ice qualified to provide this kind of key. hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re- New keys or spare keys must be synchronised mote control and new batteries is several me- before use ››› page 116. tres around the vehicle. If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle WARNING using the remote control key, this should be Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys re-synchronised ››› page 116 or the battery may result in severe injury and accident. changed ››› page 115. ● Always take all the keys with you when- Different keys belonging to the vehicle may ever you leave the vehicle. Children and unauthorised individuals could lock the be used. doors or the boot hatch, start the engine or Fig. 126 Vehicle keys turn on the ignition, activating electrical Folding the key shaft in and out systems, the electric windows, for example. When the A button is pressed, the key shaft ● Never leave children or disabled people is released and unfolds. alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be To fold it press button A and fold the key shaft in until it locks in place. able to get themselves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed Spare key vehicle can be extremely high or extremely To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, low resulting in serious injuries and illness the vehicle chassis number is required. or even death, particularly for young children. Each new key must contain a microchip and ● be coded with the data from the vehicle elec- Never remove the key from the ignition if Fig. 127 Vehicle key for vehicles with electric the vehicle is in motion. The steering may sliding doors tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work lock and it will not be possible to turn the if it does not contain a microchip or the mi- steering wheel.

114 Opening and closing

CAUTION Control lamp on the vehicle key Replacing the battery All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note ● Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action. Fig. 129 Vehicle key: battery compartment Fig. 128 Control lamp on the vehicle key ● Key operation can be greatly influenced cover. by overlapping radio signals around the ve- When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, hicle working in the same range of frequen- the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 128 (arrow) cies (e.g. radio transmitters, mobile tele- once briefly. If the button is pressed and held, phones). the indicator blinks several times (e.g. for the ● Obstacles between the remote control convenience opening function). and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and draining batteries can considerably re- When the control lamp does not light upon duce the range of the remote control. pushing a button, the batteries of the key must be changed ››› page 115.

Fig. 130 Vehicle key: remove the battery.

SEAT recommend having the batteries changed in a specialised workshop. The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover ››› Fig. 129. »

115 Operation

When changing the battery, use another bat- ● The vehicle key battery may contain per- Central locking and locking tery of the same model and observe the po- chlorate. Observe the legal requirements larity when fitting it ››› . for their disposal. system

To change the battery Introduction ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 114. Synchronising the vehicle key Read the additional information carefully ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- ›››  page 10 hicle key ››› Fig. 129 in the direction of the ar- If the  button is pressed frequently outside row ››› . of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- Central locking functions correctly when all hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If ● Extract the battery from the compartment ing the key. In this case, the vehicle key must the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 130. be synchronised once more as follows: locked with the key. ● Place the new battery in the compartment, pressing in the direction of the arrow as ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 114. If the vehicle has the Keyless Access closing and ignition system, it may only be locked shown ››› Fig. 130 ››› . ● Remove the cover from the driver door han- with the ignition off and the driver's door ● Fit the battery compartment cover, press- dle ››› page 93. closed. ing in the direction of the arrow as shown ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For ››› Fig. 129 until it clicks into place. this, it must remain with the vehicle. The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may ● Open the vehicle within one minute using CAUTION run down and fail to start the motor. the key shaft. ● If the battery is not changed correctly, ● Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key. WARNING the vehicle key may be damaged. The key has been synchronised. ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage The incorrect use of the central locking ● Replace the driver door handle cover. the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- system may cause serious injuries. place the dead battery with another of the ● The central locking system will lock all same voltage, size and specifications. doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from For the sake of the environment opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or ● Please dispose of your used batteries accident, locked doors will complicate ac- correctly and with respect for the environ- cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas- ment. sengers.

116 Opening and closing

● Never leave children or disabled people workshop, special functions of the central Function Action alone in the vehicle. The central locking locking system can be switched on or off button can be used to lock all the doors ›››  page 28. Lock the vehi- – Switch off the ignition. from within. Therefore, passengers will be cle by pushing – Open a door of the vehicle and In case of a vehicle key fault or central lock- the central close it again. locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked ing system fault, all doors can be locked or locking but- – Push the central locking button in the vehicle can be exposed to very high unlocked manually. ton: . or very low temperatures. ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- Lock the vehi- – Switch off the ignition. Automatic locking (Auto Lock) cle with the OR: Remove the key from the igni- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- In this instance, the vehicle locks automati- vehicle key: tion. cle can be extremely high or extremely low – Open a door once. cally when moving at speeds above approx. resulting in serious injuries and illness or – Lock the vehicle with the key. even death, particularly for young children. 15 km/h (10 mph) ›››  page 28. When the vehicle is locked, the  control lamp on the ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed Note and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, central locking button lights up in yellow they may not be able to exit the vehicle by ››› Fig. 132. If the vehicle key buttons are pressed themselves or get help. ››› Fig. 131 or one of the central locking but- Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock) tons is pressed ››› Fig. 132 several times in quick succession, the central locking fea- When the key is removed from the ignition ture is disabled briefly to protect from over- Description of the central locking slot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors and loading. The vehicle will then remain un- system the boot automatically ›››  page 28. locked for around 30 seconds. If no door nor the boot is opened during this time, the The central locking system allows all doors Locking the vehicle after the airbags have vehicle will then automatically unlock. and the rear lid to be locked and unlocked been deployed centrally. If the airbags are deployed due to an accident, the vehicle will be automatically and ● From outside, using the vehicle key. completely unlocked. Depending on the ● From outside with the Keyless Access sys- amount of damage, it can be locked follow- tem ››› page 119, ing an accident in the following ways: ● From inside, by pushing the central locking button ››› page 118.

In the submenu Convenience in the Config- uration menu, or by visiting a specialised

117 Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehicle Warning: depending on the central locking Unlocking and locking the vehicle from outside function selected in the Convenience sub- from inside menu, you may have to push the  button twice ›››  page 28 to unlock all doors and the rear lid. The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if the batteries have enough power. When locking, the vehicle's turn signals will blink. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehicle without opening any doors or the rear lid, it will lock again automatically after a few seconds. This function prevents the vehicle Fig. 132 On the driver's door: central locking button. from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. Push the button ››› Fig. 132: Convenience open/close function Unlocking the vehicle. Fig. 131 Buttons on the vehicle key  ● See ››› page 130, Controls for the windows: functions.  Locking the vehicle. Function Handling the buttons on the vehicle ● See ››› page 132, Sliding sunroof: opera- The central locking button is still operative tion. when the ignition is switched off. Unlocking the vehicle. Press button . Keep it pushed for the convenience The central locking button is only deactiva- opening. ted if the “Safe” security system is activated page 238. Lock the vehicle. Press button . Keep it ››› pushed for the convenience Please note the following when you use the locking function. central locking button to lock your vehicle: Unlocking the rear lid. Press button . ● Do not turn on the “Safe” security system Open the sliding door. ››› page 124. ››› page 238. ● Do not turn on the anti-theft alarm.

118 Opening and closing

● It will not be possible to open the doors or ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with the rear lid from the outside. This may offer the handles on the four doors or the button extra safety, for example when stopped at located on the boot hatch. traffic lights. ● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For ● The doors can be opened and unlocked in- this to occur, there has to be a valid key inside dividually from the inside by pulling the door the vehicle and the ignition push button handle. If necessary, pull the door release needs to be pressed ››› page 234. lever twice. ● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with ● The driver door cannot be locked when one of the four door handle. open. This avoids locking the vehicle key inside the vehicle when there is nobody inside. Fig. 134 Locking and ignition system without The central locking and locking systems op- Keyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock- erate in the same way as a normal locking ing inside the door handle and sensor surface and unlocking system. Only the controls B for locking on the exterior of the handle. change. Locking and unlocking the vehicle with Keyless Access Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle double flash of the indicator lights; locking by without actively using its key. For this, only a a single flash. valid vehicle key is required to be in an area The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- near ››› Fig. 133 the vehicle and one of the onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open sensor surfaces to be touched on the door any door or boot hatch. handles ››› Fig. 134. Unlocking and opening the doors (Key- General information less-Entry) If a valid key is located in the proximity of the ● Grip the door handle. In doing this, the sen- car Fig. 133, the Keyless Access lock and ››› sor surface ››› Fig. 134 A (arrow) is touched ignition system gives the key entry as soon as on the handle and the vehicle unlocks. Fig. 133 Keyless Access locking and ignition one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- ● system: nearby areas. dles is touched or the push button on the Open the door. boot hatch is operated. The following features are then available without having to use In vehicles without safety system “Safe”: the vehicle key actively: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- it) ● Switch the ignition off. » 119 Operation

● Close the driver's door. vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if Keyless Access temporary disconnection ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) no door or boot hatch are opened. function* on the door handle. The door being operated You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- must be closed. Locking the vehicle with a second key cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and cycle. In vehicles with safety system “Safe”: it is locked from the outside with a second ve- ● closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- it) for engine ignition ››› page 234. In order to hicle has automatic gearbox), since otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked. ● Switch the ignition off. enable engine ignition, press the  button on the key inside the vehicle ››› Fig. 131. ● Close the door. ● Close the driver's door. ● Push the central locking button  on the re- ● Touch the surface sensor B once (arrow) Automatically disabling sensors mote control and touch the locking sensor on the door handle. The vehicle locks with the If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a surface of the driver door handle “Safe” security system ››› page 238. The long period of time, the proximity sensor on ››› Fig. 134 B within the following 5 seconds. door being operated must be closed. the passenger door is automatically disa- Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the ● Touch the sensor surface B twice (arrow) bled. vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also on the door handle to lock the vehicle without possible if the vehicle is locked through the the “Safe” security system ››› page 238. If the exterior sensor on the door handle is of- driver’s door lock. ten activated unusually with the vehicle ● To check that the function has been deacti- Unlocking and locking the boot hatch locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rub- bing against it), all proximity sensors are disa- vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto- bled for a time. If this only happens with the on the door handle. The door should not matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 133 exterior sensor on the driver's door, only this open. there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. sensor is disabled. The next time the door can only be unlocked Open or close the hatch normally Sensors will again be enabled: via the remote control or the lock cylinder. ››› page 126. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, ● After a time. After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Keyless Access will be active again. In the following instances, the rear lid does ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- not lock automatically after closing: ton  on the key. Convenience functions ● OR: if the boot is opened. To close all electric windows, the sun roof ● If the entire vehicle is unlocked. and electric tilting panoramic roof with the ● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All convenience feature, keep your finger for a vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The few seconds on the lock sensor surface B 120 Opening and closing located on the exterior part of the driver or will display on the dash panel screen. This Function Necessary operations passenger door handle until the windows and could happen if any other radio frequency roof close. signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. Press the  button twice on the vehicle key. Opening the doors by touching the sensor from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an surface on the handle takes places in ac- Touch the Keyless Access aluminium case). cordance with the settings activated on the Lock the vehicle with- close and ignition lock sen- out activating the sor surface located on the menu Configuration - Convenience ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, how the sensors on the door “Safe” security sys- exterior part of the door ›››  page 28. tem. handle twice page 119. handles operate may be affected. If this is ››› CAUTION the case, wash the vehicle ››› page 352. Press the central locking ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- button  on the driver door The sensor surfaces on the door handles matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the once. could engage if hit with a water jet or high gear stick is in position P. pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle Depending on the vehicle, when switching the ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the key in the nearby area. If at least one of the ignition off, a warning may be displayed on remote control of the system is equipped windows is open and the sensor surface B the dash panel screen stating that the “Safe” with a position sensor. If this remote control on one of the handle permanently acti- security system is activated (SAFE Lock or vates, all windows will close. If the water jet does not detect movement for a certain SAFELOCK). or steam is briefly moved away from the length of time, the system will conclude sensor surface A on one of the handles that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on Disabling the “Safe” security system and then pointed at it again, all the win- a night table) so it will be disabled. dows will probably open ››› page 120, Con- The “Safe” security system may be disabled venience functions. in any of the following ways: Safe security system “Safe” ● Press the  button on the vehicle key twice. Note ● Touch the Keyless Access close and ignition Function Necessary operations ● If the vehicle battery has little or no lock sensor surface located on the exterior charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost Lock the vehicle and part of the door handle twice ››› page 119. or entirely out of charge, you will probably Press the  button once on activate the “Safe” the vehicle key. ● Switch the ignition on. not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle security system. with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- ● Press the ignition push button of the Keyless cle can be unlocked or locked manually Access lock and ignition system. » ››› page 93. ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning

121 Operation

When the “safe” security system is disa- When does the system trigger an alarm? key. On vehicles with the Keyless Access sys- bled, the following needs to be taken into The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for tem, the alarm can also be disabled by account: about 30 seconds accompanied by optical grasping the door handle ››› page 119. ● The vehicle can be opened and unlocked warning signals for about five minutes when from the inside using an inside door handle. the vehicle is locked and the following unau- Note ● The anti-theft alarm is activated. thorised actions are taken: ● The alarm will be triggered once more when anybody enters the same zone of sur- ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and ● When the door is mechanically unlocked veillance or any other zone. If, for example, the anti-tow system are disabled. using the vehicle key without turning the igni- after opening a door, the rear lid is also tion within the following 15 seconds. opened. WARNING ● A door is opened. ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated Careless use of the “Safe” security system ● The bonnet is opened. when the vehicle is locked from within using can cause serious injury. the central locking button . ● The rear lid is opened. ● Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- it has been locked using the key. When the ● When the ignition is switched on with a non- ly with the key, only the driver door is un- “Safe” security system is activated, the authorised key. locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. doors cannot be opened from the inside! ● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not ● When the doors are locked, it is difficult ● When there is movement inside the vehicle unlocked - and the central locking button to get to passengers in the vehicle interior (vehicles with interior monitoring). in case of an emergency. Passengers could will be activated. remain trapped inside and unable to unlock ● When the vehicle is towed (vehicles with ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat the doors in case of an emergency. anti-tow system) then the anti-theft alarm will not operate ● When the vehicle is lifted (vehicles with an- correctly. ti-tow system). Anti-theft alarm ● Transporting the vehicle on a ferry or by railroad (vehicles with an anti-tow system or The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to interior monitoring). break into the vehicle or steal it. ● Unhitch a trailer connected to the anti-theft The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned alarm ››› page 301. on when the vehicle is locked with the key. How to turn OFF the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid 122 Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring system Switching off the interior monitoring and ● If the sunglasses storage compartment in and anti-tow system* the anti-tow systems the roof console is open. The vehicle interior monitoring is switched off ● When the panoramic sliding sunroof is by pressing the remote control lock button  completely or partially open. twice. ● When suspended objects are hung from the interior mirror (air freshener) or there are ● Lock all doors and rear lid. loose papers in the vehicle. ● Use the key to lock the vehicle. The interior ● If the separation net is fitted and moves monitoring and / or anti-towing alarm are (due to heating). switched off until the next time the vehicle is locked. ● Due to a vibrating mobile telephone inside the vehicle. To turn off the interior monitoring and anti- tow systems before unlocking the vehicle, for Note Fig. 135 On the roof console: interior monitor- example in the following situations: ing sensors. Upon activating the alarm, if any door or ● When leaving animals inside the vehicle  the rear lid is open, only the anti-theft The interior monitoring system triggers the ››› page 116. alarm will be activated. The interior moni- alarm if the vehicle is locked and movement is toring and anti-tow systems will only be ● detected inside the vehicle. The anti-tow sys- When the vehicle must be loaded. activated when the doors and rear lid are tem triggers the alarm if the vehicle is locked ● When the vehicle is being transported, for fully closed. when the system detects the vehicle is being example, by ferry. raised. ● When the vehicle must be towed with the axle raised. Switching on the interior monitoring and Doors the anti-tow systems Risk of false alarms Introduction Close the storage compartment ››› Fig. 135 The interior monitoring system will only oper- 1 on the roof console, otherwise the interior ate correctly if the vehicle is completely WARNING monitoring function (arrow) is not guaranteed closed. Observe legal requirements. The to work freely. alarm may be accidentally triggered in the If a door is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause Use the key to lock the vehicle. If the anti- following cases: serious injuries. theft alarm is turned on, the interior monitor- ● When a window is completely or partially ing and the anti-tow systems are also activa- ● Always stop immediately and close the open. ted. door. » 123 Operation

● When closing, ensure that the door has Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym- WARNING closed correctly. A closed door should be bol may be displayed on the dash panel Opening sliding doors while driving is dan- flush with the corresponding parts of the screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi- gerous. These doors may be pushed open bodywork. cation is also visible when the ignition is or closed when the vehicle accelerates or switched off. The indication disappears ● Open and close doors only when nobody brakes and cause serious injuries. is in the way of the door. around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been locked. ● Never open the sliding doors when the vehicle is in movement. WARNING A door held open by its retainer could be blown closed by the wind or close if the ve- Sliding doors Manually opening and closing the hicle is on a hill, causing injury. sliding door ● When opening and closing doors, always Introduction use the door handle. WARNING If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it Warning lamp could open unexpectedly when driving and cause serious injuries.  It lights up ● Stop immediately and close it. ● When closing, ensure that the sliding At least one vehicle door is open or not correctly shut.  door has closed correctly. A closed sliding Do not continue driving! Open the corresponding door should be flush with the correspond- door and close it immediately. ing parts of the bodywork. ● Only open and close sliding doors when Several warning and control lamps light up no body is in the way of the door. Fig. 136 On the sliding door: door handle 1 . for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being WARNING verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Function Necessary operations If a sliding door is not fully open, it could onds. Open the slid- When the sliding door is released, close unexpectedly and cause serious inju- If a door is open or not properly closed, the ing door from open the door fully by pulling on ries. the inside. the outside handle. warning lamp  or  will light up on the in- ● Always open the sliding door fully. strument panel.

124 Opening and closing

Function Necessary operations Function Necessary operations Rollback anti-trap function of the electric sliding doors Opening the When the sliding door is released, Press the ››› Fig. 137 button on the sliding door open the door fully by pulling on dash panel, on the remote control The rollback anti-trap function of the electric from the inside. its interior handle ››› Fig. 136 1 . key and on the interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding door opens sliding doors can reduce the risk of injury Pull on the inside or outside door Opens the with the rollback anti-trap function when opening and closing the sliding doors Closing the handle and close the sliding door, sliding door as long as the button is not pressed ››› . sliding door. pushing it gently. Make sure that it electrically. again. is completely closed. If an object gets in the way of the sliding door Pull briefly on the interior or exterior while it is closing, it will open again. door handle. The sliding door opens automatically. If an object gets in the way of the sliding door Electric opening and closing of the while it is opening, the door will be immobi- Press the Fig. 137 button on the ››› lised at this point. sliding door* dash panel, on the remote control key and on the interior lining of the ● Check the reason for which the sliding door sliding door. The sliding door closes with the rollback anti-trap function does not open or close. Closing the as long as the button is not pressed ● Try to open or close the sliding door again. sliding door again. As it closes, a warning sound is given. electrically. To close the sliding door without the roll- Pull briefly on the interior or exterior back anti-trap function door handle. The sliding door ● closes with the roll-back function. Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. As it closes, a warning sound is giv- ● Press and hold the  button ››› Fig. 137. en. The sliding door closes with full force.

Fig. 137 On the dash panel, on the remote Note WARNING control key and on the interior lining of the sliding door: button to open and close a sliding ● When the fuel tank flap is open, the right- Closing the electric windows without the door. hand side electric sliding door is locked anti-trap function can cause serious injury. and can only be opened manually. ● Always close the sliding doors carefully. All of the electric sliding doors can be ● If the window of a sliding door is lowered ● Nobody should ever get in the way of the opened and closed manually using more them this door cannot open fully. electric sliding doors, especially when force. closing without the anti-trap function. »

125 Operation

● The anti-trap function does not prevent Turning on and off the electric child safety Rear lid fingers or other parts of the body getting Function Necessary operations pinched against the window frame and Introduction causing injury. Activate: Press the button ››› Fig. 138 1 or 2 . Read the additional information carefully Deactivate: Press the button again. ›››  page 12 Electric child safety lock The yellow control lamp  indicates that the WARNING feature is on for the corresponding button. Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- WARNING dents and serious injury. When the electric child safety function is ● Open and close the rear lid only when activated, the sliding door can be opened nobody is in the way. from the outside only. ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it ● Never leave children or disabled people down with your hand on the rear window. alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be This could break and cause injury. locked. Therefore, passengers will be ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing, locked inside the vehicle. They could be otherwise, it may open unexpectedly while Fig. 138 On the driver door: electronic child- trapped in the car in an emergency and will driving. A closed rear lid should be flush proof lock. not be able to get themselves to safety. In- with the corresponding parts of the body- dividuals locked in the vehicle can be ex- work. The electric child safety lock avoids opening posed to very high or very low tempera- and locking of the sliding door and its electric tures. ● Always keep the rear lid closed while driving to avoid toxic gases entering the ve- windows from the inside so that children can- ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- hicle interior. not accidentally open the door while the ve- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- hicle is being driven. Using the left-hand cle can be extremely high or extremely low ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a ››› Fig. 138 1 or right-hand side 2 button, resulting in serious injuries and illness or load carrier installed. Likewise, the boot the childproof lock is activated on the left- or even death, particularly for young children. hatch cannot be opened when a load is at- right-hand side respectively. tached to it, for example bicycles. An open rear lid could close itself if there is an additional weight on it. If necessary, press down on the rear lid and remove the load. ● Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other doors when you are not using the 126 Opening and closing vehicle. Ensure that nobody remains inside Warning lamp Note the vehicle. At outside temperatures of less than 0°C ● Never allow children to play inside or  It lights up (+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot around the vehicle without supervision, es- always automatically lift the rear lid. In this The rear lid is open or not correctly shut.  pecially if the rear lid is open. Children case, open the rear lid manually. Do not continue driving! Open the rear lid and could enter the luggage compartment, close it again. close the rear lid and become trapped. De- pending on the time of the year, tempera- Several warning and control lamps light up tures inside a locked and closed vehicle Closing the rear lid for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- can be extremely high or extremely low re- ed on, signalling that the function is being sulting in serious injuries and illness or even verified. They will switch off after a few sec- death, particularly for young children. onds. ● Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. If the vehicle key or the The  warning lamp appears on the dash central locking button is used, they may be panel if the rear lid is open or not properly locked in the vehicle. closed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym- WARNING bol may be displayed on the dash panel Unsuitable or careless unlocking and open- screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi- ing of the rear lid could cause serious inju- cation is also visible when the ignition is Fig. 139 Rear lid open: space for pulling. ries. switched off. The indication disappears around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been ● If there is a loaded luggage carrier on the Closing the rear lid rear lid, it could be unlocked or open but locked. ● Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid not recognised as such. An unlocked or open rear lid could open unexpectedly WARNING ››› Fig. 139 (arrow). while driving. If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it ● Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in- could open unexpectedly when driving and to place in the lock. CAUTION cause serious injuries. ● Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling ● Always stop immediately and close the on it firmly. Before opening the rear lid, ensure that rear lid. there is sufficient free space to open and close it, for example if you are towing a ● Ensure that the rear lid has been locked Locking the rear lid trailer or in a garage. into place by the element on the lock carri- If you unlock the vehicle without opening any er when you close it. doors or the rear lid, it will lock again » 127 Operation

automatically after 30 seconds. This function Note Opening the rear lid prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked ● Press and hold the  button on the vehicle if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage key until the rear lid opens automatically. Locking is only possible when the rear lid is compartment. ● OR: press and hold the  button on the correctly and fully closed. centre console for approximately one second ›››  Fig. 8. ● The rear lid is also locked by a central locking. Opening the rear lid electronically ● OR: press the ››› Fig. 141 boot hatch button (arrow). ● If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked using the  button of the vehicle key, when it In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic is closed again it will lock automatically. opening of the rear lid is interrupted. ● A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au- Electronically opening the rear lid does not tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h work when a trailer is electrically connected (7 mph). and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch ››› page 301. WARNING The rear lid can be opened manually by ap- Unsuitable or careless closing and locking plying more force. of the rear lid could cause serious injuries. ● Fig. 140 Button with rear lid open Never leave the vehicle unattended, or Closing the rear lid allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without supervision, especially if ● Press and hold the  button on the vehicle the rear lid is open. Children could enter key for approximately 1 second. the luggage compartment, close the rear ● OR: press and hold the  button on the lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle centre console for approximately one second can be subjected to extremely high and low ›››  Fig. 8. temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness ● OR: press the ››› Fig. 141 boot hatch button and even death. (arrow). ● OR: press the  button on the open rear lid ››› Fig. 140 ››› .

Fig. 141 Opening the boot hatch from the out- ● OR: manually push the rear lid down to side close it.

128 Opening and closing

The rear lid will move down to the closed po- To fully open the boot hatch again, the open- CAUTION sition to close and lock itself automatically ing angle must be memorised once more. using the power-close feature ››› . ● When using a trailer, ensure that there is ● Release the rear lid and open it to the sufficient space to open and close the rear In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic memorised height. lid. closing of the rear lid is interrupted and it will ● Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this, ● Before opening the rear lid, any kind of open slightly. apply a little more force. equipment carrier should be removed, for example a bicycle carrier. Check why the rear lid could not close. ● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 140 with the Attempt to close it once more. rear lid open for at least three seconds. CAUTION ● The opening angle is reset to the original Interrupting the opening and closing proc- factory setting. In case of repeated short-term use, the sys- ess tem is turned off to avoid overheating. Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped WARNING ● When it has cooled, it may be used once again. During this time, the rear lid may be by pressing one of the  buttons. Each time Unsuitable or careless closing and locking manually opened or closed applying a lit- one of the  buttons is pressed, the rear lid of the rear lid could cause serious injuries. tle more effort. moves to its initial position. ● Never leave the vehicle unattended, or ● If the vehicle battery is disconnected or allow children to play inside or around the Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To the fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the vehicle without supervision, especially if do this, apply a little more force. rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do the rear lid is open. Children could enter this, close the rear lid. the luggage compartment, close the rear Memorising the opening angle lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle The rear lid must be at least half open to can be subjected to extremely high and low Note memorise an opening angle. temperatures, depending on the time of Before closing the rear lid, make sure that year, resulting in serious injuries/illness or the key has not been left inside the luggage ● Stop automatic opening in the opening po- even death. sition required ››› page 129. compartment. ● Hold down the button ››› Fig. 140 with the WARNING rear lid open for at least three seconds. The opening angle is memorised. It is possible that the rear lid does not open completely or, if it is open, closes alone if a Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the large amount of snow has built up on it or if hazard warning lights and an audible warn- a luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the ing. rear lid must be supported.

129 Operation

Boot lid with movement sensor Switching the Easy Open function on or off For the automatic raising function: pull the (Easy Open) The Easy Open function and be activated button for the corresponding window up- and deactivated from menu Vehicle set- wards until it reaches the second position. tings on the infotainment system For the automatic lowering function: pull ›››  page 28. the button for the corresponding window upwards until it reaches the second position. Stop automatic movement: push or pull on Controls for the windows the button of the corresponding window.

Controls for the windows: functions Resetting one-touch opening and closing The one-touch opening and closing function Read the additional information carefully is not active after the vehicle battery has Fig. 142 Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- ›››  page 13 been disconnected or is flat and will have to ing (Easy Open). After turning off the ignition, the windows can be reset. be opened and closed for a short time using ● Close all windows and doors. If a valid vehicle key is found close to the boot the buttons on the door as long as the driver ● lid, it can be unlocked and locked moving a door or passenger side door is not open. Pull the button of the corresponding win- foot. When the key is removed from the ignition dow and hold it for one second in this position. ● Stand behind the bumper, in the middle. and the driver door is open, all of the electric windows can be opened or closed at the ● Release the button and pull upwards and ● With a brisk movement, bring your foot and same time keeping the button on the driver’s hold again. The one-touch function is now lower leg as close as possible to the bumper. door pressed down. After a few seconds, the ready for operation. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to convenience opening or closing function will the upper sensor area and your foot to the begin ››› page 130. The automatic one-touch electric windows lower area ››› Fig. 142. can be reinitialised individually or several at a time. ● Quickly remove your foot and lower leg One-touch opening and closing from the sensor areas. The lid opens. The one-touch automatic opening and clos- Convenience opening/closing When closed, the rear lid automatically locks ing is used to open or close the windows The electric windows can be opened or if the vehicle has been locked beforehand completely. It will not be necessary to hold closed from outside using the vehicle key: and there is no valid key inside. the button of the corresponding electric window.

130 Opening and closing

● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- Note To close windows without the anti-trap ton pressed. All windows which function function electrically will be either opened or closed. The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a malfunction in ● Attempt to close the corresponding electric ● To interrupt the function, release the locking the electric windows. Visit an authorised window within 10 seconds after by holding or unlocking button. workshop. the button. The window is closed without the anti-trap function, deactivated for a During convenience closing, first the windows short time. and then the sliding sunroof will be closed. Roll-back function on electric win- ● After more than 10 seconds, the anti-trap In the Configuration - convenience dows function is reactivated. The window will stop menu, there are different settings for operat- once again if there is another difficulty or ob- ing the windows ›››  page 28. stacle. The anti-trap function of the electric windows ● If the window will still not close, visit a speci- WARNING can reduce the risk of injury when opening and closing the electric windows ››› . If a alised workshop. Careless use of the electric windows can window is not able to close because it is stiff cause serious injury. or because of an obstruction, it will automati- WARNING ● Only operate the electric windows when cally open again. Closing the electric windows without the nobody is in the way. anti-trap function can cause serious injury. ● Check why the window does not close. ● Never leave children or disabled people ● Always close the electric windows care- ● Attempt to close the window again. alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be fully. locked. The windows cannot be opened in ● If you try within the following 10 seconds ● Nobody should be in the way of the elec- case of an emergency. and the window closes with difficulty or there tric windows, especially when the anti-trap ● Always take all the keys with you when- is an obstruction once again, the one-touch function is deactivated. ever you leave the vehicle. After turning off closing will stop working for 10 seconds. ● The anti-trap function does not prevent the ignition, the windows can be opened ● If the window is still obstructed, it will stop fingers or other parts of the body getting and closed for a short time using the but- at the corresponding position. When the but- pinched against the window frame and tons on the door as long as the driver door causing injury. or passenger side door is not open. ton is operated within 10 seconds, the window will close without the anti-trap function ● When transporting children in the rear ››› . seats, always deactivate the rear electric Note windows with the child safety lock so that The anti-trap function also operates if the they cannot be opened and closed. windows are closed from the outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing ››› page 130. 131 Operation

Panoramic sliding sunroof* ● Only close the panoramic sliding sunroof Opening or closing the sun blind and the sun blind when nobody is in the Sliding sunroof: operation way. ● Always take all the keys with you when- Read the additional information carefully ever you leave the vehicle. ›››  page 14 ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have ac- The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work cess to the keys. Uncontrolled use of the with the ignition on. It can be opened or key could lock the vehicle, start the engine, closed for a few minutes after the ignition has turn on the ignition and operate the panor- been switched off, provided the driver door amic sliding sunroof. and the front passenger door are not ● The panoramic sliding sunroof can be op- opened. erated for up to about ten minutes after the Fig. 143 On the interior roof lining: switches for ignition has been switched off, provided the the sun blind. Convenience open/close function driver door and the front passenger door The panoramic sliding sunroof can be are not opened. Function Necessary operations opened or closed from outside the vehicle us- To open coming the vehicle key: Press button ››› Fig. 143 1 brief- Note pletely (auto- ly. ● Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking but- ● In case of a fault in the operation of the matic): ton pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof is panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti-trap To stop automat- Briefly press the button adjusted or closes. function will not operate correctly. Visit a ic operation: ››› Fig. 143 1 or ››› Fig. 143 2 . specialised workshop. ● Release the unlock or lock button to stop To set the inter- Hold the button Fig. 143 1 ● The rotary button of the panoramic slid- ››› the function. mediate posi- or ››› Fig. 143 2 until the re- ing sunroof remains in the last position se- tion: quired position is reached. During convenience closing, first the windows lected if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle, and To close com- and then the panoramic sliding sunroof will Press button ››› Fig. 143 2 brief- pletely (auto- be closed. will have to be re-positioned the next time ly. you drive. matic): WARNING The panoramic sliding sunroof can be oper- Careless or uncontrolled use of the panor- ated for up to about ten minutes after the ig- amic sliding sunroof can cause serious inju- nition has been switched off, provided the ries.

132 Lights and visibility driver door and the front passenger door are ● Sun blind: within 5 seconds of triggering the Lights and visibility not opened. anti-trap function, push button ››› Fig. 143 2 until the sun blind closes completely. ● The panoramic sliding sunroof or sun Lights Anti-trap function of the panoramic blind closes without the anti-trap function. sliding sunroof and the sun blind ● If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot Control lamps be closed, visit a specialised workshop. The anti-trap function reduces the risk of in-  It lights up jury when opening and closing the panoram- WARNING ic sliding sunroof and sun blind ››› . When Driving light totally or partially faulty. Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or Change the corresponding lamp ››› page 94. If all they encounter an obstacle while closing, sun blind without the anti-trap function can the bulbs are OK, the vehicle should be taken to a they reopen. cause serious injuries. specialised workshop if necessary. ● Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof ● Always close the panoramic sliding sun- Fault in adaptive light ››› page 135. or the sun blind did not close. roof carefully. ● Attempt to close the panoramic sliding sun- ● Nobody should be in the way of the pan-  Flashes roof or sun blind once again. oramic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially when they are closed without the an- Fault in the adaptive light system. ● If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind ti-trap function. Go to a specialised workshop ››› page 135. is still obstructed, it will stop at the corre- ● The anti-trap function does not prevent sponding position. Close it without the anti- fingers or other parts of the body getting  It lights up trap function. pinched against the window frame and Rear fog light switched on ››› page 26. causing injury. Closing without the roll-back function  It lights up ● The switch ›››  Fig. 15 should be in the Note 1 “closed” position . Front fog lights switched on page 26. The anti-trap function is activated if the ››› ● Panoramic sliding sunroof: within 5 seconds windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof of triggering the anti-trap function, pull the are closed from the outside of the vehicle  It lights up control all the way back ›››  Fig. 15 (arrow using the ignition key for convenience clos- 5 ) until the panoramic sliding sunroof closes ing ››› page 130. Left or right turn signal. fully. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a vehicle or trailer turn signal is faulty. If necessary, check the vehicle and trailer lighting. »

133 Operation

 It lights up Audible warnings to advise the driver that Note the lights have not been switched off Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 134. The legal requirements regarding the use If the key is not in the ignition and the driver of vehicle lights in each country must be door is open, an audible warning signal is observed.  It lights up heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off. Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) on ››› page 136. ● When the parking light is on ››› page 134. Turn signal and main beam lever Several warning and control lamps light up ● When the light switch is in position . for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Read the additional information carefully ed on, signalling that the function is being ›››  page 26 verified. They will switch off after a few sec- WARNING onds. The side lights or daytime driving lights are Convenience turn signals not bright enough to illuminate the road WARNING ahead and to ensure that other road users For the one-touch signalling, when the igni- are able to see you. tion is switched on, move the lever as far as Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- possible upwards or downwards and release ● Always use your dipped beam head trol and warning lamps on page 109. the lever. The turn signal will flash three times. lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor. The control turn signals are switched on and off from the menu Lights & Visibility on Switching lights on and off WARNING the instrument panel display ›››  page 28. If the headlights are set too high and the This function can be disconnected at a speci- Read the additional information carefully main beam is not used correctly, there is a alised workshop for those vehicles which do ›››  page 26 risk of dazzling or distracting other road not have the menu Lights & Visibility. users. This could result in a serious acci- The driver is personally responsible for the dent. correct use and adjustment of the lights in all Note situations. ● Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted. ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- In vehicles with a trailer hook: if the trailer is ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ● Never use the main beam or headlight connected electrically and is fitted with a ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- flasher when it can dazzle others on the tive part stops flashing and only flashes rear fog light, the vehicle’s fog light is auto- road. matically switched off. once in the new part selected. ● The turn signal only works when the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning

134 Lights and visibility

lights also work when the ignition is switch- When the light switch is in position , a ● The automatic dipped beam control ed off ››› page 85. photo sensor automatically turns the instru- () only switches on the dipped beam ment and switch lighting on and off. ● If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is when there are no changes in brightness, faulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as and not, for example when it is foggy. fast as usual. Adaptive headlights (AFS) ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road ● The main beam headlights can only be The adaptive headlights only operate when is not well lit due to weather or lighting switched on if the dipped beam headlights the dipped beam is on and at speeds of over conditions. Daytime lights do not provide are already on. 10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptive enough light to illuminate the road properly headlights automatically improve lighting on or be seen by other road users. the road ahead. ● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light The adaptive headlights can be switched on Light and visibility: functions the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- and off from the infotainment system. cle which does not have the rear lights on  Parking light may not be visible to other drivers in the When the parking light is switched on, (right Static cornering lights darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in or left turn signal), the front side light and the When turning slowly to change direction or conditions of poor visibility. rear light on the corresponding side of the ve- going round a tight bend, the static cornering hicle stay lit. The parking lights will only work lights automatically come on. The static cor- with the ignition off. nering lights only work at speeds of less than Automatic dipped beam control 40 km/h (25 mph). * Daytime running lights The static cornering lights may be incorpora- The daytime running lights consist of individu- ted into the fog lights or the front headlights, The automatic dipped beam control is merely al lights, integrated in the front headlights. By depending upon the equipment. intended as an aid and is not able to recog- connecting the daytime running lights, these nise all driving situations. lights are switched on1) ››› . WARNING When the light switch is in position , the The daytime running lights switch on every If the road is not well lit and other road vehicle lights and the instrument panel and time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is users cannot see the vehicle well enough switch lighting switch on and off automatical- in positions 0 or , according to the level of or at all, accidents may occur. ly in the following situations ››› in Light and exterior lighting. visibility: functions on page 135: »

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear side light is switched on as well. 135 Operation

Automatic switch- Automatic switch- on the vehicles travelling in front and in the ● On closed curves, when the traffic in the ing on ing off opposite direction, and on other environmen- opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- tal and traffic conditions from an approxi- nounced slopes The photo sensor de- When adequate lighting mate speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) and turns ● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- tects darkness, for exam- is detected. them off again at speeds below approxi- tion and with a central reservation barrier ple, when driving through mately 30 km/h (18 mph). a tunnel. where the driver can see through gaps or over it e.g. lorry drivers. The rain sensor detects When the windscreen Switching on and off rain and activates the wipers have been inac- ● If the camera is damaged or if the power windscreen wipers. tive for a few minutes. Action supply has been cut off ● – With the ignition on, turn the lights In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain WARNING control to the position  and put ● In the event of dust or sand storms If the road is not well lit and other road the turn signal and main beam lever in Switching the main beam position ››› page 134. ● If the windscreen is damaged by the im- users cannot see the vehicle well enough on: When the headlight adjustment (auto- pact from a stone in the camera's field of vi- or at all, accidents may occur. matic lights also) is activated, the sion ● warning lamp lights up in the dash The automatic dipped beam control ● If the camera's field of vision is misted up, () only switches on the dipped beam panel display . dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. when there are no changes in brightness, – Switch the ignition off. and not, for example when it is foggy. – OR: turn the lights control to a posi- WARNING Switching tion other than  ››› page 134 off: – OR: put the turn signal and main The greater comfort that the headlight ad- beam lever in the light flash or main justment provides (automatic also) must Headlight adjustment beam position ››› page 134. not cause you to take risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) The following conditions can cause the head- ● Always monitor the lights yourself and The headlight adjustment automatically con- light adjustment to fail to turn off the main adjust them depending on the light, visibili- nects and disconnects these lights depend- beam or fail to do so in time: ty and traffic conditions. ing on the environmental and traffic condi- ● The headlight adjustment (automatic al- tions and on the speed, within the limitations ● On roads with insufficient lighting with very reflective signs so) may not correctly detect all situations of the system ››› . This is monitored by a and in certain situations may only provide sensor located on the inside of the wind- ● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe- limited function. screen, above the interior rear vision mirror. destrians or cyclists. ● If the windscreen is damaged or modifi- The automatic headlight adjustment auto- cations are made to the vehicle lighting, matically switches on the lights depending this may harm the functioning of the 136 Lights and visibility

headlight adjustment (automatic lights al- “Coming home”: operations to perform Note so), for example, if additional headlight are ● The time taken for the headlights to go fitted. – Automatically at the end of the delay period. off can be changed in the Lights & Visi- – Automatically, if 30 seconds after bility menu and the function can be coming on, a vehicle door or the boot switched on or off ›››  page 28. Note Deactivate: hatch remains open. ● When the “Coming home” function is on, Main beam and flashed headlights can be – When the light switch is turned to po- if the vehicle door is opened there is no au- turned on and off manually at any time with sition . the turn signal and main beam lever – When the ignition is switched on. dible warning signal to advise that the light ››› page 134. is still on. “Leaving home”: operations to perform – Unlock the vehicle when the light Hazard warning lights “Coming home” and “Leav- Activate: switch is in position  and the photo ing home” function (guidance sensor detects darkness.

lights) – Automatically, at the end of the delay period. The “Coming home” function should be – When the vehicle is locked. Deactivate: switched on manually. However the “Leav- – When the light switch is turned to po- ing home” function is automatically control- sition . led by a photo sensor. – When the ignition is switched on.

“Coming home”: operations to perform Lighting around the exterior mirrors

– Switch off the ignition. The lighting around the exterior mirrors illuminates the door area on entering and leaving – Briefly flash the headlights for ap- Fig. 144 Centre of the instrument panel: proximately one second ››› page 134. the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is switch for hazard warning lights. The “Coming home” lighting comes Activate: unlocked, when the vehicle door is opened on when the driver door is opened. and when the “Coming home” or “Leaving Read the additional information carefully The delay in switching off the head- home” function is switched on. If the equip- lights is counted from when the last ›››  page 27 door or boot hatch is closed. ment includes the light sensor, the lighting around the exterior mirrors only comes when Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a it is dark. broken down vehicle. In a number of countries it is now obligatory, for example, to turn on the hazard warning lights and use a reflective safety vest ››› page 85. » 137 Operation

When being towed with the hazard warning WARNING ● In some vehicles, the brake lights will lights on, a change in direction or traffic lane flash when braking abruptly at speeds of A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk can be indicated as usual using the turn sig- approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn of accident for the driver and for other road nal lever. The hazard lights will be interrupted vehicles travelling behind. If braking con- users. temporarily. tinues, the hazard warning lights system ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- will automatically be turned on at a speed If your vehicle breaks down: ble. Park the vehicle a safe distance from of less than approximately 10 km/h surrounding traffic to lock all the doors in 1. Park the vehicle a safe distance from (6 mph). The brake lights remain lit. Upon case of an emergency. Turn on the hazard traffic and on suitable ground ››› . accelerating, the hazard warning lights will warning lights to warn other road users. be automatically turned off. 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights with ● Never leave children or disabled people the  button ››› Fig. 144. alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. In case of an emergency, passen- 3. Connect the electronic parking brake Adhesive strips for headlights or ››› page 238. gers will be trapped inside the vehicle. Indi- viduals locked in the vehicle can be ex- adjusting headlights 4. Move the selector lever to its intermedi- posed to very high or very low tempera- ate position or to P page 247. ››› tures. In those countries where vehicles drive on the 5. Stop the engine and remove the key other side of the road to the home country, from the ignition page 234. the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle ››› WARNING 6. Have all occupants leave the vehicle drivers of oncoming vehicles. The components of the exhaust system and move to safety, for example behind reach very high temperatures. This could The direction of the headlights can be adjus- a guard rail. cause a fire and considerable damage. ted from the instrument cluster, in the Tou- rist light* of the menu Configuration> 7. When leaving the vehicle, take all keys ● Always park your vehicle so that no part Lights and visibility  page 32. with you. of the exhaust system can come in contact ››› 8. Place an emergency warning triangle to with flammable materials (such as dried For those vehicles in which it is not possible to indicate the position of your vehicle to grass or fuel). adjust the headlights from the menu, adhe- other road users. sive strips are used to cover certain parts of 9. Allow the engine to cool and check if a Note the headlamp cover or the headlights may be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For specialist is required. ● The vehicle battery will discharge and further information, please refer to a special- run down if the hazard warning lights re- If the hazard warning lights are not working, ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a main on for too long (even with the ignition you must use an alternative method of draw- technical service. turned off). ing attention to your vehicle. This method must comply with traffic legislation. 138 Lights and visibility

Note 2 Headlight range control WARNING Use of the Tourist light option and the The headlight range control ››› Fig. 145 2 is Heavy objects in the back of vehicle may adhesives on the headlights is only allowed modified according to the value of the head- cause headlight dazzle and distract other if they are to be used for a short period of light beam and the vehicle load status. This drivers. This could result in a serious acci- time. To modify the direction of the head- offers the driver optimum visibility and the dent. lights permanently, please take the vehicle headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load to a specialised workshop. SEAT recom- ››› . status so that it does not blind other driv- mends visiting a technical service centre. The headlights can only be adjusted when ers. the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 145 2 : Headlight range control, lighting of Interior and reading lights the instrument panel and controls Value Vehicle load statusa) Read the additional information carefully Two front occupants, luggage compart- ›››  page 27  ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart- Storage and luggage compartment light-  ment empty ing When the glove compartment and the rear lid All seats occupied, luggage compart-  ment full. With trailer and minimum are opened and closed, a light automatically drawbar load. switches on or off.

Driver only, luggage compartment full Ambient lighting  With trailer and maximum drawbar load. The ambient lighting in the front covering of Fig. 145 On the side of the steering wheel: in- a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those the ceiling lights up the controls on the centre strument and switch lighting control 1 and shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary headlight range control 2 positions. console from above when the side light or dipped beam lights are on. 1 Instrument and switch lighting Dynamic headlight range control In addition, the lever on the door moulding When the headlights are switched on, the The control 2 is not mounted in vehicles with can also be illuminated. » brightness of the instruments and switch dynamic headlight range control. The head- lighting can be regulated by turning the light range is automatically adjusted accord- switch ››› Fig. 145 1 . ing to the vehicle load status when they are switched on. 139 Operation

Note ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- Rear side window sun blinds tudinally backwards. The reading lights go out when the vehicle is locked, or a few minutes after the key is Vanity mirror light removed from the ignition. This prevents the vehicle's battery from discharging. There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is opened ››› Fig. 146 2 a light comes on. Visibility The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up. Sun visors WARNING Sun visors and sun blinds may reduce visibility when open. Fig. 147 On the rear right-hand window: sun blind. ● Always roll or fold sun blinds and visors away when not in use. The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fitted in the side panels of the windows. Note ● Pull the sun blind by the handle ››› Fig. 147 The light above the sun visor automatically A up to the top. switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from ● Fastening the support rod to both ancho- Fig. 146 Sun visor discharging. rages in the correct spaces B . Verify that the sun blind extended is hooked safely in the Options for adjusting driver and front pas- correct spaces B . senger sun visors: ● To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- top and lower by hand ››› . screen. ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its CAUTION mounting and turned towards the door To prevent damage to the blind or the inte- ››› Fig. 146 1 . rior trim, do not lower the sun blind “quickly”.

140 Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper and win- tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on ● The interval wipe speed varies according the windscreen and reduce visibility. to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle dow wiper systems is moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned. WARNING Control lamp ● The rear wiper is automatically switched Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility on when the windscreen wiper is on and the and increase the risk of accident and seri- It lights up car is in reverse gear.  ous injury. Windscreen wiper level too low. ● Always replace damaged or worn blades Top up the windscreen wiper reservoir as soon as or blades which do not clean the wind- possible ››› page 334. screen correctly. Windscreen wiper functions

Several warning and control lamps light up CAUTION Windscreen wipers performance in differ- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ent situations ed on, signalling that the function is being In icy conditions, always check that the If the vehicle verified. They will switch off after a few sec- wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- The activated position provisionally is at a stand- onds. fore using the wipers for the first time. In changes to the previous position. cold weather, it may help to leave the vehi- still cle parked with the wipers in service posi- The air conditioner comes on for ap- tion ›››  page 57. proximately 30 seconds in air recir- Window wiper lever During auto- culation mode to prevent the smell of matic wipe the windscreen washer fluid entering CAUTION Read the additional information carefully the inside the vehicle. ›››  page 27 If the ignition is switched off while the wind- Intervals between wipes depend on screen wipers are on, the windscreen wip- For the inter- the vehicle's speed. The higher the WARNING ers carry on wiping at the same level when val wipe vehicle speed the shorter the inter- Water from the windscreen washer water the ignition is switched back on. Ice, snow vals. bottle may freeze on the windscreen if it and other obstacles may damage the does not contain enough anti-freeze, re- windscreen wiper and the respective mo- Heated windscreen washer jets ducing forward visibility. tor. The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze. Note not thaw the water in the washer hoses. The heated windscreen washer jets automatically ● In cold conditions, you should not use the ● The windscreen wipers will only function adjust the heat depending on the ambient wash/wipe system unless you have when the ignition is switched on and the re- temperature when the ignition is switched on. » warmed the windscreen with the ventila- spective bonnet or rear lid are closed. 141 Operation

Headlight wash/wipe system Rain sensor* Move the lever to the required position The headlight washers/wipers clean the ››› Fig. 148: headlight lenses. 0 Rain sensor off. After the ignition is switched on, the first and 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- every fifth time the windscreen washer is sary. switched on, the headlights are also washed. A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should be pulled towards the steering wheel when – Set control to the right: high sensitivity. the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any – Set control to the left: low sensitivity. encrusted dirt (such as insects) should be cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling). When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts To ensure the headlight washers work cor- Fig. 148 Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the operating again when the windscreen wipers rectly in winter, any snow which has got into rain sensor A . are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling the bumper jet supports should be cleaned at more than 4 km/h (2 mph). away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray. Rain sensor modified behaviour Note Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 149 of the The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta- rain sensor include: cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the path. Remove the obstacle and switch the damaged blades may lengthen the activa- wiper back on again. tion time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a fast and continuous wipe. Fig. 149 Rain sensor sensitive surface ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper. The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rain the roads may cause an extra long wipe sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual when the windscreen is almost dry. wipe ››› page 141. ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

142 Lights and visibility reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or Rear vision mirror CAUTION make it react more slowly, later or not at all. In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle ● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone Introduction rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re- WARNING faces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as duction in the sensitive surface area and fast as possible with a damp sponge or adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the The automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mir- similar. sensor will vary with the size of the damage ror contains an electrolytic fluid which may caused by the stone. leak if the mirror is broken. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory WARNING organs. ● The electrolytic fluid may cause irritation The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs, to switch on the wipers. particularly in individuals suffering from ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- asthma or other illnesses. Make sure that ually when water on the windscreen ob- adequate quantities of fresh air enter and structs visibility. leave the vehicle if it is not possible to open all the doors and windows. Note ● If the electrolytic fluid comes into contact with eyes or skin, wash the area for at ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain least 15 minutes with plenty of water, and sensor regularly and check the blades for seek medical advice. damage ››› Fig. 149 (arrow). ● If the electrolytic fluid comes into con- ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- tact with shoes or clothing, wash the area mend a window cleaner containing alco- for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water. hol. Wash shoes and clothing before wearing them again. ● If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, wash your mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unless recommended by a Doctor. Seek medical advice immediately.

143 Operation

Interior rear vision mirror Manual anti-dazzle function for interior Exterior mirrors rear vision mirror ● Basic position: point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards. ● Pull the lever to the back to select the anti- dazzle function ››› Fig. 150.

Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror Key to Fig. 151:

1 Control lamp Fig. 150 Manual anti-dazzle function for rear Fig. 152 On the driver door: control for exter- vision mirror 2 Control nal rear-view mirrors. 3 Light incidence sensor Read the additional information carefully This function can be activated and deactiva- ›››  page 17 ted by pressing the rear-view mirror switch ››› Fig. 151 2 . When it is activated, the warn- Turn the knob to the required position: ing lamp lights up 1 .  Electric folding exterior mirrors ››› . When the ignition is on, the sensor 3 automatically moves the rear vision mirror to the Switch on the exterior mirror heating They anti-dazzle position depending upon the inci-  only heat up if the ambient temperature is dence of the light from behind. less than +20°C (+68°F). The automatic anti-dazzle function is deacti- Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turn- Fig. 151 Automatic anti-dazzle function for ing the knob forward, backward, to the right vated when reverse gear is engaged or the  rear vision mirror or to the left. interior or reading lights are on. The driver should always adjust the rear vi- Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turn- Note  ing the knob forward, backward, to the right sion mirror to permit adequate visibility or to the left. through the rear window. If the light is obstructed or prevented from reaching the sensor, e.g. by the sun blinds, Zero position. Exterior mirror unfolded, exte- the rear vision mirror with automatic anti-  rior mirror heating off, adjustment of exterior dazzle function will not operate correctly. mirror not possible. 144 Lights and visibility

Synchronised mirror adjustment steering wheel buttons and select Conven- ● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror ● In the Settings - Convenience menu, ience. when there is no-one in the way of the mir- select whether or not the mirrors should move ● Select the Rear vision mirror adjust- ror. in synchronisation ›››  page 28. ment function (if it is already checked, un- ● When moving the mirror, take care not to ● Turn the knob to position L. check it and check the option again). trap fingers between the mirror and the ● mirror bracket. ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The Select reverse gear. right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir- same time (synchronised). ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb WARNING ● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- area. Failure to correctly estimate the distance view mirror: rotate the control to position R. ● The new position of the mirror will be stored of the vehicle behind could lead to serious automatically and allocated to the vehicle accident. Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driv- key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For ● Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors in- er side vehicles with seat memory, please see crease the field of vision, however objects ››› page 150. appear smaller and further away in the mir- The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is rors. controlled in the same way as the automatic Activating the passenger exterior mirror ● The use of these mirrors to estimate the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror ››› page 144. settings distance to the next vehicle when changing lane is imprecise and could result in serious ● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R. Store the reverse settings for the passen- accident. ger exterior mirror ● With the ignition switched on, select reverse ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to ● Select the vehicle key in which the setting is gear. estimate distances to vehicles behind you to be stored. ● The stored position of the passenger exteri- or in other circumstances. ● Use this key to unlock the vehicle. or mirror for reverse gear is deleted when ● Make sure that the rear visibility is ade- driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the ● Connect the automatic parking brake. quate. knob is turned from position R to another po- ● Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R sition. (passenger side). CAUTION ● Switch the ignition on. WARNING ● Before entering a car wash, always ensure that the exterior mirrors are correctly ● Move the gear lever to neutral. Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking folded in. » care to avoid injuries. ● Access the Settings menu on the instrument panel display using the multifunction

145 Operation

● Electrically-folding exterior mirrors Seats and head restraints Electric driver's seat adjustment* should not be folded and unfolded mechanically as this may damage the electri- Read the additional information carefully cal operation. Adjusting the seats and ›››  page 16

headrests WARNING For the sake of the environment Using the front electric seats in a careless The exterior mirror heating should be Manual adjustment of the seats or uncontrolled manner may lead to severe switched off when it is no longer needed. injuries. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 15 ● The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Note WARNING Never leave children or disabled people ● The exterior mirror heating initially heats alone in the vehicle. The safe driving chapter contains impor- up with a high power, after two minutes the ● In the event of an emergency, stop elec- tant information, tips, suggestions and heat will depend upon the ambient temper- trical adjustment by pressing any button. ature. warnings that you should read and observe for your own safety and the safety of your ● In the event of a fault, the electric exteri- passengers ››› page 59. CAUTION or mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing the edge of the mirror surface. So as not the damage the electrical com- WARNING ponents of the front seats, do not kneel on the seats or apply specific pressure to one ● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi- point of the seat or seat backrest. cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. ● Be careful when adjusting the seat Note height. Careless or uncontrolled adjust- ● It may not be possible to electrically ad- ment can cause injuries. just the seat if the vehicle battery is very ● The front seat backrests must not be re- low. clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and ● Seat adjustment is stopped when the en- the airbag system might not protect as gine is started. they should in the case of an accident, increasing risk of injury.

146 Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the rear seats luggage compartment tray. Remove the Adjustment of the head restraints tray before adjusting the seat backrest. ● Objects in the luggage compartment could cause damage when moving the rear seats forwards or backwards.

Fig. 153 Adjusting rear seats

Function Necessary operations

Pull the lever and adjust the seat backrest to the required position ››› . The seat backrest must be engaged when the 1 Adjusting the lever is released! There is a seat backrest. handle instead of the lever on the third row of seats and on the central seat of the second row. It is used in the same man- Fig. 154 A: Adjust the head restraints with no ner as the lever. possibility of lengthways direction adjustment; 2 Only in the B: Adjust the head restraints with lengthways Pull the lever and move the second row of direction adjustment » seat forwards or backwards. seats: move the The seat must be engaged seat forwards or when the lever is released! backwards.

CAUTION ● Tilting the seat backrest of the second row of seats fully back could damage the 147 Operation

● The head restraint must engage securely in Removing and installing the head position. restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head Fig. 155 Adjust the head restraints in the sec- restraint. ond or third row of seats Adjusting the head restraint for short peo- Read the additional information carefully ple ›››  page 16 Lower the head restraint completely, even if All seats are equipped with a head restraint. your head is below its upper edge. When the head restraint is at its lowest, it is possible Adjusting height that a small gap remains between it and the ● Raise the head restraint in the direction of seat backrest. the arrow or lower it ››› Fig. 154 or ››› Fig. 155 1 with the button pressed ››› in Removing Adjusting the head restraint for tall people and installing the head restraints on Raise the head restraint completely. page 149. ● The head restraint must engage securely in Fig. 156 A: Fitting the head restraints with no position. There are three possible positions on possibility of lengthways direction adjustment; the second row of seats and two possible po- B: Fitting the head restraints with lengthways sitions on the third row of seats. direction adjustment

Adjusting the front head restraints ● Push the head restraint forward in the direction of the arrow or backward ››› Fig. 154 1 B with the button pressed.

148 Seats and head restraints

● Adjust the head restraint according to the Removing the head restraints from the correct seat position and secure it second and third row of seats ››› page 148. ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards ››› page 157. Removing the front head restraints in vehi- ● Push the head restraint up as far as it will go cles with the lengthways direction adjust- . ment of the head restraints ››› ● Pull out the head restraint ››› Fig. 157 1 ● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so with the button pressed. that the head restraint can be fitted. ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat back- ● Push the head restraint up and backward Fig. 157 Fitting the head restraints in the sec- wards until it is engaged. as far as it will go ››› . ond or third row of seats ● Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card 2 B, Fitting the head restraints in the second All seats are equipped with a head restraint. on both sides between the seat backrest cov- and third row of seats er and the end protector of the seat backrest ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards Removing the front head restraints in vehi- retaining bar and unlock the retaining bars ››› page 157. cles without the lengthways direction ad- with a little pressure. ● justment of the head restraints ● Completely pull out the head restraint. Insert the head restraint into the guides on the seat backrest. ● If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so that the head restraint can be fitted. Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles ● Push the head restraint down while press- with the lengthways direction adjustment ing the button 1 . ● Push the head restraint up as far as it will go of the head restraints ››› . ● Fold the backrest of the rear seat backward ● again until it is engaged. ● Pull out the head restraint pressing the but- Pull out the two retaining bars from the head restraint as far as possible. ton completely ››› Fig. 156 1 A. ● Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- ● Correctly place the head restraint into the sition ››› page 147. Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles guides on the seat backrest and insert it. WARNING without the lengthways direction adjust- ● Push the head restraint down as far as pos- ment of the head restraints sible until the two retaining bars are secured. Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of ● Correctly place the head restraint into the ● Adjust the head restraint according to the severe or fatal injuries in the event of acci- guides on the seat backrest and insert it. correct seat position and secure it dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres. » ● Completely press the button 1 A and push ››› page 148. the head restraint downwards.

149 Operation

● Always fit and adjust the head restraint Seat functions Switch off seat heating if there is nobody in properly whenever a person is occupying a the seat. seat. Seat heating* ● Refit any removed head restraints imme- Function Action ››› Fig. 158, diately so that passengers are properly ››› Fig. 159 protected. Activate Press button . Seat heating is ● All vehicle occupants must correctly ad- switched on fully. just the head restraint according to their Adjusting the Keep pressing button  until the height to reduce the risk of back injuries in heating output required intensity is set. the event of an accident. The upper edge of the head restraint must be as close as Deactivating Keep pressing button  until all of possible to the same level as the top of the lights are switched off your head and under no circumstances be- ››› Fig. 158, ››› Fig. 159. low eye level. Keep the back of your neck Fig. 158 Detail of centre console: front seat as close as possible to the head restraint. heating controls, here with the second temper- WARNING ature level set ● Never adjust the head restraint while the Inappropriate use of the seat functions can vehicle is in motion. cause severe injuries. ● Assume the proper sitting position before CAUTION your trip and remain in it throughout. This When removing and fitting the head re- also applies to the other occupants. straint, make sure it does not hit the head- ● Only adjust the seat position memory liner of the vehicle or the front seat back- when the vehicle is stationary. rest. Otherwise, the interior roof and other ● Only switch the lumbar massage function parts of the vehicle could be damaged. on and off when the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 159 Detailed view of centre console: con- ● Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs trols for the front seat heating in vehicles away from the seat operating and adjust- equipped with Climatronic ment radius.

The seat cushions can be heated electrically WARNING when the ignition is switched on. The backrest is also heated in some versions. People whose pain and temperature threshold has been affected by some kind of medicine, paraplegia or chronic illness

150 Seats and head restraints

(e.g. diabetes) may sustain burns to the Lumbar massage function* Seat with position memory* back, buttocks and legs from using the seat heaters that may lead to a long healing process or that may never completely heal. Seek medical advice if you have doubts regarding your health. ● People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating.

CAUTION ● To avoid damaging the heating elements Fig. 160 On the side of the front seat: button Fig. 161 Memory buttons on the outside of the of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on for lumbar massage function. driver seat the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. During the massage operation, the lumbar Memory buttons support will move in a way that massages the ● Liquids, sharp objects and insulating ma- Individual settings for the driver seat and the lumbar area of the back. While it is operating, terials on the seat could damage the seat exterior mirror can be assigned to each mem- the arch of the lumbar support can be adjus- heating. ory button. ted using the corresponding control based on ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat your personal preferences ››› page 60. heating immediately and have the unit in- Storing exterior mirror settings for driving spected by a specialised workshop. forwards Connection ● Connect the automatic parking brake. ● Press the  button in the control panel of For the sake of the environment ● the seat. Move the gear lever to neutral. The seat heating should remain on only ● Switch the ignition on. when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- Disconnection ● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir- sary fuel waste. ● Press the  button again in the control rors. panel of the seat. ● Keep the SET button held down for more than one second ››› Fig. 161. Automatic off ● Press the required memory button for the ● The lumbar massage will disconnect auto- following 10 seconds. An audible warning matically after approx. 10 minutes. confirms the settings have been stored. »

151 Operation

Storing front passenger exterior mirror ● Within the following three seconds, push memory buttons can then be reprogrammed settings for driving in reverse gear the open button  on the vehicle key. An au- and the vehicle keys re-assigned. ● Connect the automatic parking brake. dible warning confirms the settings have been activated. ● Open the driver door and do not get into ● Move the gear lever to neutral. the vehicle. ● Switch the ignition on. Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and ● Operating the seat settings from outside ● Press the required memory button. assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle the vehicle. key ● Select reverse gear. ● Move the angle of the seat backrest com- ● Activate the memory function of the vehicle pletely forwards. ● Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir- key ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb ● Release the control to set the angle and area. ● Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir- then press again until an audible warning is rors. heard. ● The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle ● Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned Note key that was used to unlock the vehicle. to the vehicle key. The front passenger side exterior mirror au- Activating exterior mirror settings To deactivate the memory function of the tomatically changes from the position stor- vehicle key ed for reversing as soon as the vehicle ● With the driver door open and the ignition moves forward at a speed of at least turned off, push the memory button of the Condition: a position must be memorised in 15 km/h (9 mph) or when the gear selection corresponding door briefly. the memory. lever is changed to a position other than R. ● OR: with the ignition switched on, hold in ● Press and hold the SET button. the corresponding memory button until the ● Within the following 10 seconds, push the memorised position is reached. open button  on the vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the settings have been de- To activate the memory function of the ve- activated. hicle key

Condition: a position must be memorised in Initialising the seat position memory the memory. The position memory system must be restar- ● Open the driver-side door. ted if, for example, the driver seat has been changed. ● Press and hold any memory button. Restarting deletes all memories and assignments for the seat with position memory. The 152 Seats and head restraints

Convenient entry function for the ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will WARNING go ››› page 60. third row of seats Careless or uncontrolled use of the con- ● Push the lever ››› Fig. 162 1 forwards and venient entry assistant may result in severe fold the backrest of the rear seat. This seat injury and accident. folds forward completely ››› and can still ● Never use the convenient entry function be moved further forward. when the vehicle is in motion. ● Always take care when entering and leav- ● Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt ing the vehicle ››› . when folding the rear seats back. ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other Repositioning the seat in the second row body parts out of the hinges and the seat ● Lift the backrest of the rear seat in an up- locking mechanism when folding and un- right position. The entire seat folds back- folding. wards ››› . ● Mats or other objects can be caught in ● Make sure that the rear seat is securely en- the hinges of the seat backrests or rear Fig. 162 Second seat row: accessibility con- gaged so that the seat belts can provide seat. This could prevent the seat backrest trols. proper protection in the rear seats. The red from locking safely when positioned upright. mark ››› Fig. 162 2 should no longer be visi- The outer seats of the second row can be fol- ble ››› in Folding down rear seats to cre- ● All seat backrests must engage correctly ded to make it easier to get in and out of the ate load space on page 160. for the seat belts on the rear seats to work third row of seats. properly. When the seat backrest of an oc- Emergency exit function cupied seat is not correctly locked in place, Folding down the second row seats the passenger can be thrust forward with If the lever ››› Fig. 162 1 does not work, e.g. the seat backrest in case of sudden brak- ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind after an accident, the seats on the second ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident. up the seat belt by hand. row can be folded forwards from the third row ● A red mark on the side of the seat ● to allow vehicle occupants of the third row of If necessary, remove the side head restraint ››› Fig. 162 2 indicates that the seat back- of the integrated child seat ››› page 82. seats to get out of the vehicle ››› . rest is not engaged. The mark is no longer ● If necessary, raise the armrests. visible when it is correctly engaged. ● Pull the handle ››› Fig. 162 3 back and fold ● Remove any objects located in the footwell the backrest of the rear seat. The complete ● If the seat backrest or seat are folded of the second row of seats, where applicable rear seat folds forward ››› . down and are not correctly locked in place, ››› . no passenger should use them. »

153 Operation

● When getting in or out, never lean or hold Folding the backrest of the front The front passenger front airbag must be dis- onto the folded seat on the second row of passenger seat* abled ›››  page 19 if objects are being seats. transported on the folded front passenger seat. WARNING Folding the backrest of the front passen- If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the ger seat second row then it is possible that the ● seats of this row cannot be folded down Remove any objects from the front passen- from the third row of seats in the event of an ger seat cushion ››› . accident. In the event of an emergency, ● Adjust the front passenger seat to its lowest passengers in the third row of seats will not position ››› page 60. be able to leave the vehicle or to help ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will themselves. go ››› page 60. ● Child seats should not occupy all the Fig. 163 Folding the backrest of the front pas- ● Unlock the backrest of the front passenger seats of the second row if other passengers senger seat are to occupy the third row. seat in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 163 1 .

CAUTION ● Fold the backrest of the front passenger seat forwards in the direction of the arrow ● Before folding down the rear seat back- ››› Fig. 163 2 until it is horizontal. rest for returning it to its position, adjust the ● front seats so that the head restraints and The backrest of the front passenger seat seat backrests do not hit each other when must engage safely in its folded position. folding and unfolding. Lifting the backrest of the front passenger ● Any objects located in the footwell of the second row of seats may be damaged on seat folding the rear seat forwards. Remove any ● Check that there are no objects or parts of objects before folding the seat down. the body in the hinge area. Fig. 164 Unlocking the folding backrest of the front passenger seat ● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat by first unlocking it again ››› Fig. 164. The backrest of the front passenger seat can ● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat be folded and locked horizontally. until it is upright. The seat backrest must be engaged.

154 Seats and head restraints

● The upright backrest of the front passenger ded may lead to severe injuries in the event WARNING seat must safely engage. of an accident or sudden braking. The centre armrest may limit the freedom ● Never carry people or children on the WARNING of movement of the driver's arm and cause front passenger seat when the seat back- a serious accident. Folding and lifting the backrest of the front rest is folded. ● Keep the centre armrest compartments passenger seat uncontrollably or without ● When the backrest of the front passenger closed while the vehicle is in motion. paying attention may lead to severe inju- seat is folded, only the outer seat behind ● The centre armrest is not designed for ries. the driver on the second row of seats may children to sit on! Sitting in this incorrect ● Only fold and lift the backrest of the front be occupied. This also applies to children position can cause severe injuries. passenger seat when the vehicle is station- sitting in a child seat. ary. ● While the backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, the front airbag must remain Centre armrest disconnected and control light      on. ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of the hinges and the seat locking mechanism when folding and unfolding. ● Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the backrest of the front passenger seat. This could prevent the seat backrest from locking safely when positioned upright. ● The upright backrest of the front passen- Fig. 165 Front centre armrest ger seat must engage. If the backrest of the front passenger seat is not locked, it may To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in the suddenly move and cause severe injuries. direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 165, setting by setting. WARNING To lower the centre armrest, pull it down- Seat anchors and hinges exposed when the wards. Then lower the centre armrest. backrest of the front passenger seat is fol-

155 Operation

Transport and practical ● Always ensure that objects inside the ve- Transporting a load hicle cannot move into the area of the air- equipment bags while driving. Secure all objects in the vehicle ● While driving, always keep object com- ● Distribute the load throughout the vehicle, Transporting objects partments closed. on the roof and in a trailer as uniformly as ● Remove all objects from the front pas- possible. Introduction senger seat when it is folded down. When ● Transport heavy objects as far forward as the seat backrest is folded down, it presses possible in the luggage compartment and on small and light objects and these are Always transport heavy loads in the luggage lock the seat backs in the vertical position. detected by the weight sensor on the seat; compartment and place the seat backs in a ● this sends false information to the airbag Secure luggage in the luggage compart- vertical position. Always use the anchors pro- control unit. ment with suitable straps on the fastening vided with suitable rope to secure heavy ob- rings ››› page 157. ● jects. Never overload the vehicle. Both the While the backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, the front airbag must remain ● Check the headlight adjustment carrying capacity as well as the distribution disconnected and control light ››› page 133. of the load in the vehicle affect driving be-      on. haviour and braking ability ››› . ● Use the suitable tyre pressure according to ● Objects secured in the vehicle should the load being transported. Read the tyre in- WARNING never be placed in such a way as to make flation information label ››› page 338. passengers sit in an incorrect position. ● Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects For vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, ● If secured objects occupy a seat, this can cause serious injury in case of a sud- change the vehicle load status ››› page 298. seat should not be occupied or used by den manoeuvring or breaking or in case of anyone. an accident. This is especially true when CAUTION objects are struck by a detonating airbag Objects on the shelf could chafe against and fired through the vehicle interior. To re- WARNING the wires of the heating element in the duce the risks, please note the following: The driving behaviour and braking ability heated rear window and cause damage. ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always change when transporting heavy and large keep equipment and heavy objects in the objects. Note luggage compartment. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- Please note the information about loading ● Always secure objects with suitable rope ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. a trailer page 301 and the roof carrier or slings so that they cannot enter the ››› ● Accelerate gently and carefully. system page 167. areas around the front or side airbags in ››› case of sudden braking or an accident. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● Brake early. 156 Transport and practical equipment

Driving with the rear lid open WARNING ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior Brake early. Driving with the rear lid open creates an addi- when the rear lid is open. This could cause ● If necessary, read the instructions for driv- tional risk. Secure all objects and secure the loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide ing with a trailer ››› page 301. rear lid correctly and take all measures pos- poisoning, serious injury and accidents. sible to reduce toxic gases from entering the ● If necessary, read the instructions for driv- vehicle. ● To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle ing with a roof carrier system ››› page 167. always drive with the rear lid closed. WARNING ● In exceptional circumstances, if you must WARNING drive with the rear lid open, observe the fol- Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open A sliding load could considerably affect the lowing to reduce the entry of toxic gases in- could cause serious injuries. stability and safety of the vehicle resulting side the vehicle: in an accident with serious consequences. ● Always drive with the rear lid closed. – Close all windows and the sliding sun- ● Secure loads correctly so they do not ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose roof. move. items could fall out of the vehicle and injure – Turn off the air recirculation for the other road users or damage other vehicles. ● When transporting heavy objects, use heating and air conditioner. suitable ropes or straps. ● Drive particularly carefully and think – Open all of the air outlets in the dash ahead. ● Lock the seat backs in vertical position. panel. ● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking – Turn the heating fan and heater to the given that this could cause an uncontrolled highest level. movement of the open rear lid. Luggage compartment ● When transporting objects that protrude CAUTION out of the luggage compartment, indicate them suitably. Observe legal requirements. An open boot hatch changes the length Introduction ● and height of the vehicle. If objects must project out of the luggage Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment, the rear lid must never be compartment and place the seat backs in a used to “secure” or “attach” objects. vertical position. Always use the fastening ● If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, Driving with the vehicle loaded rings with suitable rope or straps. Never over- it should be removed before travelling with load the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity the rear lid open. For the best handling when driving a loaded as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle, note the following: vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and braking ability . » ● Secure all objects ››› page 156. ››› ● Accelerate gently and carefully. 157 Operation

WARNING ● While driving, always keep object com- Note partments closed. When the vehicle is not in use or being The ventilating slits between the heated watched, always lock the doors and the ● Do not place hard, heavy or sharp ob- rear window and the shelf must not be cov- rear lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or jects inside the vehicle interior, in open ered so that used air can escape from the death. storage compartments, the rear shelf of vehicle. the boot or on the dash panel. ● Do not leave children unwatched, especially when the boot is open. Children ● Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects could climb into the luggage compartment, from clothes and pockets inside the vehicle close the rear lid from inside and be unable and store securely. to escape themselves. This could lead to serious injury or death. WARNING ● Never allow children to play in or around The transport of heavy object changes ve- the vehicle. hicle handling and increases braking dis- ● Never transport people in the luggage tance. Heavy loads that have not been compartment. stored or secured correctly could cause loss of control and result in serious injury. WARNING ● Vehicle handling changes when transporting heavy objects due to a change in Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects the centre of gravity. can cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of ● Distribute the load as uniformly and as an accident. This is especially true when low down on the vehicle as possible. objects are struck by a detonating airbag ● Store heavy objects in the luggage com- and fired through the vehicle interior. To re- partment as far from the rear axle as possi- duce the risks, please note the following: ble. ● Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always place equipment and heavy objects in the CAUTION boot. ● Hard objects on the rear shelf of the boot ● Always secure objects with suitable could chafe the wires of the heating ele- ropes or straps so that they cannot be ment and antenna of the rear window and pushed inside the cabin and move around cause damage. the areas around the front or side airbags in the event of sudden braking or an acci- ● The side window antenna could be dam- dent. aged due to chafing from objects. 158 Transport and practical equipment

Folding down rear seats to create ● If required, remove the head restraints from load space the integrated seats for children and refit them ››› page 82. ● If necessary, raise the armrests. ● Remove objects from the footwell in front of and behind the rear seat ››› . ● Move the rear seat all the way back. ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will go ››› page 60. ● In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier in the rear of the centre console, if necessary. ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 166 1 back and fold the seat backrest forwards. The complete rear seat folds forward ››› . ● Fold the seat backrest forwards until it locks into the load surface position ››› Fig. 166 B. ● If necessary, pull on the lever ››› Fig. 167 2 to move the seat to the required position. ● When the seat is folded down, no adults or children should travel in it ››› .

Fig. 167 Third seat row: fold down the rear seat Folding the seats in the third row of seats Fig. 166 Second seat row: folding the rear to load A then return to position B for loading seat A, rear seat as load space B. ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind Each rear seat can fold down individually to up the seat belt by hand. extend the luggage compartment. ● Open the rear lid. Folding the seats in the second row of ● Push the head restraint down as far as it will seats for loading go ››› page 60. ● If necessary, open the belt loop and wind ● Remove objects from the footwell in front of up the seat belt by hand. and behind the rear seat ››› . »

159 Operation

● Remove objects from the space below the ● Press on the seat tray in the seat backrest the seat backrest in case of sudden brak- rear seat. until it is held in position by its magnets. ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident. ● Remove the attachment elements and sup- ● Open the sliding door. ● No seat must be occupied if the seat ports for the net from the rail system. ● Put the seat backrest into position and backrest or seat is folded or not correctly ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 167 1 back and fold the press firmly until it clicks into place. engaged. seat backrest forwards. The rear seat folds ● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest forward ››› and the cushion also moves for- to ensure that they are correctly locked in CAUTION ward. place and that the seat belt protection is ● Before folding the rear seat backrest, ad- ● Fold the seat tray forward on top of the fol- guaranteed for rear seat passengers. just the front seats so that neither the head ded seat. restraint or backrest hit them when folded. ● When the seat is folded down, no adults or WARNING ● Objects placed in the footrest area in children should travel in it ››› . Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly front of and behind the rear seats can be without paying attention could cause seri- damaged when seats are folded down or Putting the seats in the second row back in ous injury. put back into position. Remove any objects in the way before folding seats down or replace ● Never fold or lift the seats while driving. positioning them. ● Pull lever ››› Fig. 166 1 upwards and place ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when ● Objects placed in the moulding on the the seat backrests in vertical position. The raising the seat backrest. back of the third row of seats can be dam- entire seat folds backwards. ● Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other aged when folding down the seats or put- ● Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest body parts out of the hinges and the seat ting them back into position. Remove any to ensure that they are correctly locked in locking mechanism when folding and un- objects in the way before folding seats place and that the seat belt protection is folding. down or repositioning them. guaranteed for rear seat passengers. ● Mats or other objects can be caught in ● The attachment elements and supports the hinges of the seat backrests or rear for the net partition placed on the rail sys- Putting the seats in the third row back in seat. This could prevent the seat or seat tem can be damaged when folding down place backrest from locking securely in the verti- seats from the third row or putting them cal position. back into position and these can also dam- ● Open the rear lid. ● All seat backrests must engage correctly age the seats themselves. Before folding ● Pull on the handle ››› Fig. 167 2 to put the for the seat belts on the rear seats to work down or repositioning the seats, remove seat tray back in position. properly. When the seat backrest of an oc- the attachment elements and supports for ● Pull the handle ››› Fig. 167 3 . The entire cupied seat is not correctly locked in place, the net from the rail system. seat folds backwards. the passenger can be thrust forward with

160 Transport and practical equipment

Shelf* ● Release the shelf upwards by the side supports and guide it forward.

Closing the shelf ● Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide backwards. ● Secure the shelf using the left and right side supports.

Installing the shelf behind the second row of seats

Fig. 168 In the boot: shelf of the boot. ● Place the shelf in its position in the side lining, left-hand side first. ● Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 168 B . ● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, pressing down.

Installing the shelf behind the third row of seats ● Remove the shelf from the side trim support ››› Fig. 169 A. To do this, press the shelf up- Fig. 169 Remove the shelf supports A then put wards (arrow) and remove it. them away safely B. ● Open the compartment in the left-hand The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec- side boot lining ››› page 169 and hook the ond or third row of seats ››› . shelf to the rear of the compartment lid ››› Fig. 169 B. Opening the shelf ● Close the rear left-hand side lining com- ● Pull the shelf handle ››› Fig. 168 A a little partment. bit backwards. ● Place the shelf in its position in the side lining, left-hand side first. »

161 Operation

● Lift the shelf off in direction of the arrow ● Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp ob- ››› Fig. 168 B . jects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf. ● Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf. pressing down.

Removing the shelf Net partition* ● Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 168 B and lift it in the direction of the arrow C . ● Remove the shelf from the right-hand side support. ● Moreover, when detaching the shelf be- Fig. 171 In the boot: install the net partition behind the third seat row: cover the supports hind the second row of seats. of the side trims with their covers. ● With only 5 seats: support the released The net partition can prevent objects in the shelf by placing it on the front section of the luggage compartment entering the vehicle boot floor ››› page 169. interior / the driver area. First remove the net from its bag and unfold it. WARNING If the shelf is placed on one of the rear Fold out the net partition seats, this could cause serious injury in Fold out the cross support rods ››› Fig. 170 1 case of sudden braking or an accident. for the net partition fully in the direction of the ● Whenever it the third row seats are occu- arrow until you hear a “click”. pied, the shelf should be put behind this row. Installing the net partition behind the second row of seats WARNING Fig. 170 Unfold the net partition 1 then fold it ● again 2 and 3 Hook in the net partition on the left-hand Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects side roof support ››› Fig. 171. To do this, guide or animals on the rear shelf could cause the rod from up to down. serious injuries in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking or even an accident.

162 Transport and practical equipment

● Hook in the net partition on the rear right- Folding in the net partition Fastening rings* hand side roof support by pressing on the ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 170 2 rod. and bend the rod A in the direction of the ar- ● Secure the net partition hooks into the row with the release button pressed. straps in the front of the boot Fig. 171 then ››› ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 170 3 tighten the belts. and bend the rod B in the direction of the arrow with the release button pressed. Installing the net partition behind the front ● Store the net partition securely in the vehi- seats cle. ● Hook in the net partition on the front left- hand side roof support ››› Fig. 171. To do this, WARNING guide the rod from up to down. Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be Fig. 172 In the boot: fastening rings. ● Hook in the net partition on the rear right- violently thrown in case of a sudden ma- hand side roof support by pressing on the noeuvre or braking and especially in acci- To the front and rear of the luggage compart- rod. dents causing serious injury. ment, there are fastening rings for securing ● Secure the hooks of the net partition to the ● Ensure that the rods are correctly locked objects ››› Fig. 172 (arrows). On some models, attachment rings in the left and right hand in place. the fastening rings are located right at the side footwells on the second row of seats ● Even when the net partition is correctly back, in the area of the lock carrier plate. then tighten the straps. fitted, objects must be secured. There are other fastening rings located to the ● When driving with the net partition, no left and right hand side of the second row Removing the net partition passengers should be behind it. footrests. ● Loosen the net partition straps. Some models of fastening rings must be lifted ● Release the net partition hooks from the to use them. rings ››› Fig. 171. ● Unhook the net partition on the right-hand WARNING side roof support ››› Fig. 171 by pressing on Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps the rod. may be released in case of sudden braking ● Unhook the net partition from the left-hand or an accident. As a result, objects may be side roof support. fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death. »

163 Operation

● Always use suitable ropes and straps in Rails and attachment system* ● Always ensure that the attachment inserts good condition. into the guide system ››› . ● Secure the ropes and straps to the fastening rings. Removing the attachment elements ● Loose objects in the luggage compart- ● Remove the attachment element from the ment can suddenly slide and change the guide and pull downwards. way the vehicle handles. ● Secure all objects, little and large. Securing a load ● Never secure a load that is too heavy for ● Pull the strap through the attachment ele- the fastening rings. ment and secure the load ››› . ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening WARNING rings. Fig. 173 In the boot: system including rails, adjustable attachment elements 1 and adjusta- In case of an accident or sudden braking, Note ble tightening straps 2 . the attachment elements in the parts of the rails close to the seats of the third row ● The maximum load of the fastening rings The rails and attachment system consists of could injure seat occupants. is approximately 3.5 kN (3.57 kp). four rails, movable attachment elements, ● Whenever the seats on the third row are ● You can find suitable transport straps and straps to be secured to the rails and a net to be occupied, remove the attachment el- load securing systems at a specialised with supports to cover baggage ements from the rails or move them all the workshop. SEAT recommends taking your ››› page 165. The rail and attachment sys- way back. car in for technical service. tem is designed to secure light objects. If the seats in the third row are to be occupied by WARNING passengers then attachment elements should never be placed in the section of the Movable attachment elements that are not rails close to the seats ››› . secured correctly can be released from the guide in case of sudden braking or accident. As a result, objects may be fired Installing the attachment elements through the vehicle interior causing serious ● Fit the attachment element with the ruts injury or death. facing upwards ››› Fig. 173 1 to the upper ● Always ensure that the movable attach- part of the guide and press downwards. ment elements are correctly inserted into ● Move the attachment element to the de- the guides. sired position.

164 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Baggage net* Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps may be released in case of sudden braking or an accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death. ● Always use the attachment straps of the rail and attachment system. ● Secure the attachment straps firmly to the attachment elements. Fig. 175 Release the baggage net ● Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly slide and change the If the seats in the third row are to be occupied way the vehicle handles. by passengers then attachment elements ● Secure all objects, little and large. should never be placed in the section of the ● Never secure a child seat to the attach- rails close to the seats ››› . ment elements. Installing the baggage net supports CAUTION ● Fit the baggage net support into the guide from the back and press downwards. ● The attachment elements placed on the rail system can be damaged when folding ● Move the baggage net support to the re- down seats from the third row or putting quired position. them back into position and these can also ● Always ensure that the net support inserts damage the seats themselves. Before fold- into the rail system ››› . ing down or repositioning the seats, remove the attachment elements and supports for the net from the rail system. Hooking the baggage net into the support Fig. 174 Hook the baggage net A and use it as Place the attachment rod on the baggage a bag B. net support ››› Fig. 174 1 and rotate 90° to the left 2 . The red mark on the attachment rod should not be visible ››› . »

165 Operation

Using the net for bag type baggage ● With only 5 seats: after removing, place CAUTION ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one the baggage net safely in the front compartment on the floor of the boot ››› page 169. ● The baggage net supports placed on the of the upper rails. rail system can be damaged when folding ● Fit a movable baggage net attachment el- down seats from the third row or putting Removing the baggage net supports ement to each one of the lower guides them back into position and these can also ››› page 164. ● Remove the net attachment element from damage the seats themselves. Before fold- the rail and pull it out downwards. ing down or repositioning the seats, remove ● Hook the baggage net into the supports. the baggage net supports from the rail sys- ● Hook the baggage net attachment strap WARNING tem. underneath into one of the movable attach- In case of an accident or sudden braking, ment elements ››› Fig. 174 B. the net attachment elements in the parts of ● Join the baggage net supports to the upper the rails close to the seats of the third row Retaining hooks rails as much as possible by pushing them. could injure seat occupants. ● Press the sides of the baggage net togeth- ● Whenever the seats on the third row are er so that they are held by the Velcro. to be occupied, remove the attachment elements from the rails or move them all the Using the baggage net to separate the way back. luggage compartment ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one WARNING of the upper rails. Baggage net supports that are not secured ● Fit the baggage net supports to each one correctly can be released from the guide in of the lower rails. case of the sudden braking or accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the ● Hook the baggage net into the supports. vehicle interior causing serious injury or Fig. 176 In the boot: retaining hooks. death. To release the baggage net On the right-hand side of the luggage com- ● Always ensure that the baggage net sup- partment, there are folding retaining hooks ● Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right ports are correctly inserted into the rails; ››› Fig. 176 that can be used to secure light ››› Fig. 175 1 until you can see the red mark the red mark should not be visible. shopping bags. on the rod. Pull the attachment rod upwards ● Never secure a child seat to the baggage 2 . net supports. ● Press the retaining hooks down ››› Fig. 176 (arrow) and fold them. ● Hook the bags in place.

166 Transport and practical equipment

● After use, raise the hooks again. Hooking the baggage net into the boot Roof carrier* floor WARNING ● Hook the baggage net into the fastening Introduction Never use these hooks to secure objects. In rings ››› Fig. 177 1 and 2 . the event of sudden braking or an accident, The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- they could be pulled out. Releasing the baggage net mise aerodynamics. For this reason, conven- The secured baggage net is taut ››› . tional roof carrier systems cannot be secured CAUTION to the roof water drain channel. ● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg Given that the water drains have been incor- from the fastening rings ››› Fig. 177 1 . (about 5 lbs). porated into the roof for aerodynamic rea- ● Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks sons, only the SEAT approved basic supports from the fastening rings ››› Fig. 177 2 . and roof carrier systems can be used. Luggage net* WARNING When should the roof carrier system be re- The elastic baggage net stretches when it moved? is secured to the luggage compartment ● When it is not being used. fastening rings. The secured baggage net is taut. The hooks on the net can cause in- ● When the vehicle is being washed in a car jury if the net is incorrectly hooked or un- wash. hooked. ● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- ● Always ensure that the hooks do not sud- mum height (e.g. in a garage). denly release from the fastening rings when hooking or un-hooking. WARNING ● Always keep your face and eyes protec- The risk of an accident is increased by ted at a safe distance to avoid injury should Fig. 177 In the boot: net used on secured bag- transporting heavy or bulky loads on the gage a hook slip while hooking or unhooking. roof, which affects the car's handling by ● Always engage the hooks in the order shifting the centre of gravity and increasing The baggage net can be used to secure given. If a baggage net hook springs back susceptibility to cross winds. lighter items. this can cause injury. ● Always secure loads correctly with suitable and undamaged attachment rope or straps. »

167 Operation

● Large, heavy, wide and flat loads nega- Fastening the base supports and WARNING tively affect the vehicle aerodynamics, the roof carrier system If the base supports and the roof carrier centre of gravity and handling. system are incorrectly fitted or used in an ● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden unsuitable manner, the entire system could braking. break free causing accident and injury. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- ● Always take the manufacturer assembly ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. instructions into account. ● Only use base supports and roof carrier CAUTION systems that are not damaged and are correctly fitted. ● Always remove the roof carrier system from the roof before entering a car wash. ● The base support should only be fitted to the points indicated in the diagram ● The height of your vehicle is changed by ››› Fig. 178. the installation of the roof carrier and the Fig. 178 Attachment points for the basic sup- ● Secure the base supports and roof carri- load secured on it. Compare the vehicle port and the roof carrier system height with the passage height, for exam- er system correctly. ple in underground car parks or for garage The mounts are the basis of a complete roof ● Check the screws and attachments be- doors. carrier system. Special fixtures must then be fore driving and after a short distance. Dur- ● The roof antenna, the range of the panor- added in order to safely transport luggage, ing each long journey, check the attach- amic sliding sunroof and the boot hatch bicycles, skis, surf boards, boats, etc. on the ments during every break. should not be affected by the roof carrier roof. All the components of this system can ● Always fit the roof carrier system correct- system and the load being transported. de acquired at a technical service centre. ly for wheels, skis, surfboards, etc. ● Take extra care not to let the hatch strike ● Never modify or repair the basic supports the roof load when opening. Securing the base supports and roof carri- or roof carrier system. er system For the sake of the environment Always secure the base supports and roof Note carrier system correctly. The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof Read and take into account the instructions carrier system is fitted. The roof carrier system must always be in- included with the roof carrier system fitted stalled exactly according to the instructions and keep them in the vehicle. provided. The position openings are located on the inner side of the side roof rods ››› Fig. 178.

168 Transport and practical equipment

Loading the roof carrier WARNING In the front centre armrest compartment the following factory-fitted connections are Exceeding the maximum authorised roof Loads can only be correctly secured when available: USB/AUX-IN. load can result in accidents and/or vehicle the roof carrier system is correctly fitted damage. The factory-fitted CD changer is located in ››› . ● Never surpass the maximum authorised the left-hand storage compartment of the weight for the roof, the maximum author- boot. Maximum authorised roof load ised weight on the axles and the total maxi- The maximum authorised roof load is 100 kg mum authorised weight of the vehicle. WARNING (220 lbs). The roof load includes the roof ● Never exceed the capacity of the roof In the event of sudden braking movements carrier system and the load being transpor- carrier system even if this is less than the or turns, loose objects may be thrown ted ››› . maximum authorised roof load. around the vehicle interior. This could Always check the roof carrier system weight ● Secure heavy items as far forward as cause serious injuries to passengers and and the weight of the load to be transported possible and, in general, distribute the ve- cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. and, if necessary, weigh them. Never exceed hicle load uniformly. the maximum authorised roof load. ● Do not carry animals or store hard, heavy or sharp objects in the vehicle in: open stor- WARNING If you are using a roof carrier with a lower age compartments, instrument panel, weight rating, you cannot transport the maxi- Loose and incorrectly secured loads can items of clothing or bags. mum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum fall from the roof carrier system causing ● While driving, always keep object com- weight limit for the roof carrier given in the fit- accidents and injury. partments closed. ting instructions. ● Always use suitable ropes and straps in good condition. Distributing a load WARNING ● Always secure loads correctly. Uniformly distribute loads and secure them Objects falling into the driver's footwell correctly ››› . could prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the driver to lose control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a serious acci- Check attachments Storage compartments dent. After fitting the base supports and the roof ● Introduction Make sure the pedals can be used at all carrier system, always check the attach- times, with no objects rolling underneath ments after a short trip and at regular inter- them. vals. Storage compartments must only be used to store light or small objects. ● The floor mat should always be secured to the floor. »

169 Operation

● Never place other mats or rugs on top of (Sun)glasses case in the roof con- Storage compartment in the roof the original mat supplied by the factory. sole console ● Make sure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION ● Objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage. ● Do not keep heat-sensitive objects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Heat and cold could damage them or render them Fig. 179 On the roof console: glass compart- Fig. 180 On the roof console: storage com- useless. ment. partment. ● Light-transparent objects placed inside the vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying To open, press and release the button To open press the button and release it glasses or transparent suction caps on the ››› Fig. 179 (arrow). ››› Fig. 180. windows, may concentrate the sun's rays and cause damage to the vehicle. To close, press the cover upwards until it To close, press the storage compartment up- clicks into place. wards until it clicks into place. Note To ensure the interior monitoring works cor- To ensure interior monitoring works properly, rectly, the (sun)glasses case must be closed the storage compartments must be closed The ventilating slits between the heated when the vehicle is locked page 123. when the vehicle is locked page 123. rear window and the shelf must not be cov- ››› ››› ered so that used air can escape from the vehicle.

170 Transport and practical equipment

Compartment on the instrument Compartment on the centre con- Compartment in the front central panel* sole armrest

Fig. 181 Storage compartment on the dash Fig. 182 Compartment in the front centre con- Fig. 183 Storage compartment in the front panel sole. central armrest.

The storage compartment on the instrument There is an open compartment on the centre To open, fully lift the central armrest in the di- panel may have a cover. console ››› Fig. 182 in which there may be a rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 183. 12 volt power socket ››› page 177. To open, press the button on the cover To close, lower the central armrest. ››› Fig. 181 (arrow). WARNING To close, press the cover down until it clicks into place. The centre armrest may limit the freedom of movement of the driver's arm and cause a serious accident. ● Keep the centre armrest compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING The centre armrest is not designed for children to sit on!

171 Operation

Card compartment* Glove compartment Press the cover upwards to close.

Vehicle wallet compartment The glove compartment is designed to store the vehicle documentation. The vehicle on-board documentation wallet should always be kept in the glove compartment. Insert it crosswise in the glove compartment.

Fig. 184 Lower part of the centre console: Glove compartment cooling space for cards. Fig. 185 Glove compartment There is an air vent ››› Fig. 186 A on the rear To the bottom of the centre console there is a panel so that cooled air from the air condi- compartment ››› Fig. 184 1 for coins, cards, tioner (this must be connected) is fed into the car park tickets and similar items. glove compartment. Turn the air vent to open and close it. Note WARNING To avoid theft or use by others, do not use the compartment to store credit or ATM The risk of serious injuries in the event of an cards or similar. accident during a sudden braking manoeuvre or turn is increased if the glove compartment is left open. ● Keep the glove compartment closed Fig. 186 Glove compartment open while the vehicle is in motion.

Opening and closing the glove compart- CAUTION ment For structural reasons, some model ver- Unlock the glove compartment where neces- sions will have gaps behind the glove com- sary. The glove compartment is locked when partment into which small objects may fall. the key slot is vertical. This could lead to strange noises and dam- Pull the handle to open ››› Fig. 185. age to the vehicle. You should therefore not

172 Transport and practical equipment

keep very small objects in the glove com- ● If you are using a child seat with a base or There may be a drawer below the front seats. partment. foot, always install this base or foot correctly and safely. Opening and closing the drawer ● If the vehicle has a storage compartment To open, press the button on the drawer han- Storage compartments in the rear in the footwell in front of the last row of dle and pull the drawer out. seats, this compartment cannot be used as footwell* designed; on the contrary, it must be filled To close, push the drawer under the seat until using the specially designed accessory so it clicks into place. that the base or foot is correctly supported by the closed compartment and the child WARNING seat is secured properly. If this compart- If the drawer is open it could obstruct use ment is not suitably secured when using a of the pedals. This could result in serious child seat with a base or foot then the com- accident. partment cover could rupture in an acci- ● The drawers must remain closed while dent and the child will be ejected and suf- the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the fer serious injury. drawer and any objects in it could fall into ● Please read and observe the child seat the driver's footwell and obstruct the ped- manufacturer's handling instructions. als.

Fig. 187 Storage compartments in the footwell Drawers* Folding table* of the second row of seats.

Move the mat to one side (where applicable). To open, pull on the rear centre part of the cover ››› Fig. 187 (arrow). To close, press the cover down.

WARNING Make sure children are properly belted in and correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion. Fig. 188 Drawer under the front seat Fig. 189 Folding table on the front seat »

173 Operation

Fold out the table by pulling on it ››› Fig. 189 WARNING (arrow). Do not use the portable waste bin as an A drink holder is built into the folding table ashtray to avoid the risk of fire. ››› page 175. To fold it back, push the folding table down as far as possible ››› Fig. 189. Other storage compartments

WARNING The folding table must not be folded down while the vehicle is in motion to avoid the Fig. 192 Other compartments in the boot floor. risk of injuries. Side compartments in the luggage compartment Portable waste bin* There are other compartments ››› Fig. 191 1 and 2 in the side of the boot. To open the compartment 1 , turn the catch clockwise. To open the compartment 2 , lift the cover. Compartment 1 houses the factory fitted CD changer. The compartment lid 1 can Fig. 191 In the boot: lateral storage compart- safely store the tray support covers. ment. Compartments in the boot floor More storage compartments can be found in the boot floor.

Fig. 190 Left sliding door trim: portable waste Function Necessary operations bin. Open the rear com-  Lift the rear of the boot partment ››› Fig. 192 The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle floor using the handle. holder on the trim of the left-hand sliding 4 : door.

174 Transport and practical equipment

Function Necessary operations Note WARNING

 Move the hook at the rear The first aid kit is located in the rear left Closed bottles inside the vehicle could ex- Keeping the rear right of the boot and hook compartment of the luggage compart- plode or crack due to the heat or the cold. compartment open: the boot floor onto it ment. ● Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle ››› page 157. if the inside temperature is too high or too  Push back the hook and low. Closing the com- push the rear of the boot partment: Drink holders floor 4 down. CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders Other storage compartments: Introduction when the vehicle is in motion. They could ● in the centre console, front and rear. Bottle holders spill during braking, for example, and cause ● in the door trims, front and rear. damage to the vehicle and the electrical There is a bottle holder in the open compart- system. ● Coat hooks on the central door pillars and ments in the driver and front passenger doors on the rear roof handles. and in that of the sliding door. Note ● Bag hook in the luggage compartment ››› page 157. WARNING The drink holders can be removed for cleaning. Improper use of the drink holders can WARNING cause injury. Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re- ● Never place hot drinks in the drink hold- strict the driver's view and lead to serious ers. During sudden braking or driving ma- accidents. noeuvres, the hot drink could be spilled and lead to scalding. ● Hang the clothes from the hooks so that driver's view is not restricted. ● Ensure that no bottles or other object are dropped in the driver footwell, as they ● The coat hook is suitable for light items of could get under the pedals and obstruct clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp their working. objects in the bags. ● Never place heavy containers, food or other heavy objects in the drink holder. In CAUTION the event of an accident, these heavy ob- Keep the CD changer compartment closed jects could be “thrown around” the vehicle while the vehicle is in motion to reduce vi- interior and cause serious injuries. brations that could damage the changer. 175 Operation

Drink holders in front centre con- Drink holders, rear* Ashtray and cigarette light- sole er*

Ashtray

Fig. 194 Centre console, rear section: extend Fig. 193 Front centre console: drinks holder. the drinks holder.

● To open, move the cover backwards Opening and closing the drink holder in ››› Fig. 193. the rear centre console Fig. 195 Front centre console: ashtray closed. ● To close, move the cover forwards. ● To open, move the drink holder downwards in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 194. There are ashtrays located on the front of the centre console ››› Fig. 195 and on the rear ● To close, lift the drink holder. lining of the rear door. The third row of seats has a drink holder in the side trim compartment on the rear left. Opening and closing the ashtray ● To open, lift the ashtray cover. ● To close, push the ashtray cover down.

Emptying the ashtray ● Remove the ashtray from the drink holder or lining of the door by pulling it upwards. ● After emptying the ashtray, insert it from above into the drink holder or door lining.

176 Transport and practical equipment

WARNING WARNING connected to them can be used when the ignition is switched on. Incorrect use of the ashtray may cause a Undue use of the cigarette lighter may fire or burns and other serious injuries. cause a fire or burns and other serious inju- ● Should a connected electrical device overheat, switch it off and unplug it imme- ● Never put paper or other flammable ob- ries. diately. jects in the ashtray. ● The cigarette lighter must only be used to light cigarettes or similar. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the CAUTION Cigarette lighter vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used ● To avoid damage to the vehicle's electri- when the ignition is switched on. cal system, never connect equipment that generates electrical current, such as solar Note panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt power sockets in order to charge the vehi- The cigarette lighter can also be used with cle's battery. the 12 volt power socket ››› page 177. ● Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility according to current regulations. Power sockets ● To avoid damage due to voltage variations, switch off all devices connected to the 12 V power sockets before switching the Introduction ignition on or off and before starting the en- Fig. 196 Front centre console: lighter. gine. Electrical equipment can be connected to ● Depending on the vehicle equipment, there the power sockets in the vehicle. Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt may be a lighter to the front of the centre power socket that consumes more than the console ››› Fig. 196 or in the compartment to All connected appliances should be in per- power indicated in watts. Exceeding the the front of the centre console. fect working order without any faults. maximum power absorption could damage the vehicle's electrical system. ● Push the button on the cigarette lighter in- WARNING wards with the ignition on ››› Fig. 196. Improper use of the power sockets or elec- For the sake of the environment ● trical devices could lead to a fire and Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly. Do not leave the engine running when the cause serious injuries. ● Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the vehicle is at a standstill. » cigarette on the glowing coil ››› . ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The power sockets and equipment ● Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

177 Operation

Note 12 volt power socket ● Using devices with the engine stopped The 12 volt power socket will only work with and the ignition switched on will drain the the ignition on. battery. Using electrical appliances with the engine ● Unshielded equipment can cause inter- stopped and the ignition switched on will ference on the radio equipment and the ve- drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi- hicle's electrical system. ces connected to the power socket can only ● Interference can occur on the radio's AM be used when the engine is running. waveband if electrical appliances are used To prevent voltage variations from causing near the rear window aerial. Fig. 198 Detailed view of the centre console, damage, switch off the electrical consumer rear section: 230-volt power socket. connected to the 12 volt power socket before switching the ignition on or off and before Vehicle power sockets Depending on your vehicle version, you may starting the engine. have a 12-volt power socket and/or a 230 volt power socket. 12 volt power sockets can be found in the following locations in the vehicle:

Maximum power consumption ● Compartment in the centre of the centre Power Maximum power consump- console. socket tion ● Compartment in the front centre console. ● Storage compartment in the front central 12 Volts 120 Watts armrest. 230 Volts 150 Watts (300 Watt peak) ● Rear centre console ››› Fig. 197. The maximum capacity of each power socket ● At the rear right of the luggage compart- Fig. 197 Centre console, rear section: 12-volt must not be exceeded. The power consump- ment. power socket. tion is indicated on the rating plate of each appliance. 230 Volt Euro power socket* Where two or more appliances are connec- The power socket only works when the en- ted at the same time, the total rating of all the gine is running ››› . connected devices must never exceed 190 Plug in an electronic device: plug the device Watts ››› . into the power socket as far as possible to

178 Transport and practical equipment unlock the built-in childproof lock. The cur- ● Liquids must not be spilt over the power – Where devices have with a high start- rent only flows when the childproof lock is un- socket. up current, surge protection prevents locked. ● Do not plug adapters or extension cords them from switching on. In this case, into the 230 Volt Euro power connector. unplug the device and try plugging it LED on the power socket ››› Fig. 198 Otherwise, the built-in child safety device back in after around 10 seconds. Steady green light: The childproof lock is un- will switch off and the connector will be- locked. The power socket come live. Note can now be used. ● Do not plug current conductors such as a ● Some appliances may not work properly knitting needle into the 230 Volt Euro power Flashing red light: There is some kind of fault in the 230 Volt Euro power connector due connector. (e.g. disconnection due to to a lack of power (Watts). excess current or tempera- ● The 230 Watt Euro power connector can ture). CAUTION be modified for 115 Watt appliances and ● Always follow the operating instructions vice versa. Consult a specialist shop for Heat protection for the appliances to be connected! advice on accessories to adapt the connector. SEAT recommends taking your car The 230 Volt Euro power connector converter ● Never exceed the maximum power rating in for technical service. switches off automatically when a certain as this could damage the vehicle's general temperature is exceeded. This disconnect electrical system. prevents overheating in the event of an in- ● 12 volt power socket: crease in power consumption of the connected appliance and where the atmospheric – Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility accord- temperature is too high. The inverter will ing to current regulations. switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appliances that are switched – Never power the socket. on and connected to the power socket will ● 230 Volt Euro power socket: start up again. Therefore, switch off all elec- – Do not plug in devices or connectors trical appliances connected to the power that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) socket when the current converter switches into the power socket. off due to overheating. – Do not connect lamps which contain a neon tube. WARNING – Only plug appliances with a voltage High voltage in the electrical installation! that matches the power socket voltage into the power socket.

179 Operation

Air conditioning ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- long period of time. If the cooling system is pleasant smell. switched off and air recirculation mode Air conditioning switched on, the windows can mist over Note very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. ● Introduction ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it When the cooling system is turned off, air is not required. coming from the outside will not be dried. Viewing Climatronic information To avoid fogging up the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooler (compressor) The factory-fitted infotainment system screen WARNING on. To do this, press the A/C button. The briefly displays information relating to Clima- Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and button lamp should light up. tronic. reduce driver concentration possibly re- ● If the humidity and temperature outside The units of temperature measurement is dis- sulting in a serious accident. the vehicle are high, condensation can drip played on the factory-installed infotainment ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or off the evaporator in the cooling system system and, depending on the vehicle equip- use the air recirculation for long periods of and form a pool underneath the vehicle, ment, can be set using the Configuration time; the air in the vehicle interior will not this is completely normal and there is no menu on the instrument panel. be refreshed. need to suspect a leak. ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to WARNING CAUTION ensure heating and cooling are not im- Reduced visibility through the windows in- ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think paired, and to prevent the windows from creases the risk of serious accidents. it may be broken. This will avoid additional misting over. ● Ensure that all windows are free of ice damage. Have the air conditioner checked and snow and that they are not fogged up by a specialised workshop. preventing a clear view of everything out- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- Controls side. cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT ● The maximum heat output required to de- recommends taking your car in for techni- Read the additional information carefully frost windows quickly is only available cal service. ›››  page 38 when the engine has reached its normal ● Do not smoke when air recirculation is running temperature. Only drive when you switched on in vehicles with an air condi- To switch a function on or off, press the ap- have good visibility. tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the propriate button. Press the button again to ● Always ensure that you use the air condi- cooling system vaporiser and on the acti- switch off the function. tioner and heated rear window to maintain vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and good visibility.

180 Air conditioning

The LED on each control lights up to indicate Rotary control ● Turn the temperature control to the centre Description that the respective function of a control has ››› Fig. 199 position. been switched on. ● Open and direct all the air outlets in the A Temperature selector Some Climatronic controls may also be on dash panel ››› page 182. the air conditioner control panel located in B Air flow regulator ● Turn the air distribution control to the re- the rear centre console. These controls are quired position. used to make the appropriate settings for the rear seats. Air conditioning user instructions With Climatronic ● Press the AUTO button. Note The interior cooling system only works when ● Set the temperature to +22°C (+72°F). ● Not all Climatronic buttons are opera- the engine is running and fan is switched on. tional in  mode. ● Open and direct all the air outlets in the The air conditioner operates most effectively dash panel ››› page 182. ● The  button is locked in defrost mode. with the windows and the electric sliding panoramic roof closed. However, if the vehi- Climatronic: switching the measuring units cle has heated up after standing in the sun for for temperature on factory-fitted infotain- Controls in the rear seats some time, the air inside can be cooled more ment system installed with the default set- quickly by opening the windows and the slid- tings ing electric panoramic sunroof briefly. Switching the temperature indication from Setting for conditions of optimal visibility Celsius to Fahrenheit on the infotainment system is carried out in the menu on the instru- When the air conditioning is switched on, the ment panel ›››  page 32. temperature and the air humidity in the vehicle interior drop. In this way, when the outside The cooling system does not switch on air humidity is high, the windows do not mist over and comfort for the vehicle occupants is If the air conditioning system cannot be improved. switched on, this may be caused by the following: Fig. 199 Centre console: details of the con- Electronic manual air conditioning ● The engine is not running. trols in the rear seats ● Switch off the air recirculation ››› page 183. ● The fan is switched off. ● Set the fan to the required setting. ● The air conditioning fuse is blown. »

181 Operation

● The outside temperature is lower than ap- Special features Note proximately +3°C (+38°F). If the humidity and temperature outside the After starting the engine, any residual hu- ● The air conditioner compressor has been vehicle are high, condensation can drip off midity in the air conditioner could mist over temporarily switched off because the engine the vaporiser in the cooling system and form the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func- coolant temperature is too high. a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal tion as soon as possible to clear the wind- ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air and does not indicate a leak! screen of condensation. conditioner checked by a specialised workshop.

Air vents

Fig. 200 Air vents in the dash panel

Air vents thumbwheel is in the  position, the corre- There are other air vents that cannot be ad- sponding air vent is closed. justed on the dash panel B , in the footwell Never close the air vents ››› Fig. 200 A completely to ensure heating, cooling and venti- ● Change the air direction using the ventila- and in the rear area of the interior. lation inside the vehicle. tion grille lever. CAUTION ● Turn the thumbwheel in the required direc- Never place food, medicines or other heat- tion to open and close the air vents. When the sensitive objects close to the air vents. 182 Air conditioning

Being heat-sensitive, they may be dam- Switching the recirculation mode on and Switching the automatic air recirculation aged or made unsuitable for use by the air off manually on the Climatronic  mode on and off coming from the air vents. Connect: press the  button until the lamp Connect: press the  button until the right on the button lights up. lamp on the button lights up. Note Disconnect: press the  button until the Disconnect: press the  button until the The air from the vents flows through the ve- lamp on it is not lit up. lamp on it is not lit up. hicle interior and out through the outlets below the rear window. The slots must not Automatic air recirculation mode  Switching the automatic air recirculation be covered with items of clothing or other When in position , fresh air enters the ve- mode off temporarily objects. hicle interior. If the system detects a high con- ● press the  button to temporarily switch centration of hazardous substances in the to manual air recirculation mode in the event ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched of unpleasant smells from outside. The left in- Air recirculation on automatically. When the level of impurities dicator lamp turns on. drops to within a normal range, recirculation ● After more than two seconds, press the  Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient mode is switched off. button again to restart automatic air recircu- air from entering the interior. The system is unable to detect unpleasant lation. The right indicator lamp turns on. When the outside temperature is very high, smells. selecting manual air recirculation mode for a WARNING short period refreshes the vehicle interior With the following outside temperatures and Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- more quickly. conditions the air recirculation does not switch on automatically: duction on page 180. For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● If the cooling system is switched off and switched off when the  button is pressed ● The cooling system is switched on (the AC air recirculation mode switched on, the or the air distributor turned to  ››› . button is lit up) and the outside temperature is windows can mist over very quickly, con- below +3°C (+38°F). siderably limiting visibility. Switching the recirculation mode on and ● The cooling system and the windscreen ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it off manually on the air conditioning (Elec- wipers are switched off and the outside tem- is not required. tronic manual air conditioning)  perature is below +10°C (+50°F). Connect: press the  button until the lamp ● The cooling system is switched off and the CAUTION on the button lights up. outside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F). Do not smoke when air recirculation is Disconnect: press the  button until the The windscreen wiper is switched on. switched on in vehicles with an air condi- lamp on it is not lit up. tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the »

183 Operation

cooling system vaporiser and on the acti- gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people Switching the auxiliary heater on vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and to lose consciousness. It can also cause and off pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- death. pleasant smell. ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or Switching the auxiliary heater on: leave it running in places that are enclosed Note or unventilated. Manually using the instant on/off ››› page  button. 180 Climatronic: air recirculation mode ● Never program the independent heating system to be activated and operated in switches on to prevent exhaust gas from  Manually using the remote control. ››› page entering the vehicle interior when it is in re- closed, unventilated areas. 185 verse and while the automatic windscreen Automatically at the programmed ››› page wipers are working. WARNING and enabled on time. 186 The components of the auxiliary heater exhaust system heat up a great deal. This Switching the auxiliary heater off: Auxiliary heater* (additional could cause a fire. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part Manually using the instant ››› page heater) of the exhaust system can come in contact  on/off button for the air condi- 180 tioner. with flammable materials (such as dried grass). Introduction  Manually using the remote con- ››› page trol. 185 The auxiliary heater is powered by fuel from CAUTION the vehicle's fuel tank and can be used while Automatically after the pro- ››› page grammed time. the vehicle is in motion and at a standstill. Se- Never place food, medicines or other heat- 186 sensitive objects close to the air vents. lect the mode required (heat or fan) Food, medicines and other heat-sensitive Automatically, when the  lamp ››› page ››› page 186 on the dash panel. objects may be damaged or made unsuita- (fuel reserve) comes on. 316 ble for use by the air coming from the air In winter, the auxiliary heater can be used in Automatically when the battery ››› page vents. heat mode before switching on the ignition to power drops to a very low level. 334 remove any ice, mist or snow from the windscreen (thin layers only). Special feature WARNING After switching the auxiliary heater off, it continues to run for a short period to completely The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon dioxide, an odourless and colourless toxic

184 Air conditioning burn any fuel remaining in the auxiliary heat- Remote control light Battery light Meaning er. The exhaust gases are also extracted from The remote control light provides users with Fig. 201 B the system. different information at the push of a button: The remote control battery is Flashes orange for flat. The on or off signal has Battery light Meaning around five seconds. not been received, respec- Remote control Fig. 201 B tively.

The auxiliary heater has a) Lights up green for Within its range, the remote control might not re- been switched on using the around two seconds. ceive the signal sent by the vehicle receiver. In this  button. case, the remote control will send an error message whether the auxiliary heater is on or off. Come closer The auxiliary heater has Lights up red for to the vehicle and press the corresponding button on been switched off using the around two seconds. the remote control once again.  button.

Slowly flashes green Replace the battery of the remote control No ona) signal has been re- for around two sec- ceived. If the light ››› Fig. 201 B on the remote con- onds. trol does not come on when the button is The independent heating is pressed, the remote control battery should Fig. 201 Independent heater: remote control. blocked. Quickly flashes soon be replaced. Possible causes: the fuel tank green for around two is almost empty, the battery The battery is located beneath a cover on seconds. Fig. 201 Meaning charge is very low or there is the back of the remote control. Turn the slot a fault.  Switch the auxiliary heater on. to the left using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a Flashes red for No offa) signal has been re- coin). When changing the battery, use anoth- Switch the auxiliary heater off:  around two seconds. ceived. er battery of the same model and observe the polarity when fitting it ››› . A Aerial. The remote control battery is Lights up orange for almost flat. However, the on B Light. around two seconds, Range or off signal has been re- then green or red. ceived, respectively. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The auxiliary heater may accidentally switch The remote control, when fitted with new bat- on if a button is pressed on the remote control Lights up orange for The remote control battery is teries, has a range of several hundred metres. by mistake. This may also occur outside the around two seconds, almost flat. The on or off sig- Obstacles between the remote control and » range of the remote control or if the light then flashes green nal has not been received, or red. respectively. flashes.

185 Operation

the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- Programming the auxiliary heater Menu op- Description charged batteries can considerably reduce tions the range of the remote control. The heater or ventilation inside the vehicle can be programmed for a certain period. Three different timers (hh.mm) can An optimum range is obtained by keeping the later be selected using the On op- remote control vertical, with the aerial Before programming, check that the day is Timer 1 tion. If the auxiliary heater is to be ››› Fig. 201 A pointing upwards. When doing correctly set in the Auxiliary heater - Timer 2 switched on for just a certain day of so, do not cover the aerial with your fingers or day of the week menu ››› . Timer 3 the week, select the day of the week with the palm of your hand. and the time for the auxiliary heater to come on. There must be a minimum distance of 2 me- Enabling the Auxiliary heater menu on tres between the remote control and the ve- the instrument panel The operating time may vary be- Duration tween 10 and 60 minutes and can ● hicle. From the main menu, select the Auxiliary be set to 5-minute intervals. heater submenu and press the OK button Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle CAUTION on the windscreen wiper lever. Operating interior when the auxiliary heater is mode ● The radio frequency remote control con- ● OR: press the  or  arrow buttons on the switched on. tains electronic components. Therefore, multifunction steering wheel until the Auxil- avoid getting it wet and being knocked and iary heater menu is displayed. Day Set the current day of the week. protect it from direct sunlight. The predefined factory values for Factory ● Use of inappropriate batteries may dam- Menu op- the functions of this menu are re- Description settings age the remote control. For this reason, al- tions stored. ways replace the used battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifica- The auxiliary heater can be set to Back This returns to the main menu. come on automatically if required. tions. To do so, select a timer: – The timer is displayed marked with Checking programming For the sake of the environment a . If the timer has been switched on after Switching – Only one timer can be selected. If switching the ignition off, the light on the  ● Please dispose of old batteries so that on a timer has been selected, Prog. button will remain lit for around 10 seconds. they do not harm the environment. Switching ON will be displayed on the screen. If ● The remote control battery may contain off no timer has been selected, the instrument panel display will show WARNING perchlorate. Observe the legal require- Prog. OFF. Never program the independent heating ments for their disposal. – To change a programmed timer system to be activated and operated in you must either select a different timer or select Disable. closed, unventilated areas. The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon dioxide, an

186 Air conditioning

odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon When will the auxiliary heater will not monoxide can cause people to lose con- switch on? sciousness. It can also cause death. ● The auxiliary heater requires about as much power as the dipped beam headlights. If the battery charge is low, the auxiliary heat- Operating instructions er will switch off automatically or will not even switch on. This avoids problems when The auxiliary heater exhaust system located starting the engine. below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, ● The heater will switch on just once each mud and other objects. The exhaust gases time. The timer will also have to be switched must not be obstructed in any way. The ex- back on every time it is required. haust gases generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted un- Note derneath the vehicle. ● Noise will be heard while the auxiliary On heating the vehicle interior, depending on heater is running. the outside temperature the warm air is first ● When the air humidity is high and the out- directed at the windscreen and then to the side temperature low, the heating system rest of the vehicle interior through the air may evaporate condensation from the aux- vents. If the air vents are turned towards the iliary heater. In this case, steam may be re- windows, for example, the form of air distribu- leased from underneath the vehicle. This is tion may be affected. completely normal and there is no need to suspect a fault! Depending on the outside temperature, the ● temperature at which the auxiliary heater If the auxiliary heater runs several times over a prolonged period, the vehicle bat- warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat tery may run flat. To re-charge the battery, higher if the heating or air conditioner tem- drive the vehicle for a long distance. As a perature control is set to maximum before general rule, drive for as much time as the switching the heating on. auxiliary heating was working. Depending on the engine, vehicles with auxiliary heater may be fitted with a second battery in the luggage compartment that is responsible for powering the auxiliary heater.

187 Infotainment System

Infotainment System WARNING panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between The driving recommendations and traffic these areas and the occupants. External indications shown on the navigation system devices can cause serious injury in an acci- Introduction may differ from the current traffic situation. dent, especially when the airbags inflate. ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have Safety warnings priority over the recommendations and displays provided by the navigation system. WARNING Safety instructions for the Infotain- ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- er's arm movements, which could cause an ment system tions. accident and severe injuries. ● Always keep the armrest closed while the WARNING WARNING vehicle is in motion. Distracting the driver in any way can lead Connecting, inserting or removing a data to an accident and cause injuries. Operat- medium while driving can distract your at- WARNING ing the Infotainment system can distract tention from the traffic and cause an acci- your attention from the traffic. Opening a CD player's housing can lead to dent. injuries from invisible laser radiation. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. ● Have CD players repaired only by quali- ● Select volume settings that allow you to WARNING fied workshops. easily hear signals from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens Connecting leads for external devices may and horns). obstruct the driver. CAUTION ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high ● Arrange the connecting leads so that The Infotainment system can be damaged a volume setting, even if only for short peri- they do not obstruct the driver. by the incorrect insertion of a data storage ods of time. device or the insertion of an incompatible WARNING data storage device. ● When inserting a data storage device, WARNING External devices that are loose or not prop- make sure it is correctly positioned The volume level may suddenly change erly secured could move around the pas- ››› page 199. when you switch audio source or connect a senger compartment during a sudden driv- new audio source. ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident ● Applying force may irreparably damage and cause damage or injury. the SD card slot locking mechanism. ● Lower the base volume before connecting or switching the audio source. ● Never place or fit external devices to the ● Only use suitable SD cards. doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash

188 Introduction

● When inserting and removing CDs, al- Note ways hold them at right angles to the front For the proper functioning of the Infotain- of the CD drive without tilting so as not to ment system it is important that the date scratch them page 199. ››› and time set in the vehicle are correct. ● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is already in the unit or being ejected, the DVD drive may be irreparably damaged. Always wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTION Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage device and non-round media may damage the CD player. ● Only use clean, standard 12-cm CDs. – Do not affix stickers or other items to the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive. – Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off and damage the CD drive. – Do not insert 8-cm single CDs or irregularly shaped or non-round CDs. – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker than normal CDs.

CAUTION The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distorted.

189 Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Colour

Fig. 202 Overview of the controls The infotainment system is available in different versions that may have different titles and functions of some buttons.

1 Volume. Off/on ››› page 193 – MUTE : Mute the sound from the audio 2 Infotainment buttons: source ››› page 193. – RADIO : Radio Mode (change of band – SETUP : Menu and system settings. frequency ››› page 198. – SOUND : Sound and volume settings. – MEDIA : Media mode (audio sources) 3 Touchscreen ››› page 193. ››› page 199. 4 CD drive ››› page 199. – EJECT : Eject the CD ››› page 199. 5 Settings button (search and selection) – PHONE : Phone mode ››› page 225. 6 Slot for SD cards ››› page 199 7 AUX-IN multimedia socket: ››› page 199. 190 Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 203 Overview of the controls The infotainment system is available in different versions that may have different titles and functions of some buttons

1 Volume. Off/on ››› page 193 – NAV : Navigation Mode ››› page 215. 7 Proximity sensor: ››› page 196. 2 Infotainment buttons: – SETUP : Menu and system settings. – RADIO : Radio Mode (change of band – TRAFFIC : Traffic reports ››› page 222. frequency ››› page 198. – SOUND : Sound and volume settings. – MEDIA : Media mode (audio sources) – MENU : Selecting the main menu ››› page 199. ››› page 192. – PHONE : Phone mode ››› page 225. 3 Touchscreen ››› page 193. – VOICE : Voice control. 4 CD drive ››› page 199. – MUTE : Mute the sound from the active 5 Settings button (search and selection) audio source. ››› page 193. – EJECT : Eject the CD ››› page 199. 6 Slot for SD cards ››› page 199.

191 Infotainment System

Menu summary

The Infotainment system display ››› Fig. 203 3 can be used to select the different main menus.

Press the Infotainment MENU button to open the menu summary.

Function button: operation and effect

Radio ››› page 198, Radio Mode. Media ››› page 199, Media Mode. Tele- ››› page 225, Phone management phone system (PHONE)*.

Naviga- ››› page 215, Navigation*. tion

Traffic ››› page 222, Traffic bulletins and dynamic route guidance (TRAFFIC).

Full Link ››› page 206, Full Link*. Images ››› page 206, Images main menu.

Sound –

Setup –

192 Introduction

General instructions for use Rotary infotainment push knobs system switches off automatically. If the Info- and keys tainment system is switched on again, it will switch off automatically after approximately Introduction Rotary/push knobs 30 minutes (switch-off delay).

If the setup is changed, this may change the The left-hand rotary knob  ››› Fig. 203 1 is Note display on the screen and in some cases, the the volume control or the on/off button. Infotainment system may behave in a manner ● The Infotainment system is a part of the The right-hand rotary knob Fig. 203 5 is different to that described in this manual. ››› vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- the setup button. cle. Note ● If the battery has been disconnected, ac- Infotainment buttons tivate the ignition before switching on the ● Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly Infotainment system. pressing the touchscreen is sufficient to The infotainment buttons are shown in this in- operate the Infotainment system. struction manual with the title “Infotainment button” and a symbol with a blue title, for in- ● Not all listed function buttons and func- stance, infotainment button MEDIA tions described may be available due to Change base volume Fig. 203 2 . the device software used in your market. ››› The equipment is not faulty if a function The Infotainment System buttons are used by Changes in volume are indicated by a “vol- button is missing from the screen. pressing them or pressing and holding. ume bar” on the screen. During that time, no ● Due to country-specific legislation, cer- operations can be performed with the Info- tain functions may not be available on the tainment system. screen when the vehicle is travelling above Switching on and off It is possible to preset certain volume settings a certain speed. and adjustments. ● Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle To manually switch the Infotainment system may cause noise from the vehicle loud- on and off, briefly press the rotary knob  Turn volume up speakers. ››› Fig. 203 1 . ● Turn the volume control  clockwise. ● Restrictions on the use of devices using When switching on, the system starts-up with ● Bluetooth® technology may apply in some OR: Rotate the left wheel on the multi-func- the last set volume, provided that this does countries. For further information, contact tion steering wheel upwards. not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- the local authorities. ume. Turn volume down Depending on the equipment and country, ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise. » when switching off the engine or removing the key from the ignition, the infotainment 193 Infotainment System

● OR: Rotate the left wheel on the multi-func- Operation of the function buttons Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- tion steering wheel downwards. and the instructions on the screen lected.

Mute sound Increase or decrease the size of the im- ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise ages displayed on the screen until it displays . The size of the pictures on the image view ● OR: press the Infotainment MUTE 1) button. ››› page 199 and, for instance, the display of the navigation map ››› page 215 that can be Muting the Infotainment system sound stops zoomed in or out. To do so, enlarge or reduce the media source that is playing. The screen the image displayed by moving two fingers. displays . Overview of screen and function buttons Note Display and function buttons: operation If the base volume has been considerably Fig. 204 Overview of some of the function but- and effect increased to play a certain audio source, tons on the screen. lower the volume again before switching to The title bar shows the selected menu and, 1 another audio source. The Infotainment system comes equipped where applicable, other function buttons. with a touchscreen Fig. 203 3 . ››› 2 Press it to open another menu. Active areas of the screen that call up a cer- Mobile crosshair: Move the crosshair tain function are called “function buttons”. around the screen by pressing lightly and These buttons are operated by briefly press- without lifting the finger. ing the screen or by pressing and holding. The function buttons appear in the instruc- OR: To move the crosshair to a particular position, press that spot on the screen. tions with the label “function button” and a button symbol . 3 Fixed crosshair: Move the area below the crosshair around the screen by pressing Function buttons start functions or open sub- lightly and without lifting the finger. menus. The currently selected menu is displayed in the title bar ››› Fig. 204 1 of the OR: Press the desired position on the screen; the position is centred around the submenus. crosshair.

1) Depends on the device. 194 Introduction

Display and function buttons: operation Open list entries and search in lists ● Briefly press the screen above or below the and effect scroll marker. ● OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker The mobile bar is shown when a list has and without lifting it, move it around the more entries than the amount that can be 4 screen. Lift your finger off the screen when displayed on the screen ››› page 195, Open list entries and search in lists. you reach the desired position. ● OR: Place your finger in the centre of the Press it on some lists to move up a level, one  screen and without lifting it, move it around by one. the screen. Lift your finger off the screen Press to return from the submenus one at a when you reach the desired position.  time to the main menu or to undo the entries made.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens Fig. 205 Possible entries on a setup menu list. Input masks with on-screen keypad  (options window) which displays other setup options. The entries on a list can be activated by Some functions or messages are accompa- pressing them on the screen directly or by us-  /  nied by a check box and are activated  or ing the adjustment button ››› Fig. 203 5 . deactivated  by pressing said check box. Mark list entries using the setup button OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection. and open them × Press to close a pop-up window or an input ● Turn the setup button to mark the entries on window. the list with a rectangle one by one and con- Press them to change the setup adjust- tinue searching the list in this manner.  /  ments one at a time. ● Press the setup button to activate the Move the slider around the screen by press- marked entry on the list. Fig. 206 Text input in entry mask.  ing it lightly and without lifting your finger. Search lists (scrolling the screen) Input windows with on-screen keypad are used for functions such as entering an entry If more entries than the amount that can be name, selecting a destination address or en- displayed on the screen can be selected tering a search term for searching long lists. from a list, a movable bar will be displayed right of the image ››› Fig. 205 1 . The function buttons listed below are not available in all countries or for all topics. »

195 Infotainment System

Subsequent chapters only explain those Overview of the function buttons Function button: operation and effect functions that differ from those in the screen shown in the figure. Function button: operation and effect Press to delete characters in the input line from right to left. The input line with cursor is located in the top Zip code a): Press this button to enter a zip  left bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed code in the Navigation mode. Press and hold to delete several characters. here. 123 : Press this button to open the num- 1 ber and special character input screen.  Press to close the input window. Input windows for “free text input” ABC : Press this button to go back to the a) This depends on the country and unit in question. In the input masks for open text, you may en- letter input screen. ter letters, numbers and special characters in Press this button to change the keypad any combination. 2 language. Keypad languages can be selected from the menu system setup. Proximity sensors Press the OK function button to accept the character sequence entered. Displays the number and opens the list of The Infotainment system is equipped with an 3 remaining selectable entries that match integrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 203 7 . Input windows for selecting a saved entry the entered text. The image on the screen changes from dis- (e.g. selection of a destination address) Letters Press them to copy them into the input play mode to automatic operation when your and dig- It is only possible to select a sequence of let- line. hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the its ters, numbers and special characters that function buttons are automatically highligh- matches a stored entry. Hold and press to display a pop-up win- ted to facilitate their use. dow with the special characters based Suggestions for matching stored destinations Depending on the device, the proximity sen- Letters on said letter. appear depending on the characters entered sors can be enabled or disabled in the Dis- and  in the input line. In the case of compound Press the desired character to enter it. play settings menu. names, it is necessary to enter a space. Some special characters can be written out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”). If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries, Press this button to change between up- the number of remaining entries is displayed  Additional information and display percase and lowercase. after the input line ››› Fig. 206 3 . Pressing options this function button displays these remaining  Press to enter a space. entries in a list. If there are less than 6 desti- The displays appearing on the screen may Press this button to confirm the sugges- nations remaining, the list opens automatical- Accept vary depending on the settings, and may dif- ted input and close the input screen. ly., fer from those described here.

196 Introduction

The status bar on the screen can display, for example, the current time and outside temperature. All displays can be viewed only after completely restarting the Infotainment system.

197 Infotainment System

Audio and Media Mode Opening the RADIO main menu Function button: function Press the Infotainment RADIO button. This function button is only available Radio Mode when automatic playback is on. RADIO main menu function buttons SCAN Press setting button ››› Fig. 203 4 RADIO Main Menu Function button: function to start automatic playback.

To select the desired frequency Preset buttons to store stations 1 1 to 15 band. ››› page 199. To change the preset key group us- 2 To update the station list (frequency ing the function button.  band AM or DAB). Sort the FM station list. a) This depends on the country and unit in question. Alphabetically  : The station list is 3 sorted alphabetically. Possible indications and symbols

Group  : The station list is sorted by Display: Meaning station groups. View the frequency or the name of the sta- Opens the list of currently receivable Fig. 207 RADIO main menu.  Stations tion and, where applicable, the radio text. radio. The name of the radio station and the ra- Opens the adjusted frequency band  Manual A dio text will only be displayed if RDS is range. available and enabled.

Shows additional services. The func- The display name of the station can be  Viewa) tion button is only available in DAB set. mode. The Radio Data System (RDS) is deactiva- RDS Opens the settings menu of the ac- ted. The RDS can be activated in the FM Setup Offa)  tive frequency band. setup menu.

To change between stored stations The TP function is active and can be tuned TPa) or available stations. in.  /  Adjustment of the arrow buttons in No Fig. 208 Radio Mode: station list. There is no traffic news station available. the menu. TPa)

198 Audio and Media Mode

Display: Meaning In the RADIO main menu, you can store sta- Media Mode tions from all available frequency wave-  The radio station is stored on a preset but- lengths on 15 numbered function buttons. ton. These function buttons are called “preset Introduction buttons”. a) DAB not available. “Media sources” are audio sources containing audio files on various different data stor- Functions of the preset buttons a) This depends on the country and unit in question. age devices (e.g. CDs, SD cards, external Press the preset button corre- MP3 players). These audio files can be Note sponding to the desired station. played by the Infotainment system via their ● Bear in mind that being in underground Selecting the The stored stations can only be corresponding drives or audio input sockets parking lots, in tunnels, in areas with tall station from the played by pressing the corre- (internal CD drive, SD card slot, AUX-IN multi- buildings or mountains can interfere with preset buttons sponding preset button provided it media socket etc.). radio signals. can be received at your current location. ● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to Copyright the windows may affect reception on vehi- Press one of the function buttons Audio and video files on data storage devices cles with a window aerial. ››› Fig. 209 1 . are usually protected by intellectual property OR: Slide your finger right to left rights, as per the corresponding national and Change the or the other way around on the international laws. Be aware of the current le- preset button screen. Preset buttons group gal provisions! The preset buttons are shown in groups of 5 function buttons ( 1 to Note 5 , 6 to 10 and 11 to 15 ). ● Do not use memory card adapters. Storing the sta- See: Storing stations. ● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- tion on the pre- ration or loss of files on data storage devi- set buttons ces. Storing the sta- A station logo can be assigned to tion logo on the the stations stored on the preset preset buttons buttons.

Fig. 209 RADIO main menu.

199 Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu Function buttons of the Media main menu Function button: function

Function button: function Press it to change mode.

Indicates the media source being : To repeat the current track. played. Press to select another media source ››› page 201. : To repeat all tracks.  CD : Internal CD drive ››› page 201.  Repeats all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being SD card 1 ,  SD card 2 *: SD card played now. If in the Media Settings ››› page 202. menu the  Mix/Repeat including subfolders option 1  USB 1 and  USB 2 *: External data is enabled, it also includes the subfold- storage device connected to a USB port ers. ››› page 203. Fig. 210 MEDIA main menu. Random play. The  function button  AUX : External audio source connected changes to  Using the MEDIA main menu, different media to the AUX-IN multimedia socket Includes all the tracks that are on the sources can be selected and played. ››› page 204. same memory level as the track being  BT Audio : Bluetooth® audio  played now. If in the Media Settings ● Press the MEDIA button on the Infotainment ››› page 205. menu the system to open the MEDIA main menu  Mix/Repeat including subfolders option ››› Fig. 210.  Selec- Opens the track list. is enabled, it also includes the subfold- tion ers. It will continue playing the last media source selected from the same point. Change track in Media mode.  /  The media source being played is indicated Playback stops. The  function button on the dropdown list when the 1 function  changes to  . button is pressed. Playback is resumed. The  function If there is no Media source available, the ME-  button changes to  . DIA main menu is displayed. Opens the menu Media Settings.  Set- up

200 Audio and Media Mode

Indications and symbols of the MEDIA Changing the Media source Function button: Media source main menu  SD card 1 Display: Meaning SD card ››› page 202.  SD card 2* Display track information (CD text , ID3 label in MP3 files).  USB 1 External data storage device connected to the USB port Audio CD: Displays the track and track  USB 2* ››› page 203. number, according to the order on the data A storage device. External audio source connected  AUX to the AUX-IN multimedia socket Audio files: Displays the name of the artist, ››› page 204. the name of the album and the track if available.  BT Audio Bluetooth® audio ››› page 205.

Displays the album cover if available in the Fig. 211 MEDIA main menu. B data storage device. Note ● From the MEDIA main menu, press the The Media source can be changed in the The progress bar and the playing time so far and time remaining in minutes and seconds. MEDIA Infotainment button repeatedly to cy- Track list view. cle through the available media sources. VBR: In the case of audio files with variable C ● bit rates the remaining time may vary. OR: From the MEDIA main menu, press the ››› Fig. 211 1 function button and select the Inserting and ejecting a CD Press the progress bar or press it and move it desired Media source. to skip to a different part of the track. The driver should refrain from operating the The pop-up window displays unavailable infotainment system while the vehicle is in Media sources (greyed out). motion. Insert or change the data storage de- When a Media source that has already been vice before moving off! played is selected again, playback is re- The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio sumed from the point at which it ended. data CDs.

Media sources that can optionally be se- Inserting a CD lected ● Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. Function button: Media source ● Insert the CD into slot ››› Fig. 203 4 of the  CD Internal CD drive ››› page 201. drive to the point where it is drawn in automatically. » 201 Infotainment System

● Once entered, playback starts automati- ● If after inserting a number of different If an SD card cannot be inserted, make sure it cally. CDs and receiving the CD drive error ev- is positioned correctly and is compatible with ery time, contact a qualified workshop. the unit. Ejecting a CD Playback does not start automatically if To prevent thefts in convertible vehicles, the there are audio files stored in the SD card and key must be in the ignition to eject a CD (anti- Inserting or ejecting an SD card they can be read. theft protection). The driver should refrain from operating the Ejecting the SD card1) ● Press the EJECT ››› Fig. 203 2 button. infotainment system while the vehicle is in The inserted SD cards must be prepared for ● The CD in the drive will be ejected and motion. Insert or change the data storage de- ejection. must be removed within approximately vice before moving off! 10 seconds. ●  Only compatible audio files are displayed. In the MEDIA main menu, press the Setup button to open the Media Settings menu. If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it Other files are ignored. is automatically retracted for security rea- ● OR: Press the infotainment MENU button sons without activating the CD mode. Inserting the SD card1) and then press Setup to open the System settings menu. Left SD card slot: Illegible or faulty CD ● Press the Remove safely function button and Enter a compatible SD card with the corner  If the data on an inserted CD cannot be read then SD Card . After correctly ejecting the cut upwards and the title on the left (the con- data storage device from the system, the or a defective CD is inserted, the correspond- tact surfaces pointed to the right) in the left ing warning appears on screen. function button becomes inactive (grey col- SD card slot ››› Fig. 203 6 until it clicks. our). Note Right SD card slot: ● Press the inserted SD card. The SD card “jumps” to the eject position. ● Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra- Enter a compatible SD card with the corner tions can cause playback to jump. cut downwards and the title on the right (the ● Remove the SD card. ● When the temperature inside the info- contact surfaces pointed to the left) in the tainment unit is too high, loading and play- right SD card slot ››› Fig. 203 6 until it clicks. back of CDs is disabled.

1) The number of slots for SD cards depends on the country and device in question. 202 Audio and Media Mode

Illegible SD card Playback does not start automatically if ● OR: Press the infotainment MENU button If the data on an SD card cannot be read, a there are audio files stored and readable in and then press Setup to open the System warning will be displayed on the infotainment the SD card. settings menu. system. Further operation of the external data medi- ● Press the Remove safely function button and then USB . After correctly ejecting the data The infotainment system switches to the last um (changing track, selecting tracks and storage device from the system, the function source selected. playback modes) is described in the appropriate chapters of this manual ››› page 199. button becomes inactive (grey colour). Note ● Now the data storage device can be dis- Instructions and restrictions connected. The navigation SD card may not be used as memory storage for other files. The Info- The number of USB ports  and the compat- Unreadable data storage device tainment system will not recognise the files ibility with Apple™ devices and other media saved on it. players depend on the unit. If a data storage device with unreadable data The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- is connected, the infotainment system display age of 5 volts for a USB connection. will show a warning. External data storage device in the Due to the large number of different data Note USB port storage devices and various iPod™, iPad™ ● If an external Media player is connected and iPhone™ generations available, it is not ® Depending on the country and device, there through Bluetooth and USB at the same possible to guarantee fault-free operation of  might be one or several USB ports  in the time to the infotainment system, the all functions described here. ® vehicle. Bluetooth audio connection is automati- Take into account all other instructions and cally disconnected.  The location of the USB ports depends on limitations regarding requirements for media ● If a connected device is not recognised, the vehicle in question ››› page 112. sources. disconnect all the connected devices and Audio files on an external data storage device try connecting the device again. connected to the USB port  can be played Disconnecting ● Do not use SD card adaptors, USB exten- and controlled via the Infotainment system. Connected data storage devices must be sion cords or USB hubs! Where this manual refers to external data prepared before their disconnection in order ● Read and bear in mind the manufactur- storage devices, this means USB mass stor- to remove them. er's instruction manual for the external data storage device. age devices containing supported audio files, ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the Setup  such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks. button to open the Media Settings menu. Only compatible audio files are displayed. Other files are ignored. 203 Infotainment System

External audio source connected to The location of the AUX-IN ports  depends Information on operating an external au- the AUX-IN multimedia socket  on the vehicle in question ››› page 112. dio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket In order to connect the external audio source to the AUX-IN socket, a suitable cable is re- Meaning Function quired with a 3.5 mm jack that is inserted into the AUX-IN socket of the vehicle. Selection of another The external audio source audio source from the continues to run in the The connected external audio source is Infotainment system. background. played over the vehicle speakers and cannot Stopping playback on be controlled via the Infotainment system The infotainment system the external audio remains in the AUX menu. controls. source. The connection of an external audio source is indicated by AUX on the screen ››› Fig. 213. Note ● Please read and observe the manufac- Fig. 212 MEDIA main menu. Connecting an external audio source to turer's instruction manual for the external the AUX-IN multimedia socket audio source. ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment ● Interference noise may be heard if the ex- system. ternal audio source is powered from the 12- ● Connect the external audio source to the volt power socket of the vehicle. AUX-IN multimedia socket. ● Start playback on the external audio source. ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the ››› Fig. 212 1 function button and select AUX . Fig. 213 Media Mode: external audio source The output volume of the connected exter- connected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket. nal audio source should be adjusted to the Depending on the country and device, there volume of the other audio sources. might be one or several AUX-IN sockets  in the vehicle.

204 Audio and Media Mode

Connecting an external audio ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment started or stopped when the unit is switched ® source through Bluetooth® system. to Bluetooth Audio mode or to a different au- ● Press the Infotainment MEDIA button. dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or change the track via the Infotainment system. ● Press the ››› Fig. 214 1 function button and  select BT Audio . Note ● Press Search for new device in order to pair ● Due to the large number of possible Blue- an external Bluetooth® audio source for the tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to first time. guarantee fault-free operation of all de- ● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audio scribed functions in all sources. source from the list. ● Always switch off the warning and serv- ● OR: Establish the connection through the ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audio Bluetooth Settings menu. source, e.g. key tones on a mobile telephone, to prevent possible interference ● Please refer to the instructions on the Fig. 214 MEDIA main menu. noise and malfunctions. screen of the Infotainment system and on the ® ® ● Depending on the device, the Bluetooth ® Bluetooth audio source regarding the rest of Bluetooth Audio mode allows you to listen to audio connection is interrupted automati- ® the procedure. audio files being played on a Bluetooth au- cally when connecting an external Media dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec- ® You may still need to manually start playback player through Bluetooth and the USB port ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue- on the Bluetooth® source.  at the same time with the infotainment tooth®) over the vehicle speakers. system. When playback on the Bluetooth® audio Conditions source is stopped, the Infotainment system remains in Bluetooth® Audio mode. ● The Bluetooth® audio source must support the A2DP Bluetooth® profile. Images Controlling playback ● In the Bluetooth Settings menu, the The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio Introduction to the subject  BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be on. source can be controlled via the Infotainment system depends on the connected Blue- Requirements and formats of compatible Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer tooth® audio source. images ● ® Activate Bluetooth visibility on the external The image files must be stored on a compati- Bluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele- With media players that support the AVRCP ® ble data storage device (e.g., a CD, an SD phone). Bluetooth profile, playback on the Blue- tooth® audio source can be automatically card or a USB device). »

205 Infotainment System

Compatible image formats: age-based navigation ››› page 223, Naviga- Function button: function tion with images. BMP (.bmp) up to 4 megapixels. To continue the playback of a slide- Opening the Images main menu  show. The  function button changes GIF (.gif) up to 4 megapixels. to  . ● Press the MENU button on the Infotainment JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg) up to 64 megapixels (progressive system. Image settings. mode up to 4 megapixels).  Setup ● Afterwards, press the Images function but- PNG (.png) up to 4 megapixels. ton. Zoom in, zoom out, or restore view ● Press the ››› Fig. 215 1 function button to To enlarge or reduce the view of the image select the source where the picture files in displayed: Images main menu question are located. ● Turn the adjustment knob. Function button: function ● OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the Display and selection of the source. screen using 2 fingers.

Only sources with compatible image To zoom in the image displayed: 1 formats can be selected ››› page 205, Requirements and formats of com- ● Press the  function button. patible images.

To rotate the view of the image 90 de-  /  grees to the left or the right. Full Link*  Reset the view of the image. Fig. 215 Images main menu. General information and safety in-  Selec- Opens a list of image files. structions Using the Images menu, image files can be tion viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- To change to the previous or next im- The Full Link menu contains the following in- / show.   age. terfaces: Valid for Discover Media: Image files linked to To stop the playback of a slideshow. ● Apple CarPlay™1) complete address data can be used for im-  The  function button changes to  .

1) Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple Inc. 206 Audio and Media Mode

1) ● Android Auto™ WARNING terfere with sensitive technical and medi- ● 2) cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal- MirrorLink™ Any applications that are not suitable or function or damage to the equipment. Based on the mobile device used, a connec- execute incorrectly may cause damage to tion is established through the corresponding the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. interface. ● SEAT, S.A. only recommends the use of CAUTION the apps that SEAT, S.A. provides for this This way, it is possible to display the contents SEAT, S.A. cannot be held liable for any vehicle. and functions displayed on the mobile device damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor on the Infotainment system display. ● Protect the mobile terminal with its applications from improper use. quality or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insuf- To avoid distracting the driver while driving, ● Never make modifications to the applica- ficient coverage of the network, the loss of only specially adapted applications can be tions. used ››› . data during transmission or the improper ● Follow instructions in the manual for the use of mobile terminals. mobile device. WARNING If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in- Note WARNING correctly secured in the vehicle, it could ● Use of Full Link™ technology may result in move around the passenger compartment The use of applications while driving can high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan. in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre, distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- ● SEAT recommends having a high battery emergency stop or accident, resulting in in- tracting the driver in any way can lead to charge on the device when connected to jury. an accident and cause injuries. Full Link™. ● While driving, mobile terminals must be ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. ● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link™, securely fastened in position, outside the the “Date and time” should be correctly airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed CAUTION configured. away. In areas where special regulations apply or ● SEAT applications are designed to com- the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, municate with the vehicle and interact with the mobile terminal must be switched off at it via the Full Link™ connection, therefore its all times. The radiation produced by the functionality is linked to the mobile device mobile terminal when switched on may in- being connected via USB. »

1) Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc. 2) MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are trademarks of Car Connectivity Consortium LLC. 207 Infotainment System

● You can find further information on the Requirements for Full Link websites to confirm whether your phone technical requirements, compatible devi- is compatible with the system. ces, suitable applications and availability Mirror Link at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers. – Check smartphone compatibility: www.mirrorlink.com/phones – MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher Is Full Link blocked? – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or the CCC must be installed in the device. Android Auto – Check smartphone compatibility. An- droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/ – Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher – Install Android Auto™ app Apple CarPlay – Check smartphone compatibility. Apple Fig. 216 Message on Infotainment system CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay screen. – iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher To unblock this feature, you must obtain the – Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see accessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise, phone settings) a message like this will appear on the screen whenever you select the feature ››› Fig. 216. 3 USB cable connecting car to phone: use the USB cable approved and sup- Fig. 217 Full Link Requirements plied by the phone's official distributor.

1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. 2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

208 Audio and Media Mode

Activation of Full Link 1 Enable data transfer for SEAT apps. What should I do if it does not con- 2 Preferred connection type: Choose be- nect? tween MirrorLink™ or Android Auto™ only for Android™ phones compatible with Restart the mobile device both technologies. For iOS (Apple™) systems, the connection is automatic if the Check the USB cable visually. device is compatible. Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam- 3 Select the device. aged or worn.

Finally, a message will appear stating that Clean the USB ports (device Visually check and vehicle). data transfer will commence when the device that the USB ports is connected. Press OK. Once selected, the are properly con- Try another compatible mo- Fig. 218 Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in- technology compatible with your device can nected. bile device. put. be used. Check that the vehicle and device Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT Authorised Service. Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not Note USB connections are not damaged necessary to establish the connection be- Depending on your smartphone, it may and/or worn. Have the mobile device re- tween the smartphone and Full Link. paired or replace it. have to be unlocked for the connection to Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- occur. Try another compatible mobile device. sary to enable all of the app features1). Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system ● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's USB port using a USB cable ››› Fig. 218. ● On the main menu of the Full Link settings, select:

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve additional charges. Please check the charges with your operator. 209 Infotainment System

Full Link main menu Apple CarPlay™ ● Press the Full Link button. ● Press the Device list ››› Fig. 219 1 button and then select the mobile device from the list of devices.

End connection ● On the Apple CarPlay™ service press the ››› Fig. 220 1 button to access the Full Link main menu. ● Press the ››› Fig. 219 2 button to end the active connection.

Fig. 219 Full Link main menu. Fig. 220 Apple CarPlay™ main menu Special characteristics During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, 1 List of devices : display of connected devi- Apple CarPlay™ prior requirements the following characteristics are applicable: ces. To use Apple CarPlay™ you must meet the 2 Disconnect : disconnect active connec- following requirements: ● Bluetooth connections between mobile de- tion. vices and the Infotainment system are not ● The mobile device must support Apple 3 Settings : Full Link settings. possible. CarPlay™. ● Any active Bluetooth connections are auto- ● The mobile device must be connected to matically terminated. the Infotainment system through USB. ● Operating the phone is only possible through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de- Establish connection scribed in these instructions for the Infotain- If a mobile device is paired for the first time, ment system are not available. follow the instructions on the Infotainment ● The mobile device connected cannot be system display and the mobile device dis- used as a media device on the Media menu. play. ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- ● The prior requirements must be met in order tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga- to use Apple CarPlay™. tion system at the same time. The latest navi- ● Press the MENU infotainment button. gation system launched will terminate the previous one. 210 Audio and Media Mode

● The display of the instrument panel does Android Auto™ ● Select the Android Auto™ connection type not display any turning indications or notifi- on Full Link™ Settings. cations from the phone or other communica- ● The first connection to Android Auto™ must tion media. be done while the vehicle is stationary. ● Press the Device list ››› Fig. 219 1 button Voice control system and then select the mobile device from the ● Press VOICE shortly or  to start the list of devices. voice control system of the Infotainment sys- ● If you are initiating the session using tem. Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo- ● Press VOICE for a while or  to start the bile telephone connects automatically via voice control system of the connected de- Bluetooth™ to the Infotainment system tele- vice. phone and it will not be possible to pair an- Fig. 221 Android Auto™ Menu other mobile telephone via Bluetooth™. Note The information on technical requirements, Android Auto™ Prior Requirements End connection compatible end devices, applications and To use Android Auto™ you must meet the fol- ● On the Android Auto™ service press availability are available on www.ap- lowing requirements: ››› Fig. 221 1 . ple.com/ios/carplay or SEAT Authorised Services. ● The Android Auto™ application must al- ● Select Return to SEAT to access to the ready be downloaded and installed on the Full Link main menu. mobile device. ● Press the ››› Fig. 219 2 button to end the ● The mobile device must support Android active connection. Auto™. Special characteristics ● The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system through USB. During an active Android Auto™ connection, the following characteristics are applicable: Initiating the connection ● Bluetooth connections between other mo- In order to initiate the connection with the bile devices and the Infotainment system are mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- not possible. nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB ● Operating the phone is only possible connection, and to be sure to follow the in- through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™ » structions of the device being paired.

211 Infotainment System

device is connected to the Infotainment sys- MirrorLink™ ● The mobile device must be connected to tem through Bluetooth at the same time, the the Infotainment system via USB. telephone function of the Infotainment sys- ● Depending on the mobile device used, a tem can also be used. suitable application must be installed for the ● An active Android Auto™ device cannot be use of MirrorLink™ on the device. used as a media device on the Media menu. ● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- Establish connection tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation The requirements must be met to use Mirror- system at the same time. The latest naviga- Link™. tion system launched will terminate the previous one. ● Press the MENU button on the Infotainment system. ● The display of the instrument panel does not display any turning indications or notifi- Fig. 222 Function buttons in the general view ● Press the Full Link button. cations from the phone or other communica- of compatible applications. ● Select the MirrorLink™ connection type on tion media. Full Link Settings. ● Press the Device list ››› Fig. 219 1 button Voice control system and then select the mobile device from the ● Press VOICE shortly or  to start the list of devices. voice control system of the Infotainment system. Function buttons and possible messages ● Press VOICE for a while or  to start the Function button: function voice control system of the connected device.  Switch- Terminating the MirrorLink™ connec- ing off tion. Note Press to close the open apps. The information on technical requirements, Fig. 223 Other MirrorLink™ function buttons. Close compatible end devices, applications and  Then press the apps to be closed or Apps the Close all function button to close availability are available on www.seat.com MirrorLink™ prior requirements all the open applications. or SEAT Authorised Services. In order to use MirrorLink™, the following requirements must be met: Press to change to the mobile device  :  screen. ● The mobile device must be compatible with MirrorLink™. 212 Audio and Media Mode

Function button: function Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? Where can I download apps?

®  Setup To open the Full Link™ settings. No. The USB cable supplied with the device should On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink and be used. on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

1 Press to return to the main menu. Is there a navigation option? If Full Link stops working, where can I have it repaired? Press to show the Infotainment Sys- 2 Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link tem on the display. technologies if the technology is available in your If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- country and if you have the Navigation app. er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should Press to hide all function buttons. see your mobile telephone vendor. OR: Press the right setting button What is the difference between using the Full Link 3 system navigator (via telephone) instead of an- Will WhatsApp be certified? Fig. 203 4 to show or hide all ››› other navigator? function buttons. This depends on the technology. Benefits: Daily updates. Press to display all the function but- Issues: data consumption, reception problems. Is MirrorLink® available in my country? 4 tons in the right-hand margin of the screen. Can I send voice messages? Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all the countries and regions where SEAT operates. View other function buttons. With certified apps, you can answer but not send What are the differences between MirrorLink®, 5 The display of other function buttons voice messages. and the number of buttons displayed Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? depend on the mobile device used. What apps are visible while driving? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and The symbol refers to the right setting Depending on the technology: Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies. ® button ››› Fig. 203 4 . – for MirrorLink : SEAT-certified apps and CCC, They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is 6 – for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper- Press the right setting button to show – for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™. ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. or hide all function buttons. Where can I find compatible apps? Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEAT model? Compatible apps can be found on the following links: Frequently asked questions about www.mirrorlink.com/ No, this is not possible. » www.android.com/auto/ Full Link www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

What is the connection method?

USB Cable.

213 Infotainment System

Where can I find more information about Full Link?

If you have any questions, please see our Innova- tion/Connectivity sections on our website: www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- [email protected]

214 Navigation*

Navigation* dense tree canopy, underground car park), in full. Using an old version may lead to errors navigation can still continue using the vehicle during navigation. sensors. Navigation, entry and con- Updating navigation data trol Possible limitations in navigation The current navigation data can be downloa- In areas that are not or are only partially digi- ded from www.seat.com and stored in an SD Introduction tised on the data storage device (e.g. insuffi- card compatible with the unit. cient definition of one-way streets and road Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT, categories), the Infotainment system will still General information S.A. dealerships. attempt to provide route guidance. Using all the data available, the Infotainment The procedure is described on the internet at system calculates the optimum route to the Navigation area and update of navigation www.seat.com. destination. data Using navigation data The destination is defined by entering an ad- Roads and streets are subject to constant dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- change (e.g. new roads, changes to street ● Insert the SD card containing the navigation or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be names and building numbers). Therefore, if tion data ››› page 199. taken into account in the route calculation the navigation data is not updated, then er- ● Do not remove the SD card while testing. (dynamic route guidance ››› page 222). rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid- Wait for the testing icon to disappear. Spoken instructions and visual guidance on ance. If the SD card inserted contains valid naviga- the navigation unit and on the instrument SEAT, S.A. recommends updating navigation tion data, the notification The source con- panel will direct you to your destination. data on a regular basis. Up to date navigation tains a valid navigation database is data can be downloaded from displayed. CAUTION www.seat.com or acquired at a SEAT, S.A. The navigation announcements played dealer. Navigation can start. may be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-date navigation data). CAUTION Updating and using navigation da- Do not remove the SD card while the navi- ta from an SD card gation data is in use. The SD card may be Instructions for navigation irreparably damaged! » The Infotainment system always requires the When the Infotainment system is unable to re- navigation data that is currently valid for this ceive any data from GPS satellites (due to a unit in order to allow all functions to be used

215 Infotainment System

Note The Navigation main menu allows you to se- Function button: function lect a new destination, call up a previously ● Before removing the SD card you must used or stored destination and search for Search for points of interest (e.g. ho- prepare it for ejection ››› page 199. Naviga- points of interest.  POI tels, fuel stations, etc.) within a partic- tion and receipt of TMC bulletins are not ular search area ››› page 220. possible without the SD card. Opening the main Navigation menu To modify or activate or deactivate ● Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is in use. This could ● Press the NAV button on the Infotainment  View the split screen ››› Fig. 224 A damage the memory card! system to open the last menu that was open ››› page 221. in navigation. ● The navigation SD card may not be used Open the Navigation Settings as memory storage for other files. The Info-  Setup menu. tainment system will not recognise the files Navigation main menu function buttons saved on it. and indicators ● SEAT, S.A. recommends only using origi- Function button: function New destination (enter destina- nal SEAT, S.A. SD cards to use navigation data. The use of other SD cards could limit The split screen is displayed tion) A its operation. ››› page 221. Opening menu New destination (entering Messages and function buttons on destination) B the map display ››› page 222. Navigation main menu ● In the Navigation main menu, press the New destination  : To enter a new des- New destination function button . tination ››› page 216. ● Press the Options  function button and se- 1 Route  : During route guidance lect the required type of destination (Ad- ››› page 218. dress, Address, POI or On map).

View the audio source selected (radio 2 Address or Media). After entering a country and a town, you can  My To activate or manage stored destina- start navigating towards the centre of the se- destina- tions ››› page 218. lected town. tions When narrowing down the destination address, please note that every entry restricts  My To create or manage a route Fig. 224 Navigation main menu route ››› page 219. the available range of subsequent selections. For instance, if the street you are looking for is

216 Navigation* not in the postcode area you have selected Function button: function Function button: function in a previous window, you will not be able to find the street at the street selection stage. Select on the map : Points of interest will be Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti- searched around the destination selected on nation. Function button: function the map. To select a destination on the map, press the Edit button. Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga- tion Settings. Country : To select the desired country. Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve- Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point City : To enter the desired city or postcode. hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air- ports) and then the desired entry on the list. of interest. Street : To enter the desired street name. Save : To save the selected point of interest in House number : To enter the desired house number. the destination memory ››› page 218. After starting route guidance Dial number : Establishes a telephone connec- Junction : To select the desired intersection. tion with the number stored for the point of inter- Last destinations : Open the My destinations est. menu page 218. ››› Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point of interest. Start : Start route guidance to the selected address. Search name : To search a point of interest entering Point of interest the name or using synonyms of the categories (e.g. “Sleep” for hotels and hostels). Start the route towards a point of interest. a) This function button is only displayed with route Function button: function guidance activated.

Search area : To select the area in which special des- On the map tinations must be searched. Fig. 225 Route calculation. ● Select the destination on the map and con- Surroundings of the location : Points of interest will firm with OK . After starting route guidance, the route to the be searched around the location. ● OR: Enter the coordinates and confirm with first destination will be calculated. a) Surroundings of the destination : Points of interest OK . will be searched around the destination. The calculation will be performed in accordance with the data selected in the Route On the route a): Points of interest will be searched Function button: function options menu. along the route. Save : To save the selected point of interest in the After starting route guidance, three alterna- Surroundings of the address : Points of interest will destination memory ››› page 218. be searched around the address entered. tive routes will be suggested depending on »

217 Infotainment System

the selected setup ››› Fig. 225. These 3 routes gestion on the route. An additional navigation Function button: function correspond to the selectable route options: announcement is given if the route is recalcu- Cheapest, and Shortest and Fastest. lated due to traffic congestion. New destination/leg : To enter a new destination or a new stopover ››› page 216. During a navigation announcement, you can Route criteria: Meaning change its volume using the button . Route information : View route information for current route. Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculated For other adjustments to the navigation rec- by taking into consideration economic factors. ommendations, see Navigation announce- Save destination : To save the selected destination in the destination memory. Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if a ments settings. detour is necessary. Route : Press to open the route mode Note ››› page 219. Orange route: Shortest route to the destination, even if it takes longer. The route may have unconven- ● If you miss a turning during route guid- Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10 tional sections such as secondary roads. ance and are currently unable to turn back, km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoid keep on driving until the navigation system congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the  ● Select the route desired by clicking on the offers a new route. Route function button and then Cancel congestion ahead . left of the map. ● The quality of the navigation recommendations given by the Infotainment system Once the route has been calculated, the sys- depends on the navigation data available tem gives the first navigation announcement. and any reported traffic problems. My destinations (enter destination) Up to 3 navigation announcements are given before a turn. The stored destinations can be selected from the My destinations menu. ● Press the adjustment knob to listen to the Route last audible navigation instruction. ● Press the My destinations.  function button ● In the Navigation main menu, press the in the main Navigation menu. A navigation announcement informs you Route  function button. when you have reached your “destination”. ● Select the desired function: Store position ,  Destinations or Home . A navigation announcement informing you The Route function button is only displayed that you have reached the “destination area” with route guidance activated. Store position is given if the exact destination cannot be reached because it is located in a non-digi- Function button: function ● By pressing the Store position function button, the entered position is stored as a Flag- tised area. Stopping route guidance : Aborts current route guid- ged destination in the Destination mem- During dynamic route guidance, you re- ance. ory. ceive information about reported traffic con- 218 Navigation*

● Mark the Flagged destination in the If a home address has not yet been stored, an The “starting point” of a route is always the Destination memory. address can be assigned as the home ad- current vehicle position determined by the In- ● Press the Store function button. dress. fotainment system. The “destination” is the end point of a route. “Stopover destinations” The name can be changed in the following Assigning the home address for the first time: are driven to before the destination. input window. Press the  function button to Current position : Press to store the vehicle's current ● Press the My destinations.  function button store the destination. position as the home address. in the main Navigation menu. Address : Press to enter the home address manually. Destinations and contacts ● Select the desired function button (Edit route, New route or Route mem.). ● Select the desired function button. Editing the home address: The home address can be edited in the Naviga- Pop-up window function buttons My route Function button: function tion settings menu.

Latest destinations  : View of destinations for which a Function button: function route has already been started. Edit route a): To edit and store the active route. My route (route mode) Destination memory  : View of destinations stored New route : To create a new route. manually and from imported vCards ››› page 223, Importing vCards (electronic business cards). Route mem. : To Delete, Edit or Start the routes stored. Favourites  : View of destinations stored as favourites. a) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated in the route mode. Contacts  : View contacts that have a stored address (postal address). Function buttons and indications in the New route and Edit route Home address Only one address or position can be stored Function button: function as the home address at any one time. The stored home address can be edited or over- Fig. 226 Details of the route during route guid- : Stopover. written. ance. : Destination. If a home address has already been stored, A Several destinations can be defined in the route guidance will be started to the stored ...: Estimated time of arrival at destination. route mode. A trip with several destinations is home address. known as a “route”. ...: Calculated distance to destination. »

219 Infotainment System

Function button: function Points of interest Selecting a point of interest on the map

Press on the destination to display the function Function button: function buttons. There are several points of interest in the area.  : Delete destination. 1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of interest. B  : To start guidance direct to the selected destination. Destinations that come before the The only point of interest in this zone. Press the selected destination are ignored. 2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest.  : To open the detailed view of the destination in question. Search for a point of interest Available function buttons. In the Navigation main menu, press the New dest.: To add a new destination to the tour. Fig. 227 Points of interest on the map. Points of interest function button .

Destinations: To add a new destination from Press the More points of interest button. The points of interest saved in the navigation My destinations to the tour. data memory are divided into different point Save: To store the created tour in the tour mem- of interest categories. Each point of interest Function button: function C ory. category is assigned a symbol for display on Search area : To select the area in which special des- Start: To start route guidance. the map. tinations must be searched.

Calculatea): To update calculated distance If a database of points of interest has been Surroundings of the location : Points of interest will and estimated arrival time. imported into the Infotainment system, be searched around the location. ››› page 223, Importing Personal POI the Stopb): To stop route guidance to the active Surroundings of the destination a): Points of interest destination. main category Personal POI is also shown. will be searched around the destination.

To move a stopover or a destination to another In the Map settings menu, the categories of On the route a): Points of interest will be searched 1 position on the list. Press and hold to move the points of interest to display on the map can along the route. destination. be configured. Up to 10 categories of points Surroundings of the address : Points of interest will of interest can be selected. a) This function button is only displayed with route be searched around the address entered. guidance activated and when a destination has been Display of points of interest on the map can Select on the map : Points of interest will be added to the tour. be enabled or disabled with the View  searched around the destination selected on b) This function button is only displayed with route ››› page 221 button. the map. To select a destination on the map, guidance activated. press the Edit button.

220 Navigation*

Function button: function Function button: function Split screen

Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve- a) To display the route on the map. hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air- ports) and then the desired entry on the list. To display the destination on the a) Save : To save the selected point of interest in map. the destination memory ››› page 218. Autom. Dial number : Establishes a telephone connec- To select the display format of the Day tion with the number stored for the point of inter- map. est. Night

Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected  Split Press to display the split screen point of interest. screen ››› page 221. Search name : To search a point of interest entering Press to display the categories of the Fig. 228 Split screen displayed. the name or using synonyms of the categories points of interest selected on the (e.g. “Sleep” for hotels and hostels). map. Also see ››› page 220, Points The split screen ››› Fig. 228 A can display a) This function button is only displayed with route of interest. additional information. guidance activated.  POI In the Navigation settings menu, under Map settings you Enable or disable split screen can configure the categories of ● In the Navigation main menu, press the points of interest to display on the View View function button . map. ● Enable the  Split screen button by press- Open the View menu a) This function button can only be displayed with ing . ● route guidance activated. In the Navigation main menu, press the ● Press the ... function button.  the split  View function button . screen to select a display option.

Function button: function To hide the split screen press  .

Map display in two dimensions (con- 2D  ventional). Function button: function

Map display in three dimensions Audio : Indicates the selected audio source. » 3D  (bird's eye view).

221 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function buttons and messages on the can be received at the current location. The map display. station being listened to does not have to be Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav- the traffic news station. To activate function buttons 1 and , press elling direction and indicates the current position of the vehicle (street name). function button 3 . List of available traffic reports a) Manoeuvre : The list of manoeuvres is displayed. Function button: function ● Press TRAFFIC on the infotainment menu to display the list of traffic bulletins. Road signs : Based on the features of the vehicle, the To select automatic scaling. If the function is 1 road signs stored in the navigation data or the road active, the symbol is displayed in blue (). ● Press the  function button and select All signs recognised by the road sign detector are dis- or Route. played. 2 Current altitude indicator.

Sat. data : current vehicle position in coordinates and View map scale ( or ). Rotate the set- Function button: function 3 GPS status (satellite reception). tings button to modify the scale of the map. All : All traffic bulletins received will be displayed. a) This function button is only displayed with route To change the orientation of the map (north- guidance activated.  facing or direction of travel). This function is on- Route : The traffic bulletins received that affect the ly available in 2D mode. calculated route will be displayed.

 To centre the exact vehicle position on the map. Map display Dynamic route guidance To centre the exact destination on the map. This In order for dynamic route guidance to func- function button is only displayed if either Dis- tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the  play destination on map is selected route options. ››› page 221. If during route guidance a traffic report is re- Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few sec- ceived that affects the route being travelled,  onds, it automatically returns to the last selected scale. an alternative route will be searched for if the Infotainment system calculates that time can be saved.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic route Traffic reports on map (selection) guidance (TRAFFIC) Symbol: Meaning Fig. 229 Messages and function buttons on The Infotainment system constantly receives the map display. traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-  : Slow traffic ground, provided a TMC traffic news station

222 Navigation*

Symbol: Meaning ● In the Navigation settings menu, press The Personal POI stored are now in the POI the Import destinations function button. storage device ››› page 220 and can be  : Traffic jam ● Select the data carrier with the vCards used for navigation. saved in the list. The stored Personal POI can be deleted in  : Accident ● Press Import all vCards from this folder . the Navigation Settings menu under Manage storage. ● Confirm the import notice with the OK  : Slippery road function button.

 : Skid risk The saved vCards will now be in the destina- Navigation with images tion memory ››› page 218 and may be used  : Danger for navigation.

 : Road works Note Only one address per vCard can be impor-  : Strong wind ted. In the event any vCards have multiple addresses, only the main address will be : Road closed to traffic  imported.

During route guidance, traffic congestion that does not affect the route calculated is displayed in grey. Importing Personal POI Fig. 230 Images main menu. Importing Personal POI to a POI storage device Importing vCards (electronic busi- Selecting an image and starting route ness cards) ● Insert the SD card containing the POI guidance ››› page 199. Bear in mind the requirements and formats of Importing vCards to the destination mem- ● Press the Infotainment MENU button and the compatible images ››› page 205. ory then select Setup . ● Insert the data storage device with the stor- ● In the System settings menu, press the ● Insert the data storage device with the stored images or connect it to the Infotainment System information function button. ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment system ››› page 199. system ››› page 199. ● Press the Update software button to import ● Press the Infotainment system MENU button ● Press the Navigation function button in the the points of interest stored. and then select Images . » main Settings  menu. 223 Infotainment System

● Press the ››› Fig. 230 1 function button and select the data storage device where the images are stored. ● Select the desired image. ● Press the  function start route guidance.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigation Settings menu, under Advanced settings an additional pop-up window opens when you start route guidance.

● Pressing the Demo mode function button starts a “virtual route guidance” to the destination you have entered. ● If you press the Normal function button, a “real route guidance” starts.

224 Phone management system (PHONE)*

Phone management sys- WARNING external antenna, the maximum electromagnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle Speaking by telephone and operating the might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to tem (PHONE)* mobile telephone whilst driving can dis- the health of the driver and passengers. tract you from the road and cause an acci- This is also the case if the aerial has not dent. Introduction to the tele- been correctly installed. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. phone management system ● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- ● Select volume settings that allow you to tres between the antennas of the mobile easily hear signals from outside the vehicle Introduction phone and an active medical device, such at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might and horns). The phone functions described below can be alter the operation of these devices. ● used through the Infotainment system if there In areas of little or no coverage or, in ● Do not carry a mobile phone very close some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under- is a mobile telephone turned on, paired and or directly above an active medical device, pass, your call may be cut off and you may connected to it via Bluetooth®. for instance in a chest pocket. not be able to make even emergency calls. ● Immediately turn off the phone if you sus- In order for the mobile telephone to be able pect it is causing interferences in an active to connect to the Infotainment system the tel- WARNING medical device or any other medical de- ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth®. If a mobile phone is not secured or is incor- vice. If there is no mobile telephone connected to rectly secured in the vehicle, it could be the Infotainment system, the telephone man- flung though the interior during a sudden WARNING agement system will not be available. driving or braking manoeuvre or in the If the centre armrest is extended it may ob- event of an accident, and could cause inju- Take into account the instructions to use a struct the driver's arm movements, which ries. mobile telephone in the vehicle without con- could cause an accident and severe inju- nection to the external antenna ››› page 314. ● While driving, always have the mobile ries. phone, its accessories and other devices, ● Always keep the armrest closed while the such as a support for the phone, a notepad WARNING vehicle is in motion. or a portable infotainment system, correct- General, mandatory, legal and country- ly fastened and away from the airbag specific instructions and laws for the use of areas or safely stored. CAUTION mobile phones inside the vehicle must always be considered. High speeds, poor weather or road condi- WARNING tions and the quality of reception can all affect the quality of a telephone conversa- If mobile phones and radiocommunications tion in the vehicle. devices are used without connection to an

225 Infotainment System

General information tooth® technology, consult the safety all times. The radiation produced by the warnings in its instruction manual. Only use mobile telephone when switched on may The instructions shown on the screen for compatible Bluetooth® devices. interfere with sensitive technical and medi- each telephone menu will depend on the cal equipment, possibly resulting in a malfunctions of the mobile telephone used. There function or damage to the equipment. may be variations. Places with special regulations Take into account the instructions to use a mobile telephone in the vehicle without con- Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele- Bluetooth® nection to the external antenna ››› page 314. phone pre-installation function in places with a risk of explosion. In the majority of cases, Bluetooth® Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For these places are clearly signposted, but not ® further information on compatible Bluetooth® Bluetooth technology allows a mobile tele- always clearly ››› in Introduction on products, ask your nearest SEAT, S.A. dealer phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- page 225. They include, for example: or check on the internet. phone management system. In order to use the telephone management system with a ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- mobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo- phone and of any accessories. ● The lower decks of boats and ferries. gy, it is first necessary to pair them. ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid You may experience poor reception or may Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones detect gas (such as propane or butane). be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. and automatically connect when turning on Most electronic devices are shielded against ● places where the air is laden with chemi- the ignition if a connection has been previ- HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal ously established. For this to take place the electronic equipment may not be protected powder. telephone must be switched on and its Blue- ® from the HF signals of the telephone man- ● all other places where the vehicle engine tooth function activated, and there must be ® agement system. This may cause interfer- must be switched off. no active Bluetooth connection with other ence. devices. In certain circumstances, other data WARNING must be entered in the mobile phone. Note Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a Bluetooth® connections are free. ● risk of explosion! Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- Bluetooth® technology may apply in some tooth® SIG, Inc. countries. For further information, contact CAUTION the local authorities. In areas where special regulations apply or ● If you wish to connect a device to the tel- the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, ephone management system via Blue- the mobile terminal must be switched off at 226 Phone management system (PHONE)*

® Bluetooth profiles Bluetooth® profile: Explanation Device 1 Device 2 When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- Audio Video Remote Control Profile HFP (associated) + ephone management system, a data ex- HFP (with priority) A2DP/AVRCP change takes place via the Bluetooth® pro- AVRCP Profile to view information of tracks and files. control playback on the mobile device. HFP (with priority) HFP (associated)

The availability of the Bluetooth® profiles de- a) Depending on the mobile phone used. HFP A2DP/AVRCP pends on the features of the vehicle and the HFP (with priority) + mobile phone. A2DP/AVRCP  Pre-installation for mobile phone ® Bluetooth profile: Explanation Basic HFP  Hands-Free-Profile If there is a mobile phone connected to the If there is a mobile phone connected to Hands-Free-Profile (HFP) Bluetooth® to the HFP the phone management system through Comfort phone phone management system, you can make HFP, you can make phone calls with the hands-free system. phone calls with the hands-free system.

Message-Access-Profile The aerial of the vehicle cannot be used.

If the mobile phone connected to the Take into account the instructions to use a MAP phone management system is compati- mobile telephone in the vehicle without con- ble with MAP, SMS can be received via the nection to the external antenna ››› page 314. phone management systema).

Phonebook Access Profile Possible types of connection Basic The types of connection depend on the PBAP PBAP can be used to access the phonebook of a connected mobile phone. country and device in question. Fig. 231 The phone holder used for connecting To see the meaning of the acronyms and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile the mobile phone to the car aerial is located in terms of the table, see ››› page 226. A2DP Profile for the transfer of audio signals in the front centre armrest. stereo quality (music playback). Device 1 Device 2 Comfort phone service with connection to the aerial of the vehicle is available for mobile HFP (with priority) + HFP (associated) A2DP/AVRCP phone standards GSM 900, GSM 1800 and UMTS 2100. »

227 Infotainment System

If there is a mobile phone connected to the Connection to the external antenna of the The charging process is automatically inter- Hands-Free-Profile (HFP) Bluetooth® car rupted when turning off the ignition or taking ››› page 226 to the phone management sys- Take into account the particular characteris- the key off the ignition. tem, you can make phone calls with the tics to connect to the external antenna of the Compatible charging cables can be pur- hands-free system. vehicle. chased from SEAT dealers. For the connection to the aerial of the vehicle, ● If necessary, open the storage compart- the mobile phone must be on the lodging sur- ment. face ››› Fig. 231 1 . Pairing and connecting mobile ● Place the mobile phone on the lodging sur- If the mobile phone does not connect, take face 1 (the rear part of the mobile phone phones to the Infotainment system into account the instructions to use a mobile must rest on the lodging surface). telephone in the vehicle without connection There can be up to 2 Bluetooth® devices con- to the external antenna ››› page 314. If the mobile phone has been placed correct- nected at the same time to the infotainment system. The location of the mobile phone lodging sur- ly, the antenna of the mobile phone will auto- face to use the comfort phone service de- matically connect to the external antenna of In order to operate mobile phones via the In- pends on the vehicle in question. the vehicle. fotainment system, the mobile phone and the An additional antenna amplifier guarantees Infotainment system must be paired once Special characteristics the quality of the connection. first. Take into consideration the following aspects Pairing must only be conducted with the vehi- in order not to hinder the connection of the USB Port  cle stopped. phone to the aerial of the vehicle. Depending on the features, there may be a USB port  in the lodging surface area in Conditions ● The dimensions of the mobile phone must which USB devices can be charged (e.g. mo- not exceed 120 x 67 mm. ● The ignition must be switched on. bile phones or Media players). ● Only one mobile phone can be placed on ● Of necessary, disconnect the headset from The maximum charging capacity is 1.6 A. the lodging surface 1 . the mobile phone connected. ® ● Place the mobile phone without a protec- Depending on the features, the USB devices ● The Bluetooth function of the mobile tel- tion cover or case on the lodging surface. connected can also be used as audio sour- ephone and the Infotainment system must be ces ››› page 199. active, visibility must be active as well. ● Do not place metallic objects (e.g. keys, ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone coins, etc.) on the lodging surface. ● Connect the desired USB device via a ca- must be deactivated. ble compatible with the USB port .

228 Phone management system (PHONE)*

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- ● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis- automatically re-established as soon as a bile telephone. play of the Infotainment system with that device is once again within Bluetooth® range. shown on the mobile telephone. If they During the pairing process it is necessary to match, confirm on both devices. WARNING enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad. To do so, the mobile telephone must be Once the pairing process has concluded, the Do not perform the pairing and connection process while driving. This may cause an ready. PHONE main menu is displayed along with accident! the phonebook, call list and SMS stored on Starting mobile phone pairing the mobile phone, which are automatically ● Press the PHONE button on the Infotain- loaded. Confirmation on the mobile phone Note ment system. may be necessary. For more information about pairing and ● Press the Find telephone function button. The duration of the loading process depends connection of mobile phones, please con- on the amount of data stored on the mobile tact a SEAT, S.A. authorised service. As soon as the search is completed, the telephone. After loading, the data will be ® names of the Bluetooth devices found are available on the Infotainment system. displayed on-screen. Switching the telephone manage- ● Turn on the mobile phone you want to pair Pairing and connection of mobile tele- ment system off on the list of Bluetooth® devices found. phones There may be several mobile phones paired ● End the current call. The infotainment system and the mobile to the infotainment system, but just a maxi- ● Switch the ignition off. phone can be connected to each other. To mum of 2 devices can be connected to it at ● Remove the key from the ignition switch. terminate the connection of both devices, the same time. you might have to enter more data on the ● Turn the mobile phone off. mobile phone and the Infotainment system. When the Infotainment system is switched on, it automatically connects to the last connec- If the key is still in the ignition switch after ● If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mo- ted mobile telephones. If it is not possible to turning off the ignition, it will not turn off. After bile phone. connect to these mobile telephones, the tele- around 15 minutes of delayed disconnection phone management system will try to auto- (default value) the telephone management Depending on the mobile phone: matically connect to the next mobile tele- system will switch off. ● Use your mobile telephone to enter and phone on the list of paired devices. Note confirm your PIN code, as instructed in the The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con- display of the infotainment system. nection is approx. 10 meters (11 yards). The If there was a mobile phone connected to active Bluetooth® connection disconnects if the telephone management system, the OR: this distance is exceeded. The connection is emitting unit of the mobile phone will still » 229 Infotainment System

be on after turning the phone management Function button: function system off. You might have to turn off the mobile phone.  Dial To open the number pad and enter a number telephone number ››› page 232.

 Con- To open the phonebook of the paired Description of the telephone tacts mobile telephone. management system.  SMSc) To open the menu for SMS messages. PHONE main menu To open call lists of the paired mobile  Calls Fig. 233 Incoming call. telephone ››› page 232. To open the Telephone settings Opening the PHONE main menu  Setup menu. Press the PHONE button on the Infotainment Press to accept a call. system to open the PHONE main menu  ››› Fig. 232. Press to end a call.  OR: Press to reject an incoming call. Function button: function Press to mute the call signal during a a) Mobile phone with priority and con-  call and to reactivate it. nected. 1 a) See more information about priority or associated Press to connect or pair a different mobile phones and about user profiles. Fig. 232 PHONE main menu. mobile phone. b) Only displayed if the associated mobile telephone Associated mobile phonea) and con- is connected. nected. c) Depending on the mobile phone connected. b) 2 Press to change its priority. The associated mobile phone becomes the Instructions and symbols of the phone priority mobile phone and vice-versa. management system Favourites (speed dial); you can as- 3 Display: Meaning sign a contact to these ones. Name of the mobile network operator A (provider) of the SIM of the paired phone.

230 Phone management system (PHONE)*

Display: Meaning Display and function buttons: operation Functions during a phone call and effect View of stored telephone number or name. Functions available If the contact stored has an assigned im- Press to disconnect the microphone of  age, it can be displayed. Press the function button. the pre-installation for mobile phone dur- Mute the micro-  ing a phone call (button  switches to B When receiving a call, the name of the phone of the pre- The microphone of the pre-in-  ). mobile phone receiving the call is dis- installation for stallation for mobile phone is  played (priority or associated mobile mobile phone muted (button switches to A Press to connect the microphone of the  ). phone).  pre-installation for mobile phone during a phone call (button  switches to  ).  Paired mobile telephone battery charge Turn on the mi- Press the function button.  status. crophone of the  Press to keep the phone call through the pre-installation The microphone is enabled (but- a) pre-installation for mobile phone.   Strength of coverage signal received by for mobile phone ton switches to ).  the mobile telephone. View of stored telephone number or Press the function button name. If the contact stored has an as- Settings  and then signed image, it can be displayed. Have a phone Hands-free . During a phone call When receiving a call, the name of the call via the mo- The hands-free system is disa- B mobile phone receiving the call is dis- bile phone bled and the phone call contin- played (priority or associated mobile ues on the mobile phone (button phone).  switches to  ). Press to open the detailed view of the Press the  function button. contact. OR: Press the function button Return to the Press to hold a call. Setup and then Hands-free . phone call  When there is a call on hold, audio trans- through the pre- The hands-free system is ena- mission is off. Phone calls held in the vehi- installation for bled and the phone call contin- cle are not transmitted. mobile phone. ues on the pre-installation for mobile phone (button   Press to end a call. switches to  ).

Fig. 234 During a phone call. a) This button is only displayed when the phone call is on the mobile phone. After starting a call with a phone number, the PHONE main menu switches to the Phone call screen ››› Fig. 234.

231 Infotainment System

Enter telephone number menu Functions available Functions available

Press the  Voice mail function Entering a phone number with button to start the connection. Enter telephone the keypad. OR: Press the  function button number Press the  function button to for about 2 seconds to start the make a call. connection. Enter the first letters of the con- Call mailbox If the number for the mailbox has tact to find using the keypad. not yet been stored, enter it and The available entries appear in confirm with OK . Select a contact the phonebook. from the list Stored numbers can be modified Search in the phonebook and in the User profile set- press the desired contact to es- tings menu. tablish the connection. Fig. 235 Enter telephone number menu. The prefix function serves to add To enter a country code, instead Open the Enter telephone number menu a prefix to the phone number en- of the first two digits (interna- tered or stored when dialling, Enter the country tional access code e.g. “00”) Press the Select number  function button to e.g. to make a phone call from a code you can enter the character “+”. open the Enter phone number menu. different profile of the SIM (Du- al/TwinBill) or to cancel service Press the function button 0 for approx. 2 seconds to add the +. Functions available or control orders on the phone network (e.g. hide phone num- b) Prefix func- a) This depends on the country and unit in question. SOS Emergen- Press the function button to  ber). tion b) cy calla) make an emergency call. The function button is only displayed when the pre- Enter the phone number without fix button is enabled in the User profile settings the prefix and press / . Press the function button to ob- menu. tain help in the event of break- The prefix stored in the User  Assis- down. profile settings menu is a) automatically placed before the tance call SEAT, S.A. Authorised Services Calls Menu (call lists) phone number and the call are also at your disposal with starts. their mobile units. ● Select the desired call list: All , Missed calls , Press the function button to start Dialled numbers or Received calls . Press the function button to ob- a) Voice input a connection through voice contain information about the SEAT,  Information trol through a phone number. a) S.A. brand and selected addi- call tional services related to traffic and travel.

232 Phone management system (PHONE)*

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Displays the numbers of  missed and unanswered calls.

Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled on the mobile telephone and on the  Infotainment system telephone management system.

Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the calls received on the mobile telephone and  on the Infotainment system telephone management system.

The stored prefix is placed before the phone number automatically and the con-  nection is started. Also see ››› page 232, Enter telephone number menu.

Opening the detailed view of a contact. All the telephone numbers are displayed in the  detailed view, and where applicable, the address recorded for the contact in question.

The phone number is copied to the Enter  phone number menu ››› page 232.

Note The availability of the call lists will depend on the mobile phone used.

233 Driving

Driving ● The engine should only be switched off ● Do not apply additional underseal or an- when the vehicle is at a standstill. ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter, heat shields or the particulate filter. Start and driving WARNING With the engine running or when it is star- Stopping and starting the ted, some assistance and safety systems will be active, which could help reduce the Ignition lock engine risk of serious injury. ● Never start or leave the engine running in Introduction poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Ex- haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a Immobiliser display toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Car- When an invalid key is used or in the event of bon monoxide can cause people to lose a system fault,  or Immobiliser on is dis- consciousness. It can also cause death. played on the instrument panel. The engine ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the cannot be started. engine is running. The vehicle could move off suddenly or something unexpected Pushing or towing could happen resulting in damage and serious injury. Fig. 236 Vehicle key positions For technical reasons, the vehicle must not ● Never use start boosters. Cold start be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is sprays could explode or increase the en- Read the additional information carefully preferable. gine speed unexpectedly. ›››  page 25

WARNING Vehicle keys Fig. 236 WARNING ››› Turning off the engine while driving will Without the key in the ignition switch: steering make it difficult to steer and stop the vehi- The components of the exhaust system lock may be enabled. cle; this could even result in the loss of con- reach very high temperatures. This could trol causing an accident with serious con- cause a fire and considerable damage. Ignition off, all electrical devices disconnected. sequences. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part Key can be removed from the vehicle. In vehi- ● The assisted braking and steering sys- of the exhaust system can come in contact 1 cles with automatic gearbox, the ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is tems, the airbag system, seat belts and with flammable materials (such as wood, in position Pa). certain safety equipment are only active leaves, dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.). while the engine is running.

234 Start and driving

Vehicle keys ››› Fig. 236 able to get themselves to safety. For exam- Starter button ple, depending on the time of the year, Ignition is switched on. Pre-heating of diesel 2 temperatures inside a locked and closed engine. The steering lock can be unlocked. vehicle can be extremely high or extremely Switch on the engine. Release the key when the low resulting in serious injuries and illness 3 engine has started. When it is released, the key or even death, particularly for young chil- returns to position 2 . dren. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if a) Depending upon country. the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the Key not authorised for the vehicle steering wheel. If a key which is not authorised for this vehicle is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be re- Note Fig. 237 In the centre console: start-up push moved as follows: button for the Keyless Access lock and start-up ● If the key is left in the ignition lock with system. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles ● Automatic transmission: the key cannot be the engine off for long periods, the vehicle is symmetrical. removed from the ignition lock. Press and re- battery will run flat. lease the selector lever locking button. Key ● For automatic gearbox vehicles, the key can be removed from the vehicle. can only be removed from the ignition lock ● Manual transmission: Remove the key from if the gear selector lever is in position P. If the ignition. applicable, press and release the locking button of the selection lever. WARNING Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle key could result in serious injury. ● Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. If not, the engine could accidentally be started and Fig. 238 Emergency ignition in vehicles with electrical equipment such as the windows Keyless Access. could accidentally be operated which may result in serious injury. The start-up button may only be used if there is a valid key in the vehicle. ● Never leave children or disabled people » alone in the car. Passengers could be trapped in the car in an emergency and not be 235 Driving

Opening the driver's door when exiting the Engine restart feature Starting the engine vehicle activates the electronic lock on the If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle steering column if the ignition is disabled after the engine stops, you will only have 5 Complete operations only in the sequence ››› page 252. seconds to restart it. A warning will display on given: the dash panel screen. Switching the ignition on/off Vehicles without Vehicles with After this interval, it will not be possible to ● Briefly push the start-up button Fig. 237 Keyless Access Keyless Access ››› start the engine without a valid key inside the without touching the brake or clutch ped- vehicle. Press and hold the brake until step 5 is per- al ››› . formed. WARNING 1. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press Emergency starting function and hold the clutch down until the engine Any accidental movement of the vehicle starts. If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, could result in serious injury. an emergency start-up will be required. The Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector ● When pressing the start-up button, do 2. relevant message will appear in the dash lever in position P or N. not press the brake or clutch pedal, this panel display. This may happen when, for ex- way the engine will start immediately. Only in vehicles with ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or diesel engine: for flat: preheating, turn the WARNING key in the ignition lock 3. ● Immediately after pushing the start-up but- to position If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- ››› Fig. 236 2 . A con- ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering out due care, this may cause accidents and column ››› Fig. 238. trol lamp lights up on serious injury. the dash panel . ● The ignition connects and the engine starts ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle automatically. Press the starter but- when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau- ton Fig. 237; do not Turn the key in the ig- ››› thorised person could lock the vehicle, press the accelerator. nition lock to position Emergency disconnection start the engine or connect the ignition 4. There needs to be a ››› Fig. 236 3 ; do not and, in this way, operate electronic equip- valid key inside the If the engine does not stop after briefly press- press the accelerator. ment (e.g. the windows). vehicle for the engine ing the start-up button, an emergency dis- to start. connect will be required: Note Once the engine Once the engine ● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec- 5. starts, release the key starts, release the In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds in the ignition lock. start-up button. system, there may be a delay in the engine ››› . starting if it requires preheating. ● The engine turns off automatically. 236 Start and driving

Vehicles without Vehicles with ● Do not push or tow start the engine. Un- Vehicles without Vehicles with

Keyless Access Keyless Access burnt fuel could damage the catalytic con- Keyless Access Keyless Access verter. If the engine does not 1. Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› . If the engine does not start, stop and wait for start, stop and wait around 1 minute to try For the sake of the environment Press and hold the brake pedal until the step 4 6. 2. for around 1 minute to again. If necessary, is performed. Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start try again. perform an emergen- driving immediately if the visibility is OK. If the vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place cy start ››› page 236. 3. This helps the engine reach operating tem- the selector lever in position P. Disconnect the electronic parking brake when perature faster and reduces emissions. 7. Connect the electronic parking brake you are about to start driving ››› page 238. 4. ››› page 238. Note WARNING Briefly press the start- ● For example, if the key battery is very up button › Fig. 237. Turn the vehicle key in ›› Never leave the vehicle unattended if the worn or flat, the engine cannot be started If the engine fails to 5. the ignition lock to po- engine is running. The vehicle could move with the starter button. In this case, remove switch off, perform an sition ››› Fig. 236 1 . off suddenly, especially if it is in gear, re- the ignition button from the lock and insert emergency discon- sulting in an accident and serious injury. the key. nect ››› page 236. ● Electrical devices with a high power con- If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear- 6. WARNING sumption are switched off temporarily box, put it into 1st or reverse. Cold start sprays could explode or cause a when the engine starts. sudden increase in the engine speed. ● When the engine is started cold, there WARNING ● Never use start boosters. may be strong vibrations for a few mo- Never switch off the engine while the vehi- ments for technical reasons. This is quite cle is moving. You may lose control of the normal, and no cause for concern. vehicle and there is a risk of serious acci- CAUTION ● At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F), dent. ● An attempt to start the engine while driv- smoke may be given off below the vehicle ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not ing or starting the engine immediately after when the additional heater is turned on. work when the ignition is switched off. turning it off can cause damage to the engine or starter motor. ● The brake servo does not work with the engine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs Stopping the engine pressed with more force. and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard. ● As the power steering does not work if the Complete operations only in the sequence engine is not running, you will need more given: strength to steer than normally. » 237 Driving

● If the key is removed from the ignition, the Electronic immobiliser Braking and parking steering may lock and it will not be possible to steer the vehicle. The gear lock prevents the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and the ve- Introduction hicle being moved. CAUTION The brake assistance systems include the ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- The vehicle key has a chip that automatically anti-lock braking system (ABS), the brake as- Stop system* switches off the engine, the disables the immobilizer when the key is sistance system (BAS), the electronic differ- ignition remains switched on. Make sure placed in the ignition lock. ential lock (EDL), the traction control system (ASR) and the electronic stability control that the ignition is switched off before leav- The electronic immobiliser will be activated (ESC). ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could again automatically as soon as you pull the discharge. key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with WARNING ● If the engine has been driven at high the Keyless Access system, the key has to be speed for a prolonged period of time, it outside the vehicle ››› page 119. Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty may overheat when turned off. To avoid en- brake system may lead to serious accident. gine damage, allow the engine to run for For this reason, the vehicle can only be used ● If  lights, alone or accompanied by a approximately two minutes in neutral be- with a genuine SEAT key with the correct warning message on the instrument panel fore switching it off. code. Coded keys can be purchased from display, please go immediately to a speci- your technical service centre page 114. ››› alised workshop to check the brake pads Note If an unauthorised key is used, the message and to replace them if they are worn. ● In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the SAFE or Immobiliser active is displayed key can only be removed when the selector on the instrument panel. The vehicle cannot WARNING lever is in position P. be started in this case Careless parking can cause serious injury. ● After stopping the engine, the engine Note ● Never remove the key from the ignition if compartment fan may continue running for the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock a few minutes, even when the ignition has The correct operation of the vehicle is only may engage and lock the steering wheel been switched off or the key removed. The guaranteed when original SEAT keys are making the vehicle impossible to control. radiator fan is automatically switched off. used. ● Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

238 Start and driving

● Always apply the electronic parking ● Special attention is required when driving  It lights up red brake when you leave your vehicle and through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or when you park. other objects. The vehicle underbody, Brake pedal not engaged! Press the brake pedal hard. ● Never leave children or disabled people bumpers, mudguards and running gear, alone in the vehicle. They could release the and the engine and exhaust system could electronic parking brake, activate the se- be damaged as you drive over these ob-  It lights up yellow jects. lector lever or gear stick and start the vehi- Front brake pads worn out. cle moving. This could result in a serious Go to a specialised workshop immediately. Inspect accident. all the brake pads and replace as necessary. ● Always take all the keys with you when- Control and warning lamps ever you leave the vehicle. The engine  It lights up yellow could accidentally be started and electri-  It lights up red cal equipment such as the windows could Along with the  warning lamp flashing: fault in the accidentally be operated resulting in seri- Together with the  control lamp on the button: electronic parking brake. ous injury. Electronic parking brake on ››› page 240 Go to a specialised workshop. ● Never leave children or disabled people Fault in the brake system It lights up green alone in the car. They could be trapped in  Stop the vehicle! Seek specialist assistance!  the car in an emergency and will not be ››› page 242. Brake pedal not engaged. able to get themselves to safety. For exam- Press the brake pedal to select a gear range. ple, depending on the time of the year, Brake fluid level inadequate.  Do not continue driving! Check the brake fluid temperatures inside a locked and closed Brake pedal not engaged. level ››› page 333. vehicle can be extremely high or extremely Press the brake pedal to disengage the electronic parking brake page 240. low resulting in serious injuries and illness Together with the ABS control lamp : ABS fault. ››› or even death, particularly for young chil- Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be dren. braked without ABS. Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being CAUTION  Flashes red verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Special care should be taken when park- Electronic parking brake faulty. At the same time, the onds. ing in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri-  control lamp may lit up or the  on the button ers. Objects protruding from the ground may flash. WARNING may damage the bumper or other parts of Go to a specialised workshop, as you may not be Observe the safety warnings in Con- the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid able to park safely. ››› trol and warning lamps on page 109. damage, stop before the wheels touch the » barrier or kerb. 239 Driving

WARNING Electronic parking brake ● The control lamps  on the button and  on the instrument panel go off. Driving with brakes in bad condition could result in a serious accident. Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold ● If the brake warning lamp  does not function activated turn off or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or ● Pull on the electronic parking brake button. there is a fault in the brake system. Obtain ● Once you have engaged a gear, gently professional assistance immediately press the accelerator and pull on the elec- ››› page 332, Checking the brake fluid level. tronic parking brake button. ● If the brake warning lamp  lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- ABS regulation could be malfunctioning. As tion activated a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively Fig. 239 Detail of the centre console: elec- ● Once you have engaged a gear, take your easily when braking. If the rear wheels lock tronic parking brake switch. foot off the brake pedal and gently press the this could result in loss of vehicle control! If possible, reduce your speed and drive Applying the electronic parking brake accelerator. carefully to a specialised workshop close The parking brake can be applied whenever by to check the brake system. During the the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ig- Automatic release of the electronic park- following journey, avoid sudden braking nition is switched off. Always apply the parking brake on starting the engine and manoeuvres. ing brake when you leave your vehicle and The electronic parking brake is automatically ● If the  lights up, alone or accompanied when you park. released when the vehicle starts moving, if by a warning message on the instrument the driver door is closed and the driver is panel display, please go immediately to a ● Pull the  button until the control lamp  wearing his/her seat belt. In addition, in vehi- specialised workshop to check the brake on the button lights up. cles with a manual gearbox the clutch pedal pads and to replace them if they are worn. ● The parking brake is applied when the  should also be pressed to the floor before control lamp lights up on the instrument pan- starting the engine so that the system recog- el ››› page 239. nises that the parking brake should be released. Disengaging the electronic parking brake ● Switch the ignition on. Emergency braking function ● Press button . At the same time, press the Only use the emergency braking function if brake pedal hard or gently press the acceler- the vehicle cannot be stopped with the brake ator pedal with the engine switched on. pedal ››› ! 240 Start and driving

● Pull the  button for a longer duration to ● If the electronic parking brake has not ● Ensure that all passengers leave the vehi- brake the vehicle hard. The warning display been used for a long while, the system cle, especially children. will be accompanied by the corresponding sometimes performs automatic and audi- ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with audible warning. ble checks while the vehicle is at a stand- you. still. ● To stop the braking process, release the ● Lock the vehicle. button or press the accelerator. Additional information for steep ascents WARNING Parking and descents The incorrect use of the electronic parking Before switching off the engine, rotate the brake may result in serious accident. When parking your vehicle, all legal require- steering wheel so that if the vehicle should ments should be observed. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to move, it will be held by the kerb. brake the vehicle except in an emergency. The braking distance is considerably lon- To park the vehicle ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that ger, because braking is only applied to the Complete operations only in the sequence they are against the edge of the kerb. rear wheels. Always use the foot brake. given. ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of ● Never accelerate from the engine com- the road. partment with the engine running and a ● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . gear or a gear range engaged. The vehicle ● Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve- WARNING could move, even if the parking brake is ap- hicle comes to a standstill. plied. The components of the exhaust system ● Connect the electronic parking brake reach very high temperatures. This could ››› page 240. cause a fire and considerable damage. Note ● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- ● Always park your vehicle so that no part ● In vehicles with manual transmission: tor lever to position P. of the exhaust system can come in contact when the clutch pedal is released and the ● Switch off the engine and release the brake with flammable materials (such as wood, accelerator pressed at the same time, the pedal. leaves,dried grass, or spilled fuel). electronic parking brake is automatically released. ● Remove the key from the ignition. CAUTION ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be ● If necessary, turn the steering wheel slightly possible to disconnect the electronic park- to lock the steering. ● Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri- ing brake. Use the jump-start ● With a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear on ›››  page 54. ers. Objects protruding from the ground flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear may damage the bumper or other parts of ● When the electronic parking brake is ap- on hills, and release the clutch pedal. the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid » plied or released, noises may be heard. 241 Driving

damage, stop before the wheels touch the nance Programme, to have the brake pads tance has increased suddenly) it may be barrier or kerb. checked. possible that there is a fault in the braking system. The  warning lamp lights up and a ● Special attention is required when driving If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- text message displayed. Take the vehicle to a through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or ter crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall specialised workshop immediately and have other objects. The vehicle underbody, or even after washing the car, the effect of the fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speed bumpers, mudguards and running gear, the brakes is lessened as the brake discs are and be prepared to use more pressure on the and the engine and exhaust system could wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher speed, brake pedal, and allow for longer stopping be damaged as you drive over these ob- “dry” the brakes as quickly as possible by distances. jects. braking gently several times. Only do this without endangering vehicles behind you or Brake servo any other road users ››› . The brake servo only operates when the en- Information on the brakes A layer of salt on the discs and brake pads gine is running and the pressure applied by will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 the driver on the brake pedal increases. and increase braking distance. If you drive for miles), new brake pads have not yet a prolonged period on salted roads without If the brake servo does not operate or the ve- reached their maximum braking capacity, braking then brake carefully several times to hicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will and need to be “run in” first ››› . The slightly eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes ››› . have to be pressed with more force given that reduced braking effect can be compensated the braking distance will be increased when for by increasing pressure on the brake pedal. If the vehicle remains parked for considerable the brake servo does not operate ››› . While running in, the full braking distance lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes are not used, there may be corrosion on the or emergency braking distance is larger WARNING then when the brake pads have been run in. brake discs and a build up of dirt on the While running in, avoid full power braking or brake pads. If the brakes are not used fre- New brake pads do not brake to full effi- situations requiring braking performance. For quently, or if rust has formed on the discs, ciency. example, in heavy traffic. SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and ● For the first 320 km (200 miles), new discs by braking firmly a few times at a mod- brake pads have not yet reached their The rate of wear of the brake pads de- erately high speed. Only do this without en- maximum braking capacity, and need to be pends to a great extent on the conditions in dangering vehicles behind you or any other “run in” first. For this, to compensate for re- which the vehicle is used and the way the ve- road users ››› . duced braking efficiency the brake pedal hicle is driven. If the vehicle is used frequently will have to be pressed with more force. in city traffic or for short trips or driven sport Faults in the brake system ● To avoid losing control of the vehicle and style, visit a specialised workshop regularly, causing serious accidents, always take During braking, if you notice that the vehicle more frequently than advised in the Mainte- great care when driving with new brake does not react as usual (that the braking dis- pads. 242 Start and driving

● When running in new brake pads, always WARNING The thickness of the brake pads should be respect the safety distances between you checked visually and regularly, by looking Driving without the brake servo may signifi- and other vehicles and do not cause situa- through the openings in the wheel rims or cantly increase the braking distance and tions requiring extreme braking perform- from underneath the vehicle. If necessary, result in a severe accident. ance. remove the wheels to check them thor- ● Never allow the vehicle to move forwards oughly. SEAT recommends taking your car when the engine is switched off. in for technical service. WARNING ● If the brake servo does not operate or the When brakes overheat, braking is less effi- vehicle must be towed, then the brake ped- cient and braking distances increase. al will have to be pressed with more force ● When driving on slopes, brakes can be given that the braking distance will be in- Braking and stability sys- overloaded and overheat quickly. creased when the brake servo does not operate. tems ● Reduce speed or change down a gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking CAUTION Warning and control lamps effect and to reduce the strain on the brake ● Never make the brakes “slip” by pressing system. It lights up yellow the pedal gently, if it is not really necessa-  ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers ry to brake. Continuously pressing on the ESC disconnected by the system. could restrict the airflow to the brakes and brake pedal will heat the brakes. This could Turn the ignition on and off. If necessary, drive for a cause them to overheat. significantly reduce braking power, in- short distance. crease braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system. Fault in the ESC. WARNING Go to a specialised workshop. ● Reduce speed or change down a gear Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take when faced with steep and long slopes. Along with the ABS control lamp : fault in the ABS. longer to engage and this increases brak- This allows you to use the engine braking Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be ing distances. effect and to reduce the strain on the brake braked without ABS. ● Test the brakes carefully. system. Otherwise, the brakes may over- The battery has been reconnected ››› page 334 ● Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt heat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce by braking gently several times, when speed or to stop. It flashes yellow weather, road and traffic conditions permit.  Note ESC or ASR regulating. Stop pressing the gas pedal. Adjust your driving style When checking the front brake pads, take to the road conditions. » the time to also check the rear brake pads.

243 Driving

 It lights up yellow Brake assist systems the same as slow driving. When driving with a trailer, ESC does not provide the same ASR deactivated manually. The brake assistance systems ESC, ABS, BAS, amount of vehicle control as without a trailer. Connect the ASR ››› page 246. ASR is automatically ASR and EDL only operate when the ignition is activated when the ignition is switched on or off. Adjust your speed and driving style to road, switched on. They contribute significantly to traffic and weather conditions. ESC cannot increasing active safety.  It lights up yellow push the limits of the laws of physics; improve the transmission available or maintain the ve- Along with the ESC control lamp : fault in the ABS. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) hicle on the road if a lack of driver attention Go to a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be ESC reduces the risk of skidding and increa- creates an inevitable situation. Otherwise, braked without ABS. ses the vehicle stability by braking individual ESC assists in maintaining vehicle control in Together with the warning lamp  or : Faulty ABS. wheels under specific driving conditions. ESC extreme situations and uses the movements Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be detects critical handling situations, such as of the steering made by the driver to maintain braked without ABS. understeer, oversteer and wheelspin on the the vehicle moving in the desired direction. If driving wheels. The system stabilises the vehi- the vehicle is driven at such a speed that it Several warning and control lamps light up cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc- will leave the road before ESC can intervene for a few seconds when the ignition is switching the engine torque. then the system cannot provide assistance. ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ESC has its limits. It is important to realise that The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are in- onds. ESC is also subject to the laws of physics. corporated into ESC. ESC is always on. The ESC will not be able to deal with all situations ESC should only be turned off using the ASR WARNING with which drivers may be faced. For exam- button ››› Fig. 240 when traction is insuffi- ple, if the road surface changes suddenly cient. Always remember to turn on the ASR Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- then ESC will not be useful in all cases. If the once more when the vehicle has traction trol and warning lamps on page 109. vehicle suddenly enters a section covered by again. water, mud or snow then ESC will not provide WARNING assistance in the same way as on dry ground. Anti-lock system (ABS) If the vehicle loses its grip on the ground and ● If the ABS  warning lamp does not go ABS can prevent the wheels from locking dur- moves on a film of water (“aquaplaning”), the out or if it lights up while driving, the ABS is ing braking until just before the vehicle stops ESC will not be able to help the driver control not working properly. The vehicle can only thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle the vehicle due to the loss of adherence with be stopped using normal braking without and maintain control. This means that, even the road surface, which prevents braking and ABS. The protection provided by the ABS is during full braking, the risk of skidding is re- steering. If the vehicle is driven through series not available. Visit a specialised workshop duced: as soon as possible. of bends at high speed, the ESC will not always be as effective: aggressive driving is not

244 Start and driving

● Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do not rapidly, the braking force is multiplied and the Electronic drive torque management remove your foot from the brake pedal or re- braking distance is reduced. This enables the (XDS) duce braking force! ABS to be activated more quickly and effec- When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- ● Do not “pump” the brake pedal, or reduce tively. tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn braking force! Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal! at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this ● Maintain vehicle direction when braking When the brake pedal is released or when way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer fully. the brake force is reduced, brake assist auto- wheel) receives less drive torque than the in- matically turns off the brake servo. ner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit- ● When the brake pedal is released or when uations the torque delivered to the inner the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off. Traction control when accelerating (ASR) wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv- ABS control can be observed by vibration of In the event of wheelspin, the traction control ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit. the brake pedal and noise. You should never system reduces the engine torque to match This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on expect the ABS to reduce the braking dis- the amount of grip available. The ASR makes the front axle, resulting in understeer or tance under any circumstances. This dis- some situations easier, for example, when “lengthening” of the trajectory. tance will increase when driving on gravel, restarting, accelerating or going uphill, even in cent snow or on icy and slippery ground. unfavourable road conditions. The XDS system can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. When driving on loose ground, the all-terrain The ASR can be switched on or off manually configuration of the ABS is automatically ››› page 246. Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside turned on. When ABS is activated, the front wheel and counter the excess driving torque wheels may lock briefly. This shortens the Electronic differential lock system (EDL) of that wheel. This means that the driver's de- braking distance in off-road situations as the sired trajectory is much more precise. wheels are prevented from digging into loose EDL is available when driving in straight lines surfaces. All-terrain ABS only intervenes when under normal conditions. When the EDL de- The XDS system works in combination with driving in a straight line. When the front tects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel the ESC and is always active, even when ASR wheels are turned, the normal ABS is activa- and directs the power to the other drive traction control is disconnected. ted. wheels. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts WARNING Brake assistance systems (BAS) out automatically if subjected to excessive Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet loads. The EDL will switch on again automati- ground can result in loss of vehicle control The brake assistance system may reduce the cally when the brake has cooled down. and serious injury to the driver and passen- required braking distance. The brake assis- gers. tance system boosts the braking force if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergen- ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- cy. As a result, the braking pressure increases ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. » 245 Driving

Even though the brake assistance systems, ly. This includes, among others, brakes, Switching ASR on and off ABS, BAS, EDL, ASR and ESC, provide more tyres and other systems already men- security, do not take unnecessary risks tioned. while driving. ● Remember that changing and fitting oth- ● Brake assistance systems can not over- er components to the vehicle can affect come the laws of physics. Even with ESC operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and and other systems, slippery and wet roads ESC. will always be dangerous. ● Changes to the vehicle suspension or us- ● Driving to quickly on wet ground can re- ing unapproved wheel/tyre combinations sult in the wheels losing contact with the can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL ground in an effect known as “aquaplan- EDL and ESC, as well as their effectiveness. ing”. Without adherence, it is impossible to ● Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC de- brake, steer or control the vehicle. pends on the use of suitable tyres Fig. 240 Detailed view of the centre console: ● Brake assistance systems cannot avoid ››› page 338. button used to switch ASR on and off (vehicles accidents if, for example, the driver does with ESC) not respect safety distances or drives to Note quickly in difficult conditions. The electronic stability control ESC consists ● of ABS, EDL and ASR and only works when ● Even though brake assistance systems To ensure that the ESC and ASR work the engine is running. are extremely effective and help control properly, all four wheels must be fitted with identical tyres. Any differences in the roll- the vehicle in difficult situations, remember The ASR can be switched off while the engine ing radius of the tyres can cause the sys- that the vehicle stability depends on tyre is running by pressing the  button grip. tem to reduce engine power when this is not desired. ››› Fig. 240. The ASR (and similar) is only ● When accelerating on a slippery surface, switched off when the required traction is not ● If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, for example on ice or snow, press the ac- obtained: celerator carefully. The wheels can still slip the ESC, EDL and ASR will also be out of ac- even with brake assistance systems result- tion. ● When driving through deep snow or on ing in loss of vehicle control. ● Noises may be heard while any of the loose ground (gravel, etc.). above systems are operating. ● When “freeing” a trapped vehicle. WARNING Turn the ASR back on by pressing the The effectiveness of ESC can be consider-  button ››› Fig. 240. ably reduced if other components and systems affecting driving dynamics are not maintained or are not functioning correct-

246 Start and driving

Gearbox nificantly reduce braking power, increase Manual gear change braking distance or even result in the total Read the additional information carefully Introduction failure of the brake system. ›››  page 36 When reverse gear is engaged and the ig- In some countries, it is necessary to press the nition is switched on the following takes Control and warning lamps clutch pedal to the floor to start the engine. place: ● Reverse lights light up.  It lights up red Selecting reverse gear Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is ● When reversing, the air conditioner auto- Brake pedal not engaged! matically changes to air recirculation mode. Press the brake pedal hard. stopped. ● The rear window heater switches on when WARNING the windscreen wiper is activated.  It lights up green When the engine is running, the vehicle will ● Also, the parking sensor system, the optical Brake pedal not pressed. start to move as soon as a gear is engaged parking sensor and the camera for the re- To select a gear range, press the brake pedal. Also and the clutch released. This is also the verse assist system are connected. see “Electronic parking brake” ››› page 238. case with the electronic parking brake on.

WARNING ● Never engage the reverse gear when a  Flashes green vehicle is moving forward. Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac- The selector lever locking button has not engaged. tion and skidding, especially on slippery The vehicle does not start moving. CAUTION ground. This could cause loss of control of Apply the lock of the selector lever ››› page 248. the vehicle resulting in an accident and To prevent damage and avoid premature considerable damage. Several warning and control lamps light up wear, please observe the following: ● Only use the kick-down function or rapid for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● While driving, do not leave your hand acceleration if visibility, weather, road and ed on, signalling that the function is being resting on the gear stick. The pressure ap- traffic conditions so permit. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- plied by your hand is transmitted to the onds. gearbox selector forks. WARNING ● Always ensure that the vehicle is com- WARNING pletely stopped before engaging the re- Do not allow the brakes to “rub” for a pro- verse gear. longed period of time, or brake frequently Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- or for long periods of time. Continuous trol and warning lamps on page 109. ● When changing gear, always make sure braking heats up the brakes. This could sig- the clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor. »

247 Driving

● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on  - Parking lock are determined by the engine load, your indi- hills with the engine on. The driven wheels are mechanically locked. vidual driving style and the speed of the vehicle. Only change gears when the vehicle is at a standstill. To change the position of the selec- Selector lever locking Automatic gearbox* tor lever, press the brake pedal and switch on The gear selector lever lock prevents, in P or the ignition. N, a gear selection from being inadvertently engaged and the vehicle moving off acciden-  - Reverse gear tally. Reverse gear is engaged. To release the gear selector lever lock, press Only put in reverse when the vehicle is at a and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. standstill. If not it could result in serious dam- Press simultaneously on the selector lever age. lock. The selector lever lock is not engaged if it is  - Neutral moved quickly through position N (e.g. when The gearbox is in neutral. No movement is shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, Fig. 241 Automatic gearbox selector lever with transmitted to the wheels and the engine for instance, to “rock the vehicle backwards locking button (arrow) does not act as a brake. and forwards” if it is stuck in snow or mud. The Read the additional information carefully selector lever lock engages automatically if  - Standard forwards driving position ›››  page 36 the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is (normal programme) in position N for more than about one second The selector lever has a lock. When changing The gears are changed (up and down) auto- at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph). the selector lever from position P to a range matically. The gear shifts are determined by ® of gears, press the brake pedal and press the In vehicles with a DSG automatic gearbox, the engine load, your individual driving style on rare occasions the selector lever lock may lock on the selector lever, located on the front and the speed of the vehicle. part of the knob, in the direction of the arrow not engage. In this case, the transmission is ››› Fig. 241. To move the gear selector lever locked to prevent the vehicle from moving ac-  - Standard forwards driving position  from the position N to D or to R, first press and cidentally. The green control light flashes (sports programme) hold the brake pedal. and an information text is displayed. Proceed The shift up to a higher gear is automatically as follows to engage the selector lever lock: When the ignition is on, the current position of delayed and the shift down is faster with re- ● Press the brake pedal and then release. the selector lever is shown on the instrument spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad- panel. vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts

248 Start and driving

WARNING ● Never leave the vehicle with the lever in Gear change with Tiptronic* the N position. The vehicle may move Placing the selector lever in an incorrect downhill regardless of whether the engine position may cause loss of control of the is switched on or not. vehicle and a serious accident. ● Do not press the accelerator when engaging a range of gears. CAUTION ● With the engine running and a range of If, when the vehicle is at a standstill, the gears selected, the vehicle will move off electronic parking brake is not applied and when the brake pedal is released. the brake pedal is released while in position P, the vehicle may move a few centi- ● Never select reverse gear or the parking metres forwards or backwards. lock while driving. Fig. 242 Selector lever in Tiptronic position WARNING Note (left-hand drive vehicles). The lay-out in right- If, while driving, the selector lever is acci- hand drive vehicles is symmetrically opposed. Unintentional movements of the vehicle dentally placed in position N, lift your foot could cause serious injury. off the accelerator. Wait until the engine is ● As a driver, you should never leave your running at idle speed before selecting a vehicle if the engine is running and a gear new gear range. range is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the electronic parking brake and engage parking lock P with the selector lever. ● While the engine is running and with the D, S or R range of gears selected, keep the brake pressed to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Transmission is not totally inter- Fig. 243 Steering wheel with two paddle shifts rupted either when the vehicle is idling or for Tiptronic when the vehicle “continues moving forwards”. The Tiptronic system allows you to manually change gears in vehicles with an automatic ● Never engage the R or P gear ranges gearbox. When you change to the Tiptronic when the vehicle is moving. programme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long » 249 Driving

as the system is not changing gear automati- CAUTION Back-up mode cally due to a traffic situation. ● When accelerating, the gearbox auto- If all the selector lever positions on the instru- matically shifts up into the next gear short- ment panel display are shown with a light- Using Tiptronic with the selector lever ly before the maximum engine speed is coloured background, this means there is a ● Press the selector lever from position D to reached. fault in the system. The automatic gearbox the right into the Tiptronic selector gate ››› ● When reducing speed manually, the will operate in back-up mode. When the in Automatic gearbox* on page 249. gearbox only shifts gear when the engine backup programme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds ● Press the lever forwards + or backwards can no longer exceed the maximum engine and within a selected range of gears. – to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 242. speed. ● To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selec- For the DSG® dual clutch gearbox, in some tor lever to the left. cases, this may mean that the reverse gear Driving with automatic gearbox does not engage. The gearbox should be Using the Tiptronic with the steering wheel checked by a specialised workshop as soon paddle shifts The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- as possible. cally as the vehicle moves. ● In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle Protection against overloading the DSG® shifts ››› Fig. 243. Driving down hills 6-gear automatic gearbox ● Pull the right-hand side paddle + The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle ››› Fig. 243 towards the steering wheel to you will need. The lowest gears increase the begins to jerk and the selector lever position step up a gear. engine braking work. Never go down hills with indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage ● Pull the left-hand side paddle – the selector lever in neutral N. to the clutch, this interrupts the power trans- ››› Fig. 243 towards the steering wheel step mission between the engine and the gearbox. down a gear. ● You should reduce speed accordingly. There is no more traction and it is not possible ● To exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right- ● Press the selector lever from position D to to accelerate. If the clutch is opened auto- hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- the right into the Tiptronic selector gate matically due to overloading, press the brake proximately 1 second or move the selector ››› page 249. pedal. Wait a few seconds before starting to lever to the left. ● Gently pull the selector lever back to move again. change down a gear. If the paddles are not used for a period of Kick-down time, the vehicle leaves Tiptronic mode. ● OR: reduce using the steering wheel paddles ››› Fig. 243 ››› page 250. The kick-down system provides maximum acceleration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

250 Start and driving

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right the vehicle resulting in an accident and Display Meaning down, the automatic gearbox will shift down considerable damage. to a lower gear, depending on road speed  Optimum gear. ● Only use kick-down and rapid accelera- and engine speed. This takes advantage of tion when weather conditions, surface con- Recommendation to change up a the maximum acceleration of the vehicle ditions and traffic conditions permit; accel-  gear. ››› . erate and drive in a manner that does not endanger other road users. Recommendation to change down When the accelerator is pressed to the floor,  a gear. the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear ● Please remember that the driven wheels only after the engine reaches the specified can slip and the vehicle can skid if the ASR Information for “cleaning” the particulate maximum engine speed. is turned off, especially on slippery ground. filter ● Turn on the ASR after accelerating! Launch-Control Programme The exhaust gas system control recognises when the particulate filter is blocked, and The Launch-Control programme enables CAUTION helps to clean it by recommending a specific maximum acceleration while at a standstill. ● If you stop on a hill with a gear range en- gear for driving. It may therefore be necessa- ● Switch off the ASR ››› page 238. gaged, do not try to prevent the vehicle ry to drive with the engine at an exceptionally from rolling back by pressing on the accel- high speed ››› page 256. ● Press and hold the brake pedal with your erator. This could cause overheating and left foot. damage the automatic gearbox. WARNING ● Place the selector lever in position S or Tip- ● Never allow the vehicle to move with the The recommended gear display is intended tronic. gear selector lever in N, especially with the as a guideline only; it should never replace engine turned off. The automatic gearbox ● Press the accelerator with the right foot un- the driver's attention to driving carefully. til the vehicle reaches an engine speed of ap- will not be lubricated and could be damaged. ● Responsibility for selecting the correct proximately 3200 rpm. gear for each situation continues to lie with ● Lift the left foot off the brake ››› . The vehi- the driver, for example when overtaking, cle starts with maximum acceleration. climbing a hill or towing a trailer. Recommended gear display ● Turn on the ASR after accelerating! In some vehicles, the recommended gear for For the sake of the environment WARNING reducing fuel consumption is displayed on Selecting the most appropriate gear for the Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac- the instrument panel: situation will help you to save fuel. » tion and skidding, especially on slippery ground. This could cause loss of control of

251 Driving

Note If the driver door is opened before the ignition turn and the vehicle more difficult to con- is switched off, the steering column electronic trol. The recommended gear display is switched lock is activated via the ignition key or the off when the clutch pedal is pressed. ● The power steering only works when the sensor built into the door handle. engine is running. ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the Steering column mechanical lock engine is switched off. To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the Steering ● Never remove the key from the ignition if steering before leaving the vehicle. the vehicle is in motion. The steering may Information relating to different ve- lock and it will not be possible to turn the hicle processes. Please engage Unlocking the steering wheel. steering lock steering

Electro-mechanical power steering assists Parking the vehicle Turn the steering wheel WARNING the driver when steering. ››› page 238. slightly to release the Power-assisted steering, together with the steering lock. Electro-mechanical power steering adapts ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle electronically to the speed of the car, torque Remove the key from the Insert the key in the igni- steering in critical situations. However, the and turning angle. ignition. tion lock. driver is ultimately responsible for steering the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted Turn the steering wheel Hold the steering wheel If the power steering should fail at any time or steering does not remove this responsibili- the engine is switched off (for instance when slightly until you hear the in this position and steering lock. switch on the ignition. ty. being towed), the car can still be steered, as long as the key remains in the ignition. How- ever, more effort than normal will be required Power-assisted steering Control and warning lamps to turn the steering wheel. Power-assisted steering helps the driver in critical situations. It recommends the rotation Steering column electronic lock direction of the steering wheel to perform a  It lights up red Vehicles with Keyless Access: the steering corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), The electromechanical steering is damaged. column locks when the driver's door is thereby causing a small turn of the wheel in Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and opened and the ignition is switched off. the correct direction to avoid skidding ››› . as soon as possible. Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand- Have the steering checked immediately by a specialised workshop. still and, where applicable, the selector lever WARNING in position P. If the power steering is not working then the steering wheel is much more difficult to

252 Start and driving

 It lights up yellow verified. They will switch off after a few sec- works “irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or onds. 600 miles, please note: Hindered operation of the electromechanic steering. The steering system should be checked by a special- WARNING ● Do not use full throttle. ised workshop as soon as possible. If, after restarting ● Do not force the engine above two thirds of the engine and driving for a short distance, the yel- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- low warning lamp no longer comes on, it will not be trol and warning lamps on page 109. its maximum speed. necessary to take the vehicle to a specialised work- ● Do not tow a trailer. shop. Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 The battery of the vehicle was disconnected and it to 1000 miles), gradually increase power has been connected again. Run-in and economical driv- Drive a short distance at around 15-20 km/h until reaching the maximum speed and high (9-12 mph). ing engine speeds.

 Flashes red Running in Running in new tyres and brake pads ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres Fault in the steering column electronic lock. Please observe the instructions for running-in page 338  Do not continue driving! Seek specialist assis- new components. ››› tance. ● Notes on the brakes ››› page 242 Running-in the engine It flashes yellow For the sake of the environment  The engine needs to be run-in over the first If the engine is run in gently, the life of the Twisted steering column. 1500 km (1000 miles). During its first few Swing the steering wheel a few times. hours of running, the internal friction in the engine will be increased and the engine oil engine is greater than later on when all the consumption reduced. Not unlocked or blocked steering column. moving parts have bedded down. Remove the key from the ignition and then switch the ignition back on. Check the messages displayed on How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km the instrument panel at the same time. (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- Environmental compatibility Do not drive on, if the steering column remains formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek Environmental protection is a top priority in should be driven at a moderate speed – es- specialist assistance. the design, choice of materials and manufac- pecially when the engine is cold – this will re- ture of your new SEAT. » Several warning and control lamps light up duce engine wear and increase its useful life. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. ed on, signalling that the function is being Always engage a lower gear when the engine

253 Driving

Constructive measures to encourage re- ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth cycling ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear. ● Joints and connections designed for easy tems. In addition, “skipping” gears when shifting up dismantling. ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- helps to save fuel, weather and traffic condi- ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- dues (RDF). tions permitting. tling. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. Do not wait until the last moment before ● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual changing gear. Only use first gear when you ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, move off and change to second gear quickly. accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and etc.). Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with automatic gearbox. ISO 1629. ● The use of water-soluble paints. Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve Choice of materials an economical driving style as the display in- ● Use of recycled materials. Economical and environmentally dicates the best moment to change gear. ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part friendly driving Let the vehicle roll if its components are not easily separated. If you take your foot off the accelerator, the ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials Fuel consumption, environmental impact and fuel supply is stopped and consumption is re- originating from renewable sources. engine, brake and tyre wear depend largely on three factors: duced. ● Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. ● Personal driving style. Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating, for example when approaching a red traffic ● Use of CFC-free coolants. ● Conditions of use (weather, road surface). light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too ● Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions Technical requirements. slowly or the distance is too long, the clutch pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en- dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption are gine will then operate at idle speed. 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, possible with an appropriate driving style and hexavalent chromium. the adoption of certain simple tips. If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for a period of time, switch off the engine; for ex- Manufacturing methods Changing gear early ample, while waiting at a level crossing. In ve- ● hicles which have the Start-Stop function on, Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the General remarks: the highest gear is always the engine switches off automatically when protective wax for cavities. the most economical. As a guide, for most ve- the vehicle is not moving. ● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- hicles at a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph), drive cle transport. 254 Start and driving

Think ahead and “flow” with the traffic outside temperature, it will require a large Therefore, unnecessary short journeys should Frequent acceleration and braking consider- amount of energy from the engine. Therefore, be avoided. Try to combine trips. we recommend that the selected tempera- ably increase fuel consumption. If you think The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in ture for the vehicle is not too different to the ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance summer, even when other conditions are the outside temperature. It is a good idea to air from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow same. down by simply lifting your foot off the accel- the vehicle before starting your journey and The engine takes a long time to warm up erator. This eliminates the need for constant to drive a short distance with all the windows when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- braking and acceleration. open. Only then should you close all the windows and switch on the air conditioning. Keep tant emissions are also especially high during windows closed when travelling at high this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best Calm and steady driving speeds. Driving with the windows open in- to drive off immediately after starting the en- A constant driving style is more important creases fuel consumption. gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed. than speed: a constant driving style will entail ● Switch off the seat heating when the seats lower fuel consumption. have warmed up. Adjusting type pressures. When driving on the motorway, it is more effi- ● Switch off the heated rear window and the Having the correct pressure in your tyres cient to drive at a constant and more moder- windscreen heating when the windows have helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a ate speed than to be continuously accelerat- demisted and are free of ice. result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing ing and braking. As a general rule, you will the tyre pressure slightly (+0.2 bar ● Do not leave the auxiliary heater switched reach your destination just as quickly when [2.9 psi/20 kPa]) can help to save fuel. you drive at a constant speed. on when the vehicle is moving ››› page 184. If you are prepared to accept a slight reduc- The cruise control function helps you to ach- Avoid short journeys tion in comfort, the tyres may be filled to the ieve a constant style of driving. pressures recommended for a fully-loaded Fuel consumption is much higher when the vehicle. This is also valid when driving alone engine is cold, immediately after it has been Moderate use of additional devices without luggage. started. It takes a few kilometres of driving for It is important to travel in comfort, but con- the engine to warm up and to normalise con- When you buy new tyres, make sure they are venience systems should be used ecological- sumption. optimised for minimum rolling resistance. ly. The engine and catalytic converter need to Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Some equipment, when connected, increase reach their proper working temperature in fuel consumption considerably, for example: order to minimise fuel consumption and emis- The lighter the vehicle, the more economical sions. The ambient temperature has a deci- and ecological the driving style. For example, ● Air conditioning cooling system: If the air sive influence. an additional weight of 100 kg will increase conditioning system is required to cool to sig- fuel consumption up to 0.3 l/100 km. » nificantly lower temperatures than the true 255 Driving

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads Engine management and ex-  It lights up from the vehicle. haust gas purification sys- Diesel engine glow plug system. Remove optional equipment and unneces- The engine glow plug system has been activated. tem The engine can be started straight away when the sary accessories lamp switches off. The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower Introduction the fuel consumption. Optional equipment  Flashes and accessories (such as roof racks or bike WARNING carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of Fault in the management of the diesel engine. the vehicle. The components of the exhaust system If the warning lamp blinks while driving have the en- reach very high temperatures. This could gine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as Therefore, we recommend you remove all op- cause a fire. possible. tional and unnecessary equipment and ● Always park your vehicle so that no part racks, especially if you intend to drive at high of the exhaust system can come in contact  It lights up speeds. with flammable materials (such as dried Fault in the emission control system. grass). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- Other factors which increase fuel con- ● Do not apply additional underseal or an- cialised workshop to have the engine checked. sumption (examples): ti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, ● Fault in engine management. catalytic converter, heat shields or the par-  Flashes ● Driving on hills. ticulate filter. Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic ● Trailer towing. converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- WARNING Control lamps cialised workshop to have the engine checked. Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,  It lights up  It lights up weather conditions, the condition of the Fault in the management of the petrol engine. Particulate filter blocked ››› page 257 road and the traffic situation. Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible. Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

256 Start and driving

WARNING ● Do not top up with too much engine oil ● Never use biodiesel. However, a blend pre- ››› page 326. pared by the diesel manufacturer containing Observe traffic regulations when cleaning biodiesel within the limits established by the the particulate filter while driving. ● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter cables ›››  page 54. EN 590 standard may be used ››› page 319. ● Only carry on driving if visibility, weather, ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. road and traffic conditions so permit. If you should notice misfiring, uneven running ● Do not top up with too much engine oil ● Never endanger your safety or that of or loss of power when the car is moving, re- page 326. other road users. duce speed immediately. Have the car in- ››› spected by a specialised workshop. If this ● Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter cables  page 54. CAUTION happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust ››› system and escape into the atmosphere. The In order to reduce blocking of the particulate Always pay attention to any lit control catalytic converter can also be damaged by filter, some vehicles with an automatic gear- lamps and to the corresponding descrip- overheating. tions and instructions to avoid damage to box may increase the engine speed slightly the vehicle. For the sake of the environment to start cleaning the filter automatically. The  control lamp will not light up in this case. Even when the emission control system is Note working perfectly, there may be a smell of Control lamp  While the control lamps , ,  or  re- sulphur under certain conditions. This de- main lit, there may be engine problems, pends on the sulphur content of the fuel If the  control lamp lights up you should fuel consumption may increase and the en- being used. help the filter clean itself by driving in the ap- gine may lose power. propriate manner. You should drive at a speed of at least Particulate filter 60 km/h (37 mph) for about 15 minutes in Catalytic converter fourth or fifth gear (automatic transmission: The particulate filter removes soot particu- gear range S) at an engine speed of around The catalytic converter permits the subse- lates from the exhaust gas, retains and burns 2,000 rpm. In this way, the soot build up in the quent treatment of the exhaust gases thus re- them. To assist the combustion process, SEAT filter is burned. When cleaning is successful, ducing contaminating gas emissions. To en- recommends you avoid frequent short trips. the control lamp turns off. sure a longer working life for the exhaust sys- If the lamp  does not turn off, or the three tem and catalytic converter in a petrol en- ● Always use diesel with a low sulphur con- lamps turn on (particulate filter , fault in gine: tent ››› page 319. the emission control system  and glow ● Never use petrol or fuel oil. ● Always use unleaded petrol. plugs ), drive the vehicle to a specialised » ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. 257 Driving

workshop and have the fault repaired at the ● Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag- ● Check the depth of the water before enter- earliest opportunity. nostics equipment and spare parts required ing the flooded zone. The water should never for inspections and repairs? come above the lower edge of the bodywork WARNING ● Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina- ››› . ● Always drive according to the road tion country? ● Do not drive faster than a pedestrian. weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. ● For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol avail- ● Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear Driving recommendations should never able at the right octane rating? or switch off the engine. lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic. ● For diesel engines: Is diesel fuel available ● Oncoming traffic will cause waves which with a low sulphur content? raise the level of the water, making it difficult to cross the water. For the sake of the environment ● Are a suitable engine oil (››› page 326) and other engine fluids complying with SEAT The Start/Stop system must be deactivated Even when the emission control system is specifications available in the destination when driving through flooded areas working perfectly, there may be a smell of country? sulphur under certain conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel ● Will the navigation system fitted at the fac- WARNING tory operate correctly in the destination being used. When driving through water, mud, melted country with the available navigation data? snow, etc., please remember that due to ● Are special tyres required in the destination damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in country? winter, the braking effect may be delayed, Driving tips therefore the required braking distance is CAUTION greater. Driving abroad SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- ● “Dry the brakes and remove ice” by brak- age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower ing carefully. Ensure that you are not en- In some countries, certain safety regulations quality fuel, an inadequate service or the dangering other road-users or breaking and requirements are in force relating to ex- non-availability of genuine spare parts. traffic regulations in the process. haust gas emissions, which differ from the ● After driving through water, avoid sudden technical characteristics of the vehicle. Be- sharp manoeuvres. fore travelling abroad, SEAT recommends you consult a technical service about the le- Driving along flooded roadways CAUTION gal requirements and the following points: To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ● Driving through flooded areas may se- ● Does the vehicle need technical modifica- ing through water, for example, along a floo- verely damage vehicle components such tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust- ded road, please observe the following: ment of the headlamps? 258 Driver assistance systems as the engine, transmission, drive train or Driver assistance systems Control lamps electrical system. ● Never drive through salt water as salt  It lights up causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of Start assistance systems The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- the vehicle which have been in contact with gine shutdown is active. salt water. Introduction

WARNING . It lights up The intelligent technology in the start as- The Start-Stop system is not available. sistance systems cannot change the laws of physics. The improved comfort provided by start assistance systems should not Start-Stop operation* prompt you to take risks. ● Unintentional movements of the vehicle could cause serious injury. ● The start assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. ● Always try to adapt the speed of the vehicle and your style of driving to the condition of the ground or the road and to weather and traffic conditions. ● The start assistance system cannot keep the vehicle stationary in all conditions on a gradient or cause it to brake on steep Fig. 244 Detail of centre console: Start-stop downhill gradients, e.g. if the road is slip- operation button. pery or icy. With the Start-Stop system enabled, the engine is automatically stopped when the vehicle is at a standstill. The engine restarts automatically when required. The function is enabled automatically whenever the ignition is switched on. The »

259 Driving

instrument panel displays information on the ● The bonnet must be closed. Conditions for automatically restarting current status. ● The factory-fitted towing bracket must not the engine be electrically connected to a trailer. The engine may automatically restart under Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● A minimum engine temperature has been the following conditions: ● When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it in reached. ● neutral and take your foot off the clutch. The If the vehicle interior is too hot or too cold. ● The steering wheel must not be turned engine switches off. ● If the vehicle moves. more than 270 degrees. ● Simply depress the clutch pedal to move ● If the vehicle's battery voltage drops. ● The vehicle has moved since the last stop. off again. ● In vehicles with Climatronic: the tempera- Conditions requiring the key to restart the Vehicles with an automatic gearbox ture inside the vehicle is within the pre-set engine temperature range. ● Brake the vehicle until it is stopped, and The engine must be started manually under ● keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate The temperature set is neither very high nor the following conditions: the Auto Hold* system so that the vehicle re- very low. ● mains braked. The engine will switch off. The ● The air conditioning defrost function is not If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt. warning lamp  will appear in the display. switched on. ● If the driver door is opened. The engine may stop before the vehicle ● In vehicles with Climatronic: the blower has ● If the bonnet is opened. comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at not been manually set to a high speed. ● In vehicles with manual transmission: if a 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’s ● The power level of the vehicle's battery is gear is engaged. gearbox). sufficient. ● When you take your foot off the brake ped- ● The vehicle's battery temperature is neither Switching Start-Stop mode on and off al the engine will start up again. The warning too high nor too low. manually lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto ●  Hold* system, when the system is active, the ● The vehicle is not on a steep gradient or Press the button on the centre console engine will not start if you remove your foot slope. ››› Fig. 244. from the brake pedal. The car starts when ● The front wheels are not overly turned. ● The button will light up when the Start-Stop you press the accelerator pedal. function is switched off. ● The heated windscreen is not switched on. ● The engine will start immediately if the vehi- Important conditions for the engine to au- Reverse gear is not engaged. cle is in Stop mode when it is switched off tomatically switch off ● The park assist system is not switched on. manually. ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. ● The driver door must be closed. 260 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Auto Hold function* If the driver presses the brake pedal briefly or the accelerator to start off, the Auto Hold The brake servo and the power steering do function releases the brake once more. The not work when the engine is switched off. vehicle moves according to the gradient. ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off. If any of the conditions necessary for the Auto Hold function change while the vehicle stopped, the system is turned off as is the indica- CAUTION tor on the button ››› Fig. 245. The electronic Using the Start-Stop function for a long pe- parking brake engages where necessary to riod at very high outside temperatures park the vehicle safely ››› . could damage the vehicle's battery. Conditions for keeping the vehicle at a Note Fig. 245 Detail of centre console: Auto Hold standstill with Auto Hold: button. ● In some cases, you may have to restart ● The driver door must be closed. the vehicle using the key. Observe the cor- The control lamp on the button switches on ● The driver seat belt must be buckled. responding message on the instrument when the Auto Hold function is on. ● The engine must be running. panel display. When the Auto Hold function is on, this helps ● The ASR system is switched on ● If the steering wheel is turned more than the driver if they must regularly stop the vehi- 270°, Stop will not function; however, the ››› page 238. cle or if they must stop with the engine run- angle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehicle. ning for prolonged periods, for example, on Automatically engaging and disengaging hills, before a traffic light or in traffic jams with the Auto Hold function continuous stopping and starting. If the Auto Hold function was engaged with The Auto Hold function automatically pre- the AUTO HOLD button before disengaging vents the vehicle from rolling away acciden- the ignition, the function will automatically re- tally when at a standstill, without the driver main engaged after the ignition is re-engag- having to keep his/her foot on the brake ped- ed. al. If the Auto Hold function was not engaged, it When the system that detects that the vehi- will automatically remain disengaged after cle has stopped, the Auto Hold keeps the ve- the ignition is engaged. » hicle at a standstill. The brake pedal can be released.

261 Driving

Permanent Auto Hold connection Auto Hold turns off automatically under CAUTION the following conditions: The Auto Hold function must be switched on Before entering an automatic car wash, al- every time the engine is started. However, to Manual gearbox Automatic gear- ways switch the Auto Hold function off, as it switch the Auto Hold function on permanent- box could be damaged when the electronic ly, the mark must be switched on in the Set- parking brake automatically engages. tings menu, “Autohold” submenu 1. If one of the conditions mentioned in table on ›››  page 28. page 262 changes. 2. If the engine is “not running regularly” or if there Auto Hold works automatically under the is a malfunction. Parking distance warning following conditions: 3. When changing to idle If the selector lever is system* All points must be fulfilled simultaneously speed. placed in neutral (N). ››› : 4. If the engine is turned If the engine is switch- Introduction off or stalls. ed off. Manual gearbox Automatic gear- The parking distance warning system assists box 5. If the driver acceler- If the vehicle is accel- the driver when parking. When the vehicle ates while pressing erated. approaches an obstacle, forwards or back- 1. If the vehicle is kept at a standstill using the the clutch in. brake pedal on a flat or a slope. wards, an intermittent audible warning will be 6. When one of the heard, higher or lower depending on the dis- 2. The engine must be “running smoothly”. wheels has minimal tance. The shorter the distance, the shorter contact with the the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is 3. On a slope, the 1st A gear for driving is se- ground (e.g. on un- too close to the obstacle, the audible warning gear is engaged uphill lected from R, D or S. even ground). or the reverse gear is becomes constant. engaged for a downhill. The clutch must WARNING If you continue to approach an obstacle be held down. when the sound is continuous, this means the The Auto Hold technology is limited by the system can no longer measure the distance. Upon accelerating Upon accelerating, laws of physics. The improved comfort pro- and pressing in the the brake releases vided by Auto Hold should never prompt The sensor system on the bumpers transmit clutch simultane- gradually. you to take risks. and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound ously, the brake re- ● Never leave the vehicle running and with signal (transmission, reflection from the ob- leases gradually. the Auto Hold function switched on. stacle and reception), this system continu- ● Auto Hold cannot always stop the vehicle ously calculates the distance between the uphill and downhill (e.g. if the ground is bumper and the obstacle. slippery or frozen). 262 Driver assistance systems

WARNING the warnings of the parking sensor system Parking distance warning system* could cause considerable damage to the The parking distance warning system and vehicle. the optical parking system cannot replace driver awareness. ● The bumper sensors may become damaged or misaligned, for example, when ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- parking. stacles and people are not registered. ● To ensure that the system works properly, ● Always observe the area around the vehi- the bumper sensors must be kept clean, cle, as the sensors do not always detect free of ice and snow and uncovered. small children, animals or objects. ● When cleaning the sensors with high- ● The surface of certain objects and some pressure or steam cleaning equipment, clothing do not reflect the ultrasound sig- spray the sensors briefly at a distance of nals from the parking distance system. The no less than 10 cm (4 inches). Fig. 246 Detail of the centre console: button system cannot detect or incorrectly de- for switching the parking distance warning sys- tects these objects and people wearing tem on and off these types of clothes. Note ● External sound sources can affect the Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous parking distance aid signals. In this case, warnings on the parking sensor system, e.g. under certain circumstances, people and rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of other objects will not be detected. vehicles.

CAUTION ● The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open boots, etc. This could result in damage to your car. Fig. 247 Parking sensor system sensors on the ● Although the parking distance warning front bumper system detects and warns of the presence of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap- The parking distance warning system assists pear from the angle of measurement of the the driver when parking. If the vehicle is ap- sensors if it is too high or low and the sys- proaching an obstacle, an intermittent audi- tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it ble warning is emitted. The shorter the dis- will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring tance, the shorter the intervals between » 263 Driving

tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obsta- ● Your technical service centre can adjust the cle, the audible warning becomes constant. volume of the warning signals.

Switching the parking distance warning Note system on and off If the parking distance warning system is ● Press the  button when the ignition is faulty, a constant audible warning will be switched on ››› Fig. 246. emitted the first time it is switched on and the button will flash. Switch the parking ● Automatic connection: engage reverse distance warning system off using the but- gear. ton and take the vehicle to a specialised ● workshop to have the system checked as Automatic disconnection: drive faster than Fig. 249 On-screen OPS display: A has de- 15 km/h (9 mph). soon as possible. tected an obstacle in the segment; B restricted area in front of the vehicle. The button lights up when the function is switched on. Optical parking system* (OPS) The optical parking system is an accessory to the Parking distance warning system Things to note on the parking distance ››› page 263 and the park assist system warning system ››› page 265. ● The parking distance warning system The zone recorded by the sensors in front of sometimes registers water on the sensors as and behind the vehicle is displayed on the an obstacle. factory-fitted infotainment system display. ● If the distance does not change, the warn- Any obstacles are displayed in relation to the ing signal will sound less loudly after a few vehicle ››› . seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the volume will remain constant. Function Necessary operations ● When the vehicle moves away from the ob- Switch on the parking distance stacle, the beeping sound automatically Fig. 248 On-screen OPS display: A has de- warning system › page 263 or Switching the ›› switches off. On approaching the obstacle tected an obstacle in the collision zone; B has the park assist system display on: again, the beeping sound will automatically detected an obstacle in the segment; C zone ››› page 265. The OPS switches recorded behind the vehicle. switch back on. on automatically. ● If the electronic parking brake is engaged or the selector lever is set to P, no audible warning will be emitted.

264 Driver assistance systems

Function Necessary operations On the colour When the OPS is switched off and back on screen: col- again, muting is cancelled. Error messages Distance from Press an area selection button on Audible our of the cannot be switched off. Switching the the factory-fitted infotainment the vehicle to warning segment if an display off system. the obstacle WARNING manually: OR: press  or RVC on the obstacle is screen shortly. recognised Do not be distracted from the traffic when looking at the screen. Drive forwards at more than about Ahead: around 10-15 km/h (6-9 mph). 31-120 cm Beeping Switching the Yellow Select the reverse gear on vehi- Behind: around sound display off cles with rear assist page 270. 31-160 cm manually: ››› The display changes to the image Park Assist system* (Park of the camera. Approximately Perma- 0-30 cm in front or nent Red Assist) behinda) sound Zones explored a) The permanent sound starts at a somewhat greater Introduction The area in which obstacles are recognised distance on vehicles with a factory-fitted towing covers from the front of the vehicle to up to bracket. 120 cm ahead and 60 cm on the sides ››› Fig. 249 B . Behind the vehicle, the area With towing bracket analysed covers 160 cm and around 60 cm A specific image is displayed on the screen of to the sides ››› Fig. 248 C . vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket and an electrically connected trailer. In this Screen display Fig. 250 Related video case, the distances behind the vehicle are not The image displayed represents the super- indicated. The Park Assist system helps the driver to find vised zones in several segments. As the vehi- a suitable place to park, to insert the vehicle cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches Switching the parking sensor system into parallel and perpendicular parking pla- the displayed vehicle segment ››› Fig. 248 B sound on and off ces and to leave parallel parking places. and ››› Fig. 249 A . Ultimately, when the sec-  ond-to-last segment is shown, the collision If the button on the infotainment system The Park Assist system is limited to the system area has been reached. Stop the vehicle! display is pressed briefly, it may mute the abilities and requires that the driver is espe- sound of OPS warnings. To switch the warn- cially attentive ››› . ings back on, press the button again briefly. The parking sensor system is a component of the Park Assist system that helps to park the vehicle. » 265 Driving

For vehicles with the optical parking system CAUTION ● When cleaning the sensors with high- (OPS), the infotainment system screen dis- pressure or steam cleaning equipment, ● The park assist system aims exclusively plays the detected zones in front of and be- spray the sensors briefly at a distance of at other parked vehicles, without taking hind the vehicle, indicating - within the limits no less than 10 cm. curbs or other circumstances into account. of the system - the position of obstacles in re- Make sure you do not damage the tyres lation to the vehicle. and wheel rims when parking. Where nec- Note The park assist system cannot be switched essary, stop manoeuvring to avoid damag- Contact a specialised workshop with any ing the vehicle. on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec- system faults. SEAT recommends taking trically connected to a trailer. ● The sensors may not always be able to your car in for technical service. detect objects such as trailer draw bars, WARNING thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This could result in damage to your car. Despite the assistance provided by the park assist system, do not run any risks ● Although the parking distance warning when parking. The system is not a replace- system detects and warns of the presence ment for driver awareness. of an obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from the angle of measurement of the ● Unintentional movements of the vehicle sensors if it is too high or low and the sys- could cause serious injury. tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. the warnings of the parking sensor system ● The surface of certain objects and items could cause considerable damage to the of clothing and external sound sources vehicle. This is also valid when using the may have a negative affect on the park as- park assist (e.g. to park behind a truck or sist signals or on the system sensors or motorcycle). Therefore, always keep a may not reflect its signals. close watch on the area in front of and behind the vehicle while parking, and inter- ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- vene promptly if necessary. stacles and people are not registered. ● To ensure that the system works properly, ● Always observe the area around the vehi- the bumper sensors must be kept clean, cle, as the sensors do not always detect free of ice and snow and uncovered. small children, animals or objects. ● The bumper sensors may become damaged or misaligned, for example, when parking.

266 Driver assistance systems

Parking using the park assist sys- ● In head-in parking: press the  tem ››› Fig. 251 button as many times as necessary to select the desired parking mode. When the function is enabled, the lamp button will light up. ● If necessary, press the  button once more to change parking mode. ● Apply the turn signal for the side on which a gap is to be detected for parking. The instrument panel displays the side corresponding to the road.

Parking Fig. 251 Detailed view of the centre console: ● When parking parallel to the road: drive button to switch the park assist system on man- next to the gap at a speed of no more than ually 40 km/h (25 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 m and 2 m. ● When parking perpendicular to the road: drive next to the gap at a speed of no more than 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 m and 2 m. Fig. 252 Gap detected: in line or in battery. ● The best parking results will be achieved if Preparing to park you position the vehicle as parallel as possible to the line of parked cars or the kerb. ● The Traction control system ASR must be ● When a suitable parking place is displayed turned on ››› page 238. on the instrument panel, stop and select re- ● In parallel parking: press the  verse gear. ››› Fig. 251 button as many times as necessa- ● Follow the instructions given on the instru- ry to select the desired parking mode. When ment panel display the function is enabled, the lamp button will light up. ● Then, release the steering wheel when the warning signal sounds ››› : The system »

267 Driving

will move the steering wheel! Ob- ● A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma- signal from the parking sensor system does serve the surrounding area. noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the not indicate changes of direction.  button again. ● Observe the surrounding area and acceler- ● The park assist can also be activated af- ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h ● There is a system malfunction (system tem- terwards, if you pass close to a parallel (4 mph). porarily unavailable). parking space at a maximum of 40 km/h ● The park assist system is only responsible ● The ASR system is switched off or the ASR (25 mph) or close to a perpendicular park- for moving the steering wheel during the ma- or ESC is working. ing space at about 20 km/h (12 mph) and  noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera- then press the button. tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake. WARNING ● The progress bar on the screen of the instrument panel shows a display of the rela- ● Follow the instructions given by the park The steering wheel turns quickly by itself tive distance to be covered. assist system until the manoeuvre is comple- when parking using the park assist system. ted. Placing your hand between the steering ● When the Park Assist system is turning wheel spokes could lead to injuries. the steering wheel of the stopped vehicle ● The park assist system steers the vehicle the  symbol is also displayed. Press on forwards and backwards until it is in a straight the brake pedal so that the steering can position in the parking space. Note turn with the vehicle at a standstill and thus ● The manoeuvre is complete when the cor- ● The park assist system has its limitations. reduce the number of manoeuvres. responding indication is given on the instru- For example, it is not possible to park on ● A “suitable” parking space length is at ment panel display. tight bends using the park assist system. least 1.1 m greater than the length of the ● Even if the park assist system recognises vehicle. Stopping the parking manoeuvre that there is not enough space for parking ● If the results of the park assist system are The park assist system stops the manoeuvre the vehicle, the instrument panel display not as good after changing the wheels, the will still show this place. In this case, the in advance in the event of one of the follow- system must memorise the perimeter of the parking manoeuvre should not be reques- new wheels. This process is performed au- ing: ted. tomatically while the vehicle is in motion. ● Press button . ● Changing gears between forward and re- To help this process, turn slowly (at less than 20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty ● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). verse gears before indicated (that is, before the signal from the parking sensor sys- car park. ● The driver moves the steering wheel. tem) the parking results may not be ideal. ● The parking manoeuvre has not been com- ● For parallel parking (parallel to the road), pleted after 6 minutes since the park assist a sound will tell the driver when they must system was activated. change from forward gears to reverse; the

268 Driver assistance systems

Leaving a parking space using the Automatic stoppage of the manoeuvre Braking to avoid damage at excess speed Park Assist system The park assist system stops the manoeuvre It is possible that the system operates the in the event of one of the following: brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking Driving off manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes ● Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). ● Switch on the engine. will intervene during each parking process. ● The driver moves the steering wheel. ● Press button . When the function is ena- Braking to minimise damage bled, the button ››› Fig. 251 will light up. ● A sliding door is opened. To restart the manoeuvre, close the sliding door and press the When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle ● Apply the turn signal for the side on which  button again. may brake automatically. In certain circum- you want to leave the parking space. ● There is a system malfunction (system tem- stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds, ● Select reverse gear. porarily unavailable). vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As- ● Follow the instructions given by the park sist system may stop the vehicle completely ● The ASR system is switched off or the ASR assist system. before an object. or ESC is working. ● When the next indication appears, release ● Press the foot brake ››› ! the steering wheel ››› in Parking using the WARNING park assist system on page 268: The sys- Following the intervention of the brakes, the The steering wheel turns quickly automati- tem will move the steering wheel! cally when leaving a parking space using Park Assist will stop. Observe the surrounding area. the park assist system. Placing your hand ● Observe the surrounding area and acceler- between the steering wheel spokes could WARNING ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h lead to injuries. Despite the assistance provided by the (4 mph). park assist system, do not run any risks ● The park assist system is only responsible when parking. The system is not a replace- for moving the steering wheel during the ma- Park Assist brake operation ment for driver awareness. noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera- ● Always be ready to brake. tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake. The Park Assist system helps the driver by ● Automatic brake intervention will end af- ● When it is possible to leave the parking braking automatically. Automatic braking ter 1.5 seconds approximately. Following space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take does not relieve the driver of responsibility for automatic intervention of the brakes, stop control of the steering and when traffic con- controlling the accelerator, brake and clutch the vehicle yourself. ditions permit, leave the parking space. ››› .

269 Driving

Rear Assist* (Rear View ● Some objects may not be displayed or ● The system might not show all areas Camera) may not be very clear (e.g. very thin posts clearly. or fences), due to the resolution of the ● Only use the rear assist system when the monitor or if the light is dim. boot hatch is completely closed. Introduction ● The camera has blind spots in which obstacles and people are not detected. The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers CAUTION ● Keep the camera lens clean and clear of during parking or reversing manoeuvres. The ● snow and ice. Do not cover it. The camera only displays 2D images on camera image and certain orientation points the screen. Due to the lack of depth, it generated by the system are indicated on the might be difficult or impossible to recog- factory-fitted infotainment system screen. WARNING nise protruding objects or cracks in the road. Two types of location point (modes) can be The intelligent technology in the rear assist system cannot change the limits imposed ● The cameras may not always be able to selected: by the laws of physics and by the system it- detect objects such as thin rails, fences, ● Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to self. Careless or uncontrolled use of the posts and trees, etc. This could result in the road (e.g. in a car park). rear assist system may result in severe inju- damage to your car. ries and accidents. The system is not a re- ● Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to the placement for driver awareness. curb. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- The mode can be changed by pressing the ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. button on the infotainment system screen. ● Always keep a close eye on the area Only the mode to which the points can be around the vehicle and always look to- changed will be displayed. wards where you are parking. The display shows the path of the rear end of the vehi- WARNING cle using the current steering angle. The front of the vehicle turns more in compari- Use of the camera to calculate the dis- son with the rear. tance from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is inaccurate and may cause acci- ● Do not be distracted from the traffic dents and severe injuries. when looking at the screen. ● The camera lens expands and distorts ● Always observe the area around the vehi- the field of vision and displays the objects cle, as the cameras do not always detect on the screen in a different, vague manner. children, animals or objects.

270 Driver assistance systems

Instructions for use 3 Display help. The help list explains the Operations in vehicles with the optical parking surfaces and lines on the camera image. system (OPS)  Press to exit help. Switching the Select reverse gear with the igni- 4 Mute the sound. display on auto- tion switched on or the engine matically: running. Mode 1 will be dis- 5 Adjust the display: bright, contrast, colour. played. 6 Switching on the orientation points for Press a button to select the area rear parking perpendicular to the road on the Infotainment system. (mode 1). OR: press the  button on the 7 Displaying the optical parking system. Switching the screen. display off man- OR: after switching off the igni- Operations in vehicles with no optical parking ually: tion, the rear assist image stays system (OPS) on the screen briefly. Fig. 253 On the rear lid: location of the rear assist camera. Switching the Select reverse gear with the igni- Press button . display on auto- tion switched on or the engine matically: running. Mode 1 will be dis- Switching off the The OPS display will immediately played. display by dis- be shown. engaging re- Press a button to select the area verse gear: on the Infotainment system. Switching the OR: press the  button on the Switching off the Drive forwards at more than ap- display off man- screen. display by driv- prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). ually: OR: after switching off the igni- ing forwards: tion, the rear assist image stays on the screen briefly. Things to note

Switching off the The image will switch off after 1) Do not use the rear assist system in the display by dis- around 10 seconds. Fig. 254 Rear assist display: mode 2 enabled. engaging re- following cases: verse gear: – If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis control Function buttons on the screen: Switching off the Drive forwards at more than ap- (DCC). 1  display the menu;  hide the menu. display by driv- prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). – If the image displayed is not very clear or reliable ing forwards: (low visibility or dirty lens). 2  Turning off the reversing camera images. – If the space behind the vehicle cannot be clearly or completely recognised. »

271 Driving

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the ● Moisten the lens using a commercially Parking perpendicular to the road following cases: available, alcohol-based glass cleaning (mode 1) agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth – If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear. ››› . – If the driver is not familiar with the system. ● Remove snow using a small brush.

– If the rear lid is open. ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice ››› .

– If the position and installation angle of the camera CAUTION have been changed, e.g. in a rear-end collision. Have a specialised workshop check the system. ● Never use abrasive cleaners to clean the camera lens. 2) Optical illusions of the camera (exam- ● Never remove snow or ice from the cam- ples) era lens using warm or hot water. This could damage the lens. The rear assist camera produces two-dimensional Fig. 255 Display: orientation lines for the park- images. Any cracks in or objects protruding from the ing space behind the vehicle ground or from other vehicles are more difficult to Note spot or cannot be seen due to a lack of depth in the ● SEAT recommends that you practise Summary of the orientation points image displayed. parking with the rear assist system in a qui- Meaning of orientation lines displayed on the Objects or other vehicles may seem to be closer or et location or in a car park to become fa- screen ››› Fig. 255. All of the lengths of the further away than what they really are: miliar with the system, including the orien- orientation lines use a vehicle located on a – On changing from a flat surface to a slope or gradi- tation lines and their function. horizontal surface as reference. ent. ● The orientation lines will not be displayed on the screen if the rear lid is open or the 1 Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca- – On changing from a slope or gradient to a flat sur- ted up to 40 cm behind the vehicle. face. factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer. 2 Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve- – If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear. hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis- – On approaching protruding objects. These objects played green ends around 2 metres be- may be outside the angle of vision of the camera hind the vehicle, on the road. when reversing. 3 Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the vehicle as the steering wheel turns. The Cleaning the camera lens area displayed yellow ends around 3 me- Keep the camera lens clean and clear of tres behind the vehicle, on the road. snow and ice: 272 Driver assistance systems

Parking Summary of the orientation points ● When the yellow line 3 touches the side ● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se- Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces dis- limit of the space, e.g. the border or curb lect reverse gear. played on the screen ››› Fig. 256. All of the (magnifying glass), turn the steering wheel fully in the opposite direction. ● Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle ● so that the yellow orientation lines guide you located on a horizontal surface as reference. Continue reversing until the vehicle is inside the space, parallel to the road. Correct the towards the space ››› Fig. 255 3 . 1 Safety distance: road area located up to position if necessary. ● Align the vehicle straight in the parking 40 cm behind the vehicle. place using the help of the green orientation 2 Vehicle side limit. lines. 3 Turning point when parking. When the Cruise control* (Cruise Con- yellow line touches the curb or another limit of the parking space, the point for trol System - CCS) Parking parallel to the road (mode changing direction (magnifying glass) will 2) have been reached. Warning and control lamp 4 Free space required to parallel park the vehicle. The surface displayed must com-  It lights up pletely fit in the space. This cruise control system maintains the set speed of 5 Possible vehicle parked next to the curb. the vehicle.

Parking Several warning and control lamps light up ● Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- parking space and select reverse gear. ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system onds. screen for parallel parking. Fig. 256 Display: orientation lines and surfa- ● ces for the space behind the vehicle Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel WARNING so that the surface displayed yellow on the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- screen stops in front of any obstacles 5 (e.g. After applying the turn signal, the lines and trol and warning lamps on page 109. surfaces not required are deleted. another vehicle). ● Turn the steering wheel fully towards the space and reverse slowly.

273 Driving

Cruise control system operation Status Fig. 257: ● If, in the case of a manual gearbox, 1st gear A CCS temporarily switched off. The set is engaged. speed is displayed in small figures. ● If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long B System error. Contact a specialised time. workshop. WARNING C CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty. Use of the cruise control could cause accidents and severe injuries if it is not possible D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is to drive at a constant speed maintaining displayed in large figures. the safety distance. ● Do not use the cruise control in heavy Travelling down hills with the CCS traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in When travelling down hills the CCS cannot front is insufficient, on steep roads, with maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle several bends or in slippery circumstances down using the brake pedal and reduce (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. Fig. 257 Instrument panel display: CCS status gears if required. indications. ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road Automatic off or on unpaved roads. Read the additional information carefully The cruise control system (CCS) is switched ● Always adapt your speed and the dis- ›››  page 34 off automatically or temporarily: tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- The cruise control system (CCS) is able to bility, weather conditions, the condition of maintain the set speed when driving forwards ● If the system detects a fault that could neg- the road and the traffic situation. from approx. 20 km/h (12 mph). atively affect the operation of the CCS. ● To avoid unexpected operation of the ● If you drive above your set speed limit for a cruise control system, turn it off every time The CCS only slows down by reducing the long time. you finish using it. accelerator but not by braking ››› . ● When action is taken to adjust driving dy- ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or Indication on display namics, e.g. by the ASR and ESC. weather conditions. ● If the airbag is triggered. There are different versions of the cruise con- ● When travelling down hills, the CCS can- trol system. In vehicles with the multifunction ● If the brake pedal is pressed. not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle display (MFD), the set speed is displayed on ● If, in the case of the DSG® dual clutch gear- tends to accelerate under its own weight. the instrument panel screen. box, the selector lever is in the R, P or N posi- Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to tion. slow the vehicle. 274 Driver assistance systems

Emergency braking assis- lane travelling in the same direction. It may the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a fail to activate in other danger situations. possible emergency braking ››› . tance system (Front Assist)* The Front Assist function is active within a Critical warning range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) Topic introduction and 210 km/h (130 mph). Depending on If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour, (advance warning), the system may actively some of the sub-functions described below intervene in the brakes and generate a brief are omitted in order to optimise the system’s jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger general behaviour. of a collision. The Front Assist is a driving assistance Automatic braking function that can never replace the driver’s attention. If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independent Safety distance warning emergency braking by progressively increasing the braking effect in accordance with how If the system detects a situation of danger critical the situation is. Fig. 258 On the instrument panel display: ad- because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle vance warning indications. ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an Driver emergency braking assistance sys- indication on the instrument panel display tem The objective of the emergency braking as- . sistance system is to prevent head-on colli- Faced with an imminent collision, the system The timing of the warning varies depending sions against objects that may be in the vehi- may detect that the driver is not braking hard on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. cle’s path or minimise the consequences of enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it such impacts. will automatically increase the braking effect. Advance warning Within the limitations imposed by the environ- Due to certain driving circumstances and the If the system detects a possible collision with mental conditions and by the system itself, limitations of its operation, there are some the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by the function acts in staggered fashion, de- cases in which the system cannot prevent a means of an audible warning and an indica- pending on how critical the situation is. Initial- collision, although it can significantly mini- tion on the instrument panel display ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac- mise the consequences by reducing the ››› Fig. 258. tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti- speed and the force of the impact. » vates an independent emergency braking. The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same 275 Driving

WARNING tem may issue unnecessary warnings and Radar sensor intervene inopportunely in the braking. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109. ● The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane. WARNING ● The driver must always be ready to take The Front Assist system cannot change the over the control of the vehicle. laws of physics or replace the driver in ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, terms of keeping control of the vehicle and the brake pedal is “harder”. reacting to a possible emergency situation. ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by WARNING pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving Fig. 259 On the front behind the SEAT badge: Following a Front Assist emergency warn- the wheel. radar sensor. ing, pay immediate attention to the situation and try to avoid the collision by brak- Note On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica- sensor has been installed to capture the traf- ble. ● When the Front Assist is connected, the indications on the instrument panel screen fic situation ››› Fig. 259. ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- may be concealed by warnings from other scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired functions, such as an incoming call. intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the until it stops completely. However, the the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Front Assist does not work. The instrument brake system does not halt the vehicle per- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- panel displays the following message: Front manently. Use the foot brake! tions. Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- clean the radar sensor . ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- ››› scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes dents and serious injuries. When the radar sensor begins to operate several times unnecessarily), switch it off. properly again, the Front Assist will automati- ● In complex driving situations, occasional- Have the system checked by a specialised ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a cally be available again. The message will intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex- SEAT dealership. disappear from the instrument panel display. ample at traffic islands. Front Assist operation may be affected by a ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- paired, for example, by dirt or because the cur, for example, in a closed car park or due radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys- 276 Driver assistance systems to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails Operating the Emergency braking access the Assistants menu with the driver on the road or sheets used in road works). assistance system (Front Assist) assistance systems button ›››  page 30. The area in front of and around the radar ● OR: using the menu of the instrument panel sensor should not be covered with adhesives, display Settings > Assistants > Front additional or similar headlights, as this may Assist. To access the Settings menu, de- negatively affect Front Assist operation. pending on the features, use the arrow keys and the wheel of the multi-function steering If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- wheel or the button on the windscreen wiper paired or structural modifications are made lever ›››  page 29. to it, for example if the suspension is lowered, Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for ment panel will inform that it has been this purpose. switched off with the following indicator  ››› Fig. 260. CAUTION Fig. 260 On the screen of the instrument panel Front Assist switched off message. If you have the sensation that the radar Activating or deactivating the pre-warning sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- (advance warning) disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid tion is switched on. The advance warning can be enabled or dis- possible dangerous situations caused by a abled in the menu of the instrument panel When the Front Assist is switched off, so too system malfunction. If this occurs have it display Settings > Assistants > Front adjusted. are the advance warning function (pre warn- Assist  page 32. SEAT recommends ing) and the distance warning. ››› ● The sensor may become damaged or driving with the advance warning function on. lose its settings when knocked, for exam- SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 278, Switching distance warning on and off compromise the system's efficacy or dis- Switching the Front Assist off temporarily If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle connect it. in the following situations. in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- appear on the instrument panel display cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT Switching the Front Assist on and off  recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for . In this case, increase the safe distance. With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist this purpose. The distance warning can be enabled or dis- can be switched on and off as follows: ● Clean away the snow with a brush and abled in the menu of the instrument panel the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- ● Using the menu of the instrument panel dis- display Settings > Assistants > Front icer spray. play Assistants > Front Assist. You can Assist ›››  page 32. »

277 Driving

The system will store the setting for the next tions may be inopportune from the driver's ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. time the ignition is switched on. standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter- ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- vene if necessary. SEAT recommends keeping the distance tion. warning switched on at all times. ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- The following conditions may cause the hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards Front Assist not to react or to do so too or over the top. late: Switching the Front Assist off tem- ● In the first few instants of driving after porarily in the following situations switching on the ignition, due to the system’s initial auto-calibration. Adaptive Cruise Control In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. ACC* limitations: ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. Introduction ● When the vehicle is to be towed. ● If the Front Assist is switched off or damaged. ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the ● When the radar sensor is damaged. ESC activated in Sport mode manually ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for ››› page 244. example in a rear collision. ● If the ESC is controlling. ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily trically connected trailer are damaged. with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. ditional headlight or the like. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, road or sheets used in road works. ferry or train. Fig. 261 Detection area. ● If the vehicle is reversing. ● If the vehicle over-accelerates. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an extension of the normal cruise control sys- System limitations ● In case of snow or heavy rain. tem (CCS) ››› . ● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- The Front Assist has certain physical limita- bikes. tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the system's reac- ● Misaligned vehicles.

278 Driver assistance systems

The ACC function allows the driver to pro- Driver intervention prompt ● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- gram a cruise speed and to select the dis- During driving, the ACC is subject to certain ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by tance required with regard to the vehicle in limitations inherent in the system. In other applying the pedal. front. words, in certain circumstances the driver will ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, There are two versions of the system availa- have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as the ACC system could automatically ble by default: the distance from other vehicles. switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off. ● In this case, the instrument panel screen will Version 1 works at speeds between 30 and ● If the vehicle continues to move involun- 160 km/h (20 and 100 mph). warn you to intervene by applying the brake and a warning tone will be heard tarily after a driver intervention prompt, ● brake the vehicle by applying the pedal. Version 2 works at speeds between 30 and ››› page 280. 210 km/h (20 and 130 mph). ● If the dash panel displays a driver inter- WARNING vention prompt, adjust the distance your- The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise self. speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis- The intelligent technology in the ACC can- ● The driver should be ready to accelerate tance with the vehicle in front based on its not overcome the system's inherent limita- or brake by him/herself at all times. speed. tions or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause When driving behind another vehicle, the serious accidents and injuries. The system CAUTION ACC function reduces speed until it is the is not a replacement for driver awareness. same as that of the vehicle ahead and main- If you have the sensation that the radar ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to tains the set distance between the vehicles. If sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive This will avoid possible damage. If this oc- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- curs have it adjusted. cruise control also accelerates, going no tions. higher than the target speed programmed. ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- ● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT If the vehicle is equipped with automatic on steep roads, with several bends or in recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until slippery circumstances such as snow, ice, this purpose. it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads. stops. ● Never use the ACC when driving off-road Note The distance programmed should be in- or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been designed for use on paved roads only. ● If the ACC system does not work as de- creased when the road surface is wet. scribed in this chapter, do not use it until it ● The ACC does not react on approaching has been checked by a specialised work- a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- dealership for this purpose. » ped at the traffic lights. 279 Driving

● Indications on the display Maximum speed with the ACC activated  If the symbol is white: the ACC is is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). active. ● When the ACC is switched on, strange A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad- noises may be heard during automatic justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front. braking cause by the braking system.  If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive (Standby) Symbols on the instrument panel display and control lamps The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green The speed reduction by the ACC   to maintain the distance from the The ACC is active. vehicle in front is not sufficient. Some control and warning lamps will light up Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention briefly when the ignition is switched on to prompt. check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds. The ACC is not currently availa-  a) ble. WARNING With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- start it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on the trol and warning lamps on page 109. front ››› Fig. 263 (in case it is dirty or icy or it has Fig. 262 On the instrument panel display: (A) been hit). If it is still unavailable, refer to a specialised ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active. workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour Status display display is in colour. Indications on the display ››› Fig. 262: 1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-  The ACC is active. tive and is not regulating your speed. No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed 2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is speed remains constant. not active and is not regulating your distance.

280 Driver assistance systems

3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi- and is regulating your speed. by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- ble damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the 4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. ● The sensor may become damaged or adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. 5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis- lose its settings when knocked, for exam- The instrument panel displays the following tance based on speed. ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec- compromise the system's efficacy or dis- essary, clean the SEAT badge area ››› . Note connect it. When the radar sensor begins to operate ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- When the ACC is connected, the indica- properly again, the ACC will automatically cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT tions on the instrument panel screen may recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for be concealed by warnings from other func- be available again. The message on the in- this purpose. tions, such as an incoming call. strument panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again. ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- ACC operation may be affected by a strong icer spray. Radar sensor radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works). The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation. If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered, ACC operation may be affected. In this sce- Fig. 263 On the front behind the SEAT badge: nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT radar sensor. dealership. On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radar sensor has been installed to capture the traf- CAUTION fic situation ››› Fig. 263. If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

281 Driving

Operating the Adaptive Cruise grammed speed and ACC status will be dis- The set speed can be changed when the ve- Control ACC played ››› Fig. 262. hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like. Any modification to the programmed speed What ACC settings are possible? will be shown on the bottom left part of the instrument panel display Fig. 262. ● Setting your speed ››› page 282. ››› ● Setting your distance ››› page 282. Setting your distance level ● Connecting and activating the ACC To increase/reduce the distance level, press page 282. ››› the rocker switch towards the left/right ● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC ››› Fig. 265 A . ››› page 283. The instrument panel display shows the mod- ● Adjusting the default distance level at the ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis- start of your journey ››› page 283. tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- Fig. 264 On the left of the steering column: ● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 283. mends level 3. The set distance can be third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- Control. ● Conditions in which the ACC does not react ››› page 283. ing driving, as you like.

Setting speed Connecting and activating the ACC To set your speed, move the third lever loca- To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- ted in position 1 upwards or downwards until tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle the desired speed is shown on the instrument speed and the position of the third level of the panel display. The speed adjustment is made ACC must all be taken into account. at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals. ● With a manual transmission, the gearbox Once you are driving, if you wish to set the selector lever must be in any gear except current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed first, and the speed must be higher than ap- and activate the ACC, press the  proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic Fig. 265 On the left of the steering column: Fig. 265 button. If you wish to increase or transmission, the gearbox selector lever must third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise ››› Control. reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 be in position D or S. mph), move the lever to position 2 ● To activate the ACC, with the third lever in When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is ››› Fig. 264 or press the  button, respec- position 1 press the  button or move the connected, the green control lamp  will tively. third lever of the ACC to position 2 light up on the instrument panel, and the pro- ››› Fig. 264. At this point, the image of the 282 Driver assistance systems

ACC on the instrument panel display will ● Very long The following conditions may lead the switch to Active mode ››› Fig. 262. ● Last distance ACC not to react: ● If the accelerator is pressed. When the ACC function is active, the vehicle To access the Settings menu, depending on ● travels at a set speed and distance from the the features, use the arrow keys and the If there is no gear engaged. vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or ● If the ESC is controlling. be changed at any time. the button on the windscreen wiper lever ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. ›››  page 29. Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- In wet road conditions, you should always set trically connected trailer are damaged. To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in ● If the vehicle is reversing. 0 position ››› Fig. 264 (engaged). An ACC front than when driving in dry conditions. deactivated message appears and the ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph). function is totally deactivated. Changing the driving profile If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just The driving profile can be used to modify the Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise to switch it temporarily to inactive mode ACC acceleration and braking behaviour. (Standby), move the third lever to position 3 Control ACC temporarily in certain ››› Fig. 264 or press the brake pedal. There are three driving profiles available in situations the menu of the instrument panel display It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) Settings > Assistants > ACC > Basic In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is setting: opened. Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to ● Normal the system's limitations ››› : Adjusting the default distance level at the ● Sport ● On tight bends and roundabouts, in accel- start of your journey ● Eco eration and deceleration lanes on motorways The display of the instrument panel, menu or in sections with road works to prevent in- Settings > Assistants > ACC can be To access the Settings menu, depending on voluntary acceleration to reach the program- used to set the last distance level used or to the features, use the arrow keys and the med speed. wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or select from several distance levels: ● When going through a tunnel, as operation the button on the windscreen wiper lever could be affected. ● Very short ›››  page 29. ● On roads with several lanes, when other ve- ● Short hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak- ● Media ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be ● Long overtaken on the right. » 283 Driving

● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the Special driving situations vehicle in front might not be detected properly or, in certain circumstances, might not be detected at all.

WARNING If the ACC does not switch off in the situations described, serious accidents and injuries may occur. ● Always switch off the ACC in critical situations.

Note If you do not switch off the ACC in the aforementioned situations, you may com- Fig. 267 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One mit a legal offence. vehicle turning and another stationary. Fig. 266 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain physical limitations inherent in the system. For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unexpected or come late from the driver's point of view. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary. For example, the following traffic situations call for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stationary period After a stationary period, the ACC does not start driving again automatically nor does it actively regulate again.

284 Driver assistance systems

In order for the ACC to start regulating ac- ››› Fig. 266 A In these situations the vehicle Other vehicles changing lanes tively again, the driver must start driving may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to Vehicles changing lanes a short distance again faster than 2 km/h for a few seconds. the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has away from your own can only be detected to intervene by accelerating or interrupting Below 2 km/h, the ACC stops the vehicle when they are within range of the sensors. the braking process by applying the brake or again. Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- pushing the third lever backwards act ››› Fig. 267 C. In these cases, you should The ACC turns off in the following cases: ››› page 282. brake as necessary. ● If the seat belt is unbuckled. Driving in tunnels Stationary vehicles ● If the stationary period lasts longer than 3 When driving through tunnels the radar sen- minutes. The ACC does not detect stationary objects sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged ● The driver door is opened. nels. vehicles. ● If the ignition is switched off. Narrow or misaligned vehicles If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle Overtaking The radar sensor can only detect narrow or in front of it, the ACC will not react to it misaligned vehicles when they are within When the turn signal lights up before the ve- ››› Fig. 267 D. In these cases, you should range Fig. 266 B. This applies particularly hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ››› brake as necessary. ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In these cases, you should brake as necessary. and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- Vehicles driving in the opposite direction cle in front. and vehicles crossing your path Vehicles with special loads and accesso- When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, ries The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in proaching from the opposite direction or ve- Special loads and accessories of other vehi- front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- hicles crossing your path. grammed speed and maintains it. cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or over the top may be out of the ACC's range. System acceleration can be interrupted at Metal objects any time by pressing the brake or moving the Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets third lever backwards ››› page 282. cles with special loads and accessories or used in road works, can confuse the radar when overtaking them. In these cases, you sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. » Driving through a bend should brake as necessary. On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor may stop detecting the vehicle in front or reacting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane 285 Driving

Factors that may affect how the radar instrument panel display. If the message ACC stands that you wish to change lanes volun- sensor operates not available remains on for quite a long tarily. If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to time it means that there is a fault. Contact a heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- deactivated temporarily. The relevant text iting a SEAT dealership. Control lamps message will appear in the dash panel display. If necessary clean the SEAT  It lights up yellow badge ››› Fig. 263. Lane Assist system* Lane assist system connected but inactive. When the radar sensor begins to operate The system cannot detect the lane clearly. See properly again, the ACC will automatically Introduction page 287, The lane assist system is inactive be available again. The message on the in- (control lamp lit in yellow). strument panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again.  It lights up green

ACC operation may be affected by a strong Lane assist system connected and active. radar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park. Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Trailer mode ed on, signalling that the function is being When driving with trailer the ACC controls verified. They will switch off after a few sec- less dynamically. onds.

Fig. 268 On the windscreen: field of vision of WARNING Overheated brakes the camera of the Lane Assist system camera. Observe the safety warnings in Con- If the brakes overheat, for example after ››› trol and warning lamps on page 109. abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, Using the camera located in the sun visor, the the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. lane assist system detects the possible lines The relevant text message will appear in the dividing it. When the vehicle involuntarily ap- dash panel display. In this case, adaptive proaches a dividing line it has detected, the cruise control cannot be activated. system will notify the driver with a corrective intervention. It is possible to over-regulate the Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated corrective intervention at any time. once brake temperature has cooled suffi- ciently. The message will disappear from the If the turn signal is connected, there will be no warning as the lane assist system under- 286 Driver assistance systems

Indications on the instrument panel speed has not been reached or because ● OR: activate or deactivate the system in display the lane lines are not recognised. the menu Settings > Assistants > Lane – Fig. 269 B: The system is active and Assist menu ›››  page 32. The “confir- available, both lane lines are recognised. mation sign” indicates that the driver assist The steering angle is not being correc- system is switched on. ted at this moment. Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys- – Fig. 269 C: The system is operational, tem can be deactivated automatically if the highlighted line 1 indicates that there is a system malfunction. Control lamp there was a risk of involuntarily crossing switches off. the lane line and that the steering is being adjusted to correct the angle. The lane assist system is inactive (control lamp lit in yellow) ● When driving speed drops to approx. Operation mode 65 km/h (40 mph). ● Steering wheel vibration When the Lane Assist system does not detect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- The following situations cause the steering ple, in the event of road works, and snow, dirt, wheel to vibrate and require the driver to take moisture or reflections. active control of the steering: ● When the radius of a curve is too small. ● If the limits inherent to the system are ● When there is no dividing line. reached. ● When the distance to the next dividing line ● If the maximum rotational torque during the is excessive. corrective intervention is not enough to keep ● When there are more than two lane mark- the vehicle inside the lane. ings per lane. ● If during the corrective intervention by the ● When the ASR is switched off. Fig. 269 On the instrument panel display: In- system the lane is no longer detected. dication on the Lane Assist system display. ● When the system does not detect any ac- Switching the lane assist system on or off tive rotation of the steering wheel by the driv- Status display er during a prolonged period. ● Select the corresponding menu option us- – Fig. 269 A: The system is active, but not ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic available, either because the minimum ing the button for the driver assist systems ›››  page 30. driving. »

287 Driving

● When the turn signal is connected. WARNING ● If the lane assist system does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and The intelligent technology in the lane assist BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot De- contact a specialised workshop. system cannot change the limits imposed tector)* by the laws of physics and by the system it- ● If you observe any system malfunction, The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat- self. Careless or uncontrolled use of the have the system checked by a specialised ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions Lane Assist system may cause accidents workshop. ››› page 289. In this case, the Lane Assist and injury. The system is not a replacement ● Before starting travel, verify that the function expands its functions in the following for driver awareness. camera's field of vision is not covered way: ● Always adapt your speed and the dis- ››› Fig. 268. tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- If the driver tries to change lane and there is a ● Keep the camera window clean. bility, weather conditions, the condition of vehicle in the blind spot: the road and the traffic situation. ● The  lamp flashes in the corresponding ● Always keep your hands on the steering rear-view mirror even though the turn signal wheel so you can turn it at any time. has not been activated. ● The lane assist system does not detect ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the all road markings. In some circumstances, driver of the risk of collision. the poor state of the road, structures located on it or certain objects may be mistak- ● torque is applied to correct the steering enly recognised as road markings by the and return the vehicle to its lane. lane assist system. In such situations, switch the lane assist system off immedi- Disconnect the lane assist system in the ately. following situations ● Pay attention to the instructions on the Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, instrument panel display and act accord- switch it off in the following situations: ingly to its requests. ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- ● When more attention is required of the driv- roundings. er ● For very sporty driving Note ● In very unfavourable weather conditions ● The lane assist system has been exclu- ● In very unfavourable road conditions sively developed for driving on asphalted ● In areas of road works roads.

288 Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD) gently or involuntarily. The system is not a CAUTION replacement for driver awareness. with rear cross traffic alert ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to may be damaged or shifted in the event of (RCTA) the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit a collision, for example, when entering or visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- exiting a parking space. This may result in Introduction tions. the system disconnecting itself, or at least ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all having its functionality diminished. times, and be ready to intervene in the ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors steering at any time. work properly, keep the rear bumper free of ● Pay attention to the control lamps that snow and ice and do not cover it. may come on in the external rear view mir- ● The rear bumper should only be painted rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind low any instructions they may give. spot detector's functions may be limited or Fig. 270 Related video ● The blind spot assistant may react in the work incorrectly if other paints are used. face of any special constructions that may The blind spot detector (BSD) helps detect ● The external rear view mirror control be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g., the traffic situation to the sides and behind lamps may have their functionality limited high or irregular protective fences. This in the event of solar radiation. the vehicle. may cause erroneous warnings. The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps ● Never use the blind spot detector with Note the driver when backing out of a parallel rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. parking spot and in manoeuvring. The blind spot detector with rear cross traf- If the blind spot detector with rear cross fic alert has been designed for use on traffic alert does not work as described in The blind spot detector has been developed paved roads. this chapter, do not use it and have it for driving on paved roads. checked by a specialised workshop. ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- WARNING roundings. ● Never use the blind spot detector with The smart technology incorporated into rear cross traffic alert if the radar sensors the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking are dirty, covered or damaged. The system assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- may work incorrectly in these cases. come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-

289 Driving

Control lamps the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause Blind spot detector (BSD) accidents and severe injuries. Control lamp in external rear view mirrors: ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-  It lights up sages. ● Carry out the necessary operations. It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activated and ready to operate. CAUTION It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot. Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.  Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the direction of the detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist ››› page 286, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged.

If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not Fig. 271 On external rear-view mirrors: blind detected any other vehicles in the area ››› spot detector display. in Introduction on page 289. If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode).

WARNING If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up,

290 Driver assistance systems

nals in the external rear view mirrors to notify Radar sensors the driver. The radar sensor are located on the left and right of the bumper, and are not visible from Indication in the external rear view mirrors the outside ››› Fig. 272. The sensors detect an The control lamp (expanded view) provides area of approx. 20 metres behind the vehicle, an indication in the corresponding external including the blind spots to the left and right mirror ››› Fig. 271 regarding the traffic situa- of the vehicle. The range to the sides of the tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be vehicle is roughly larger than the width of a critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex- lane. ternal mirror A indicates the traffic situation to The lane width is not detected individually, Fig. 272 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of but is rather pre-configured in the system. areas. the right-hand external mirror B, indicates the Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. The Blind spot detector uses radar sensors to tween two lanes, the indications may be in- monitor the areas to the side and behind the In the case of tinted windows or windows with correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicle. The system does this by measuring tinted film, the indications of the external mir- vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and rors may not be seen clearly or correctly. there are any), and can also detect stationary objects such as dividers, and thus give an its speed differential. The blind spot detector Keep the external mirrors clean and free of incorrect indication. will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical sig- hesives or other similar materials.

291 Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 273 Schematic diagram:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 274 Schematic diagram:  Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will bly higher speed, no indication will be dis- Physical limitations inherent to the system be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 273 played. In some situations the blind spot detector B (arrow) or ››› Fig. 274 B (arrow): The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ● When being passed by another vehicle er an indication will be displayed in the exter- ly. E.g. in the following situations: ››› Fig. 273 A. nal mirror, because the blind spot detector ● on tight bends ● takes into account the speed differential with When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 274 A ● in the case of lanes with different widths with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 other vehicles. Thus even though the distance ● mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considera- from the other vehicle is identical, the indica- at the top of slopes tion will appear sooner in some cases and ● in adverse weather conditions later in others. 292 Driver assistance systems

● in the case of special constructions to the ● In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” will WARNING side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- sound and a message will be displayed on ers the instrument panel. The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- ● If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, the come the limits imposed by the laws of ParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu- physics; it only works within the limits of the Parking assistant (RCTA) ously. system. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the rear cross traffic alert Automatic braking to reduce damages tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the ● The system should never be used in limi- rear of the vehicle and the driver does not ted visibility conditions or complicated step on the brake, the system will engage the traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when brakes automatically. crossing multiple lanes. ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- The parking system helps the driver by auto- cle's surroundings, since the system is not matically engaging the brakes to reduce any guaranteed to detect things such as bicy- damage. The automatic intervention on the cles or pedestrians in all situations. brakes takes place when driving in reverse at ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting brake the vehicle to a complete stop. Fig. 275 Diagram of the parking assistant: de- that the vehicle is stationary, the system tected area around the vehicle that is driving keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. off. After automatically braking to reduce dam- Using the blind spot detector (BSD) age, the system will not be able to automati- The rear cross traffic alert uses the radar sen- with rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) sors on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 272 to moni- cally brake again for approximately 10 seconds. tor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it Activating and deactivating the blind spot backs out of a perpendicular parking space You can interrupt the automatic braking by detector (BSD) with parking assistant or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in stepping forcefully on the accelerator pedal (RCTA) very low visibility conditions. or the brake pedal in order to regain control The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic If the system detects that someone else on of the vehicle. alert can be activated or deactivated in the the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- “Assistants” menu of the SEAT information cle ››› Fig. 275, an acoustic alarm will sound. system, or depending on the vehicle's equipment, by using the driver assistance key located on the headlight lever. » 293 Driving

Open the Assistants menu. Trailer mode represented in the dash panel display and in the visual presentation of the navigation sys- ●  BSD The Blind spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated tem map. ●  Parking Assist. and it will be impossible to activate them if Applicable countries: If the verification box on the control panel is the tow hitch is electrically connected to a checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer or other similar object. Sign Assist is accepted in the following countries: ically activated at ignition. As soon as the driver starts to drive with a When the blind spot detector is ready to op- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a Andorra, Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Fin- erate, the indications in the external mirrors message will appear on the instrument panel land, France, Ireland, Italy, Liechtenstein, Lux- will turn on briefly as confirmation. display indicating that the blind spot detector embourg, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva- Austria, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Swe- The control lamp of the instrument panel indi- ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from den, Switzerland, Spain, Czech Republic, Uni- cates the system's status. the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot ted Kingdom, Vatican City. When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you ment in the system will remain active. will have to reactivate them in the corre- WARNING sponding menu. If the blind spot detector was automatically The traffic signs and instructions shown by Sign Assist may differ from the current traf- deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, fic situation. the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated ● The signs and highway code rules always manually when driving with a trailer. take precedence over the instructions and display of Sign Assist. Automatic deactivation of the blind spot detector (BSD) ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Traffic signal detection with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- ● The system cannot always detect or cor- cally deactivated when, among other rea- (Sign Assist)* rectly show all the traffic signs. sons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case Introduction WARNING if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice The traffic sign detection is not a replace- Sign Assist can help the driver with informa- in front of one of the sensors. ment for driver awareness. tion on speed limits or if overtaking is prohibi- The relevant text message will appear in the ted at that moment. The traffic signs and ad- ● Adverse conditions of visibility, darkness, dash panel display ditional information detected by the system is snow, rain and fog can cause the system

294 Driver assistance systems

1) not to show the traffic signs or to show Indication on display Display text of Sign Assist on the instru- them erroneously. ment panel

Error: Sign As- System fault. CAUTION sist Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. ● If old mapping data is used in the navigation system, this may cause the traffic signs Sign Assist: The windscreen is dirty in to be shown incorrectly. Clean the wind- the area of the camera. screen! Clean the windscreen. ● In the route points mode (navigation by route points) of the navigation system, Sign Sign Assist: It has no data transmission Assist is only partly available. only partly from the navigation system. available at Connect the navigation the moment. system and enter the navigation data support. OR: road sign detection is not supported in the country in which you are driving.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text Fig. 276 Instrument panel display: examples messages. of speed limits or overtaking prohibitions detected together with the corresponding addi- ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- tional signs ble. »

1) Depending on the version, the display may be in colour or black and white. 295 Driving

CAUTION gether with the additional sign “if the road is Tiredness detection (recom- wet”. If the vehicle's rain sensor detects rain Failure to heed the control lamps and text during travel, the traffic sign valid at this mo- mendation to take a break) messages when they appear may result in ment will move to the first position along the vehicle faults. additional sign “if the road is wet”. Introduction The permanent display on the instrument WARNING Operation mode panel screen is shown as you pass the real traffic signs. The signs for entering and leav- Do not let the extra convenience afforded ing towns activate the display of the usual Sign Assist does not work in all countries. This by the tiredness detection function tempt speed limits for that country on roads in must be taken into account when travelling you into taking any risks when driving. populated areas and national highways, abroad. When making long trips, conveniently long even if the speed is not limited by an actual breaks must be taken. traffic sign. Display of traffic signs ● The driver is responsible for determining their capacity to drive. Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to- The end of a prohibition or limitation is not gether with the corresponding additional displayed. If you exceed the speed limits ● Never drive when tired. signs are shown on the instrument panel dis- shown, a warning will not appear. The system ● The system does not always detect the play ››› Fig. 276. Depending on the naviga- does not detect areas with little traffic. The tiredness of the driver. Please read the in- tion system installed in the vehicle, traffic current legal provisions apply. formation provided in the section signs will be shown as above and also in the ››› page 297, Limited operation. navigation system's map display. Connection and disconnection ● In some situations the system may incor- ● Connect or disconnect the assist system in rectly interpret an intended manoeuvre as When Sign Assist is connected, the vehicle re- the Settings menu in the SEAT information a sign of tiredness of the driver. cords the traffic signs with a camera in the system page 28. ● In the event of the an episode called “mi- base of the interior rear vision mirror. After ›››  crosleep” at the wheel, a strong warning is checking and evaluating the information from ● OR: press the button for the driver assist not in place! the camera, the navigation system and the systems on the main beam lever. current vehicle data, up to three valid traffic ● Observe the indications on the display of signs are displayed in conjunction with the Trailer the instrument panel and act in accordance with them. corresponding additional signs. The traffic Connect or disconnect the secondary dis- sign that is currently valid for the driver is play for speed limits and overtaking bans that shown first, in the left side of the screen. A apply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Set- traffic sign of only limited validity, tings menu in the SEAT information system e.g. 90 km/h (56 mph) is shown second, to- ›››  page 28. 296 Driver assistance systems

Note shown ››› Fig. 277. The on-screen message ● when a sporty driving style is employed, on the dash panel is displayed for 5 seconds ● in the event of a major distraction for the ● The tiredness detection function has only and, where required, repeated again. The been designed for driving on motorways driver, system stores the last message displayed. and wide roads. The tiredness detection function switches off The message that appears on the instrument ● If there is a fault in the system, refer to a when the ignition is switched off or when the panel display can be switched off by press- Specialised workshop to have the system driver unbuckles their seat belt and opens the ing the OK button on the multifunction steer- inspected. door. If driving for a long time under 65 km/h ing wheel or on the window wiper lever (40 mph), the system ceases to assess tired- ›››  page 29. Using the multifunction dis- ness automatically. If driving speed is then in- play ›››  page 29 the message on the increased, the behaviour at the wheel will Function and operation strument panel display can be shown. again be evaluated. Conditions of operation Behaviour at the wheel is only evaluated at speeds of above 65 km/h (40 mph). Dynamic Chassis control (DCC)* Switching on and off The system can be switched on or off in the Operation and control Assistants menu. If an assistance system is switched on, this is indicated with a “mark”.

Fig. 277 On the screen of the instrument pan- Limited operation el: fatigue detection. The tiredness detection function is subject to The tiredness detection function registers the certain limitations. Therefore it is possible that behaviour of the driver at the wheel at the in some driving situations behaviour at the beginning of a journey and, using this, evalu- wheel cannot be correctly interpreted. E.g. in ates the tiredness. This is continually com- the following situations: pared with the current behaviour at the ● at speeds lower than 65 km/h (40 mph), wheel. If the system detects that the driver is ● tired, an audible warning using a “gong” is in sections with corners, Fig. 278 On the centre console: button for setting the dynamic chassis control. given and a symbol and complementary ● on roads in poor condition, » message on the instrument panel display are ● in the event of adverse weather conditions, 297 Driving

DCC continuously adapts the suspension to WARNING driver if it detects a considerable drop in tyre the condition of the road and current driving pressure of one or several tyres while driving. conditions, according to the pre-set pro- Adjusting the suspension can change driv- Loss of tyre pressure will be indicated by the ing properties. Dynamic chassis control gramme. indicator  as well as an audible warning must never lead to any kinds of risk. and sometimes a text message on the dash Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all panel display. When you open the driver gramme. times to suit visibility, weather, road and door, you will find a label indicating the tyre traffic conditions. pressure recommended by the manufacturer Programme Driving recommendations for the maximum vehicle load for each tyre Adjust it to the most comfortable Note approved for the vehicle in question. By setting, for example, driving on pressing the adjustment button on the tyre “COMFORT” C If the dynamic chassis control does not op- surfaces in poor condition, or monitoring indicator, you may change the making long trips. erate as described in this chapter, go to an authorised workshop and request it be reference pressure for the tyres so that the Balanced setting, suitable, for checked. tyre pressure coincides with actual pressure “NORMAL” example, for day-to-day use. ››› page 300.

Sport setting for sporty style Note Suitable use of the adjustment button “SPORT” S driving ››› page 300. In case of a fault in the dynamic chassis control, the buttons C and S will so indicate. Select a program Driving comfort might be affected by the WARNING ● Switch the ignition on. fault. Have the system checked by a speci- Unsuitable handling of the wheels and alised workshop. tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- ●    Press the button repeatedly until the ses, to tread separation or even to a blow- desired program is displayed out. The “NORMAL” programme is active when ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- neither the C nor S buttons are lit up. Tyre monitoring system sure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the WARNING Introduction tyres could overheat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. Switching the dynamic chassis control sys- The tyre monitor indicator monitors the tyre ● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on tem on while the vehicle is in motion could pressure of each wheel during driving using the label when the tyres are cold at all divert your attention from the traffic and the ABS sensors. The ABS sensors monitor the times ››› page 342. cause accidents. tyre tread perimeter and vibrations of each ● Regularly check the cold inflation pres- tyre. The tyre monitor indicator warns the sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the

298 Driver assistance systems tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they sure that the tyre pressure is correct and Control lamp are cold. that the tyres are not damaged due to ● Regularly check your tyres for damage puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.  Blinks or lights up and wear. Remove objects from the tyres only when the tyres have not been pierced by these. The tyre pressure of a wheel has dropped considera- ● Never exceed the maximum permitted bly in relation to the pressure set by the driver ● The tyre monitoring system is set to the speed or loads specified for the type of ››› page 300. tyre fitted on your vehicle. tyre pressure recommended by the manu-  Stop the vehicle! Reduce your speed immediate- facturer and indicated on the label ly! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid ››› Fig. 301. sudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres WARNING and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres. Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indica- Fault in the system. tor button could result in the indicator giv- Elements of the tyre monitoring in- Consult a specialised workshop if the tyre pressure is ing erroneous messages or prevented from correct and the lamp remains lit after switching the indicating the danger caused by a defec- dicator ignition off and back on again. Have the system tive tyre ››› page 300. checked there. Tyre monitoring indicator with button. Several warning and control lamps light up CAUTION See ››› page 300. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● The tyre valves may be damaged if the  Control lamp  on the instrument panel. ed on, signalling that the function is being cap is not in place. Check that the caps are verified. They will switch off after a few sec-  Button   on the centre console. identical to the standard caps and have onds. been correctly tightened. Do not use metal  Monitoring the tread of all tyres using ABS sensors caps ››› page 300. (indirect measurement). WARNING ● Do not damage the valves when chang-  Adjustable medium and full-load tyre pressures. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ing the tyres ››› page 300. trol and warning lamps on page 109.  Button to update the system when the tyre pressure is changed. For the sake of the environment WARNING Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel When the tyres are inflated at different consumption and tyre wear. pressures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a Note loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident. ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring » system. Regularly check your tyres to en-

299 Driving

● If the warning lamp  lights up, stop im- ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too ● Tyre pressure is insufficient mediately and check the tyres. low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect- ● Tyre structure is damaged ing vehicle performance. ● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will ● If a tyre has not been “punctured” and it load increase tyre wear, negatively affecting ve- does not have to be changed immediately, ● If the wheels on an axle are subject to a hicle stability and increasing braking dis- drive to the nearest specialised workshop tances. at a moderate speed and have the tyre heavier load (e.g. when towing a trailer). ● ● If tyres are inflated at different pressures checked and inflated to the correct pres- The vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be sure. ● The wheel on one axle is changed damaged and burst resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre monitoring indicator  or it may not indi- ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that Tyre monitoring indicator all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- cate anything under certain circumstances ted to the right pressure. The recommen- (e.g. sports driving, snow-covered or unpaved ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label roads). ››› Fig. 301. ● The tyre monitoring system can only op- Adaptation of the tyre monitoring indica- erate correctly if all of the tyres are inflator ted to the correct pressure when cold. On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one ● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure or more wheels, the ››› Fig. 279 button on the can damage them and result in an acci- tyre monitoring indicator must be kept press- dent. Ensure that the tyre pressures of all ed down, with the ignition on, until an audible the tyres correspond to the vehicle load. warning is heard. Do the same, for example, ● Before starting a journey, always inflate Fig. 279 Detail of the centre console: button when the front and rear wheels are swapped tyres to the correct pressure. for the tyre pressure monitoring indicator ››› Fig. 300. ● If tyre pressure is too low then the tyre is If the wheels are subjected to an excessive The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel subject to greater forces and it may be load (towing a trailer, heavy load), the tyre revolutions and, with this information, the heated to such an extent that the tread can pressure must be increased to the maximum tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If rupture and the tyre will burst. recommended pressure ››› page 338. Press the tread of a wheel is changed, the tyre ● With an overloaded vehicle at high the tyre monitoring indicator button to con- monitoring indicator will indicate as such on speed, the tyres can overheat and burst re- firm the new pressure value. sulting in a loss of vehicle control. the instrument panel. The wheel tread changes when:

300 Towing bracket device

Note Towing bracket device deactivated when a trailer is connected. For tow hitches not installed by SEAT, the Start- An incorrect warning may be given when Stop function must be deactivated manually snow chains are in use because the chains Driving with a trailer using a button located on the dash panel be- increase the tread of the wheel. fore driving with a trailer and it must remain Introduction off for the entire journey ››› .

Always be aware of the legal requirements WARNING for each country to drive with a trailer and to Never carry people in the trailer: this will use a tow hitch. endanger in their life and is against the law. Your car is intended mainly for transporting passengers however, it can also be used to WARNING tow a trailer provided that it is fitted with the The incorrect use of the tow hitch can necessary equipment. The additional load cause accidents and injury. has an effect on the useful life, fuel consump- ● Only use a tow hitch in perfect condition tion and the vehicle performance and, in and correctly installed. some cases, reduce the service intervals. ● Never change or repair a tow hitch. Driving with a trailer requires more force from ● To reduce the risk of injury in case of a re- the vehicle and, thus, more concentration versing collision, injury to pedestrians and from the driver. cyclists when parking, always keep the ball For wintertime temperatures, fit winter tyres to joint in when a trailer is not being used. the vehicle and the trailer. ● Never fit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes the load” or “balances the load”. Your Drawbar load vehicle has not been designed for this type of tow hitch. The tow hitch may fail and the The maximum permitted Drawbar load exer- trailer will separate from the vehicle. ted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of the tow hitch must not exceed 100 kg (approximately 220 lbs). WARNING Driving with a trailer and transporting Vehicles with the Start-Stop function heavy or large objects can affect vehicle With a SEAT factory fitted or retrofitted tow handling and even cause an accident. » hitch, the Start-Stop function is automatically 301 Driving

● Always secure loads correctly with suita- ● Always manually deactivate the Start- suitable for both the vehicle and trailer and ble and undamaged attachment rope or Stop function when a trailer is being used must be securely fitted to the vehicle chassis. straps. on a tow hitch that has not been installed Only use a tow hitch with a removable ball joint. Always check and take into account the ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- by SEAT. ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. tow hitch manufacturer's instructions. Never fit a trailer tow hitch “that distributes the load” ● Note Trailers with a high centre of gravity can or “balances the load”. overturn more easily than those with a low ● Always turn off the anti-theft alarm sys- centre of gravity. tem before connecting or disconnecting a Bumper mounted tow hitch ● Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden trailer ››› page 122. Otherwise, the tilt sen- braking. sor may erroneously activate the alarm. Never fit a tow hitch or its attachments to the bumper. A tow hitch should never interfere ● Always take the following precautions ● Never use a trailer with a new engine (for with the bumper performance. Do not modify seriously. the first 1,000 km or 600 miles) the exhaust system and brake system. Regu- ››› page 311. ● Reduce your speed immediately if you larly check the tow hitch to ensure it is firmly ● observe the trailer rocking from side to At SEAT, we recommend folding in the tow fitted. side. hitch ball when a trailer is not being used. In case of a rear collision, the damage ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h Engine cooling system (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or 100 caused to the vehicle with the extended km/h [62 mph] in exceptional circumstan- tow hitch ball could be more extensive. Driving with a trailer increases the load on the ces). This also applies in countries where ● In some models, a tow hitch is necessary engine and cooling system. The cooling sys- higher speeds are permitted. Always take for towing vehicles. For this reason, you tem should always have sufficient coolant the speed limits for vehicles with and with- should store the tow hitch in the vehicle at and to be able to cope with the vehicle and out trailers in each country into account. all times. trailer. ● Never try to stop the “snaking” by increasing speed. Electric trailer brake Technical requirements If the trailer has its own braking system, WARNING please note the relevant legal requirements. If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted The trailer braking system should never be When driving with a trailer and using a tow towing bracket it will already have the neces- connected to the vehicle braking system. hitch that was not installed by SEAT, the sary technical modifications and meet the Start-Stop function must be manually de- statutory requirements for towing a trailer. activated. Otherwise, this could cause a Trailer cable braking anomaly that could result in an ac- Only use an approved tow hitch for the gross Always use a cable between the vehicle and cident with serious consequences. trailer weight rating. The tow hitch must be the trailer ››› page 305.

302 Towing bracket device

Trailer rear lights WARNING Electric tow hitch ball* The rear lights of a trailer must fulfil the corre- If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, sponding standards ››› page 305. the trailer may separate from the vehicle Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly causing an accident with serious conse- to the vehicle electric system. In case of any quences. doubt about the electrical connection of the trailer, ask a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- CAUTION ommends visiting a technical service. ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not correctly connected, the vehicle electronics Wing mirrors may be damaged. When the field of vision behind the trailer ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cannot be seen using the standard wing mir- current, the vehicle electronics may be Fig. 280 Right side of the boot: button to elec- rors of the towing vehicle, additional wing mir- damaged. trically release the tow hitch ball rors are required according to the legal re- ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- quirements of each country. The wing mirrors tem to the electrical connections of the The rotation radius of the tow hitch ball must be fitted before driving and must pro- rear lights or any other power sources. On- should be free of people, animals and objects vide a sufficient field of vision behind. ly use suitable connections for providing ››› . electric current to the trailer. The towing bracket is located in the bumper. Trailer electricity consumption The electric tow ball is fixed and cannot be Never exceed the specifications: Note removed. ● Towing a trailer places additional de- Devices Maximum power mands on the vehicle. At SEAT, we recom- Releasing and unfolding the tow ball mend additional services between the nor- Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electric mal inspection intervals if the vehicle is parking brake. Turn signal (each side) 54 Watts used frequently for towing a trailer. ● Switch the ignition off. ● In some countries, an additional fire ex- Brake lights (total) 84 Watts tinguisher is required if the trailer weight is ● Open the rear lid. Reversing lights (total) 42 Watts more than 2500 kg ● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 280. The tow ball is released electronically and folds out Rear fog light 42 Watts automatically; the button indicator will blink. ● Move the ball joint until it inserts and the button control lamp lights. » 303 Driving

● Close the rear lid. ● When the control lamp remains lit and the cause damage to seals or remove lubricat- ● Before hitching the trailer, remove the dust rear lid is open, the tow ball has inserted cor- ing grease. guard from the ball. rectly into the folded or deployed position. ● The indicator only lights when the boot ● When the rear lid is closed, the indicator is Note turned off. hatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch- In extremely low temperatures, it is possi- ed. WARNING ble that the tow hitch is not released. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca- Restoring the tow ball to its originally posi- The incorrect use of the tow hitch can tion (e.g. a garage). tion cause accidents and injury. ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electric ● Ensure that no person, animal or object parking brake. gets in the way of the tow ball. Fitting a bicycle carrier on the mo- ● Switch the ignition off. ● Never push the button when there is a tow bile tow hitch ball hitched or when any kind of carrier or ac- ● Remove the trailer and disconnect the ca- cessory is fitted to the tow hitch ball. ble between the vehicle and trailer. If neces- The maximum load permitted for a bicycle ● While the ball is moving, do not interfere sary, remove the power socket adapter. carrier on the tow hitch ball is 75 kg, with a with any tool. maximum distance of 30 cm from the sup- ● Place the dust guard over the ball. ● Do not drive with a trailer if the control port. The distance between supports is the ● Open the rear lid. lamp does not light. distance between the bicycle carrier centre ● Press the knob briefly ››› Fig. 280. The tow ● If there is a fault in the electric system or of gravity (with the bicycles) and the centre ball is electronically released; the indicator the trailer tow hitch, visit a specialised of point of the tow hitch ball. blinks. workshop to have it checked. WARNING ● Push the tow ball into the bumper until it ● If the diameter of the tow hitch is less locks in position and the button indicator than 49 mm, never use this for a trailer. The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi- lights. cycle carrier installed can cause accidents and injury. ● Close the rear lid. CAUTION ● Never exceed the load and distances be- ● If anything is attached to the tow hitch tween supports indicated. The control lamp ball, do not, under any circumstances ● Never fit the bicycle carrier to the tow ● When the control lamp flashes, the tow ball press the button. hitch ball neck, underneath the tow hitch is not in its final position, has not engaged or ● Never direct a high-pressure or steam given that the bicycle carrier may be incor- cleaning system directly at the tow hitch is damaged ››› . rectly fitted due to the shape of the tow ball or trailer power socket. This could hitch and the model of bicycle carrier.

304 Towing bracket device

● Always read and take the manufacturer Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 281: ceive electrical power if the engine is running assembly instructions into account. (through pin 10). Pin Meaning The earth wires, pin 3 and pin 13, should not CAUTION 4 Right turn signal be connected to each other to avoid overloading the electrical system. Exceeding the maximum load and distance 5 Rear light, right between supports indicated can cause If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you considerable damage to the vehicle. 6 Brake lights will need to use an adapter cable. In this case ● Never exceed the specifications. 7 Rear light, left the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available. 8 Reverse lights

Hitching and connecting the trailer 9 Permanent live Trailer cable Always secure the trailer cable to the towing 10 Live charge cable vehicle correctly. Leave a little bit of slack in 11 Unassigned the cable for turning. However, ensure that the cable does not rub off the ground while 12 Unassigned driving. 13 Earth, pins 9 to 13 Trailer rear lights Electrical socket for trailer Check the trailer rear lights to ensure they The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power work correctly and remain legal. Ensure that socket for the electrical connection between the trailer does not use more than the maxi- Fig. 281 Diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine mum power ››› page 303. the trailer's electrical socket. running, electrical devices on the trailer receive power from the electrical connection Trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm: Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 281: (pin 9 and pin 10 on the trailer power plug). ● When a vehicle comes from the factory fitted with an anti-theft alarm and tow hitch. Pin Meaning If the system detects that a trailer has been connected electrically, the electrical equip- ● When the trailer is connected to the vehicle 1 Left turn signal ment on the trailer will receive voltage using the socket. through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 2 Rear fog light ● When the vehicle and trailer electrical sys- has a permanent live. This powers, for exam- tems work correctly and are not damaged. » 3 Earth, pins 1 to 8 ple, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only re- 305 Driving

● When the vehicle is locked using the vehicle CAUTION Loading the trailer key and the anti-theft alarm is turned on. Do not leave the trailer connected to the Trailer weight / drawbar load When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- vehicle when parked; places on its support gered when the electrical connection be- wheel or its supports. For example, when The trailer weight is the load that the vehicle tween the vehicle and the trailer is removed. changing the load or a puncture, the vehi- can pull ››› . The drawbar load is the verti- cle will be pushed up or down. The force cal weight of the tow hitch on the tow hitch Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system acting on the tow hitch and the trailer could ball ››› page 309. before connecting or disconnecting a trailer. damage the vehicle or the trailer. Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneously The figures for trailer weights and drawbar activate the alarm. load weights given on the data plate of the Note tow hitch are for values of this model only. Trailer with rear LED lights ● In the event of a fault in the vehicle or The correct figures for your specific vehicle, trailer electrical system or in the event of which may be lower than these figures for the For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear problems with the anti-theft alarm system, tow hitch, are given in the vehicle documen- LED lights cannot be connected to the anti- have the system checked by a specialised tation. The instructions in the official vehicle theft alarm system. workshop. documents take precedence. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does ● If the trailer accessories use energy from For the sake of road safety, SEAT recom- not trigger if the electrical connection with the power socket when the engine is stop- mends using the maximum allowed drawbar ped, the battery will be discharged. the trailer is cut if it has rear light with light- load. The handling of the combined vehicle emitting diodes. ● For technical reasons, trailers fitted with and trailer will be poor if the drawbar load is rear LED lights cannot be connected to the too low. WARNING anti-theft alarm system. The drawbar load increases the weight on Erroneous or unsuitable connection of ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the the rear axle, reducing the vehicle carrying electric cables may supply energy to the electrical connection with the trailer is au- capacity. trailer causing an anomaly in the vehicle tomatically cut. electronics that could result in an accident ● With the engine running, the electrical Gross combination weight with serious consequences. equipment on the trailer will be supplied ● All work on the electrical system must be with power. This figure refers to the combined weight of carried out only by a specialised workshop. the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the Loading the trailer rear lights or any other power sources. The combined vehicle and trailer must be balanced. Use the maximum drawbar load

306 Towing bracket device authorised and do not overload the front or WARNING ● Select a low gear before driving down a the rear of the trailer: steep hill to use the engine braking effect to If the load moves, the stability and safety of slow down the vehicle. Otherwise, the braking the vehicle and trailer combination will be ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy system could overheat and fail. objects are as near to the axle as possible or seriously affected and this could result in a ● The vehicle centre of gravity and handling above it. serious accident. change because of the trailer load and be- ● Always correctly load the trailer. ● Correctly secure the trailer load. cause of the increased combined mass of the ● Always secure loads correctly with suita- vehicle and trailer. Tyre pressure ble and undamaged attachment rope or straps. ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer Inflate the trailer tyres according to the man- loaded then the load distribution is incorrect. ufacturer's instructions. If you must travel in these conditions, drive carefully and reduce your speed according- Inflate the towing vehicles tyres to the maxi- Driving with a trailer mum ››› page 338. ly. Adjusting the headlights WARNING Hill starts with a trailer The front part of the vehicle may be raised Depending on the hill and the gross com- Exceeding the maximum authorised axle when the trailer is connected and the light bined weight, it is possible that the combined load, drawbar load or the gross combina- may dazzle the rest of the traffic. tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer vehicle and trailer “move backwards” slightly. could cause a serious accident with severe Adapt the height of the headlights using the For a hill start with a trailer, proceed as fol- consequences. headlight range adjuster ››› page 1391). lows: ● Never exceed the specifications. Things to note when towing a trailer or ● ● With the actual load on the front and rear Press and hold the brake pedal. caravan axles, the maximum axle load should never ● Press the  button once to turn off the be exceeded. The weight on the front and ● If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply electric parking brake ››› page 238. rear should never exceed the gross vehicle the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This ● Press and hold the  button to hold the ve- weight. will prevent the jerking that can be caused by hicle and trailer combination using the park- the trailer wheels locking. ing brake. » ● As of the combined vehicle and trailer mass, braking distances will be greater.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights. 307 Driving

● With manual transmission: press the clutch ● Always take the speed limits for vehicles ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- hard. with and without trailers into account. ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● Engage first gear or the gear range D ● If the road surface is slippery, take care ››› page 247, Gearbox. when accelerating. ● Release the brake pedal. Stabilising the vehicle and trailer ● When a system is operating, lift your foot ● Move off slowly. To do this, gently release combination off the accelerator. the clutch pedal (for manual gearbox). Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combi- ● Release the  button only when the engine WARNING nation is an extension of the electronic stabili- provides sufficient power to move the vehicle It is possible that the combination stability control (ESC) and helps, with the help of and trailer combination. sation system does not correctly recog- the steering control, to reduce trailer “sway- nised all driving situations. ing”. WARNING ● It is possible that the stabilisation system does not detect snaking of a light trailer Jerking the trailer in an unsuitable manner Requirements for stabilising the vehi- and thus does not intervene. could cause loss of vehicle control with the cle/trailer combination subsequent serious consequences. ● When driving on slippery ground, the ● An original tow hitch is fitted by the manu- ● Driving with a trailer and transporting trailer could jack-knife despite the stabili- facturer or a compatible model is retrofitted. heavy or a large objects will change the sation system. vehicle handling and braking distances. ● The ESC is switched on. The  warning ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity may ● Anticipate traffic and be extremely cau- lamp on the dash panel is not lit. even tip over before they start to rock side- tious. Brake early. ● The trailer is connected to the vehicle using ways. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to vis- the power socket. ● If a trailer is not used and the trailer pow- ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● It travels faster than 60 km/h (37 mph). er socket is connected (e.g. installation of a Reduce your speed, especially on steep bicycle carrier with lights), repeated auto- ● The maximum drawbar load is used. hills. matic braking may occur in extreme driving ● conditions. ● Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid The trailer must have a fixed drawbar. brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking. ● Trailers with brakes must be equipped with ● Always take the following precautions a mechanical inertia brake. seriously. Reduce your speed immediately if you observe the trailer rocking from side WARNING to side. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the ● Never try to stop the “snaking” by in- stabilisation system tempt you into taking creasing speed. any risks when driving. 308 Towing bracket device

Retrofitting a tow hitch recommends taking your car in for technical ● Visit a specialised workshop if you wish to service. retrofit a tow hitch to the vehicle. In any case, the separation distances must be observed when fitting a tow hitch. The dis- WARNING tance between the centre of the tow hitch If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, ball and the road surface Fig. 282 D must ››› the trailer may separate from the vehicle never be lower than that indicated. This also while driving. This could result in a serious applies when the vehicle is fully laden, in- accident. cluding maximum drawbar load.

Separation distances ››› Fig. 282: Note A Attachment points. Use only tow hitches approved by SEAT for B 1,040 mm (41 inches) the vehicle. C 74 mm (3 inches) D 364 mm (14 inches) Maximum permitted trailer weights E 247 mm (10 inches) F 596 mm (23 inches) The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence. All the technical da- G 1,097 mm (43 inches) ta provided in this documentation is applica- H 1,102 mm (43 inches) ble to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle WARNING documentation shows which engine is instal- Erroneous or unsuitable connection of led in your vehicle. electric cables may cause anomalies in the The figures may be different depending vehicle electronics that could result in an whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif- Fig. 282 Measurements and attachments to accident with serious consequences. retrofit a tow hitch ferent models and for special vehicles. ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- SEAT recommends visiting a specialised tem to the electrical connections of the WARNING workshop to retrofit a tow hitch. For example, rear lights or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indi- it may be necessary to adjust the cooling connect a trailer. cated could cause a serious accident. » system or to include thermal plates. SEAT

309 Driving

● Never exceed the indicated trailer WARNING weight. Exceeding the maximum weight indicated could cause a serious accident. CAUTION ● Never exceed the gross combined weight Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indi- rating. cated could cause damage to the vehicle. ● Never exceed the indicated trailer CAUTION weight. Exceeding the maximum gross combined weight rating indicated could cause damage to the vehicle. Gross combined vehicle weight rat- ● Never exceed the gross combined weight ing rating.

The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence. All the technical data provided in this documentation is applicable to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle documentation shows which engine is installed in your vehicle. The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fitted, for different models and for special vehicles. The maximum combined weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by about 10% for every further 1000 m (or part thereof).

310 Care and maintenance

Practical tips ● Only use wheels and tyre combinations driven must be approved by SEAT for use in which have been approved by SEAT for your vehicle and bear the e mark (the Euro- your vehicle type. pean Union's authorisation symbol). This in- Care and maintenance cludes cruise control systems or electronically controlled suspension. Accessories, replacement of Accessories and spare parts If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle parts and modifications SEAT recommends you consult an Official itself, these must bear the  mark (European Service before purchasing accessories and Union manufacturer conformity declaration). Introduction spare parts or consumables. For example, This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops or when fitting accessories at a later date, or ventilator fans. WARNING when replacing a component. A technical service centre will advise you as to the legal WARNING The use of spare parts and accessories, or requirements and manufacturer's recommen- Unprofessional repairs or modifications to incorrectly performed modifications or re- dations regarding accessories, spare parts the vehicle may affect the performance of pairs may result in damage to the vehicle, and other components. the airbags, and may cause operating accidents and serious injury. SEAT recommend you use only approved faults or fatal accidents. ● SEAT strongly recommends you to only ● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as use SEAT approved accessories and SEAT® SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare ® drink holders or telephone cradles over the original spare parts. These parts and ac- parts . These parts and accessories have covers of the airbag modules or within their cessories have been specially tested by been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, radius of action. SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety. reliability and safety. In addition the technical service centre will guarantee that the assem- ● Objects placed over the airbag covers, or ● Have any repairs or modifications carried within their radius of action, could lead to out at a specialised workshop. These work- bly is carried out professionally. serious injury or loss of life if the airbags shops have the necessary tools, diagnos- Although we continually monitor the market, are triggered. tics equipment, repair information and SEAT cannot guarantee that products not qualified personnel. approved by SEAT are reliable, safe and ● Only mount parts with the same specifi- suitable for the vehicle. Therefore, SEAT can- cations as the parts fitted at factory. not accept liability, even in those cases au- Service fluids and components ● Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as thorised by an officially recognised technical All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as drink holders or telephone cradles over the inspection office or other official body. covers of the airbag modules or within their notched belts, tyres, coolant fluids, engine Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- radius of action. oils, spark plugs and batteries are continually rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is being developed. Therefore all fluids and » 311 Practical tips

consumables should be changed at a speci- cooling effect of the coolant. If the engine The technical service centre does not accept alised workshop. Technical services are per- is running under great strain in high outside liability for damage resulting from technical manently informed of any modifications. temperatures, it could overheat. modifications or repairs performed incorrectly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these WARNING cases. For the sake of the environment The incorrect use or handling of fluids or SEAT recommends you have any technical Leaking fluids could pollute the environ- consumables may result in accident, seri- modifications or repairs performed at a tech- ment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable ous injury, burns or intoxication. containers and dispose of them in accord- nical service centre and that you use genu- ® ● Therefore, fluids must always be stored ance with legislation and with respect for ine SEAT spare parts . closed in their original container. the environment. ● Never store fluids in empty food contain- Vehicles with special accessories and ers or bottles as other people may acci- equipment dentally drink the fluid. Technical repairs and replace- The manufacturers of additional equipment ● Keep all fluids and consumables out of ments guarantee that the equipment complies with reach of children. applicable laws and regulations with respect ● Read and observe the information and When performing repairs and technical to the environment, in particular Directives warnings given on the fluid containers. modifications, SEAT's directives must be 2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first di- ● Only work in the open air or in well-venti- observed! ››› rective governs the disposal of end-of-life ve- lated zones, when using products which hicles while the second refers to the restric- give off harmful vapours. Unauthorised modifications to the electronic tions on the marketing and use of certain components or software in the vehicle may dangerous substances and preparations. ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, cause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec- acetone or any other volatile liquid in the tronic components are linked together in net- The vehicle owner should keep the documen- maintenance of the vehicle. These are toxic works, other indirect systems may be affec- tation for the additional equipment safely and highly flammable. They could lead to and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end fire or explosions! ted by the faults. This may significantly affect the vehicle's performance, increase compo- of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that nent wear and could mean that the vehicle any additional equipment mounted in end-of- CAUTION registration documents are no longer valid. life vehicles is correctly disposed of with respect for the environment. ● Only use appropriate fluids. Do not con- Your technical service centre cannot be held fuse fluids as this can cause serious mal- liable for any damage caused by technical functions or engine damage. WARNING modifications or repairs performed incorrect- Repairs or modifications which are not per- ● Accessories and other components ly. mounted in front of the air inlet reduce the formed correctly may result in damage or

312 Care and maintenance

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting regulations must be observed. These require- ● Airbag modules must never be repaired: the effectiveness of the driver assistance ments are known to specialised workshops. they have to be replaced. systems. This could result in serious acci- Modifications to the vehicle suspension may ● Never fit recycled or reused airbag com- dent. affect the operation of the airbag system in ponents in your vehicle. ● All repairs and modifications to the vehi- the event of collision. For example, if wheel cle should only be performed by a special- and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT WARNING ised workshop. are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered, the suspension is stiffened or the suspension Modifications to the vehicle suspension, in- springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are cluding the use of unauthorised wheel and tyre combinations, may affect the perform- modified, the results received by the airbag Repairs and malfunctions in the ance of the airbags and increase the risk of sensors and sent to the control unit may not airbag system serious or fatal injury in the event of acci- be accurate. For example, some modifica- dent. tions to the suspension could increase the When performing repairs and technical ● force measured by the sensors and result in Never fit suspension components which modifications, SEAT's directives must be are not identical to the original parts in the the triggering of the airbag systems in colli- observed! ››› vehicle. sions. Under normal conditions, the measured Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, values would be lower and the airbag would ● Never use wheel and tyre combinations doors, front seats, and repairs to the roof or not have been triggered. Other modifications not approved by SEAT. chassis should only be carried out in a speci- may reduce the forces measured by the sen- alised workshop. These components may sors and prevent the airbags from being trig- contain parts or sensors belonging to the air- gered when they should. Retrofitting of mobile phones bag system. If work is carried out on the airbag system or WARNING An exterior aerial is required for the use of parts have to be removed and fitted on the Repairs or modifications which are not per- two-way radios in the vehicle. system when performing other repair work, formed correctly may result in damage or The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic ap- parts of the airbag system may be damaged. errors in the vehicle operation, affecting pliances in the vehicle is subject to their ap- The consequence may be that, in the event the effectiveness of the airbag systems. proval for use in your vehicle. Under certain of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly This could result in serious or fatal acci- circumstances, this could mean that your ve- dents. or does not inflate at all. hicle registration documents are no longer ● All repairs and modifications to the vehi- So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not valid. cle should only be performed by a special- reduced and that removed parts do not ised workshop. SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with cause any injuries or environmental pollution, two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed: » 313 Practical tips

● The exterior aerial must be mounted pro- tion may be exceeded. This is also the case If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands- fessionally. if the aerial has not been correctly instal- free device, it will comply with the legislation ● The maximum transmitting power is 10 led. in many countries which only permits the use of mobile phones inside vehicles using a watts. ● You should only use a two-way radio inside the vehicle if it has first been correctly hands-free device. The optimal reach of the equipment is only connected to an exterior aerial. The hands-free system mounted at the facto- achieved with an external aerial. ry has been designed for use with conven- Check first with a specialised workshop that tional mobile phones and phones with Blue- understands the technical possibilities of in- Using a mobile telephone in a vehi- tooth technology. Mobile phones should be stallation if you wish to use a two-way radio cle without connection to an exteri- placed on a suitable phone cradle. In addi- with a transmitting power of over 10 watts. tion, the cradle should always be correctly SEAT recommends taking your car in for or aerial fitted into the base plate. This ensures that technical service. the mobile phone is securely attached to the Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio dash panel, it is always within reach of the All legal requirements, together with the in- waves, both when in use and when on stand- driver and is connected to the vehicle exterior structions for the use of two-way radios must by. Scientific studies state that radio waves aerial. be observed. exceeding certain values may be harmful to the human body. International committees If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial WARNING and authorities have established limits and incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior If the two-way radio is not securely fas- directives in order to ensure electromagnetic aerial connected to the vehicle, it will help re- tened in position, it could be sent flying radiation from mobile phones remains within duce the electromagnetic radiation transmit- around the vehicle in the event of sharp certain limits that do not endanger health. ted and the risk to human health. It will also braking, sudden manoeuvres or accident, Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientific improve the quality of the connection. causing injury. evidence that wireless telephones are totally If the phone is used inside the vehicle without ● While driving, two-way radios must be safe. the hands-free system, it will not be securely securely fastened in position, outside the Therefore, some experts recommend that use fastened and will not be connected to the ex- radius of action of the airbags, or safely of mobile phone be kept to a minimum until terior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will stowed away. the results of current research are published. the telephone charge if it is not on the support. In addition, some calls may break off When a mobile phone not connected to an WARNING and the quality of the connection will be af- exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the fected. When using a two-way radio without a con- electromagnetic radiation may be greater nection to an exterior aerial, the maximum than if the mobile phone were connected to a permitted levels of electromagnetic radia- built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

314 Care and maintenance

Mobile phones should only be used inside the Support points for raising the vehi- The vehicle should not be lifted using lifting vehicle if they are connected to a hands-free cle platforms with lift pads containing fluid. system with an exterior aerial. When raising a vehicle using a platform or jack, a series of precautionary measures are WARNING required. Do not raise the vehicle with a lifting If the mobile phone is not securely fastened platform or jack unless you have received in position, it could be sent flying around training in how to do so and know how to do the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, so safely. sudden manoeuvres or accident, causing injury. Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack  page 50. ● While driving, mobile phones must be se- ››› curely fastened in position, outside the radius of action of the airbags, or safely WARNING stowed away. Fig. 283 Front jacking points for raising vehicle The improper use of the lifting platform or with lifting platform or jack the jack when raising the vehicle may result WARNING in accidents or serious injury. ● Before raising the vehicle, please observe When using a mobile phone without a con- the manufacturer's instructions for the nection to an exterior aerial, the maximum platform or jack, and the legal require- permitted levels of electromagnetic radia- ments, where applicable. tion may be exceeded. This is also the case if the aerial has not been correctly instal- ● There should not be anyone inside the led. vehicle when it is being raised or once it is in the air. ● A minimum of 20 centimetres should be kept between mobile phone aerials and ar- ● Only use the jacking points indicated in tificial pacemakers, as mobile telephones the figures ››› Fig. 283 and ››› Fig. 284 when may affect the working of pacemakers. raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at the indicated points, it may fall from the ● Do not keep mobile phones in breast Fig. 284 Rear jacking points for raising vehicle platform while the engine or gearbox is be- pockets directly above pacemakers. with lifting platform or jack ing dismounted, for example. ● Switch off the mobile phone immediately Always use the jacking points indicated in the ● The jacking points should be centrally if you suspect there may be interference. figures ››› Fig. 283 and ››› Fig. 284 when rais- aligned and firmly positioned on the plat- ing the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at form support plates. » these points, it could be seriously damaged ››› or lead to serious injury ››› . 315 Practical tips

● Never start the engine when the vehicle is Checking and refilling lev- netic waves could cause sparks and lead raised! The vehicle may fall from the plat- to a fire. form due to the engine vibrations. els ● Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If ● If it is necessary to work underneath the it is absolutely necessary to enter, close vehicle while it is raised, you should check Filling the tank the door and touch a metal surface before that the supporting stands have an ade- touching the filler nozzle again. This will quate load capacity. prevent the generation of static electricity. Introduction ● Never climb onto the lifting platform. Sparks could cause a fire when refuelling. ● Never handle fuel close to flames, sparks ● Always make sure that the weight of the The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the or objects with slow combustion (e.g. ciga- vehicle does not exceed the lifting platform vehicle. load capacity. rettes). WARNING ● Avoid static electricity and electro-magnetic radiation when refuelling. CAUTION Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can ● Observe the safety regulations of the ● cause an explosion or fire resulting in seri- Never raise the vehicle at the engine oil service station. sump, the gearbox or the rear or front ous burns and injuries. ● Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the axles. ● Always make sure that you correctly luggage compartment. ● Always use an intermediate rubber sup- close the fuel cap to avoid evaporation and port to prevent damage to the vehicle un- fuel spillage. derbody. Check that the arms of the lifting ● Fuels are highly explosive and inflamma- WARNING platform are able to move with obstruction. ble substances that can cause serious For safety reasons, SEAT does not recom- ● The arms should not come into contact burns and injuries. mend carrying a spare fuel canister in the with the side running boards or other parts ● Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the en- vehicle. Fuel could be spilled and catch of the vehicle. gine is not switched off or if the filler fuel fire, above all in case of an accident and nozzle is not fully inserted into the tank fill- this applies to a full container as well as er neck when refuelling. This could lead to empty containers. This could lead to explo- a fire, explosion and severe injuries. sions, fires and injuries. ● When refuelling, turn off the engine, the ● Observe the following if you exceptional- auxiliary heating (››› page 184) and turn off ly have to carry fuel in a canister: the ignition for safety reasons. – Never place a fuel container to fill it in- ● Always turn off mobile telephones, radio side the vehicle or on the vehicle, for apparatus and other radio wave emitting example, in the boot or on the hatch. equipment before refuelling. Electromag- Filling in these circumstances could

316 Checking and refilling levels

create an electrostatic charge and ● In vehicles with a diesel engine, under no Control lamps and fuel gauge spark that could ignite fuel fumes. circumstances should you refuel or drive – Always place the canister on the with petrol, kerosene, heating oil or any ground to fill it. other type of different fuel. Other types of fuels could cause serious damage to the – Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of engine and to the fuel supply system and the canister as far as possible. the resulting problems are not covered by – If you are using a metal fuel canister, the SEAT warranty. the nozzle must always touch the canister while it is being filled to avoid stat- For the sake of the environment ic electricity. – Follow the legal requirements for the Fuels can contaminate the environment. use, storage and transport of spare fuel Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a Fig. 285 canisters. professional to dispose of them. On the instrument panel: Fuel gauge for petrol and diesel – Insure that the fuel container complies with manufacturing standards, for ex- Note ample, ANSI or ASTM F852-86. Lights up. There is no emergency mechanism for the  Position of the gauge in the red manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- (arrow) ››› Fig. 285 CAUTION essary, request assistance from specialised personnel. The fuel tank is almost empty ››› . The reserve tank ● Always remove any fuel spilled on the ve- is being used ››› page 41. hicle paintwork immediately to avoid dam- Refuel as soon as possible ››› . age to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paintwork.  It lights up ● Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel or a diesel engine with petrol can cause serious The gas tank is not properly closed. engine and fuel system damage; the result- Stop the vehicle and close the tank lid correctly. ing malfunctions are not covered by the SEAT warranty. If you refuel with the wrong Several warning and control lamps light up type of fuel, never start the engine. This ap- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- plies to even the smallest amount of the ed on, signalling that the function is being wrong fuel. Seek specialist assistance. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- With the engine running, the composition of onds. » the wrong fuel could significantly damage the fuel system and the engine itself. 317 Practical tips

When the  or  control lamp lights up, the Note ● Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off! auxiliary heater running and the supplemen- Otherwise, this will fill the expansion chamber tary heater automatically switch off. The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on and fuel may leak out if the ambient condi- the instrument panel Fig. 285 indicates ››› tions are warm. the side of the vehicle on which the fuel WARNING tank flap is located. Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could WARNING result in the vehicle breaking down in traffic Do not continue refilling once the fuel noz- and a serious accident. zle has switched itself off. The fuel tank Refuelling ● If the fuel level is too low then the fuel may be filled too much. As a result, fuel supply to the engine can become irregular may spurt out and spill. This could lead to a especially on slopes. fire, explosion and severe injuries. ● If the engine “is choked” or stalls due to lack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, the CAUTION power steering as well as all of the driver ● Always remove any fuel spilled on the ve- assistance systems including brake assis- hicle paintwork immediately to avoid dam- tance will stop working. age to the wheel housing, the tyre and ve- ● Always refuel when there is only one hicle paintwork. quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running out of fuel. For the sake of the environment Fig. 286 Open fuel tank flap with tank cap in Spilt fuel can contaminate the environ- CAUTION the holder ment. ● Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descrip- Read the additional information carefully tions and instructions to avoid damage to ›››  page 41 the vehicle. ● Never run the fuel tank completely dry. Refuelling An irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition The correct petrol type for the vehicle is loca- faults and unburnt fuel could enter the ex- ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap haust system. This could damage the cata- ››› page 319. lytic converter filter or the diesel particulate filter! ● If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is full ››› . 318 Checking and refilling levels

Fuel centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7” Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or means, for example, a proportion of bio- normal 91 octane petrol at least diesel of max. 7%. Identification of the fuel1) We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91 Natural Gas. octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

Type of petrol Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least 3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the AKI) at least. fuel tank flap. If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only verter and must only be run on unleaded use moderate engine speeds and a light Fig. 287 Identification of fuels according to petrol. The petrol must comply with the throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/ standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels ble. with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled Fuels are identified with different symbols. (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated Depending on the fuel, the different symbols Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or by using the octane numbers (RON) or via are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi- super 95 octane petrol at least the anti-knock index (AKI). cle. The identification serves to prevent con- We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 fusion when choosing the fuel. The following pieces of text show the infor- octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super mation included in the corresponding stickers 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- on the tank lid (examples): loss). nol). The number indicates the percentage of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light » 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the per-

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 319 Practical tips

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- Note Diesel ble. ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the 3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine one required by the engine can be used. CAUTION Please note the information on the inside of ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. the fuel tank flap. free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The phur content fuel. We recommend you use Diesel according to fuel system would be damaged. Exception: standard EN 590. vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 320, Ethanol fuel. The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or Ethanol fuel tures, thus affecting the start or operation of other metal additives entails a permanent 3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine the engine. To ensure that you can continue deterioration of the effectiveness of the to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in catalytic converter. You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gas stations is provided -depending on the 1) ● Only use fuel additives that have been gines by label on the fuel tank lid with with station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em- approved by SEAT. The products that con- the marking “Petrol/ethanol”. ployee of the petrol station whether their diesel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited tain substances to increase the octane rat- Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with ing or decrease knocking may contain met- for current and future temperatures. unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- al additives that damage the engine and ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high catalytic converter. This type of products CAUTION percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- must not be used. led in the same way as petrol refuelling. ● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents containing metals. LRP (lead replacement Also consider that ››› page 319, Type of pet- as they can cause severely damage the petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of rol fuel system and the engine. metal additives. Risk of engine damage! ● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not Note ● High engine speed and full throttle can start the engine under any circumstances. damage the engine when using petrol with SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- Risk of damaging the fuel system and the an octane rating lower than the correct sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- engine! Obtain technical assistance. grade for the engine. crease impurities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 320 Checking and refilling levels

Selective catalytic reduc- WARNING  together tion* (AdBlue) AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that It lights up red can cause injuries if it touches the skin, with eyes or respiratory organs.  Introduction ● If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the In vehicles with “Selective Catalytic Reduc- skin, rinse for at least 15 minutes with plen- AdBlue system. ty of water and seek medical help. tion”, a special urea solution (AdBlue) is injec- Go to a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there. ted into the exhaust gas system in front of the ● If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash your catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen oxide mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 emissions. minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting un-  It lights up yellow less recommended by a Doctor. Seek med- The consumption of AdBlue depends on indi- ical advice immediately. The AdBlue level is low. vidual driving style, the temperature at which Refill AdBlue over the next kilometres or miles as indicated page 322. SEAT recommends contacting a the system operates and the outside temper- ››› CAUTION specialised workshop. ature where the vehicle is driven. AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted AdBlue is kept in an independent tank in the vehicle parts, plastic, items of clothing and  vehicle and should be refilled at an official carpets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed as together It lights up yellow supplier. The AdBlue tank holds approximate- quickly as possible using a damp cloth and with ly 17 litres. plenty of cold water.  The AdBlue fill level must be checked when ● If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable with warm water and a sponge. the vehicle is being serviced. AdBlue fluid has been used. Go to a specialised workshop. Have the system WARNING checked there. If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehicle Control and warning lamps Several warning and control lamps should may not restart after switching the ignition light up for a few seconds when the ignition is off. The emergency start or jump start will  It lights up red not be possible either! switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few ● Top up with AdBlue at the latest 1,000 km The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level is too low. seconds. » or 600 miles before it runs out. Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then ● Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low. top up with the minimum quantity of AdBlue required ››› page 322.

321 Practical tips

WARNING Refilling AdBlue Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109.

Information on AdBlue

A message will be displayed on the dash panel around 2,400 km before the next service to indicate that AdBlue must be refilled ››› page 322. If you ignore this message and do not refill, you will be unable to start the en- Fig. 288 On the left side of the boot: AdBlue gine afterwards ››› page 321. tank, behind a cover. SEAT recommends contacting a specialised workshop. If not possible, it should be partially filled with a minimum 5.0 litres of AdBlue. Only refill using AdBlue expressly approved by SEAT. When the  and  warning lamps light up simultaneously, there is a fault. SEAT recommends visiting the closest specialised workshop. Fig. 289 AdBlue tank with filler neck cap and ® AdBlue is a registered trademark in the US, refilling bottle Germany, the European Union and other countries belonging to the German automo- To refill AdBlue, the vehicle must be on flat bile industry association (“"Verband der Auto- ground and not, for example, parked on a mobilindustrie e. V."”, VDA). kerb or slope. If the vehicle is not on flat ground then the filling indicator cannot measure the filling quantity.

322 Checking and refilling levels

Opening the tank filling neck Closing the tank filling neck ● Do not add AdBlue to the diesel fuel tank! ● Open the rear lid. ● Screw on the tank filler neck cap Otherwise you may damage the engine. ● Rotate the shut off on the cover clockwise ››› Fig. 289 1 clockwise until it is fully inser- ● Never leave the refill bottle in the vehicle. ››› Fig. 288 and open the cover forwards. ted. It could become permeable due to temperature changes and bottle damage and the ● ● Place the cover and turn the shut off anti- Unscrew the tank filler neck cap ››› Fig. 289 AdBlue could damage the vehicle interior. 1 anticlockwise. clockwise to close it.

Refilling AdBlue Operations before driving For the sake of the environment Only use AdBlue that is approved by SEAT ● Only switch the ignition on after refilling. Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- and that complies with ISO 22241-1 Stand- ● Keep the ignition switch on for at least 30 ment-friendly manner. ard. Only use original containers. seconds so that the system detects tank refilling. Note ● Observe the instructions and information ● Wait 30 seconds before starting the engine! provided by the refill bottle manufacturer. Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be purchased from a technical service centre. ● Observe the expiry date. WARNING ● Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle. Only keep AdBlue in its original container, ● Place the refill bottle 2 upside down inside tightly shut and in a safe place. Working in the engine com- the tank filler neck. ● Never keep AdBlue in empty food cans, ● Press the refill bottle against the filler neck bottles or other containers to avoid other partment and keep in this position. people mistaking it for something else. ● Add at least 5.0 litres of AdBlue (6 bot- ● Keep the AdBlue out of the reach of small Introduction tles). A lower quantity would be insufficient. children. Read the additional information carefully ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle ›››  page 13 have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do CAUTION not crush or damage the bottle! ● Only refill using AdBlue expressly ap- Before working in the engine compartment, make sure that the vehicle is parked on hori- ● Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise and proved by SEAT. The use of any other type zontal and firm ground. remove it carefully ››› . of AdBlue could cause engine damage! ● You can tell when the AdBlue tank is full be- ● AdBlue should never be mixed with water The engine compartment of the vehicle is a cause the bottle will be empty. or any other additives. Any type of damage hazardous area. Never work on the engine or caused by a mixture will not be covered by in the engine compartment if you are not fa- the warranty. miliar with the operations to be carried out, » 323 Practical tips

the applicable safety standards and espe- the necessary operations. If you are not – Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap cially if you do not have the necessary instru- sure about procedures then visit a special- anticlockwise, gently pressing down on ments, liquids and tools ››› ! Have the work ised workshop to carry out the necessary it. carried out by a specialised workshop if you work. Working incorrectly can cause seri- – Always protect your face, hands and are uncertain. Negligent work can cause serious injuries. arms from hot coolant and steam using ous injury. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam a large, thick cloth. or coolant escaping from the engine com- ● WARNING When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them partment. This may cause serious burns. Al- on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys- If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this ways wait until you cannot see or hear the tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. could cause serious injury. sound of steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment. ● Never work under the vehicle if it has not WARNING been immobilized. If you must work under- ● Always allow the engine to cool down beneath the vehicle with the wheels in con- fore opening the bonnet. The high voltages of the electrical system tact with the ground then it should be ● Contact with hot elements of the engine can give electric shocks as well as causing parked on flat ground, the wheels should and the exhaust system can cause burns. burns and serious injury and possibly even be prevented from moving and the key death! ● Once the engine has cooled, follow the should be removed from the ignition. ● instructions below before opening the bon- Never cause short circuits in the electri- ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- net: cal system. The battery could explode. cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ● To minimise the risk of electric shock and – Turn on the electronic parking brake ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of and place the gear selector lever in P serious consequences while the engine is accident!. The jack is not intended for this or the gearbox lever in neutral. running or starting the engine, note the fol- kind of work and its failure could lead to se- lowing: – Remove the key from the ignition. vere injuries. – Never touch the electrical wiring of the – Keep children away from the engine ignition system. WARNING compartment and never leave them unsupervised. – Never touch electric cables or the gas The engine compartment is a dangerous discharge lamps. ● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool- area capable of causing serious injury. ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew ● For all type of work, always take the ut- the cap on the expansion tank when the en- WARNING most precautions, work carefully and note gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray In the engine compartment, there are rotat- the general safety standards in force. Nev- out under pressure causing burns and seri- ing parts that could cause serious injury. er take personal risks. ous injury. ● Never place your hands on or near the ra- ● Never work on the engine or in the engine diator fan. Touching the rotor blades could compartment if you are not familiar with seriously harm you. The ventilator works 324 Checking and refilling levels according to the engine temperature and WARNING cause serious malfunctions and damage could start suddenly even when the ignition the engine! Refill liquids and certain materials can is turned off and the key is removed. catch fire easily in the engine compart- ● If any work has to be performed when the ment, causing a fire and serious injury! For the sake of the environment engine is started or with the engine running, ● Never smoke. there is an additional, potentially fatal, Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- safety risk from rotating parts, such as the ● Never work close to places exposed to ronment. For this reason you should make drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., as flames or sparks. regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a special- well as from the high-voltage ignition sys- ● Never pour service fluids over the engine. ised workshop to be checked if you see tem. Always work with the utmost caution. These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and stains, oil or other fluids on the ground. cause injuries. – Always make sure that no parts of your Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and ● If it is necessary to work on the fuel sys- professional to dispose of them. long hair can be trapped by the rotat- tem or the electrical system, please follow ing parts of the engine. Before any the instructions below: work, remove ties and jewellery (neck- – Always disconnect the vehicle battery. laces, etc), tie long hair back and tie all When disconnecting the battery, en- Opening and closing the bonnet items of loose clothing to your body to sure that the vehicle is unlocked other- Read the additional information carefully make sure that they cannot be trapped wise the anti-theft alarm will be trig- by engine components. gered. ›››  page 13 – Take extreme caution when operating – Never work close to heaters, heat sour- WARNING the accelerator and remain attentive. ces or places exposed to flames or The vehicle could move, even with the sparks. If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it electronic parking brake activated. could suddenly open while driving leaving ● Always keep a recently serviced and per- ● the driver without visibility. This could re- Always make sure you have not left any fectly working fire extinguisher close by. objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, sult in a serious accident. ● Never cover the engine with additional in- in the engine compartment. If any object is ● After closing the bonnet, always check sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of left in the engine compartment, this could that it is properly secured by the locking fire! cause malfunctions, engine faults and even mechanism in the lock carrier. The bonnet a fire. must be flush with the surrounding body CAUTION panels. When refilling or changing service liquids, ● While driving, if you notice that the bon- ensure that you put the liquids into the right net is not correctly closed then stop imme- tank. Making a mistake when refilling could diately and close it correctly. »

325 Practical tips

● Only open and close the bonnet when fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious ● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the there is nobody within its range. damage to the engine may be caused. reach of children.

1 Coolant fluid deposit ● Engine oil should only be kept in its origi- CAUTION nal packaging; the same goes for used oil 2 Engine oil dipstick until it is disposed of. ● To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the 3 Oil filler neck windscreen wiper arms, only open it when ● Never store engine oil in empty food con- the windscreen wipers are in place against 4 Brake fluid reservoir tainers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink it. the windscreen. 5 Vehicle battery (underneath a cover) ● Regular contact with engine oil can be ● Before driving, always lower the wiper 6 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir arms. bad for the skin. If you come into contact The checking and refilling of service fluids are with engine oil, wash your skin with soap carried out on the components mentioned and water. ● With the engine running, the engine oil Checking fluid levels above. These operations are described in ››› page 323. gets extremely hot and can cause severe skin burns. Always wait until the engine has Overview fully cooled. You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical specifica- For the sake of the environment tions as of ››› page 364 Similar to the other service liquids, spilled engine oil can be bad for the environment. Collect these liquids in suitable containers and dispose of them while respecting the Engine oil environment.

Introduction Control and warning lamps WARNING

Fig. 290 Diagram for the location of the vari- Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause  It lights up ous elements. injury and serious burns. Insufficient engine oil. ● Always protect your eyes when handling Stop the engine. Check the engine oil level From time to time, the levels of the different engine oil. ››› page 327. fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never

326 Checking and refilling levels

 Flashes only engine oils approved for this service according to the corresponding VW standard Faulty engine oil system. (›››  page 42) may be used. All oils indica- Go to a specialised workshop. Have the engine oil ted are synthetic multigrade oils. sensor checked. Meanwhile, check the oil level manually. Engine oils are being continuously further developed. Technical services are constantly  Flashes updated with any modifications. SEAT therefore recommends that you have the engine Engine oil pressure too low. oil changed by a technical service.  Stop the vehicle! Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. CAUTION Fig. 292 In the engine compartment: engine - If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is oil filler cap. correct, do not continue driving or leave the engine ● Only use engine oils whose specifica- running. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. tions are expressly approved by SEAT. The Read the additional information carefully Seek specialist assistance. use of any other type of oil could cause en- ›››  page 41 gine damage! WARNING Preparations Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the trol and warning lamps on page 109. Checking engine oil level engine oil reading is correct. ● Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for Engine oil specifications the oil to drain back into the sump. When the engine has cooled down, immediately check the oil level and top up if necessary. Replacement engine oil must strictly comply with the specifications. ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 323. The correct oil must be used to ensure the ● The engine oil filler neck can be recognised correct operation and long service life of the by the symbol  on the cap ››› Fig. 292 and engine. The engine comes with a high-quality the dipstick by its coloured handle. multigrade oil that can generally be used all year round. Checking the engine oil level Fig. 291 Marked engine oil dipstick Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT ● Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean standards whenever possible ››› . If you cloth. » wish to maintain the long-life service duration, 327 Practical tips

● Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as ● After topping up the oil, ensure that the cap Engine oil consumption it will go. If the dipstick has a mark, when you is screwed on to the filler neck correctly. reintroduce it this mark should slot into the The consumption of engine oil can be differ- corresponding groove located on the upper WARNING ent from one engine to another and can vary end of the tube. Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact during the useful life of the engine. ● Remove the oil dipstick again and check with hot engine components. This could Depending on driving style and the condi- the engine oil level. lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries. tions of use, the consumption of engine oil ● After reading the oil level, replace the dip- ● Always ensure that after topping of oil, can reach 1 litre every 2,000 km (one quarter stick in the tube completely. the engine oil filler cap is correctly tight- of a gallon every 1,200 miles); for new vehi- ened. This will avoid engine oil spilling onto cles, this could be higher for the first Adding oil after checking the level hot engine parts when the engine is run- 5,000 km (3,000 miles). For this reason the ning. engine oil level must be checked at regular Only add engine oil in small quantities and in intervals, preferably when filling the tank and steps: CAUTION before a journey. ● Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neck ● If the engine oil level is above the area on the cylinder head ››› Fig. 292. If you are ››› Fig. 291 A do not start the engine. Re- not sure where the cap is, request help from a quest help from specialised staff. Other- Topping up engine oil specialist. wise catalytic converter and engine dam- ● Only refill using approved SEAT engine oil in age may occur. Read the additional information carefully small quantities (no more than 0.5 l) ● When refilling or changing service liq- ›››  page 41 ››› page 327. uids, ensure that you put the liquids into the The engine oil must be changed regularly ac- right tank. Making a mistake when refilling ● To avoid adding too much oil, each time cording to the specifications of the Mainte- could cause serious malfunctions and you add a quantity, wait until the oil has flow- nance Programme. damage the engine! ed into the crankcase so that it can be meas- Due to the problems linked with disposing of ured with the dipstick. used oil and the need for suitable tools and For the sake of the environment ● Check the oil level before adding any more special knowledge, always visit a specialised oil. Do not top up with too much engine oil The oil level must never be above zone workshop to have the engine oil and filter ››› . ››› Fig. 291 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in changed. SEAT recommends taking your car through the crankcase breather and leak ● When the oil level is at least in the in for technical service. into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- B ››› Fig. 291 zone, insert the dipstick into the tem. Detailed information on the service intervals tube fully to avoid engine oil escaping when is shown in the Maintenance Programme. the engine is running.

328 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING ● Always dispose of engine oil with the ut- For the sake of the environment most respect for the environment. Never If, in exceptional circumstances, you must Coolants and additives can contaminate dispose of used engine oil in places such as change the engine oil yourself, please note the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in a garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, riv- the following: suitable containers and dispose of them in ers and drainage systems. ● Wear eye protection. accordance with legislation and with the utmost respect for the environment. ● Always wait until the engine has completely cooled to avoid being burned. ● Always keep your arms horizontal when Engine coolant unscrewing the oil drainage bolt so that it Warning lamp and coolant temper- does not run down your arms. Introduction ature indicator ● Use a suitable container large enough to collect all of the used oil in the engine. WARNING ● Never collect engine oil in empty food Engine coolant is toxic! containers, cans, bottles or other contain- ● Only keep engine coolant in its original ers as not all people are able to identify container, tightly shut and in a safe place. engine oil. ● Never store engine coolant in empty food ● Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the containers or bottles as other people may reach of children. accidentally drink it. ● Always keep engine coolant out of reach CAUTION of children. No additives should be used with engine oil. ● Ensure that the proportion of engine Fig. 293 Coolant temperature gauge on dash This could result in engine damage. Any coolant additive corresponds to the lowest panel insert. damage caused by the use of such addi- outside temperature to which the vehicle tives would not be covered by the factory will be exposed. A Cool zone. Avoid revving the engine too warranty. much or making it work hard while it has ● If the outside temperature is extremely not reached normal service temperature. low, the engine coolant could freeze caus- For the sake of the environment ing the vehicle to stop. As this would also B Normal temperature ● Before changing the engine oil, find a cause the heating to stop working, passen- C Warning area suitable location or service for proper dis- gers without warm clothing could freeze. posal. When driving normally, the needle will remain in the middle area. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard, » 329 Practical tips

especially at high outside temperatures and  Flashes red CAUTION so the indicator will move quite far to the right-hand side. Faulty engine coolant system. The original additives should never be Request help from specialised staff. mixed with coolants which are not ap- Several warning and control lamps light up proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- of causing severe damage to the engine WARNING ed on, signalling that the function is being and the engine cooling system. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not onds. trol and warning lamps on page 109. purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G13 additive has been mixed  It lights up red with an inadequate coolant. The coolant Coolant specifications must be changed as soon as possible if this Engine coolant system faulty. is the case! This could result in serious  Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- faults and engine damage. tance. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 42 It lights up red For the sake of the environment  WARNING Indicator in normal zone B Coolants and additives can contaminate If there is not enough anti-freeze in the the environment. If any fluids are spilled, Engine coolant level very low. coolant system, the engine may fail lead- they should be collected and correctly dis- Check the engine coolant when the engine has ing to serious damage. posed of, with respect to the environment. cooled and, if it is low, refill with engine coolant ››› page 331. ● Please make sure that the percentage of Although the coolant level is correct, there is a fault. additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used.  It lights up red Indicator in warning zone C ● When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- Excessive engine coolant temperature. cle would be immobilised. In this case, the  Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon heating would not work either and inade- as possible. Switch off the engine and wait for it to quately dressed passengers could die of cool down and for the needle to return to the normal cold. area. Check the engine coolant level ››› page 331.

330 Checking and refilling levels

Checking the coolant level and Preparations ● Screw on the cap tightly. topping up ● Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm ● If, in the event of an emergency, you have ground. no coolant that is compliant to the required ● Allow the engine to cool ››› . specifications (››› page 330), do not use another type of additive. Instead, top up with ●  Open the bonnet ››› page 323. distilled water only ››› . Then re-establish ● The coolant expansion tank is easily recog- the correct proportion of the mixture with the nisable because of the  symbol on the cap correct additive as soon as possible ››› Fig. 295. ››› page 330.

Checking the engine coolant level WARNING ● When the engine is cold, check the coolant Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious level using the side marking on the expansion burns. Fig. 294 In the engine compartment: Marking tank ››› Fig. 294. ● Never open the coolant expansion tank if on coolant expansion tank ● If the level is below the  minimum mark, steam or coolant is coming from the engine top up with coolant. When the engine is hot it compartment. Wait until you cannot see or may be slightly above the marked area. hear any steam or coolant escaping. ● Always wait until the engine has com- Topping up the engine coolant level pletely cooled before very carefully opening the expansion tank cap. Contact with ● Always protect your face, hands and arms hot elements of the engine can cause skin from hot coolant and steam using a large, burns. thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank ● When the engine is warm or hot, the cool- cap. ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew ● Remove the cap very carefully ››› . the cap on the expansion tank when the en- ● Only refill using new engine coolant ac- gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray Fig. 295 In the engine compartment: Coolant cording to SEAT specifications (››› page 330) out under pressure causing burns and seri- expansion tank cap ››› . ous injury. ● The engine coolant level should be be- – Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap If the coolant level is low, the coolant warning anti-clockwise, gently pressing down tween the marks on the coolant expansion indicator will light. on it. » tank ››› Fig. 294. Do not exceed the top level of the marked area ››› .

331 Practical tips

– Always protect your face, hands and ● When refilling service liquids, ensure that able forces, bubbles of water vapour can arms from hot coolant and steam using you put the liquids into the right tank. Mak- form in the system. These bubbles can signifi- a large, thick cloth. ing a mistake when refilling could cause se- cantly reduce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could even re- ● When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them rious malfunctions and damage the engine! on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys- sult in the total failure of the brake system. En- tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Un- suring that the brake system is always func- der specific circumstances, the ethylene tioning correctly is essential for your own glycol can catch fire. Brake fluid safety and the safety of other road users ››› . CAUTION Checking the brake fluid level Brake fluid specifications ● Only fill with distilled water. Any other SEAT have developed a special brake fluid type of water may lead to considerable optimised for the brake system of their vehi- rusting in the engine due to its chemical components. This could consequently cles. To ensure the optimum working of the damage the engine. If you have not used brake system, SEAT recommends the use of distilled water but another type of water to brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14 top up the coolant, a specialised workshop standard. If this brake fluid is not available or must immediately replace all of the fluid in another brake fluid is used for different rea- the engine cooling system. sons, use a brake fluid that complies with the ● Only top up coolant to the top level of the United States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or marked area ››› Fig. 294. Otherwise the ex- the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 cess coolant will be forced out of the cool- Fig. 296 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ››› . ervoir cap. ing system when the engine is hot, causing Brake fluids conforming to the standard damage. VW 501 14, fulfil the American requirements of Read the additional information carefully ● If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the Ger- ›››  page 43 wait for the engine to cool down complete- man DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. How- ly before adding coolant. Extensive coolant In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs ever, fluids that comply with the American loss is an indication of leaks in the engine water from the ambient air. If there is too FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German cooling system. Have the engine cooling much water in the brake fluid, the brake sys- DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not nec- system inspected immediately by a speci- tem could be damaged. In addition, the boil- essarily comply with the VW 501 14 standard. alised workshop. Otherwise engine dam- ing point of the brake fluid is significantly low- Always check the information on the brake age may occur. ered. When the brake fluid contains too much fluid container and ensure that you are using water and the brakes are subject to consider- suitable brake fluid.

332 Checking and refilling levels

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from ● Check the brake system and the brake ers or similar. Other people could drink technical service centres. fluid level regularly! from these recipients even if the contents ● The brake fluid should be changed regu- are clearly marked. Brake fluid level larly in accordance with the instructions ● Always keep brake fluid in the original The level of the brake fluid reservoir should given in the Maintenance Programme. container; keep it correctly sealed and out always be between the  and  marks, or ● When the brake fluid is used and brakes of reach of children. above the  mark ››› . are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys- It is not always possible to check the level of CAUTION tem. These bubbles can significantly re- the brake fluid, as in some models the engine duce braking power, notably increasing Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. components make it difficult to see the brake braking distance, and could result in the to- Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork fluid reservoir. If you cannot read the exact tal failure of the brake system. immediately. brake fluid level, consult a specialist. ● Only use brake fluid that complies with The brake fluid level drops slightly when the the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or For the sake of the environment vehicle is being used due to wear of the brake DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. Other Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. pads and the automatic readjustment of the types of brake fluids can affect the opera- Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a brake. tion of the brakes and decrease braking professional to dispose of them. power. Do not use a brake fluid if the con- Changing the brake fluid tainer does not specify compliance with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or The brake fluid should be changed in accord- DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. ance with the instructions given in the Mainte- ● The replacement brake fluid must be nance Programme. Have the brake fluid new. changed by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical ● Always ensure that you use suitable service. This means that only brake fluid com- brake fluid. Do not use a brake fluid if the container does not specify compliance plying with the required specifications will be with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or used. DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. WARNING WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- Brake fluid is poisonous. tem may fail or braking power may be re- ● To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not duced. keep brake fluid in drinks bottles/contain- 333 Practical tips

Windscreen washer reservoir ● In cold weather, a special antifreeze should Vehicle battery also be added to prevent the water from freezing ››› . Checking and topping up the wind- Introduction screen washer reservoir Filling amounts The battery is a component of the vehicle's The capacity of the tank is approximately 3 li- electrical system. tres; in vehicles with a headlight washer sys- Never work on the electrical system without tem, it is approximately 7 litres. fully understanding the operations required, WARNING the applicable safety standards and without the correct tools ››› ! If required, have any Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other work carried out by a specialised workshop. similar additives with the windscreen wash- SEAT recommends taking your car in for er water. A greasy layer may be formed on technical service. Negligent work can cause the windscreen which will impair visibility. serious injury. ● Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT. Fig. 297 In the engine compartment: cap of Location and number of batteries in the the windscreen washer tank. ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to vehicle the water in the reservoir. The battery is located in the engine compart- Read the additional information carefully ment. ›››  page 43 CAUTION Check the level in the windscreen washer ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen- Explanation of the warning indications on tank regularly and top up as required. ded by SEAT with other products. This the vehicle's battery could lead to flocculation and may block ● Open the bonnet  page 323. Wear eye protection! ››› the windscreen washer jets.  ●  The washer reservoir is marked with the ● When topping up service fluids, make ab- Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Al- symbol on the cap ››› Fig. 297. solutely certain that you fill the fluids into  ways wear protective gloves and eye ● Check there is enough water in the reser- the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- protection! ids could cause serious malfunctions and voir. Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking engine damage!  ● To top up, mix water with a window cleaner are prohibited. recommended by SEAT . Please follow ››› A highly explosive mixture of gases is the instructions for use found on the packag-  released when the battery is under ing. charge. 334 Checking and refilling levels

 Keep children away from acid and bat- ● Replaced damaged or frozen batteries as Several warning and control lamps light up teries! soon as possible. A flat battery can also for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- freeze at temperatures close to 0°C ed on, signalling that the function is being WARNING (+32°F). verified. They will switch off after a few seconds. Working on the vehicle battery and the ● For vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment: Check that the battery electrical system can cause corrosion, fire WARNING and electric shocks. Always read and take gas ventilation hose is securely attached. into account the following warnings and If the warning lamps and messages are ig- safety standards before carrying out any CAUTION nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or work: may cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never disconnect the battery if the igni- ● ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text Before working on the battery, switch off tion is switched on or if the engine is run- messages. the engine, the ignition and all electrical ning. This could damage the electrical sys- devices then disconnect the negative con- tem or electronic components. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- nection on the battery. ble. ● Do not expose the battery to direct sun- ● Keep children away from acid and the light over a long period of time, as the in- battery itself! tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the CAUTION ● Wear eye protection. battery housing. Failure to heed the control lamps and text ● Battery acid is very corrosive and caus- ● If the car is left standing for long periods, messages when they appear may result in tic. It can burn skin and cause blindness. protect the battery from extreme cold tem- faults in the vehicle. When handling the battery, protect your- perature so that it does not “freeze up” and self from splashes of acids, above all your become damaged. hands, arms and face. ● Do not smoke and never work close to places exposed to flames or sparks. Warning lamp ● Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharg- es when working with cables and electrical  It lights up devices. ● Never short the battery terminals. Faulty generator. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the electrical ● Never use a damaged battery. It can ex- system checked. plode. Replace a damaged battery imme- Disconnect any unnecessary electrical devices. The diately. generator does not charge the battery while the vehicle is in motion.

335 Practical tips

Checking the electrolyte level of hot countries and in older batteries. Other Colour indi- Necessary operations the vehicle battery batteries do not require maintenance. cator Vehicles with a Start-Stop system The electrolyte level of the vehi- (››› page 259) are equipped with a special cle's battery is too low. Have the Light yellow or battery marked with the letters “AGM”. For battery checked and, where appli- Colourless technical reasons, it is not possible to check cable, replaced by a specialised the electrolyte level of these batteries workshop. The electrolyte level of the vehi- Black Preparations cle's battery is correct. ● Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment ››› page 323 WARNING ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 323. Working with the vehicle battery involves a risk of corrosion, explosions or electric Fig. 298 In the engine compartment: remove shock. the lid from the vehicle's battery. Opening the battery cover The battery covers are different depending ● Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery on the engine size of the vehicle: acid could spill out of the openings for the release of gases and cause corrosion dam- ● In the case of a lid: press the tab age. ››› Fig. 298 A in the direction of the arrow ● Never open the vehicle battery. and pull the cover upwards. ● If battery acid splashes on you, immedi- ● In the case of a cover: remove the cover by ately rinse your eyes and skin abundantly pulling it to the side ››› Fig. 299. with water for several minutes. Then seek medical care immediately. Checking the battery electrolyte level ● If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a ● Make sure there is sufficient lighting to doctor immediately. Fig. 299 In the engine compartment: remove clearly recognise the colours. Never use the lid from the vehicle's battery. flames or flashing objects as a light source.

Read the additional information carefully ● Depending on the level of acid, the Magic ›››  page 43 eye on the top of the battery will change colour. The battery's electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in

336 Checking and refilling levels

Charging, replacing and connect- Disconnecting the vehicle's battery the ignition cannot be switched on, lock and ing or disconnecting the battery If you must disconnect the battery from the unlock the vehicle from outside. Then try to electrical system, please note the following: switch on the ignition again. If the ignition Charging the battery does not work, seek professional assistance. ● Switch off the ignition and all electrical The vehicle battery should be charged by a equipment. Automatically disconnecting devices specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and ● The vehicle must be unlocked before dis- The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto- they must be charged in a controlled environ- connecting the battery, otherwise the alarm matically implements a range of measures to ment ››› . SEAT recommends taking your will be triggered. prevent the battery from discharging when car in for technical service. ● First disconnect the negative cable and high demands are made on it: then the positive ››› . ● the idling speed is increased so that the al- Replacing a vehicle battery ternator provides more electricity. Connecting the vehicle's battery The battery has been developed to suit the ● where necessary, the power of the most ● conditions of its location and has special Before reconnecting the battery, switch off powerful devices is reduced or even com- safety features. If the battery must be re- the engine and all electrical devices. pletely disconnected. placed, consult a technical service for infor- ● First reconnect the positive cable and then ● On starting the engine, the power supply mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the the negative ››› . size and maintenance, performance and from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga- safety requirements of the new battery in Different control lamps may light up after rette lighter may be interrupted for a short your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT connecting the battery and switching the ig- time. recommends you have the battery replaced nition on. They will be turned off after a short The on-board management program cannot by a technical service. trip at a speed of between 15-20 km/h always prevent the battery from running flat. (10-12 mph). If the warning indicators remain Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries For example, if the ignition is left on for a long lit, please visit a specialised workshop to conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 period with the engine off or if the side lights have the vehicle checked. Standards. These standards must be dated or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is April 2008 or later. If the battery has been disconnected for a stationary. long time, it is possible that the next service Start-Stop systems (››› page 259) are equip- date is not displayed or calculated correctly Why does the battery run flat? ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must ››› page 104. Respect the maximum service only be replaced with a battery of the same ● When stationary for a long time without intervals permitted ››› page 349. specifications. starting the engine, particularly if the ignition Vehicles with Keyless Access is switched on. » (››› page 119): if, after connecting the battery, 337 Practical tips

● Use of electrical devices with the engine CAUTION Wheels and tyres switched off. ● Never disconnect the battery if the igni- ● If the auxiliary heater is running tion is switched on or if the engine is run- Tyres ››› page 184. ning. This could damage the electrical system or electronic components. WARNING Introduction ● Never plug accessories that supply cur- Incorrectly securing the battery or using rent, such as solar panels or a battery The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard the wrong battery can cause short-circuits, charger, to the 12-volt power sockets or the fire and serious injuries. cigarette lighter. This could damage the with anti-puncture technology tyres (Conti- Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of ● Always use only maintenance free bat- vehicle's electrical system. up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro- teries that do not run flat alone and whose tective layer inside the tread. properties, specifications and size corre- For the sake of the environment spond to the standard battery. The specifi- The inclusion of this technology means that ● Dispose of the battery in an environment- cations are indicated on the battery case. there is no type of spare wheel included in friendly manner. Batteries contain toxic the vehicle's equipment. substances such as sulphuric acid and WARNING lead. SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- ● Battery acid can contaminate the envi- wheels is carried out by a specialised work- leased when the battery is under charge. ronment. If it has leaked use adequate care shop. These workshops have the necessary ● The batteries should be charged in a collecting it (gloves and protective special tools and replacement parts, trained well-ventilated room only. glasses), and dispose of it correctly. personnel and facilities for disposing of the old tyres while respecting the environment. ● Never charge a frozen or recently thawed SEAT recommends taking your car in for battery. A flat battery can also freeze at technical service. temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). ● Always replace a battery which has fro- WARNING zen. The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or ● Battery cables not correctly connected braked if the tyres (new or used) are worn may cause a short circuit. Reconnect first or damaged. the positive cable and then the negative cable. ● Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could make driving more dangerous and result in serious accidents and damage.

338 Wheels and tyres

● All four wheels must be fitted with radial never undo the bolted joints of beadlock Handling tyres and wheels tyres of the same type, size (rolling circum- wheels. ference) and the same tread pattern. ● Never mount used tyres or wheels if you ● New tyres do not give maximum grip and are not sure of their previous history. They will not have reached their maximum brak- may be damaged, although the damage is ing capacity to start with, and therefore not immediately visible. need running in. To prevent accidents and ● Old tyres, even if they have never been major damage, extreme caution should be used, may lose air or burst unexpectedly taken for the first 500 km (310 miles). while driving, resulting in serious accident ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- or damage. If tyres are over six years old, sure they are maintained at the pressures they should only be used in an emergency indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, and with extreme caution. they could overheat, resulting in tread de- Fig. 300 Diagram for changing wheels. tachment or even burst tyres. Note ● Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut, The tyres of a vehicle are the components ● cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving For technical reasons, it is not generally which are subjected to most stress and are on damaged or worn tyres could result in possible to use the wheels from other vehi- the most underestimated. Tyres are very im- cles. In some cases, this may also be true burst tyres, serious accidents or damage. portant, as the support offered by their nar- for the same model of wheel. Please refer Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced row surface is the only point of contact be- to the vehicle documentation or ask at a immediately. tween the vehicle and the road. technical service. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre speed or loads specified for the type of pressure, driving style, the care they receive tyre fitted on your vehicle. and the correct fitting. ● The effectiveness of driver and brake assistance systems also depends on the grip The tyres and wheel rims are an essential of the tyres. part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially match- ● If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop ed to the characteristics of the vehicle and the car immediately and check the tyres our critical to good road holding and safe and wheels for damage. handling. » ● To minimise the risk of losing control of the vehicle or causing a serious accident,

339 Practical tips

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from dirt ● If you have to drive over a kerb or similar specialised workshop to have the tyres by storing them in suitable bags and standing obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as changed. them on the ground on their tread. possible at a right angle to the kerb. Tyres over 6 years old WARNING ● Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks, dents). Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a Aggressive fluids or substances could re- result of physical and chemical processes. sult in visible or invisible damage with the ● Remove any foreign bodies found on the This may affect their performance. Tyres consequent risks. outside of the tyre tread and ensure that they which are stored for long periods of time ● Always ensure that tyres do not come in- have not passed through the wall of the without being used, harden and become to contact with chemical products, oil, tyre ››› page 344. more fragile than tyres which are in constant grease, fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive ● In addition, the instructions for tyre control use. substances. systems should always be observed. SEAT recommends that tyres over six years ● Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as old are replaced with new tyres. This also ap- WARNING possible ››› page 344. plies to tyres which appear to be in perfect Old tyres, even if they have never been ● Regularly check tyres for non-visible dam- condition on the outside and which have a used, may lose air or burst unexpectedly age ››› page 344. tread depth within the values stipulated by while driving, resulting in serious accident ● Never exceed the maximum permitted the Law ››› . or damage. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre The date of manufacture, part of the tyre ● If tyres are over six years old, they should fitted on your vehicle ››› page 345. identification number (TIN), indicates the age only be used in an emergency and with extreme caution. ● Do not allow tyres to come into contact of the tyre ››› page 345. with aggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel or brake fluid ››› . Storing tyres For the sake of the environment ● Lost valve caps should be replaced imme- Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified diately. the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards, personnel according to the laws in the backwards). This ensures you will be able to country concerned. Changing wheels mount them correctly when you replace To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres them. When removed, the wheels and/or the wheels should be changed round from tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and pref- Wheels time to time according to the system erably dark location. Do not place tyres ››› Fig. 300. The useful life of all the tyres will mounted on the wheel in a vertical position. The design of wheel bolts is matched to the then be about the same time. rims. If different rims are fitted, the correct 340 Wheels and tyres wheel bolts with the right length and correct- using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should the combinations allowed between the ly shaped bolt heads must be used. This en- only be replaced at a specialised workshop. front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). sures that wheels are fitted securely and that SEAT recommends visiting a technical service the brake system functions correctly ››› . ››› page 87. WARNING Replacement of wheel rims and For technical reasons, it is not generally pos- new tyres sible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In The use of worn or damaged wheel rims could make driving more dangerous and some cases, this may also be true for the New tyres same model of wheel. result in serious accidents and damage. ● ● Only wheel rims which have been ap- When tyres are new, drive with extreme The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are proved for use with your vehicle should be caution for the first 500 km (310 miles), as all specially matched to the characteristics of used. tyres need to be run in. Tyres which have not the vehicle and are critical to good road been run in do not have such good grip or ● Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage holding and safe handling. braking capacity . and replace as required. ››› ››› ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial Wheel bolts tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer- WARNING Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct ence) and the same tread pattern. If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted torque ››› page 87. ● The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- ring trims are not correctly tightened or cording to the type and make of tyre and the Beadlock wheel rims loosened, this could result in serious accident. tread pattern. Beadlock wheel rims have various compo- ● Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel nents. These are joined together by special Replacing tyres rims with bolted ring trims. bolts using a special procedure. This ensures ● Where possible, always replace both good performance, a better seal, improved ● Any work relating to wheel rims with bolted rims should be carried out at special- wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn axle or both wheels on the rear axle) ››› . rims should always be replaced and must on- ised workshop. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service. ly be repaired in a specialised workshop. ● Old tyres should only be replaced by SEAT SEAT recommends visiting a technical service approved tyres for the vehicle in question, ››› . Note and in accordance with the maximum permitted size, diameter, load and speed capacity. » A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted Wheel rims with bolted trims to find out whether wheels or tyres of dif- Wheel rims may be fitted with interchangea- ferent sizes to those originally fitted by ble trim parts which are attached to the rim SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about 341 Practical tips

● If replacing tyres, make sure the new ones Note Tyre pressures have an emergency ride system (Conti- Seal/Run flat). Otherwise, we recommend ● Although tyres may be shown as being the same size, the true dimensions of differ- carrying a tyre mobility system. ent types of tyre may vary with respect to ● Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT the nominal size, or tread patterns may be approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they different. may knock or rub against the chassis or other ● If you use tyres that are approved by components, resulting in damage. SEAT, you can be sure that the true tyre dimensions will be correct for your vehicle. WARNING For other tyre models, the tyre vendor New tyres do not give maximum grip and should provide the manufacturer's certifi- will not have reached their maximum brak- cate with the tyre, indicating that this type ing capacity to start with, and therefore of tyre is suitable for your vehicle. This cer- need running in. tificate should always be carried with the vehicle. ● To prevent accidents and major damage, extreme caution should be taken for the first 500 km (310 miles).

WARNING Fig. 301 Position of tyre pressure specification There should be adequate space between plate the tyres and the vehicle in accordance with the vehicle design. If this is not the The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at case, the tyres may rub against parts of the the factory is shown on a label and is valid for running gear, chassis or brake lines, lead- summer and winter tyres. This label ing to faults in the brake system or to tread ››› Fig. 301 is either on the driver door strut or detachment, and the risk of burst tyres. inside the fuel tank flap. ● The true tyre dimension should not be Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce greater than the dimensions of tyres manu- the life of the tyres considerably and also im- factured and approved by SEAT and should pair the car's handling ››› . It is essential to not rub against parts of the vehicle. maintain the correct tyre pressures, especially if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. 342 Wheels and tyres

The pressure should therefore be checked at WARNING the caps are identical to the standard caps least once a month and before starting a and have been correctly tightened. journey. If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the tyre may deflate or burst suddenly while As a general rule, the pressures given are for driving. This could result in a serious acci- For the sake of the environment cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pres- dent. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sures are greater. ● If the tyre pressure is too low, they could sumption. Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the overheat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. required pressure. This could result in very low Note tyre pressures which may lead to sudden ● When driving at high speeds and/or fully blow-outs. loaded, the tyre could suddenly overheat, When checking tyre pressures, please ob- burst or be subject to tread detachment, serve the instructions for the tyre control system ››› page 298. Checking tyre pressures with the resultant loss of control of the vehicle. Tyre pressures should only be checked when ● Tyre pressures which are too high or too the vehicle has not been driven for more than low reduce the service life of the tyre, af- Wear indicator depth profile a few kilometres (miles) at low speeds in the fecting the vehicle's performance. past three hours. ● Tyre pressures should be checked regu- ● The tyre pressures should be checked reg- larly, at least once a month and before ularly, and only when the tyres are cold. Al- long journeys. ways check all the tyres. Tyre pressures ● Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the should be checked more often in colder re- vehicle load. gions, and only when the vehicle has not ● Never deflate excess pressure from hot been driven recently. Always use a correctly- tyres. operating tyre gauge. ● Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in CAUTION the vehicle. ● Take care not to tilt the manometer when Fig. 302 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators. ● After checking the pressure, always replace placing it on the valve. Otherwise, the valve the valve caps, and where applicable, ob- may be damaged. Tread depth serve the instructions given for adjusting the ● If tyre valves are not protected by caps, tyre control system ››› page 298. Certain driving conditions require a deeper or if the caps are not screwed on correctly, tread, as well as needing the tread to be ap- they may become damaged. Check that proximately the same on the front and rear tyres. This is particularly important when » 343 Practical tips

driving in winter, in cold temperatures and on WARNING Foreign bodies in the tyre wet roads ››› . Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have The minimum tread depth required by law in may lead to loss of control of the vehicle penetrated through the tyre wall! the majority of cases is 1.6 mm (1/16 of an with serious consequences. ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility inch), measured in the tread grooves next to ● Tyres must be replaced before the wear system, where necessary seal the damaged the tread wear indicators. Observe legal re- indicators are at the same level as the tyre as shown in section ››› page 88. Use a quirements in each country. tread pattern. specialised workshop for repair or replace- Winter tyres lose much of their performance ● Worn tyres have significantly reduced ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT when their tread has worn to 4 mm grip, especially on wet surfaces, increasing dealership for this. (5/32 inch). the risk of “aquaplaning”. The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread ● The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- Worn tyres make control of the vehicle wraps around the foreign body and provision- more difficult in normal or difficult driving cording to the type and make of tyre and the ally seals the tyre. conditions, increasing the braking distance tread pattern. and the risk of skidding. Tyre wear Wear indicators on the tyre The wear of tyres depends on a number of The original tyres on your vehicle have Tyre damage factors, for example: 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) high ››› Fig. 302 tread wear ● Driving style. indicators running across the tread. A number Damage to wheels and tyres is often invisible ● Unbalanced wheels. of these indicators are equally spaced to the naked eye. If you notice unusual vibra- around the tyre tread. Certain marks on the tion or the car pulling to one side, this may ● Running gear settings. tyre walls (e.g. the letters “TWI” or other sym- indicate that one of the tyres is damaged Driving style: driving round bends quickly or bols) indicate the position of the wear indica- ››› . tors. sudden acceleration or braking speed accel- ● Slow down immediately if you think you erates tyre wear. When the driving style is Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is have a damaged wheel. normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the worn. They must always be replaced before running gear settings checked at a special- the tyre tread has worn to the level of the in- ● Check the wheels and tyres for damage. ised workshop. dicator. ● If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek qualified assistance. Eccentricity of the wheels: the wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. However, certain ● If there is no visible exterior damage, drive circumstances may lead to imbalance (run- slowly and carefully to the nearest special- out), which is detected as vibrations in the ised workshop and have the vehicle checked. steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the 344 Wheels and tyres steering and suspension. In the event of run If the rims and tyres have received a heavy Tyre code out, the wheels should be balanced again. impact or have been damaged, have them When a new wheel is fitted, it should be bal- checked and, if required, replaced at a speci- anced again. alised workshop. Adjustments of the running gear: misaligned Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- running gear increases the wear of the tyres ly than standard tyres. and affects safety while driving. If tyres wear too quickly, have the wheel alignment WARNING checked at a specialised workshop. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulls to one side while driving, this may in- Low profile tyres dicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and ● Reduce speed immediately and stop, tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and while observing the highway code. a greater rim diameter along with a lower ● Check the wheels and tyres for damage. height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a ● Never carry on driving on worn tyres or more agile driving behaviour. However, on wheels. Request qualified assistance im- roads that are in poor condition, this might af- mediately. Fig. 303 Universal code on tyres fect comfort and cause more noise. ● If there is no visible exterior damage, Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- drive slowly and carefully to the nearest 1 Radial ly than standard tyres, for instance due to specialised workshop and have the vehicle 2 Rim diameter code strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and checked. 3 Load index & speed rating kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre pressure is particularly important 4 DOT tyre identification number ››› page 342. 5 Severe snow conditions To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive 6 Tyre ply composition and materials used with special care when driving on roads in 7 Max. load rating poor condition. 8 Treadwear, traction and temperature Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re- grades garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on 9 Max. permissible inflation pressure the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on the rims. 10 Passenger car tyre 11 Nominal width of tyre in millimetres » 345 Practical tips

12 Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio) Tyre code (example): Meaning Tyre code (example): Meaning

Tyre code (example): Meaning DOT BT RA TY5 1716: Tyre identification number TREAD 4 PLIES Information about tread compo- (TINa), maybe only on exterior wall of the wheel) and 1 RAYON + nents: In the example, there are 4 P215 / 55 R 16: Size: date of manufacture. 2 STEEL + 1 NY- layers below the tread: 1 layer of LON rayon (artificial silk), 2 layers of P Passenger vehicle code. DOT The tyre complies with the legal steel reinforcement and 1 layer of requirements of the US Depart- nylon. Nominal width between walls, in 215 ment of Transport, responsible for mm. tyre safety regulations. Information for the end consumer concerning the comparative values of the established base tyres 55 Height/width ratio in % BT Place of manufacture code. (standardised test procedures):

R Tyre type (R indicates “Radial”). RA Information about manufacturer TREAD- Relative service life of the tyre, and tyre size. WEAR 280 with respect to specific US stand- 16 Rim diameter in inches ard test. TY5 Manufacturer's tyre specifica- 91 V Load index ››› page 347 and tions. TRACTION AA Braking capacity of tyre on wet speed rating ››› page 347. surface (AA, A, B or C). 1716 Manufacturing date: week 17 of XL Reinforced tyres (“Reinforced”). 2016. TEMPERA- Tyre temperature resistance at TURE A higher test speeds (A, B or C). M+S or M/S Winter tyres (mud and snow tyres) TWI This identifies the position of the ››› page 347. Tread Wear Indicator If there are different letters, they are specific co- page 343. SSR or DSST, Specific manufacturer codes for ››› des of the tyre manufacturer or specific national codes. Eufonia, RFT, run-flat tyre codes. MAX LOAD US load rating, indicating maxi- ROF, RSC, ZP, 615 KG mum permitted load per tyre. a) The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number. Conti-Seal (1356 LBS)

RADIAL Radial tyre without inner tube. MAX INFLATION US limit, indicating maximum per- Tyres with directional tread patterns TUBELESS 350 KPA mitted tyre pressure. Tyres with directional tread pattern have (51 PSI) E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies been designed to operate best when rotating with international legislation fol- SIDEWALL 1 PLY Information about tyre wall com- in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre lowed by a number denoting the RAYON ponents: 1 layer of rayon (artificial sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on country granting the authorisa- silk). tion. The authorisation number tyres with directional tread. Always observe ( several digits) is shown below. the direction of rotation indicated when

346 Wheels and tyres mounting the wheel. This guarantees opti- Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for ● Only use winter tyres of the size authorised mum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, tyres with a maximum authorised speed for the vehicle. grip, noise and wear. above 240 km/h (149 mph). ● Only use radial winter tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread Tyre load rating pattern. The load rating code indicates the maximum Winter service ● Adjust speeds to within the limits indicated load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry (code letter on tyre) ››› . (load capacity). Winter tyres* Speed limit 91 615 kg (1,356 pounds) In winter conditions winter tyres will consider- A code letter indicating the speed limit is 93 650 kg (1,433 pounds) ably improve the vehicle's handling. The de- stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 347. 95 690 kg (1,521 pounds) sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- In some vehicles, it is possible to set a speed 97 730 kg (1,609 pounds) pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice warning in the MFD (multifunction dis- and snow. Winter tyres also improve the vehi- 99 775 kg (1,709 pounds) play) menu on the instrument panel cle braking performance, reducing the brak-  page 28. ing distance in winter weather. SEAT recom- ››› Speed rating mend that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle If you use V-rated tyres the speed limits and The speed rating indicates the maximum at temperatures below +7°C (+45°F). tyre pressure will be determined by engine speed permitted for the tyres. size. Please ask your technical service centre The performance of winter tyres is much re- for further information on the maximum per- P max. 150 km/h (93 mph) duced if the tyre tread is worn below 4 mm mitted speed and the required pressures for (1/16 inch). The age of the tyre is another fac- Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) the tyres. tor affecting performance, regardless of the R max. 170 km/h (106 mph) depth of the tyre tread. S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) All-wheel drive* T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) Please observe the following when using Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your car will winter tyres: have plenty of traction in winter conditions, U max. 200 km/h (124 mph) even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, ● Observe legal requirements in each coun- H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) SEAT still recommend that winter tyres or all- try. V max. 240 km/h (149 mph) season tyres should be fitted on all four ● Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels when winter road conditions are ex- Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph) wheels. pected, mainly because this will give a better W max. 270 km/h (168 mph) ● Only use winter tyres in wintery weather braking response. » Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph) conditions. 347 Practical tips

Please observe all instructions and warnings when using snow chains ›››  page 52.

WARNING Although winter tyres help to make driving safer in the winter, you should not take unnecessary risks. ● Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of winter tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to summer tyres when you have the time. In temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), performance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises while driving will all be reduced.

Note ● If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre control system, this should be “reprogrammed” whenever a tyre is changed ››› page 300. ● Please ask at a technical service centre for information about the permitted sizes for winter tyres.

348 Service

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop. Service documents the following information: CAUTION ● When each one of the services was carried Service intervals out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges- lack of availability of spare parts. Servicing and Digital Maintenance ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near Plan future. Note ● If you have expressed a special request for Log of services performed (“Digital Main- the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) write the work order. maintain its value, but also its correct operation and road safety. For this reason, con- The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- ● The components or fluids that were shop records Service receipts in a central duct the services in accordance with SEAT changed. guidelines. system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- ● The date of the next service. mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service the next inspection. This information is docu- Fixed Service or Flexible Service receipt after every service carried out con- mented in all checks performed. taining all the services carried out on the sys- Services are classified as oil change service tem. The type and the volume of the service may and inspection. The service interval display vary from one vehicle to another. A special- on the instrument panel display serves as a Whenever there is a new service the receipt is ised workshop will be able to provide specific reminder of the next service. replaced with a current one. information on the jobs for your vehicle. Depending on the features, the engine and The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the able in some markets. In this case, your WARNING Fixed service or the Flexible service will be SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- If the services are insufficient or not per- applied for an oil change service.. rent documentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised How to know which type of service needs in traffic cause an accident and severe in- to his vehicle juries. ● Check the tables below: »

349 Maintenance

Oil change servicea) you have to carry out this service, take into must be carried out before the next service account the individual conditions of use and period or even between service intervals. Type of personal driving style. A major component of PR No. Service interval Conditions of use adverse include: service the flexible service the use of LongLife oil instead of conventional engine oil. ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Every 5000 km or after QI1 1 yearb) Bear in mind the information about the speci- ● Frequent short trips. fications of the engine oil according to the Every 7500 km or after ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of QI2 VW standard page 41. 1 yearb) ›››  time, as in the case of taxis. Fixed If you do not want to the flexible service ● Every 10000 km or after Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. QI3 you can select the fixed service However, 1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending a fixed service may affect service costs on equipment). Every 15000 km or after QI4 The Service Advisor will gladly advise you. 1 yearb) ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). According to the service in- Service intervals display QI6 Flexible ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. terval display At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. ted by the service interval display on the in- This applies especially for the following strument panel display page 107. The b) Whatever happens first. ››› parts (depending on equipment): service interval display gives information for ● Inspection Servicea) service dates that involve an engine oil Dust and pollen filter change or an inspection. When the time for ● Air Care allergen filter According to the service interval display the corresponding service comes, additional ● Air filter work required, such as the change of brake a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Toothed chain Bear in mind the information about the speci- ● Particulate filter fications of the engine oil according to the ● Engine oil VW standard ›››  page 41. Information on the conditions of use The Service Advisor of your specialised Particular characteristics of the Flexible workshop will gladly inform you about the Service The service intervals and groups are usually need of performing service work between Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil based on normal conditions of use. normal service intervals, always considering change service only has to be performed the conditions of use of your vehicle. If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when verse conditions of use, some of the work 350 Service

WARNING may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or These parts are, approved parts, and are the specialised workshop is always receiving up- same as the factory parts, which are also ap- If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time. proved spare parts. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Additional service offers Original accessories ● Have the services conducted at author- We recommend you only use SEAT Original ised SEAT services or specialised work- Approved spare parts shops. Accessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- suitability of these accessories have been in- CAUTION ceived for their vehicles and approved by spected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of These parts correspond exactly to the manu- suitability of parts from other manufacturers. lack of availability of spare parts. facturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Sets of services reason, we always recommend the use of Service Mobility) Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be Sets of services include all the maintenance held liable for the safety and suitability of Since the moment you purchase your SEAT works needed to ensure the safety and the parts from other manufacturers. vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits smooth running of the vehicle (depending on and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service. the conditions of use and the features of For the first two years after the purchase, the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- operating fluids). Maintenance services are Approved spare parts ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- divided into inspection and review services. ditional costs. Consult the details of the jobs required for Approved spare parts, following the manufacturer's requirements, are an additional your vehicle at: If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- service to you, offering the possibility of re- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as ● placing complete sets, such as: light engine, Your SEAT authorised service you carry out the recommended Inspection gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical ● Your specialised workshop and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- components, etc. ised Service. » Due to technical reasons (continuous development of components) the sets of services 351 Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving. The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Maintenance and cleaning or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the Service differs depending on the country in more damage it can cause to the surface. which the vehicle was purchased. For further Basic considerations High temperatures, for instance strong sun- information ask your SEAT dealership or the light, further intensify the damage. SEAT website in your country. Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Before washing the car, soften the dirt using become a prerequisite to demand the war- plenty of water. ranty in the event of corrosion damage and Warranty deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird work. droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth. Fault-free operation warranty Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect for application on the packaging. ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter. condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary addi- WARNING High pressure cleaners tional documentation provided by your Tech- ● When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- nical Service to see the conditions and the Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies mation in this regard in your SEAT Official particularly to the operating pressure and the Service. ● Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- For the sake of the environment ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ● When purchasing car care products, camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least chose products that are compatible with 40 cm. the environment. Do not remove snow and ice with a high- ● The waste from car-care products should pressure cleaner. not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

352 Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To view mirrors must always be folded/de- in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do ployed electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car wash tunnels Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen – Never select washing programs that in- wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possible. side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment Washing by hand cut! The car should only be washed in special Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. dent! In this case the brakes should be Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several hand times. Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and CAUTION tions dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner matic car wash, please make sure to re- components of the vehicle can be checked in for matte paint. tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them the following tables. The contents should be from being damaged. Electric exterior rear- understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have » 353 Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Wheels Problem Solution Take he general considerations into account Problem Solution Have your specialised work- ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion page 357. Anti frost salt Water shop take care of this

Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning The water does dust product not create drop- Maintain with hard wax (at Exterior cleaning lets on the clean least 2 times a year) paint End exhausts Windscreen wipers Treat with suitable wax and ap- Problem Solution Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative after- Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- spite sober main- wards if the wax used does not Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required tenance/paint contain preservative ingredi- ents

Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird Problem Solution and remove with a microfibre Problem Solution droppings, tree cloth sap, road salt Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a a) solution steel cleaning product is re- Fat-based dirt, Delete immediately with a neu- quired e.g. cosmetic a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in tral soap solutiona) and a soft products or 1 litre of water a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in cloth sunscreen 1 litre of water Sensors / Camera lenses a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Paint Problem Solution 1 litre of water Problem Solution Sensors: soft cloth with clean- Carbon fibre parts ing product which does not Check the paint's colour code Problem Solution contain solvents Flaws in the paint in an authorised service and re- Dirt Camera lenses - soft cloth with store with a touch-up pencil Dirt Clean the same way as pain- cleaning product with no alco- ted parts ››› page 352 hol content Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Hand brush/Anti frost spray Apply rust remover and then Snow/ice with no solvents Environmental rust apply hard wax. Go you your tank specialised workshop if you have any queries

354 Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal dirt, e.g. oil, make- Absorb the dissolved grease solutiona) display cleaner up, etc. and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you a) must treat it with water after- Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Control panels 1 litre of water wards Problem Solution Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with pens, nail polish, an absorbent cloth, if applica- Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) dispersion paint, ble, apply neutral soap solution shoe cream etc. afterwardsa) Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water Problem Solution 1 litre of water Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Natural leather Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution a) Covers / Trims Dirt Neutral soap solution , allowed to dry before retracting Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona) Problem Solution a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) 1 litre of water Dirt Neutral soap solution e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: leather cleaner blood etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather 1 litre of water Problem Solution Grease-based Recent stains: absorbent cloth dirt, e.g. oil, make- and leather cleaner Plastic parts Dirt particles ad- Vacuum cleaner up, etc. Dry stains: grease dissolving Problem Solution hered to the sur- spray face Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral pens, nail polish, leather » Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) dispersion paint, sible solvent-free plastic clean- blood etc. shoe cream etc. er a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water 355 Maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of ● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean- pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with ● To prevent damage to the heating of the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Wheels based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev- ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive er be cleaned with chemical products, nor products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the damaging the paint job! belt in question.

356 Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- longed period in the bright sun, it is best to er cover the leather. ● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- WARNING vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers Do not use water-repellent coatings on the or similar products. windscreen. In bad visibility conditions ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the such as humid weather, darkness or when vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may removed there. This will prevent damage. be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard blades to make noise. sponges, etc. to clean. ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the Note seats. ● Remains of insects can be removed much ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- more easily with previously treated paint. ets or belts can damage the surface. ● Regular car care treatments can prevent ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage deposits of ambient rust. the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, If you want to leave your vehicle stationary spot removers or similar products on leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 337. seats. ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

357 Information for the user Information for the user ● Direction of travel Reprogramming control units ● Braking force On the whole, all the data required for the ● Detection of seat belt component management is stored in the Information for the user control units. The programming of certain The vehicle control units never record conver- convenience functions, such as the turn sig- sations held by passengers in the vehicle. nals, individual door opening and instructions Information stored in control on the display can be modified using special In vehicles equipped with an emergency call equipment at the workshop. If this is the case, units function via the mobile phone or other appli- the information and descriptions given in the ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible Instruction Manual will not match the original Description and operation to send the vehicle position. If the control unit functions. Therefore, SEAT recommends that records an accident with airbag activation, any modifications be recorded in the section Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser- the system may automatically send a signal. “Other workshop notes” in the Maintenance ies of electronic control units responsible for This will depend on the network operator. Programme. the engine and gearbox management. In ad- Normally, transmission is only possible in dition, the control units supervise the per- areas with good coverage. The technical service centre must have a re- formance of the exhaust gas system and the cord of any modification to the programming. airbag systems. Event Data Recorder Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven, The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re- Reading the vehicle fault memory these electronic control units are continuous- corder. There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi- ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event of cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem- An event data recorder temporarily stores the faults or deviations from the theoretical val- ory. The fault memory documents errors and vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the deviations from the theoretical values of the an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed warning lamps on the instrument panel light electronic control units. information about how the accident occur- up in the event of faults. red. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys- The diagnostics connector is in the driver side This data can only be read and analysed us- tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat footwell area, next to the lever for opening ing special equipment. belt status, seat positions and airbag activa- the bonnet, below a cover. tion times may be stored. The volume of data The storing of the data allows specialised The fault memory should only be read and depends on the manufacturer. workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored reset by a specialised workshop. data may include: Event data recorders can only be mounted with authorisation from the vehicle owner ● Data relating to the engine or the gearbox and, in some countries, they are governed by ● Speed local legislation. 358 Information for the user

Other important information complies with several standards, including ● SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi- the Canadian standard, ICES-002. cle does not comply in part or in full with Labels and plates the legal requirements of other countries or continents. Some parts in the engine compartment come Using your vehicle in other coun- from the factory with certificates of safety, la- tries and continents bels or plates containing important informa- Radio and antenna reception tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, for The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas- use in a particular country in accordance The aerial of radio and navigation systems fit- senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or with the national legislation in force at the ted at the factory may be mounted in differ- on the floor of the boot. time of manufacture. ent parts of the vehicle:

● Never remove these certificates of safety, If the vehicle is sold in another country or ● On the inside of the rear window, next to the labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in used in another country for an extended peri- rear window heating, od of time, the applicable legislation of that good condition and are legible. ● on the inside of the rear side windows, country should be observed. ● If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of ● on the inside of the windscreen, safety, label or plate, is replaced, the special- It may be necessary to fit or remove certain ● on the roof of the vehicle. ised workshop should attach the information pieces of equipment or to deactivate certain functions. Service work may also be affected. back in the same place. Aerials mounted on the inside of a window This is particularly true if the vehicle is used in can be recognised by the fine wires. Certificate of safety a different climate for an extended period of time. A certificate of safety on the door strut states CAUTION that all the safety standards and regulations As there are different types of frequency Aerials on the inside of windows may be established by the national traffic authorities bands around the world, you may find that damaged if knocked or if cleaned with cor- responsible for road safety were met at the the radio or navigation system supplied at the rosive or acid cleaning products. Do not time of manufacture. It may also give the factory does not work in another country. stick adhesive labels over the heating ele- month and year of manufacture, together ments and never clean the inside of the with the chassis number. CAUTION rear window with corrosive or acid products or other similar chemical products. » ● SEAT does not accept liability for any Warning of high voltage label* damage to the vehicle due to the use of a There is a label close to the bonnet lock lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's the non-availability of genuine spare parts. electrical system. The vehicle ignition system 359 Information for the user

Note We will collect the used vehicle free of Information about the EU Di- charge, provided it complies with all national If electrical equipment is used near an aer- legislation. rective 2014/53/EU ial built-into the window, you may observe interference in the reception of AM sta- Please see your technical service for further tions. information about the collection and scrap- Simplified EU compliance declara- ping of end-of-life vehicles. tion

Scrapping Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- Notes on SEAT repairs ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- The relevant safety requirements must be ob- clare that they comply with Directive served when the vehicle or components of WARNING 2014/53/EU when legally required. the airbag or belt tensioner systems are Repairs or modifications which are not per- scrapped. These requirements are known to The full text of the EU compliance declaration formed correctly may result in damage or specialised workshops. is available online at the following address: errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the driver assist and www.seat.com/generalinfo airbag systems. This could result in serious  accident. Recycling of electrical or electron- ● Have any repairs or modifications carried ic devices out at a specialised workshop. Table of correspondences All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must The table of correspondences will help you to associate the name of the device in the dec- Collection and scrapping of end- be marked with the following symbol: laration of compliance with the features of of-life vehicles  the vehicle and the terminology used in the on-board documentation. Collection of end-of-life vehicles This symbol indicates that EED must not be discarded as home waste but through selec- An extensive network of used car reception tive waste collection. Features of the Name of the device centres already exists in much of Europe. Af- vehicle according to the dec- ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re- laration of compli- ceive a certificate of destruction describing ance the environmentally friendly scrapping of the Radiofrequency re- FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, vehicle in accordance with applicable legis- mote control (vehicle) FS94 lation.

360 Information for the user

Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the declaration of compli- laration of compli- laration of compliance ance ance

Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT - Infotainment system MIB2 Entry Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 mote control (auxili- 50000914 6F9.035.225 ary heater) MIB Standard 2 3V5.035.577.A Telestart 7N0.035.552.J MIB2 Main-Unit 7N0.035.552.K Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW 7N0.035.552.Q A580 / A270 5F4.035.225 Telestart Wireless charging WCH-183 5F4.035.225.A Bluetooth MIB2 Entry 5F4.035.225.B WCH-185 5F9.035.225 MIB Standard 2 5F9.035.225.A 5G0.980.611 5F9.035.225.B MIB2 Main-Unit 575.035.225 Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC 575.035.225.A A580 / A270 ternal antenna of the 575.035.225.B car UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit Instrument panel eNSF A580 / A270 Immobilizer integrated in Addresses of the manufacturers Keyless Access Sys- MQB-B B dashboard module tem instrument cluster According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all relevant components must include the ad- Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base sistance systems dress of the manufacturer. MRRevo14F Antennas MQB27 Small/Big The address of the manufacturers of compo- family BSD3.0 nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot Antennas KSA Small Fam III include a sticker are listed below, as long as it Central control unit 5WK50254 is legally required: » 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna 5WK50474 GNSS Antenna VAG 720166002

8S7.035.503.B 361 Information for the user

Radioelectrical Radioelectrical Addresses of the Addresses of the equipment fitted equipment fitted manufacturers manufacturers in the vehicle in the vehicle

Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. ADC Automotive Distance Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 Control Systems GmbH control key 59552 Lippstadt, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 GERMANY Radar sensors for as- 88131 Lindau, GERMANY Digades gmbH sistance systems Robert Bosch GmbH Äußere Weberstraße 20 Postfach 16 61 Radio frequency re- 02763 Zittau, GERMANY 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY mote control (auxiliary Webasto Thermo & heater) Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models 868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra Auxiliary heating 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

362 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm Bluethooth All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

363 Technical data

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- through a viewer in the windscreen Technical data fications section ››› Fig. 304. This viewer is located in the lower part of the windscreen. The vehicle identifica- Technical features kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. tion number (chassis number) is also stam- Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly ped on the right water drain channel. The wa- PS used to denote engine power. ter drain channel is located between the sus- Important information pension tower and the wing. Open the bonnet rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. to read the vehicle identification number  Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. ››› page 323. Cetane number, indication of the die- CZ Type plate The information in the vehicle documentation sel combustion power. always takes precedence over the informa- The type plate is visible when the driver door Research octane number, indication of tion in this Instruction Manual. RON is opened, on the lower part of the strut. Vehi- the knock resistance of petrol. All technical specifications provided in this cles for certain export countries do not have documentation are valid for the standard a type plate. model in Spain. Vehicle identification data The manufacturer's type plate contains the The figures may be different depending following data: whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif- ● Gross vehicle weight ferent models, for special vehicles and for other countries. ● Maximum authorised weight of vehicle and trailer ● Maximum gross front axle weight ● Maximum rear axle weight

Fuel consumption

Fig. 304 Vehicle identification number. Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised Vehicle identification number by certified EU laboratories, according to the The vehicle identification number (chassis legislation in force at the time (for more infor- number) can be read from outside the vehicle mation, see the Publications Office of the

364 Technical features

European Union on the EUR-Lex website: © WARNING Drawbar loads European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) The maximum permitted drawbar load on the and apply to the specified vehicle character- ● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; ball coupling of the towing bracket must not istics. this may affect vehicle handling and lead exceed 100 kg. The values relating to fuel consumption and to an accident. Always adjust your speed In the interest of road safety, we recommend and driving style to suit road conditions CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- that you always tow approaching the maxi- and requirements. tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- cle at the time of purchase. ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rat- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the Fuel consumption and CO emissions de- load is too small. 2 permissible axle load or the permissible to- pend on the equipment/features of each indi- tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac- If the maximum permissible drawbar load vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, teristics of the vehicle may change, leading cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- to accidents, injuries and damage to the light-weight single axle trailers or tandem mental conditions, load or number of passen- vehicle. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 gers. metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar Note load. In practice, and considering all the factors Towing a trailer mentioned here, consumption values can WARNING differ from those calculated in the current Trailer weights ● For safety reasons, you should not drive European regulations. at speeds above 80 km/h when towing a Trailer weight trailer. This also applies in countries where The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- higher speeds are permitted. Weights proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- weights or the drawbar load. If the permis- Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in sible axle load or the permissible total fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 weight is exceeded, the driving character- optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 istics of the vehicle may change, leading to kg to allow for the weight of the driver. km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. Special versions, optional equipment fittings in other countries. All data in the official vehi- or retro-fitting accessories will increase the cle documentation takes precedence over weight of the vehicle ››› . these data at all times ››› .

365 Technical data

Wheels important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of ac- Tyre pressure, snow chains and cidents - particularly at high speeds. wheel bolts ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the Tyre pressure tightening torque is too high, the wheel The sticker with the tyre pressure values can bolts and threads can be damaged. be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for Note cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced. ››› We recommend that you ask your Techni- cal Service for information about appropri- The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size. (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer tyres.

Snow chains Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels. Consult section ›››  page 52, Snow chains.

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm.

WARNING ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very 366 Technical features

Engine data

Petrol engines

1.4 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 162 (220)/4,500-6,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 350/1,500-4,400

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,395 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 226 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.7 6.7 5.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9 7.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,300a) 2,420b) 2,310a) 2,430b) 2,360a) 2,490b)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,703a) 1,755b) 1,717a) 1,768b) 1,790a) 1,838b)

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,190a) 1,190b) 1,200a) 1,200b) 1,250a) 1,250b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,160a) 1,280b) 1,160a) 1,280b) 1,160a) 1,290b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 2,000 2,000 2,300a) 2,400b) 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 1,800 1,800 2,200 12% (kg) a) 5 seats. b) 7 seats.

367 Technical data

Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,500 110 (150)/3,500 110 (150)/3,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 280/1,750-3,000 340/1,750-3,000 340/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual manual 4Drive DSG

Top speed (km/h) 184 (VI) 200 (VI) 198 (VI) 198 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.4 7.3 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 12.6 10.3 10.6 10.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,390a) 2,520b) 2,390a) 2,520b) 2,560a) 2,590b) 2,410a) 2,540b)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,772a) 1,822b) 1,772a) 1,882b) 1,891a) 1,952b) 1,793a) 1,843b)

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,260a) 1,260b) 1,260a) 1,260b) 1,320a) 1,320b) 1,280a) 1,280b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,180a) 1,310b) 1,180a) 1,310b) 1,290a) 1,320b) 1,180a) 1,310b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 2,200 2,300a) 2,400b) 2,400 2,300a) 2,400b) 8% (kg)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 2,000 2,200 2,400 2,200 12% (kg)

a) 5 seats. b) 7 seats.

368 Technical features

Diesel engines

2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 135 (184)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 380/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 215 (VI) 213 (VI) 211 (VII)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.4 6.4 5.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.9 8.9 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,400a) 2,550b) 2,400a) 2,550b) 2,560a) 2,590b)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,800a) 1,841b) 1,804a) 1,845b) 1,923a) 1,974b)

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,290a) 1,290b) 1,290a) 1,290b) 1,320a) 1,320b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,160a) 1,310b) 1,160a) 1,310b) 1,290a) 1,320b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750 750 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 2,400 2,400 2,400

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 2,200 2,200 2,200 a) 5 seats. b) 7 seats.

369 Technical data

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 305 Dimensions.

ALHAMBRA

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 968/966

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,919

D Length (mm) 4,854

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,569/1,617

G Width (mm) 1,904

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,720

Turning radius (m) 11.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. 370 Index

Adjusting indirect ventilation ...... 182 Index folding the backrest of the front passenger malfunctions ...... 181 seat ...... 154 rear seats ...... 181 A front seats ...... 146 special features ...... 182 Abroad lights ...... 139 user instructions ...... 181 extended stay abroad with your vehicle . . 359 rear head restraints ...... 16, 147 Air recirculation ...... 183 sale of vehicle ...... 359 seats ...... 60 Air vents ...... 182 ABS seat with position memory ...... 151 Alcantara leather: cleaning ...... 355 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 244 Adjusting the head restraints All-wheel drive ACC ...... 278 rear head restraints ...... 16, 147 snow chains ...... 52 radar sensor ...... 281 Adjusting the seats winter tyres ...... 347 Accessories ...... 311 front seats ...... 146 AM ...... 198 Acoustic alarm rear seats ...... 147 Ambient lighting ...... 139 control and warning lamps ...... 34 AFS ...... 135 Android Auto™ ...... 211 seat belt unfastened ...... 65 Airbag covers ...... 18 Antenna ...... 313, 359 Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 278 Airbags Anti-freeze ...... 42 control and warning lamps ...... 280 see Airbag system ...... 20 Anti-lock brake system ...... 244 deactivating temporarily ...... 283 Airbag system ...... 18, 71 Anti-lock system ...... 244 instructions on the screen ...... 280 activation ...... 73 Anti-puncture ...... 47, 88 malfunction ...... 279 control lamp ...... 75 Anti-puncture kit ...... 47, 88 operating ...... 282 description ...... 72 cases where it should not be used ...... 88 radar sensor ...... 281 front airbags ...... 18, 74 Anti-puncture set ...... 88 special driving situations ...... 284 functioning ...... 73 Anti-theft alarm ...... 122 Adaptive headlights head-protection airbags ...... 21 false alarms ...... 123 dynamic ...... 135 knee airbag ...... 20 trailer ...... 305 AdBlue locking the vehicle after deployment ...... 117 Anti-theft alarm system control and warning lamps ...... 321 repairs ...... 313 anti-tow system ...... 123 information ...... 322 side airbags ...... 20 vehicle interior monitoring ...... 123 minimum quantity for a refill ...... 322 use of child seats ...... 19, 76 Anti-theft security system ...... 121, 122 refilling ...... 322 Air conditioning ...... 180 Anti-tow system ...... 123 specifications ...... 323 air recirculation ...... 183 Anti-trap function tank filling capacity ...... 321 air vents ...... 182 panoramic sunroof ...... 133 Additional heater climatronic ...... 38, 180 sun blind ...... 133 see "Auxiliary heater" ...... 184 controls ...... 38, 180 Antifreeze ...... 42, 330 electronic manual air conditioning ...... 180 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 210 371 Index

Armrests ...... 155 sign Assist ...... 294 switching on ...... 184 Ashtray ...... 176 Start-Stop ...... 259 things to note ...... 187 ASR start assistance ...... 261 Auxiliary heater remote control see Brake assistance systems ...... 245, 246 tiredness detection ...... 296 auxiliary heater ...... 185 switching on and off ...... 246 traction control when accelerating see also Traction control system ...... 244 (ASR) ...... 245, 246 B Assistance call ...... 113 traffic signal detection ...... 294 BAS Assistance systems tyre monitoring indicator ...... 300 see Brake assistance systems ...... 245 ACC ...... 278 tyre monitoring system ...... 298 Battery adaptive cruise control ...... 278 Assisted starting ...... 54 changing in the vehicle key ...... 115 adaptive headlights ...... 135 Assist systems Before setting off ...... 59 auto Hold ...... 261 lane assist system ...... 286 Belt height adjustment ...... 70 blind spot detector (BSD) with rear cross Auto Hold ...... 261 Belt tension device traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 289 Automatic belt retractor ...... 70 service and disposal ...... 71 brake assistance systems (BAS) ...... 245 Automatic car wash Belt tensioner ...... 70 cruise control system ...... 273 switching Auto Hold off ...... 262 Belt tension limiter ...... 70 disable ...... 30 switching the start assist off ...... 262 Belt tightening ...... 70 dynamic chassis control (DCC) ...... 297 Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 353 Bicycle carrier electronic differential lock system (EDL) . . . 245 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 135 fitting on the tow hitch ball ...... 304 electronic drive torque management Automatic gearbox ...... 248 maximum load ...... 304 (XDS) ...... 245 driving tips ...... 250 Biodiesel ...... 320 emergency braking assistance (Front As- emergency release ...... 37 Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 289, 290 sist) ...... 275 ignition key removal lock ...... 235 control lamps ...... 290 enable ...... 30 kick-down ...... 250 driving situations ...... 292 lane Assist ...... 286 malfunction ...... 250 indication in the external rear view mirror . . 291 lane assist system ...... 286 AUX-IN ...... 112, 204 malfunction ...... 289 Launch-Control programme ...... 251 Auxiliary heater ...... 184 operating ...... 290 optical parking system ...... 264 automatic off ...... 318 towing ...... 294 park Assist ...... 265 operating instructions ...... 187 Bluetooth Audio ...... 205 park assist system ...... 265 programming ...... 186 Bonnet ...... 13 parking assistance ...... 263 remote control ...... 185 close ...... 13 parking distance warning system ...... 263 remote control range ...... 185 closure ...... 13 rear assist ...... 270 special features ...... 184 opening and closing ...... 325 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 289 switching off ...... 184 Rear View Camera ...... 270 372 Index

Boot Card compartment ...... 172 Changing windscreen wipers ...... 57 locking and unlocking with movement sen- Catalytic converter ...... 257 Charging the battery ...... 54 sor (Easy Open) ...... 130 control and warning lamps ...... 256 Checking Bottle holders ...... 175 malfunction ...... 257 tyre pressures ...... 343 Brake CCS ...... 273 Checking fluid levels ...... 326 brake servo ...... 242 see cruise control ...... 34 Child safety ...... 77 Brake assistance system ...... 244 CD Child seat ...... 21, 78 Brake assist system ...... 244 inserting and ejecting ...... 201 deactivating the passenger front airbag . . . . 19 Brake fluid ...... 43 CD changer ...... 169, 174 disabling the front passenger front airbag . . 76 specification ...... 332 Central locking ...... 116 integrated child seat ...... 82 Brakes ...... 238 anti-theft alarm ...... 122 in the passenger seat ...... 80 brake assist system ...... 244 keyless Access ...... 119 ISOFIX system ...... 24, 81 brake fluid ...... 332 manual locking ...... 11 mounting systems ...... 23 brake fluid level ...... 333 opening doors individually ...... 117 on rear seats ...... 81 brake pads ...... 242 Central locking system regulations ...... 79 changing the brake fluid ...... 333 after airbag deployment ...... 117 safety instructions ...... 21, 78 control and warning lamps ...... 239 description ...... 117 securing with seat belt ...... 23 electronic parking brake ...... 240 remote control key ...... 118 Top Tether system ...... 24 emergency braking function ...... 240 Centre armrest ...... 155 transporting children in the vehicle ...... 79 running in new brake pads ...... 242 Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 320 weight categories ...... 79 warning and control lamps ...... 243 Changing a wheel ...... 48, 87 Cigarette lighter ...... 176, 177 Brake servo ...... 242, 244 subsequent work ...... 52 Cleaning Brake system ...... 244 wheel bolts ...... 49 Alcantara leather ...... 355 fault ...... 242 Changing bulbs ...... 94 carbon fibre ...... 354, 356 Braking body ...... 99 control panels ...... 355 brake assistance system ...... 244 control lamp ...... 95 decorative sheets ...... 355 BSD front bumper ...... 97 exhaust tail pipes ...... 354 see Blind spot detector ...... 289 halogen headlights ...... 96 exterior ...... 354 BSD Plus ...... 288 number plate light ...... 100 fabrics ...... 355 Bulb malfunction rear lid ...... 98 folding the rear view mirrors ...... 145 see Changing bulbs ...... 94 rear lights ...... 98, 99 headlights / tail lights ...... 354 xenon headlights ...... 97 high pressure cleaners ...... 352 C Changing gear Interior ...... 355 Capacities ...... 41 control and warning lamps ...... 247 leather ...... 355 windscreen wiper fluid tank ...... 334 Changing the blades ...... 90 paint ...... 354 373 Index

plastic parts ...... 355 applying the brake ...... 280 Controls on the wheel ...... 110 seat belts ...... 355 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 290 Control units ...... 358 sensors/camera lenses ...... 354 brake system ...... 239 reprogramming ...... 358 special care ...... 356 catalytic converter ...... 256 Convenience closing the radio screen ...... 355 changing bulbs ...... 95 windows ...... 130 trims/covers ...... 354, 355 changing gear ...... 247 Convenience functions washing the vehicle ...... 352 coolant ...... 329 reprogramming ...... 358 wheels ...... 354 depress the brake ...... 275 Convenience opening windows ...... 355 door ...... 124 windows ...... 130 windscreen wipers ...... 354 emission control system ...... 256 Convenient entry function for the third row of Climatronic ...... 38, 180 engine management ...... 256 seats ...... 153 Close ...... 114 engine oil sensor ...... 326 Cooling system bonnet ...... 13 ESC ...... 239 checking the coolant ...... 329 Closing ...... 114 for the seat belt ...... 65 topping up with coolant ...... 329 bonnet ...... 13 fuel level ...... 317 Copyright ...... 199 electric windows ...... 13 generator ...... 335 Cornering lights luggage compartment ...... 12, 127 indication of break pad wear ...... 239 see "Static cornering lights" ...... 135 panoramic sunroof ...... 14 key ...... 115 static ...... 135 Clothes hook ...... 174 lane assist system ...... 286 Correct position ...... 60 Code number ...... 48, 86 lights ...... 133, 134 Correct sitting position Combined weight rating ...... 310 locking the steering column ...... 252 driver ...... 60 Comfort phone ...... 227 overview ...... 34, 109 Crossing through water Coming Home ...... 137 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 290 salt water ...... 259 Compartment for (sun)glasses ...... 170 rear lid ...... 127 Cruise control ...... 273 Compartments refuelling ...... 317, 318 Cruise Control System (CCS) ...... 34, 273 centre console ...... 171 remote control ...... 185 control lamp ...... 273 front central armrest ...... 171 Start-Stop ...... 259 operations ...... 274 Compass ...... 107 tyre monitoring indicator ...... 299 warning lamp ...... 273 Connectors vehicle battery ...... 335 faults ...... 179 windscreen washer fluid level ...... 141 D Control and warning lamps ...... 34 Control of function Dangers of not using a seat belt ...... 66 ABS ...... 239 rain sensor ...... 142 Dash panel ...... 103 adaptive cruise control ...... 280 Controls for the windows ...... 13, 130 Data registry ...... 358 adBlue ...... 321 Controls on the steering wheel Data storage during the journey ...... 358 airbag system ...... 75 operating the audio system and telephone . 110 Daytime running lights ...... 135 374 Index

DCC Driver Dynamic Chassis Control (DCC) ...... 297 see Dynamic chassis control ...... 297 see Correct sitting position ...... 60 fault ...... 298 Diagnostics connector ...... 358 Driving Dynamic headlight range control ...... 139 Diesel automatic gearbox ...... 250 refuelling ...... 320 cross country ...... 59 E Differential lock data storage ...... 358 E10 see Brake assistance systems ...... 245 driving abroad ...... 258 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 320 Digital clock ...... 104 driving through water ...... 258 EDL Dimensions ...... 370 economical ...... 254 see Brake assistance systems ...... 245 Directional tread pattern fuel gauge ...... 317 see also Electronic differential lock ...... 244 tyres ...... 52 fuel level too low ...... 318 Electrical devices ...... 178, 187, 306 Disconnecting devices ...... 337 parking downhill ...... 241 Electrical socket Disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . . . 19 parking uphill ...... 241 trailer ...... 305 Display ...... 104, 105 safe ...... 59 Electric child safety lock ...... 126 Disposal towing ...... 92 Electric sliding door belt tension device ...... 71 trailer ...... 307 opening and closing ...... 125 Distance control undercarriage guard ...... 59 rollback anti-trap function ...... 125 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 278 with a trailer ...... 301 Electric windows ...... 13 Door ...... 123 Driving abroad see Windows ...... 130 childproof lock ...... 126 headlights ...... 138 Electronic differential lock ...... 244 emergency locking and unlocking ...... 10 Driving in winter Electronic differential lock system (EDL) . . . . . 245 opening and closing ...... 10 fuel consumption ...... 255 Electronic drive torque management (XDS) . 245 warning lamp ...... 124 snow chains ...... 52 Electronic immobiliser ...... 238 Door handle ...... 10 tread depth ...... 344 operating fault ...... 234 Door lock ...... 10 tyre pressures ...... 342 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 244 Door lock cylinder ...... 10 Driving through water ...... 258 Emergencies ...... 85 Door release lever ...... 103 Driving tips bulbs ...... 46 Drawbar load ...... 301 for a loaded vehicle ...... 156 changing a wheel ...... 48 loading the trailer ...... 306 Driving with a trailer emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 53 Drawers ...... 173 extinguisher ...... 303 extinguishers ...... 85 Drink holder technical requirements ...... 302 first aid kit ...... 85 central console ...... 176 Duplicate keys ...... 114 fuses ...... 45 Drink holders ...... 175 Dynamic chassis control (DCC) hazard warning lights ...... 137 rear ...... 176 control ...... 297 jump leads ...... 54 operation ...... 297 puncture ...... 47 375 Index

replacing a blown fuse ...... 46 Engine bonnet ...... 323 Equipment ...... 311 vehicle tool kit ...... 85 Engine compartment ...... 13, 323 ESC warning triangle ...... 85 battery ...... 43, 334 electronic stability control ...... 244 Emergency braking assistance system brake fluid ...... 43, 332 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 320 indications on the display ...... 275 coolant ...... 42, 329 Event Data Recorder ...... 358 malfunction ...... 276 engine oil ...... 41, 326, 328 Exhaust gas purification system ...... 256 operating ...... 277 opening and closing ...... 325 Exterior mirrors radar sensor ...... 276 windscreen washer reservoir ...... 43, 334 adjustment ...... 17 switching off temporarily ...... 278 Engine coolant ...... 42 Exterior rear view mirrors system limitations ...... 278 checking the level ...... 329, 331 control of the function ...... 146 Emergency braking function ...... 240 control and warning lamps ...... 329 electric exterior mirrors ...... 146 Emergency locking and unlocking ...... 93 G12 plus-plus ...... 42, 330 exterior ...... 144 driver door ...... 10 G12 plus-plus ...... 42 folding the rear view mirrors ...... 145 panoramic sliding sunroof ...... 15 G13 ...... 42, 330 Exterior view ...... 7, 8 passenger side door ...... 11 specifications ...... 42, 330 Extinguisher rear lid ...... 12 tank filler neck ...... 331 driving with a trailer ...... 303 Emergency unlocking temperature indicator ...... 329 doors ...... 10 topping-up ...... 331 F rear lid ...... 12 Engine data ...... 367 Fabrics: cleaning ...... 355 Emission control system Engine management ...... 256 Fastening rings ...... 163 control and warning lamps ...... 256 control lamp ...... 256 Fault Emissions data ...... 364 Engine oil ...... 41, 326 dynamic chassis control (DCC) ...... 298 Engine checking oil level ...... 327 panoramic sunroof ...... 132 assisted starting ...... 54 consumption ...... 327, 328 park assist system ...... 266 noises ...... 237 control and warning lamps ...... 326 parking distance warning system ...... 264 running in ...... 253 dipstick ...... 327 rear assist ...... 272 Engine and ignition ...... 234 engine oil level ...... 326 Fault memory 12 volt power sockets ...... 177 specifications ...... 327 connector ...... 358 ignition lock ...... 234 topping up ...... 328 reading ...... 358 immobiliser ...... 238 Environment Filling capacities pre-heating ...... 236 environmental compatibility ...... 253 AdBlue tank ...... 321 starting the engine ...... 234, 236 Environmental Filling the tank ...... 316, 318 starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . 235 ecological driving ...... 254 Fire extinguisher ...... 85 stopping the engine ...... 237 Environmental tip First-aid kit unauthorised vehicle key ...... 234 refuelling ...... 318 storage ...... 85 376 Index

Fitting Fuel gauge General overview of the engine compart- tow hitch ...... 309 control lamp ...... 317 ment ...... 326 Floor mats ...... 63 petrol ...... 317 Generator ...... 335 Fluid level control ...... 41 Fuel tank cap Glove compartment ...... 172 FM ...... 198 opening and closing ...... 41 Glove compartment lighting ...... 139 Fog light ...... 26 Fuel tank flap Folding down rear seats opening and closing ...... 41 H load space ...... 159 Full Link ...... 206 Handbrake Folding table ...... 173 Function control see Parking brake ...... 240 Folding the backrest of the front passenger tow hitch ...... 306 Hazard warning lights ...... 27, 137 seat ...... 154 Fuses ...... 45, 93 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 66 Folding wheel chocks ...... 86 fuse box ...... 93 Headlamp range adjustment ...... 103 Frequency band ...... 198 identification using colours ...... 45 Headlight range control ...... 139 Front airbags ...... 74 identifying blown fuses ...... 46 Headlights Front Assist preparation before replacing ...... 46 adaptive headlights ...... 135 indications on the display ...... 275 replacing ...... 46 driving abroad ...... 138 Front passenger front airbag headlight adjustment ...... 136 control lamp ...... 76 G headlight washers ...... 141 disconnection ...... 76 Gearbox ...... 247 Head restraints ...... 148 Front seats emergency release ...... 37 adjustment ...... 16, 147 manual adjustment ...... 15 Gearbox lever ...... 36 assembly and removal ...... 148 Front wiper blades Gear change ...... 36 Headrests change ...... 58 automatic gearbox ...... 36, 248 adjustment ...... 16, 147 cleaning ...... 58 changing gears manually ...... 247 assembly and removal ...... 148 Fuel ...... 41, 319 gear recommendation ...... 251 Heat and air conditioning ...... 180 consumption ...... 364 manual gear change ...... 36 Heated rear window ...... 39 diesel ...... 320 putting the vehicle in gear (automatic Heating and air conditioning ethanol ...... 320 gearbox) ...... 248 controls ...... 38 identification ...... 319 putting the vehicle in gear (manual gear- Hitch ball petrol ...... 319 box) ...... 247 electric release ...... 303 savings ...... 254 Tiptronic ...... 249 Horn ...... 103 Fuel consumption Gear engaged ...... 36 How to jump start ...... 54 why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 257 General instrument panel Hubcaps ...... 48 instrument panel ...... 103

377 Index

I Full Link ...... 206 menus ...... 29 general instructions for use ...... 193 service intervals ...... 107 Identification of the fuel ...... 319 general panel ...... 190, 191 symbols ...... 34, 109 Identifying letters on engine ...... 364 infotainment keys ...... 193 Instruments ...... 104 Ignition ...... 25 inserting a CD ...... 201 Integrated child seat ...... 82 see Engine and ignition ...... 234 map display ...... 222 removing ...... 84 Ignition lock ...... 25 MEDIA main menu ...... 200 seat belt routing ...... 83 removal lock ...... 235 Media mode ...... 199 setting up ...... 83 unauthorised vehicle key ...... 234 menu summary ...... 192 Interference from a mobile telephone ...... 193 Immobiliser ...... 238 MirrorLink™ ...... 212 Interior lights ...... 27 In case of emergency ...... 85 navigation ...... 215 Interior rear vision mirror ...... 143 Independent heating navigation main menu ...... 216 anti-dazzle ...... 144 remote control: replacing the battery ...... 185 navigation route ...... 218 Interior view Indication on display navigation with images ...... 223 left-hand drive ...... 9 Sign Assist ...... 295 new navigation destination ...... 216 ISOFIX ...... 24 Indications on the display ...... 105 PHONE main menu ...... 230 ISOFIX system ...... 24 adaptive cruise control ...... 280 Phone mode ...... 225 Emergency braking assistance system proximity sensors ...... 196 J (Front Assist) ...... 275 Radio mode ...... 198 Jack ...... 48, 85, 87 outside temperature ...... 106 safety warnings ...... 188 mounting points ...... 50 Information call ...... 113 SD card ...... 202 Jump leads ...... 54 Information for the user ...... 358 stored navigation destinations ...... 218 Infotainment system switching on and off ...... 193 connecting the mobile phone to the info- K text input ...... 195 tainment system ...... 228 Keyless Access traffic bulletins and route guidance ...... 222 Infotainment System keyless-Entry ...... 119 USB port ...... 203 Android Auto™ ...... 211 keyless-Exit ...... 119 volume ...... 193 AUX-IN multimedia socket ...... 204 locking and unlocking the vehicle ...... 119 Infotainment Systems Bluetooth Audio ...... 205 starter button ...... 235 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 210 changing the Media source ...... 201 things to note ...... 121 Inspection ...... 349 comfort phone ...... 227 Keyless Access locking and ignition system Instrument panel ...... 28, 104 compatible images ...... 205 see Keyless Access ...... 119 control and warning lamps ...... 34, 109 connect mobile phone through Bluetooth . 226 Keys display ...... 28, 104, 105 delayed switching off (delay time) ...... 193 control lamp ...... 115 general instrument panel ...... 103 enter telephone number ...... 232 locking and unlocking ...... 10 instruments ...... 104 378 Index

remote control ...... 114 main beam headlights ...... 134 Locking the doors manually if central locking replacing the battery ...... 115 main beam lever ...... 134 fails to work ...... 11 spare key ...... 114 main beams ...... 26 Luggage ...... 157 synchronising ...... 116 parking light ...... 135 Luggage compartment ...... 12, 126, 157 unlocking and locking ...... 118 reading lights ...... 139 closing ...... 127 vehicle key ...... 114 side lights ...... 134 driving with the rear lid open ...... 157 switch ...... 26 electronic locking ...... 128 L turn signal lever ...... 134 electronic opening ...... 128 Labels and plates ...... 359 Load compartment in the luggage compart- extension ...... 159 Lane Assist ...... 286 ment folding down rear seats to create load Lane Assist system ...... 286 see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 157 space ...... 159 control lamp ...... 286 Loading the luggage compartment ...... 157 luggage compartment lighting ...... 139 malfunction ...... 288 driving with the rear lid open ...... 157 manual release mechanism ...... 12 operation mode ...... 287 Loading the vehicle net ...... 167 when is it necessary to disconnect it? . . . . . 288 fastening rings ...... 163 net partition ...... 162 Leaving Home ...... 137 general advice ...... 156 rails and attachment system ...... 164 Lift platform ...... 315 luggage compartment ...... 12 shelf ...... 161 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 139 net partition ...... 162 see also Loading the luggage compart- Lights ...... 26, 133, 134 rails and attachment system ...... 164 ment ...... 157 AUTO ...... 135 roof carrier system ...... 169 Luggage compartment baggage net ...... 167 coming home ...... 137 trailer ...... 306 Lumbar massage ...... 151 control and warning lamps ...... 133 transporting a load ...... 156 Lumbar support ...... 146 cornering lights ...... 135 vehicle loaded ...... 157 daytime running lights ...... 135 Loads on the axles ...... 365 M dipped beam headlights ...... 134 Locking and unlocking Main beam lever ...... 134 driving abroad ...... 138 boot ...... 130 Main panel fog light ...... 26 electric panoramic sunroof ...... 132 turn signal and main beam lever ...... 134 functions ...... 135 electric sliding door ...... 125 Maintenance hazard warning lights ...... 27 in the lock cylinder ...... 10 see Service ...... 349 headlight range control ...... 139 luggage compartment ...... 127 Malfunction interior lights ...... 139 sliding door ...... 124 adaptive cruise control ...... 279 leaving home ...... 137 sun blind ...... 132 air conditioner ...... 181 light controls ...... 134 with Keyless Access ...... 119 automatic gearbox ...... 250 lighting of the instruments ...... 139 Locking button ...... 248 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 289 lighting of the switches ...... 139 catalytic converter ...... 257 379 Index

emergency braking assistance system O P (Front Assist) ...... 276 lane assist system ...... 288 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 319 Paintwork particulate filter ...... 257 Odometer code ...... 364 windows ...... 131 partial ...... 104 Panoramic sunroof ...... 14, 132 MEDIA ...... 199 total ...... 104 anti-trap function ...... 133 copyright ...... 199 Oil properties ...... 42 emergency locking ...... 15 MFD Opening ...... 114 fault ...... 132 see Multifunction display ...... 31 bonnet ...... 13 sun blind ...... 132 MirrorLink™ ...... 212 electric windows ...... 13 Park Assist ...... 265 Mobile telephone ...... 112, 313 fuel tank flap ...... 318 brake operation ...... 269 use without an exterior aerial ...... 314 panoramic sunroof ...... 14 Park assist system Mobile tow hitch ball Opening and closing ...... 10, 114 automatic stoppage ...... 269 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 304 bonnet ...... 13 fault ...... 266 Model plate ...... 364 by remote control ...... 118 leaving the parking space ...... 269 Motor oil door ...... 123 parking ...... 267 oil properties ...... 42 electric panoramic sunroof ...... 132 preparing to park ...... 267 Multi-function steering wheel ...... 110 electric sliding door ...... 125 stopping ...... 268 Multifunction display ...... 31 electric windows ...... 13 switching on or off (leaving the parking fuel tank flap ...... 318 space) ...... 269 N in the lock cylinder ...... 10 switching on or off (parking) ...... 267 panoramic sunroof ...... 14 Park Assist system ...... 265 NAV (navigation) ...... 215 rear lid ...... 12 Parking ...... 238, 241 Net sliding door ...... 124 Parking aid luggage compartment ...... 167 sun blind ...... 132 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 354 Net partition ...... 162 with Keyless Access ...... 119 Parking assistance ...... 263, 265 Noise Opening doors individually ...... 117 Parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 293 tyres ...... 348 Operating fault Parking brake Noises immobiliser ...... 234 automatic release ...... 240 adaptive cruise control ...... 280 Optical parking system ...... 264 connection ...... 240 auxiliary heater ...... 187 Original SEAT Spare Parts ...... 351 disengaging ...... 240 brake assist system ...... 246 Outside temperature ...... 106 electronic ...... 240 engine ...... 237 Overview emergency braking function ...... 240 parking brake ...... 241 Control and warning lamps ...... 34 Number of seats ...... 62

380 Index

Parking distance warning system ...... 262 Radio reception Refuelling fault ...... 264 antenna ...... 359 control and warning lamps ...... 317 optical parking system ...... 264 operating faults ...... 360 fuel gauge ...... 317 with towing ...... 264 Rails and attachment element system mistakes ...... 317 Parking light ...... 135, 263 baggage net ...... 165 opening fuel tank flap ...... 318 Particulate filter ...... 257 Rails and attachment system ...... 164 Remote control key malfunction ...... 257 Rain sensor ...... 142 unlocking and locking ...... 118 recommended gear ...... 251 control of function ...... 142 Remote control of the independent heating Passenger front airbag Raising the vehicle ...... 50 replacing the battery ...... 185 disconnecting ...... 19 lift platform ...... 315 Repairs ...... 312, 360 Pedals ...... 61, 63 RCTA ...... 293 airbag system ...... 313 Petrol see Rear cross traffic alert ...... 289 Repair work ...... 311 fuel gauge ...... 317 Rear assist ...... 270 Replacement Petrol ...... 319 Rear Assist parts ...... 311 PHONE ...... 225 fault ...... 272 Replacement parts ...... 311 Portable waste bin ...... 174 instructions for use ...... 271 Replacing bulbs Power-assisted steering ...... 252 mode 1 ...... 272 see Changing bulbs ...... 94 Power brake system mode 2 ...... 273 Reprogramming control units ...... 358 anti-lock system ...... 244 screen ...... 271 Retaining hooks ...... 166 Power socket ...... 177 things to note ...... 271 Revolution counter ...... 104 12 volts ...... 178 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 289 Rims faults ...... 179 control lamp ...... 290 changing a wheel ...... 48 Pre-heating ...... 236 Rear lid ...... 12 Roll-back function Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 352 emergency locking and unlocking ...... 12 windows ...... 131 Proximity sensors ...... 196 warning lamp ...... 127 Rollback anti-trap function Puncture see also Luggage compartment ...... 126 electric sliding doors ...... 125 action ...... 47 Rear view camera ...... 270 Roof carrier ...... 167 Pushing the vehicle ...... 234 Rear View Camera ...... 270 Roof carrier system ...... 167 Rear view mirror fastening the supports ...... 168 R adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 144 Roof rack ...... 167 Radar sensor ...... 276, 281 Recommended gear ...... 251 Run-flat tyres RADIO ...... 198 Recycled ...... 360 codes ...... 346 Radio-operated remote control Reflective vest ...... 85 Run-in see Keys ...... 114 refuelling tyres ...... 341 Radio DISPLAY: clean ...... 355 Petrol additives ...... 319 381 Index

Running in rear seats ...... 147 Seats ...... 62 brake pads ...... 242 seat with position memory ...... 151 adjustment ...... 146 new engine ...... 253 Seat belt position ...... 68 SEAT Service Mobility ...... 351 for pregnant women ...... 17 Selective Catalytic Reduction ...... 321 S seat belts ...... 17 Selector lever locking ...... 248 SAFE ...... 121, 238 Seat belts ...... 64 Service Safe driving ...... 59 adjustment ...... 17, 67 conditions of use ...... 350 Safety automatic belt retractor ...... 70 digital maintenance plan ...... 349 child safety ...... 77 belt height adjustments ...... 70 fixed service ...... 349 child seats ...... 77 belt tensioner ...... 70 flexible service ...... 349 disconnecting the passenger front airbag . . 19 belt tension limiter ...... 70 oil change service ...... 349 safe driving ...... 59 protective function ...... 65 service ...... 349 Safety equipment ...... 60 purpose ...... 64 Service proof ...... 349 Safety instructions seat belt position ...... 68 services ...... 349 using child seats ...... 21, 78 twisted belt ...... 67 servicing ...... 349 Safety Instructions unfastened ...... 66 sets of services ...... 351 Infotainment system ...... 188 use ...... 67 Service fluids ...... 311 Sale of vehicle warning lamp ...... 65 Service interval display ...... 107 in other countries / continents ...... 359 with two buckles ...... 69 Service intervals display ...... 350 Salt water ...... 259 Seat belt tensioner ...... 17 Service warning: check ...... 108 Scrapping ...... 360 Seat belt tensioners ...... 70 Signal lever ...... 26 airbag system ...... 360 Seat belt with two buckles Sign Assist ...... 294, 295 vend-of-life vehicles ...... 360 fastening ...... 69 connection ...... 296 SD card twisting ...... 69 disconnection ...... 296 inserting and ejecting ...... 202 unfastening ...... 69 indication on display ...... 295 Seat Seat functions ...... 150 operation mode ...... 296 convenient entry function for the third row convenient entry function for the third row trailer ...... 296 of seats ...... 153 of seats ...... 153 Sliding door ...... 124 electric front seat ...... 16 folding the backrest of the front passenger childproof lock ...... 126 folding down rear seats ...... 159 seat ...... 154 manually opening and closing ...... 124 folding the backrest of the front passenger lumbar massage ...... 151 opening and closing electrically ...... 125 seat ...... 154 Seat heating ...... 150 Snow chains ...... 52, 366 heating ...... 150 SEAT information system ...... 28 all-wheel drive ...... 52 incorrect position ...... 62 structure ...... 28 Spanner symbol ...... 108 number of seats ...... 62 Spare fuel canister ...... 316 382 Index

Spare parts ...... 311 folding table ...... 173 Telephone management Specifications glove compartment ...... 172 three button unit ...... 112 combined weight ...... 310 glove compartment lighting ...... 139 Tightening torque ...... 366 drawbar load ...... 301 instrument panel ...... 171 wheel bolts ...... 50 trailer weights ...... 309 other storage compartments ...... 174 TIN ...... 346 Speed rating ...... 347 portable waste bin ...... 174 Tiptronic ...... 249 Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina- rear footwell ...... 173 Tiredness detection ...... 296 tion ...... 308 roof console ...... 170 TMC / TMCpro ...... 222 Start-Stop ...... 259 Sun blind Top Tether ...... 24 Start-Stop function anti-trap function ...... 133 Top Tether system ...... 24 driving with a trailer ...... 301 opening and closing ...... 132 Tow-starting ...... 54, 90 Start-Stop operation ...... 259 rear side windows ...... 140 Tow hitch Start-Stop system Sun protection ...... 140 electric release ...... 303 control lamps ...... 259 Sun visors ...... 140 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 304 Start assistance Switch function control ...... 306 see Start assistance systems ...... 259 hazard warning lights ...... 137 Towing Starter button ...... 235 Switching lights off ...... 134 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 294 Starting assistance Switching lights on ...... 134 parking distance warning system ...... 264 description ...... 56 Switching the ignition on and off ...... 25 special characteristics ...... 294 jump leads ...... 56 Symbols things to note ...... 54 positive pole ...... 55 see Control and warning lamps ...... 34, 109 Towing a trailer ...... 365 Starting the vehicle ...... 25 Towing bracket ...... 301 Steering T optical parking system ...... 265 control and warning lamps ...... 252 Technical data Towing the vehicle ...... 53, 90, 234 power-assisted steering ...... 252 engine oil specifications ...... 327 driving tips ...... 92 steering column lock ...... 252 roof load ...... 169 front towline anchorage ...... 91 tendency to pull to one side ...... 344 tyre pressures ...... 342 rear towline anchorage ...... 92 Steering wheel Technical details Towline anchorages ...... 53 adjustment ...... 18, 61 capacities ...... 334 Traction ...... 346 Storage loads on the axles ...... 365 Traction control system ...... 244 compartment for (sun)glasses ...... 170 weights ...... 365 Traction control (ASR) ...... 245, 246 Storage compartment in the roof console . . . 170 Technical features ...... 364 Traffic bulletins ...... 222 Storage compartments ...... 169 Technical modifications ...... 312 Traffic signal detection ...... 294 cards ...... 172 Technical specifications drawers ...... 173 dimensions ...... 370 383 Index

Trailer ...... 301 Transporting children ...... 77 deterioration ...... 344 adjusting the headlights ...... 307 Transporting items eccentricity ...... 344 anti-theft alarm ...... 305 fastening rings ...... 163 foreign bodies in the tyres ...... 344 connecting ...... 305 roof carrier ...... 167 handling ...... 339 drawbar load ...... 301 roof carrier system ...... 167 new ...... 341 driving with a trailer ...... 307 Transporting objects old ...... 340 electrically releasing the hitch ball ...... 303 roof carrier system ...... 169 replacing ...... 341 electrical socket ...... 305 trailer weights ...... 309 run-flat tyre codes ...... 346 fitting a tow hitch ...... 309 Treadwear ...... 346 serial number ...... 346 function control ...... 306 Turn signal convenience function ...... 134 snow chains ...... 52 hitch ball ...... 303 Turn signal lever ...... 134 speed rating ...... 346, 347 hitching ...... 305 Tyre control systems storing ...... 340 loading ...... 306 tyre pressures ...... 343 technical details ...... 345 rear LED lights ...... 303, 305 Tyre load rating ...... 347 tyre code ...... 345 rear lights ...... 303, 305 Tyre Mobility Set ...... 47 tyre identification number (TIN) ...... 346 stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina- more than one damaged tyre ...... 88 tyre load rating ...... 347 tion ...... 308 Tyre Mobility System Tyre pressures ...... 342 trailer cable ...... 302, 305 check after 10 minutes ...... 89 tyre pressure sensor ...... 343 trailer weights ...... 309 components ...... 89 tyres with directional tread pattern ...... 346 wing mirrors ...... 303 inflating a tyre ...... 89 tyre wear ...... 344 Trailer cable ...... 302, 305 sealing a tyre ...... 89 valve caps ...... 343 Trailer weight ...... 365 see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 88 wear indicators ...... 344 permitted maximum ...... 309 Tyre monitoring system ...... 298, 300 wheel alignment issues ...... 345 Transporting control lamp ...... 299 Wheel balancing ...... 344 baggage net ...... 167 Tyre pressure ...... 366 wheels ...... 340 driving with a trailer ...... 307 Tyre pressures ...... 342 winter tyres ...... 347 driving with the rear lid open ...... 157 Tyre profile ...... 343 with directional tread pattern ...... 52 folding the backrest of the front passenger Tyre repair ...... 88 Tyres with directional tread pattern ...... 346 seat ...... 154 Tyre repair kit Tyre tread depth ...... 343 load ...... 156 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 88 Tyre wear ...... 343, 344 loading the trailer ...... 306 Tyres net partition ...... 162 avoiding damage ...... 340 U rails and attachment system ...... 164 changing ...... 48 Unfastening your seat belt ...... 67 retaining hooks ...... 166 changing wheels ...... 340 Unfasten the seat belt ...... 17 vehicle loaded ...... 157 code ...... 345 384 Index

Unlocking and locking ...... 10 Vehicle care Wheel bolts ...... 87, 366 by remote control ...... 118 antenna incorporated in window ...... 359 anti-theft ...... 48, 86, 87 door ...... 123 Vehicle data ...... 370 caps ...... 49 from inside ...... 118 Vehicle interior monitoring ...... 123 loosening ...... 49 USB ...... 203 Vehicle key set ...... 114 tightening torque ...... 50 USB/AUX-IN input ...... 112, 169 Vehicle maintenance ...... 352 Wheel load capacity ...... 346 Vehicle paint Wheel rims V maintenance ...... 354 beadlock ...... 341 Valve caps ...... 343 Vehicle tool kit ...... 48, 85 bolted trims ...... 341 Vanity mirror ...... 140 components ...... 86 Wheels ...... 338, 340, 366 Vehicle location ...... 85 changing a wheel ...... 48, 51, 87 data label ...... 364 Vehicle undercarriage guard ...... 59 hubcaps ...... 48 identification data ...... 364 Vehicle's battery Wheel trim identification number ...... 364 running flat ...... 337 hubcaps ...... 48 loading ...... 156 Vibrations remove ...... 49 parking downhill ...... 241 steering ...... 344 Windows parking uphill ...... 241 Voice control ...... 113 automatic operation ...... 130 raising ...... 50 automatic raising/lowering ...... 130 recycling ...... 360 W convenience closing ...... 130 vehicle identification number ...... 364 Warning and control lamp convenience opening ...... 130 Vehicle battery ...... 43, 334 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 273 electric ...... 13 acid ...... 336 Warning and control lamps malfunction ...... 131 assisted starting ...... 54 ABS ...... 243 roll-back function ...... 131 automatically disconnecting devices . . . . . 337 ESC ...... 243 Window wiper ...... 141 charging ...... 337 Warning triangle ...... 85, 137 Window wiper blade ...... 27 checking the battery electrolyte level . . . . . 336 Warranty ...... 352 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . 90 connecting ...... 337 Washing the vehicle Windscreen heater ...... 39 control and warning lamps ...... 335 external vehicle maintenance ...... 352 Windscreen washer ...... 43, 141 discharging ...... 187, 235 high pressure cleaners ...... 352 Windscreen washer fluid disconnect ...... 109 sensors ...... 263, 266 control lamp ...... 141 disconnecting ...... 337 things to note ...... 121 Windscreen washer water positive terminal for starting assistance . . . . 55 Wear indicators ...... 344 checking ...... 334 preparations ...... 336 Weights ...... 365 topping up ...... 334 replacing ...... 337 What negatively affects driving safety? ...... 59 starting assistance ...... 56 385 Index

Windscreen wipers ...... 27, 141 cleaning ...... 354 functions ...... 141 headlight washer system ...... 141 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 141 lifting the wiper blade ...... 57 rain sensor ...... 142 replacing the wiper blade ...... 57 service position ...... 57 special characteristics ...... 141 Window wiper lever ...... 141 Windscreen wipers service position ...... 57 Wing mirrors driving with a trailer ...... 303 Winter additional heater ...... 184 menu configuration ...... 32 Winter conditions diesel ...... 320 Winter driving Driving with a trailer ...... 301 winter tyres ...... 347 Winter operation headlight washers ...... 142 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 141 salt on the roads ...... 142 Winter tyres all-wheel drive ...... 347 speed limit ...... 347 X XDS See Brake assistance systems ...... 245

386

Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 7N5012720BL

Owner’s manual

Alhambra Inglés (11.18) SEAT Alhambra

7N5012720BL (11.18)

Inglés SEAT